BJNZ

The Advanced Art of
Baking & Pastry

The Advanced Art of
Baking & Pastry
R. ANDREW CHLEBANA
PHOTOGRAPHY BY ANTHONY TAHLIER

This book is printed on acid-free paper. ∞
Copyright © 2018 by John Wiley & Sons, Inc. All rights reserved.
Unless otherwise noted, all photography is courtesy of Anthony Tahlier Photography, Inc.
Published by John Wiley & Sons, Inc., Hoboken, New Jersey.
Published simultaneously in Canada.
No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted
in any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, scanning,
or otherwise, except as permitted under Section 107 or 108 of the 1976 United States
Copyright Act, without either the prior written permission of the Publisher, or authorization
through payment of the appropriate per-copy fee to the Copyright Clearance Center, Inc.,
222 Rosewood Drive, Danvers, MA 01923, 978-750-8400, fax 978-646-8600, or on the web at
www.copyright.com. Requests to the Publisher for permission should be addressed to the
Permissions Department, John Wiley & Sons, Inc., 111 River Street, Hoboken, NJ 07030,
201-748-6011, fax 201-748-6008, or online at www.wiley.com/go/permissions.
Limit of Liability/Disclaimer of Warranty: While the publisher and author have used their
best efforts in preparing this book, they make no representations or warranties with respect
to the accuracy or completeness of the contents of this book and specifically disclaim any
implied warranties of merchantability or fitness for a particular purpose. No warranty may
be created or extended by sales representatives or written sales materials. The advice
and strategies contained herein may not be suitable for your situation. You should consult
with a professional where appropriate. Neither the publisher nor author shall be liable for
any loss of profit or any other commercial damages, including but not limited to special,
incidental, consequential, or other damages.
Evaluation copies are provided to qualified academics and professionals for review
purposes only, for use in their courses during the next academic year. These copies are
licensed and may not be sold or transferred to a third party. Upon completion of the review
period, please return the evaluation copy to Wiley. Return instructions and a free-of-charge
shipping label are available at www.wiley.com/go/returnlabel. Outside the United States,
please contact your local representative.
For general information on our other products and services, or technical support, please
contact our Customer Care Department within the United States at 800-762-2974, outside
the United States at 317-572-3993 or fax 317-572-4002.
Wiley also publishes its books in a variety of electronic formats. Some content that appears
in print may not be available in electronic books. For more information about Wiley
products, visit our website at www.wiley.com.
Library of Congress Cataloging-in-Publication Data
Names: Chlebana, R. Andrew, author.
Title: The advanced art of baking and pastry / R. Andrew Chlebana.
Description: Hoboken, New Jersey : Wiley, [2018] | Includes bibliographical
references and index. |
Identifiers: LCCN 2017015523 (print) | LCCN 2017021342 (ebook) | ISBN
9781119400738 (epub) | ISBN 9781119400714 (pdf) | ISBN 9781118485750
(cloth : alk. paper)
Subjects: LCSH: Baking. | Pastry.
Classification: LCC TX763 (ebook) | LCC TX763 .C4935 2018 (print) | DDC
641.86/5—dc23
LC record available at https://lccn.loc.gov/2017015523
ISBN: 978-1-118-48575-0
Printed in the United States of America
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Dedication
To Heather: My rock.
Contents
FOREWORD viii Animal-Based Hydrocolloids 87
ACKNOWLEDGMENTS ix Plant-Based Hydrocolloids 90
Summary 117
Key Terms 117
1 Introduction 2
Questions for Review 117
Professionalism 3
Food Safety 7
Tools and Equipment 9 5 Creams and Mousses 118
Mise en Place 18 Custard 119

Key Terms 19 Baked Custards 125
Questions for Review 19 Mousse and Creams 129
Key Terms 145
2 Bread for the Pastry Chef 20
Introduction to Bread 21
Ingredients and Function 21 6 Frozen Desserts 146
Math 26 Ingredients 147

Sour Starters 32 Emulsifiers and Stabilizers 155
Preferments 34 Churned Frozen Desserts 155
Mixing Methods 34 Still Frozen Desserts 165
Degrees of Mixing 35 Summary 179
Bread Production Stages 37 Key Terms 179
Key Terms 55 Questions for Review 179
7 Cake Mixing and Baking 180

3 Viennoiserie 56
Introduction to Cakes 181
Introduction to Viennoiserie 57 Ingredients 181
Ingredients and Function 57 Main Categories 184
Laminated Doughs 59 Key Terms 201
Enriched Breads 67 Questions for Review 201
Puff Pastry 68
Key Terms 83
Questions for Review 83 8 Assembling Cakes 202
Classic Cakes 203

4 Modern Pastry Techniques 84 Wedding Cakes 207
Contemporary Cakes 209
Modern Cuisine 85 Glacé 214
Basics of Modern Pastry 86
Contents vii
Key Terms 245 Ganache 380

Questions for Review 245 Confections 400
Key Terms 411
9 Tarts and Pies 246
Pies and Tarts 247

13 Chocolate Work 412
Ingredients 247
Mixing Dough 249 Introduction to Chocolate Work 413
Rolling and Lining Shell 250 Chocolate Selection 414
Classic Pies and Tarts 252 Garnishes 414
Modern Tarts and Pies 253 Sculpture Design 420
Key Terms 289 Techniques 427
Questions for Review 289 Key Terms 441
10 Plated Desserts 290

14 Sugar Work 442
Presentation Approach 291
Getting Started 297 Introduction to Sugar Work 443
Key Terms 329 Cooking Sugar 444
Questions for Review 329 Casting Sugar 446
Pulling and Blowing Sugar 451
Crystalline Sugar 458
11 Petits-Fours 330 Pastillage 459
Sculpture Design 461
Introduction to Petits-fours 331
Key Terms 469
Sec 332
Glacé 341
Contemporary 350
Petits-Fours Presentations 364 INDEX 470
Key Terms 367
12 Chocolate and Confections 368
Introduction to Chocolates and Confections 369

Equipment 369
Manufacturing Chocolate 371
Chocolate Percentages 373
Tempering Chocolate 375
Chocolates 379
Foreword
Pastry Chef/Professor Andy Chlebana has written a dynamic new textbook called The Advanced
Art of Baking & Pastry.
This is the most up-to-date information written by a chef and author who has worked at
the top of the hospitality industry and competed at the highest level. Pastry chefs of every level
will benefit from the depth and variety of pastry experience inside.
Andy Chlebana served as Team USA Coupe du Monde de Patisserie Captain and has won
numerous awards, working both in chocolate and in sugar. Due to this singular experience, he
delivers two excellent chapters, “Chocolate Work” and “Sugar Work.” Every aspect on the sub-
ject is detailed in Chapters 13 and 14, from design and structure to advanced techniques like
airbrushing chocolate and creating pastillage.
A subject close to my heart, modern pastry techniques, is given due diligence in Chapter 4
with detailed explanation of the most innovative techniques developed in the past decade.
Chapter 10 on plated desserts is a refreshingly up-to-date discussion on presentation,
balance, and flavors of hot and cold desserts.
There’s an ample amount of solid, classic techniques and recipes as well. “Bread for the
Pastry Chef” (Chapter 2) is an artisan bakery primer that explains the function and science of
the bread, fermentation, mixing methods, and numerous recipes. Additional chapters cover
“Assembling Cakes,” “Frozen Desserts,” and “Vienoisserie.”
The Advanced Art of Baking & Pastry is visually stunning, with artistic photographs by one
of the top photographers in the county. There’s no one in the world more qualified to write this
than Chef Chlebana, and there’s no pastry textbook to date that encompasses so much of the
sweet world!
JIMMY MACMILLAN
Top Ten Pastry Chef by Dessert Professional Magazine
Emmy® Award-winning creator of The Chicago Restaurant Pastry Competition
Acknowledgments
I would like to express my gratitude to the many people who assisted me throughout the
process of writing this book. There are many people to thank, and I don’t want anyone to feel
that they have been left out, so thank you to everyone who helped in some way, no matter
how big or small. Your assistance was greatly appreciated and has given me the ability to
complete this project.
I would like to thank my wife, Heather, and my children, Abigail, Annabel, Andrew, and
Adler, who supported and encouraged me in spite of all the time it took me away from them. It
was a long, difficult journey for them.
Thank you to my editors at Wiley. My first contact with the company, Mary Cassells, kept
on me until I submitted the proposal and was with me until the rough draft of the manuscript.
Andrea Brescia helped me put all the pieces together and get everything in order to look the
way it does now. I could not have done this without either of you encouraging me along the
way. There is a team of people behind the scenes at John Wiley and Sons who have contributed
countless hours to the completion of this book; I thank you all for your efforts.
The photo shoot was a big undertaking for this project. Many people were involved, and
everyone contributed to the beautiful images that I hope will inspire the reader. First I need
to thank the most talented photographer I have had the pleasure of working with, Anthony
Tahlier. He and his first assistant, Sean Henderson, truly worked magic behind the lens. They
made the food that a team of my lab assistants and students helped me prepare look fantastic.
Thanks to Joliet Junior College and the Culinary Arts Department for giving me the time
to work on this book. Several friends, coworkers, and other departments contributed to my
efforts. Brooke Hoekstra and Heather Schreiner helped from the early steps of testing and
developing recipes, creating the schedule for the photo shoot, and preparing the food we shot;
additional assistance was provided by Brooke Ball and Eileen Braski. Tim Bucci, my partner in
crime at the college, always made me think about what I was doing and pushed me to become
a better pastry chef. Additional help was provided during the development stages by Anthony
Kozlowski and Stacey Lyons.
Math is an important part of baking and pastry. Donna Katula from the Joliet Junior College
Math Department helped to clean up some of the formulas and make them more user friendly.
We are all students and continue to learn all throughout our careers. Nancy Carey helped
a great deal with the breads in this book. Stephanie Pintoy provided technical assistance for
Chapter 4, “Modern Pastry Techniques.”
Products and services were also provided by the following companies; their commitment
to industry and education is greatly appreciated. Thank you for all the products and time you
donated during the production of this book:
Chicago Culinary FX—Michael Joy & Beatrice Schneider
John E. Koerner & Co. Inc.—Tim Koerner
SiliKoMart
Tomric Systems, Inc.—Tom Elsinghorst
CHAPTER 1
Introduction
How do you go from making a simple éclair to a plated dessert in a fine-dining restaurant? How
do you go from learning to temper chocolate to creating an elegant showpiece? The answer
is simple—continued mastery of one skill after another. Mastering the skills required to be a
pastry chef requires a strong foundation built on professionalism, techniques, understanding
ingredients, and constant improvement. In this chapter the groundwork will be laid, and you
will begin your journey to mastering the advanced art of pastry.
LEARNING OBJECTIVES
After reading this chapter, you should be able to:

1. Identify the fundamental skills necessary to be successful in the pastry shop.
2. Identify specialty equipment and tools.
3. Describe how to prevent foodborne illness.
Professionalism
Pastry chefs and chefs have a great deal of pride in the work they do. The job of a pastry chef is
not to simply provide good food. Formulas and techniques are used to transform ingredients
that can be found in most home kitchen pantries into something extraordinary. Having the
ability to create these edible works of art is only a small portion of pastry chef’s responsibilities.
They must also be able to manage their staff, entertain the guest, and create revenue for the
business—all while working long hours and holidays. This is a considerable amount of respon-
sibility for one person to orchestrate.
Every kitchen has its own stories that span across the industry—the long days, impossi-
ble workloads, malfunctioning equipment, being a pastry cook short for a shift, or orders not
getting delivered, all while being able to serve the food to the guest without them knowing the
chaos in the back of the house. To the uninitiated, it sounds like a nightmare; however, those
that work in a kitchen tell these stories and wear them like a badge of honor.
I am constantly asked: “Why would you choose a job like this?” What draws people to work
in the hospitality industry? A closer examination in the name of the industry reveals the answer.
The hospitality industry is based on the principles of service. It is the job of the pastry chef, exec-
utive chef, baker, and cook to provide service to the guest. It is our job not only to serve food but
also to cater to the needs and tastes of the guests and entertain them as well.
“We are Ladies and Gentlemen serving Ladies and Gentlemen.” This is the motto of the
Ritz-Carlton Hotel Company; it clearly defines the function of all employees. Not only are
employees responsible for serving the guest but they must also treat their fellow staff members
with the same courtesy and respect. Professionalism starts with the attitude of the employee.
3
Dedicated employees who demonstrate pride in their craft will advance quickly through the
ranks of the pastry shop.
Skills for Success in the Pastry Shop

A good attitude and understanding of the expectations of the hospitality industry provide
a solid foundation to succeed in the pastry shop. Ensuring cleanliness and safety as well as
understanding ingredients and striving to improve are foundational skills. When starting out
in your career, take the time to develop skills in these areas and build on them as you con-
tinue learning. You will find that these areas are all intertwined—one relies on and impacts the
others. The ability to demonstrate an understanding of these skills is the first step in the start
of your career.
Mastering Cleanliness
One word that could easily describe the kitchen environment would be hectic. Multitasking is
essential, but when working on more than one task at a time, it is easy to become disorganized.
It is important to focus not only on technique and properly executing the process of a recipe but
also on maintaining a clean and organized work area. A clean work area is the sign of an effi-
cient work area—and a safe one. Cleanliness encompasses more than an individual’s personal
uniform and workspace; it also means that all members are contributing to the cleanliness of
the pastry shop.
Uniform The uniform of the kitchen has evolved over many years. While there is a wide range
of what is worn in the kitchen, there are five elements that make up proper kitchen attire. The
professional image of the pastry chef is based on sturdy shoes, pants, chef jacket, apron, and
hat. While different uniforms can be found in culinary schools and restaurants throughout the
country, some form of each of these elements is typically used.
Just as the uniform of the pastry chef has changed over the years, so has the role of the
pastry chef. The pastry chef is no longer kept “trapped” in the kitchen. Kitchen spaces are
more open and accessible, making the back of the house more visible to the guest. Television
shows have increased the popularity of the food service industry, and, as a result, the diner
may request to meet the chef and even tour the kitchen. Guests often want to meet the people
who have made their food, adding to their experience of the meal. A clean uniform benefits the
individual as well as the industry as a whole. When we wear our kitchen uniforms we represent
the professionalism of the industry. A clean uniform not only makes the individual look good, it
increases the positive perception of the industry.
Your uniform is the first thing that guests will see when they meet you. All clothing, includ-
ing shoes, must be clean. Professionalism is demonstrated partly through appearance. It is
understood that flour will get on pants and shoes, and chocolate will get on a white chef’s coat.
This happens to everyone on occasion, but the goal is to develop work habits that will maintain
the cleanliness of the uniform.
Work Area Organization In addition to maintaining a clean uniform, it is important to

maintain a clean work area. Not only are clean work areas sanitary and free from debris, but
they also include the organization of equipment and ingredients. Keeping the work area clean
will help to keep your uniform clean. A clean work area demonstrates good organizational
skills, respect for ingredients, and collaboration with coworkers.
The expectation of work in a professional pastry shop is to execute a recipe correctly and
as quickly as possible. When assembling a recipe, organize ingredients and equipment to min-
imize the possibility of having to do the recipe again. Ingredients not arranged in an organized
way can easily be left out of a recipe, resulting in wasted food. A recipe that needs to be remade
adds to the labor cost as well as food cost. The fundamentals of understanding ingredients and
mixing methods will ensure the mise en place of equipment and ingredients is correct.
4 CHA PT E R 1 Introduction
The pastry shop is not a one-person operation; all team members come together, working
like a machine to provide the necessary products to the guest. A clean work area shows a great
deal of respect and professionalism among coworkers.
Pastry Shop Organization In addition to maintaining individual workstations, the mem-

bers of the team must work together to keep the pastry shop clean and organized. Restaurants,
country clubs, and bakeries may have limited staffing. Consequently, this requires all team
members to partake in daily removal of trash, cleaning of floors, and storage of inventory. In
larger operations, cleaning the shop is a cooperative effort between the stewarding department
and kitchen staff.
A clean pastry shop will provide a safe working environment for team members. Food
products and debris on floors increase the chances of accidents caused by slipping or falling,
and they attract rodents and pests. Cleaning any food or debris from worktables and floors will
create a safer work environment and will be less likely to attract vermin.
In an effort to maintain the common areas of the pastry shop, designing a schedule of daily
and weekly maintenance will ensure that these areas are cleaned. Additional areas of responsi-
bility that may need to be included on this list would be rotating of storeroom items, inspecting
cooler production for freshness, and organizing freezer space. Properly training staff to clearly
label and date products will reduce the amount of time required to clean and organize these
areas. If all team members do their part, when it comes time to clean the shop, it can be done
quickly and effortlessly.
Focusing on Safety
A safe work environment will contribute to reduced workplace injuries. The pastry kitchen is
a dangerous place to work—sharp knives, mechanical equipment, and even dirty floors can
all cause injury. Safety starts with the individual. Good personal habits and maintenance of
personal tools are both necessities.
Earlier, we discussed the importance of the uniform and how a clean uniform reflects
directly on the professionalism of the pastry chef. Your tools are an important part of your uni-
form. Without them, you would not be able to complete your daily tasks. All personal tools
should be cleaned and stored and in proper working order before leaving for the day. Cleaning
and drying tools will help them to last longer and reduce the possibility of cross contamination.
In addition to being clean, knives should be properly sharpened. A dull knife will make it
more difficult to accurately cut items and is more dangerous than a sharp knife.
Understanding Ingredients
When starting out in your career, it is important to understand why something is being done just
as much as what is being done. Take pie dough, for example, which is a simple combination of
flour, fat, and liquid. To mix pie dough, the fat is cut into the dry flour. Once this mixture has
reached pea-sized particles, liquid is then added. That sounds simple enough, and it is, really.
The what is simple to explain and can be learned through demonstration.
But as you continue in the profession, it is important to analyze the why. Why are these
ingredients used? Why do I mix them this way?
To make changes to the recipe, you must first understand the function of the ingredients.
Each chapter in this text examines the ingredients used in the formulas and explains their
function and benefits. This places the information right alongside the theory and formulas for
easy reference.
The simplicity of pie dough makes it a good example for this exercise. First, let’s look at
what makes a good pie dough. Descriptors of pie dough would be flaky and tender. Devel-
oping these textures in the dough is achieved through the ingredients used and method of
assembly. Mixing the dough using the same method and different ingredients will yield a
different result.
Professionalism 5
Pie dough is made from a ratio of 3 parts flour, 2 parts fat, and 1 part liquid. First we will
examine the flour. A flaky dough is made by using low-protein flour, such as cake or pastry.
However, even with low-protein flour, a tough dough can be created. If liquid is added earlier
in the mixing or the dough is mixed too long after the liquid is added, the result will be a tough
crust. While pie dough can be made with stronger flours, mixing must be observed very closely
to prevent overmixing, which can happen very easily.
The second ingredient is fat. Fat comes in many forms—solid vegetable fat, oil, butter, and
lard. What does the fat do in pie dough? It creates layers inside the dough to make the baked
dough flaky. Oil will be instantly absorbed into the flour and will not contribute to a flaky dough.
We are thus left with solid fats, each of which must be analyzed to determine the best selection.
Analyzing Fats in Pie Dough
Type of Fat Characteristics Cost Source

Butter Hard when cold, soft when room temperature, good flavor High Animal
Solid vegetable fat Hard when cold, firm when room temperature, neutral flavor Low Vegetable
Lard Hard when cold, firm when room temperature, neutral flavor Low Animal
Solid vegetable fat is the most commonly used fat in the production of pie dough. It works
well under a wide range of temperatures and is low in cost. While butter will give additional fla-
vor, it quickly transitions from a firm consistency when refrigerated to very soft at room temper-
ature and can be easily overmixed. Lard has many of the same characteristics as the vegetable
fat and will produce a very flaky dough. The source of the lard and vegetable fat may help in the
decision making process. For example, if producing pies to be marketed as vegetarian, vegeta-
ble fat would be a better choice.
The last ingredient is liquid. Liquid is used to pull the flour and fat together to form a
dough. Water is typically used for this function. It is easily accessible in the pastry shop and
carries a very minimal cost. In some instances, pie dough may contain milk—the fat in milk will
contribute to a softer crust. The lactose present in the milk will cause the crust to brown more
than if water was used.
It is amazing the difference that changing one ingredient in a recipe has on the final results.
In addition to possible changes in flavor or texture, ingredients interact with each other in a rec-
ipe and create a system. Changing one can impact how the others work and ultimately change
the final result. Understanding ingredients will help you to make an informed decision as to
what can be added or taken away, and provide insight into the results of the final product.
Striving to Improve
To achieve success in the pastry shop, it is important to continuously strive for improvement.
Some of the tasks found in the pastry shop may come naturally to an individual while others
may not. Generations of pastry chefs have worked hard to master the challenges of the bake-
shop and innovate new techniques. Many others will continue behind them and build on what
they have done. Working on your skills and continuing to improve and develop new skills is
what will make you successful in this industry.
The skills you learn in culinary school are the foundation of your new career. Students learn
the fundamentals of working cleanly, proper scaling, use of equipment, mixing techniques,
piping—the list goes on and on. To truly master these skills takes years of practice. Apply the
same techniques an athlete uses: Practice will make you surer and more precise.
When preparing formulas in class or at work, mistakes will happen. These mistakes should
be used as a learning experience to prevent the mistake from happening again. Carefully ana-
lyzing the result should result in an understanding of what went wrong. Learning from mistakes
will make you a stronger pastry chef.
Food Safety
The food service profession relies on more than food that looks and tastes good. As profes-
sionals, we also guarantee that the food being served is safe for consumption. Serving food that
is unsafe can result in sickness, fines, and lawsuits. Observing safe food-handling practices will
protect our customers, the reputation of the business, and your bottom line.
State and local governments are responsible for determining the sanitation standards that
must be observed by food service operations under their jurisdiction. Sanitation inspections
are conducted to ensure that the laws are being followed to provide the public with safe food.
While inspectors are not always welcome, remember that these visits are in place to protect the
customer and the operation. It is through recognizing and understanding the causes of food-
borne illness that it can be prevented.
Food can become contaminated through three hazards: physical, chemical, and biological.
Physical Contamination
Physical contamination occurs when foreign matter enters a food item, which may cause ill-
ness or injury to a person consuming the product. Physical contaminants may include glass,
metal flakes, bone chips, shells, wood, and stone. Illness may not be directly connected to
these items, but they can cause illness through cross contamination.
Chemical Contamination
Chemical contamination is caused by cleaning chemicals or by cooking food using pans and
utensils not approved for cooking. Chemicals should always be stored away from food and food
preparation areas. When they must be used, be sure to thoroughly rinse the area with water
before use. Since different foods react with metals, it is recommended to use stainless-steel
pots, pans, and utensils to reduce the likelihood of chemical contamination.
Biological Contamination
Biological contamination is caused by ingesting food or water that contains bacteria, para-
sites, viruses, or toxins produced by microorganisms or plants (such as poisonous mushrooms).
While no one is immune from contracting a foodborne illness, pregnant woman, the elderly,
small children, and those with chronic illness are more susceptible. The symptoms often
present the same as the flu—cramping, upset stomach, vomiting, and diarrhea—which can
lead to dehydration. In some instances, neurological symptoms such as dizziness or difficulty
breathing may occur and require immediate medical attention.
The pastry shop is a hands-on operation, and food that is constantly handled can become
easily contaminated if the proper guidelines are not followed. Personal hygiene, time–
temperature abuse, and cross contamination are the main causes of foodborne illness.
Personal Hygiene
Good personal hygiene is the first step in preventing the spread of foodborne illness. Bacteria are
present on our skin, hair, eyes, nose, mouth, and hands. These bacteria can be transferred to food
and food contact surfaces and, given the right conditions, can multiply in food and make people
sick. Regular hand washing is the most effective defense against the spread of foodborne illnesses.
Here are 10 ways to reduce foodborne illness:
1. Do not work if you are sick.

2. Wear a clean uniform.
Food Safety 7
3. Properly restrain hair with a hat or hairnet.
4. Keep facial hair neatly trimmed.
5. Do not touch your face or head at work.
6. Remove jewelry at work.
7. Cover your mouth when coughing or sneezing.
8. Wash hands as needed when working:
• After eating, drinking, break
• After using restroom
• After working with anything that may be contaminated
9. Wear rubber gloves when working with finished food items.
10. Wear rubber gloves when wearing a bandage.
Rubber gloves are not a complete solution to stopping the spread of foodborne illness.
In fact, if used improperly, they can be just as bad as not washing your hands. Gloves are not
a substitute for hand washing. Gloves should be worn when working with foods that are not
going to be heated again for service. This will reduce the risk of contaminating the food with
bacteria on your hands. The gloves should only be worn when handling food—opening doors
and gathering equipment should be done prior to putting the gloves on.
Time–Temperature Abuse
There are ideal conditions under which bacteria will grow; however, through the use of time
and temperature, we can control the bacteria’s ability to reproduce. In addition to time and
temperature, bacteria require a moist, neutral environment, and oxygen. Bacteria can grow in
the presence (aerobic) or absence (anaerobic) of oxygen, and this is true for the bacteria that
cause foodborne illness as well.
The best tool in the kitchen to fight against microorganisms is a thermometer. When
storing food, keep it under 41°F (5°C) in the refrigerator or above 140°F (60°C) for serving. When
FIGURE 1.1 Thermometer showing temperature

ranges for bacteria growth
held at these temperatures, the bacteria will not be killed but the growth will be slowed down.
Food stored between this range—41°F (5°C) to 140°F (60°C)—is in the food danger zone. The
maximum time for food to be stored in the danger zone is 4 hours. This range is ideal for the
reproduction of bacteria and it grows at a very fast rate. Food stored in this range for more than
4 hours should be discarded.
Cross Contamination
Cross contamination is the process of unknowingly transferring bacteria or microorganisms
from one surface to another surface or food. It usually occurs between raw and cooked foods
and can occur during storage. Raw items in the bakeshop—for example, egg products—should
be stored on the bottom shelf of coolers to prevent raw egg product from getting on finished
items. Preventing cross contamination can be done by washing hands, changing cutting
boards, and washing and sanitizing workstations throughout the day. The proper use of rubber
gloves can also reduce the possibility of cross contamination.
Food Allergies
A food allergen is an exaggerated immune response triggered by certain proteins in food.
The most common symptoms of food allergies include tingling in the mouth; hives; itching;
swelling of the lips, tongue, or face; wheezing or trouble breathing; abdominal pain, nausea, or
diarrhea; and dizziness, lightheadedness, or fainting. In severe cases, some people will go into
anaphylactic shock, with difficulty breathing, a drop in blood pressure, rapid pulse, and loss
of consciousness. In cases of severe reaction, emergency medical treatment is necessary, as
severe allergic reactions can lead to death.
Some people have an intolerance to certain foods. There is a difference between intoler-
ance and an allergy. An allergic reaction comes on every time the food is eaten. Intolerance
only manifests itself gradually, or only after consuming large quantities of the food. Both may
exhibit similar symptoms. Although food intolerance can lead to chronic health issues, it is not
imminently life threatening, as food allergies sometimes are.
As a commitment to keeping the customer safe, it is important that food service workers
are aware of allergens in the food they serve. There are over 160 foods that can cause allergic
reactions—the Food Allergen Labeling and Consumer Protection Act of 2004 (FALCPA) identifies
the eight most common allergenic foods. The U.S Food and Drug Administration (FDA) states
that 90 percent of all food allergies originate from this group of eight foods:
• Milk • Tree nuts
• Eggs • Peanuts
• Fish • Wheat
• Crustacean shellfish • Soybeans
Many of these allergens can be found in the pastry shop. Some may not be used as an
ingredient on their own but they may be part of a prepared item used in a recipe. Understand-
ing ingredients goes further than just understanding how the ingredients work together. It also
includes knowing what is in another ingredient. For example, many pistachio pastes are made
with almonds or almond oil, and a person might not be allergic to pistachios but might be to
almonds. The same holds true for items produced in the pastry shop. While peanuts may only
be contained in a few items, they are present in the shop. Cross contamination can be enough
to cause some people to go into anaphylactic shock.
Tools and Equipment

Looking back in time, baking bread without any equipment was a laborious task. Dough was
mixed by hand and ovens were heated with wood. Fast forward to the modern pastry shop, where
mixers knead the dough, dividers portion the dough, proof boxes reduce fermentation time, and
Tools and Equipment 9

oven temperatures are precisely controlled. The tools and equipment of the pastry shop f acilitate
the job of the pastry chef, reducing production times and helping to regulate consistency.
Tools
Air Tools
Airbrush An airbrush is used for adding detail to pastillage, bonbons, chocolate showpieces,
and plated desserts. There are two types of airbrushes, single action and double action. A
single-action airbrush only controls the amount of air pressure and will always spray a certain
amount of color. A dual-action airbrush controls the amount of colorant as well as the air
pressure. Pressing down allows the air to flow and pulling back sprays the color. The more the
button is pressed down, the more airflow will increase. The further the button is pulled back,
the more paint will be released.
Air compressor The air compressor provides the air pressure for the airbrush.
Heat Tools
Alcohol Wick Burner A small burner filled with denatured alcohol is used to melt and attach
a small piece of sugar to a showpiece.
Blowtorch The blowtorch is used to caramelize sugar on a crème brûlée, unmold frozen
cakes from metal rings, and fasten sugar pieces on a showpiece. A large propane blowtorch
and smaller butane blowtorch are used throughout the book. The smaller butane torch is
useful for connecting delicate sugar pieces.
Hair Dryer The hair dryer with a cool setting is used to cool sugar work. It can be used to rap-
idly cool pieces that have been attached, blown sugar, and larger cast pieces.
Heat Gun The heat gun is used for warming melted chocolate and to keep it tempered. It
can also be used to warm tools when working with chocolate or to unmold frozen cakes from
metal rings.
Scales and Thermometers

Digital Scale A digital scale is a battery-powered device used to measure ingredients by
weight. Use a digital scale that is made of kitchen-safe materials with a maximum weight of
at least 5 lb (2.267 kg). A smaller scale that can measure 0.003 oz (0.1 g) will be needed for the
recipes in Chapter 4, “Modern Pastry Techniques.”
Digital Thermometer with Probe A digital thermometer with probe can be used for
cooking sugar, checking oil temperature when frying, and checking the temperature of ganache.
Many of these thermometers can be switched between Fahrenheit and centigrade.
Infrared Thermometer Infrared thermometers can be used to quickly check the tempera-
ture of chocolate when tempering. They only read surface temperature, so it is important to stir
thoroughly before checking the temperature to get an accurate reading. Infrared thermometers
are not good for checking the temperature of boiling liquids.
Specialty Hand Tools

Chocolate-Dipping Forks Chocolate-dipping forks are used for hand-dipped choco-
lates. They can be purchased in sets or as individual pieces. The shape of the fork is designed
10 CH A PT E R 1 Introduction
s pecifically for the candy they are used to dip. A hoop is used for round truffles and forks are
used for square or elongated pieces.
Metal Bars Food safe metal bars of varying thickness can be used for spreading cake layers,
chocolate, and casting sugar.
Microplane A microplane is a very fine grater used for removing the zest of citrus fruits or
grating chocolate.
Sauce Gun A sauce gun is a funnel-shaped device that can dispense a liquid. The sauce gun
is useful for casting sugar, depositing liquor bonbons, glazing pastries, and saucing dessert
plates for large functions.
Sugar Pump A sugar pump is a rubber air bladder connected to a copper tip by a rubber
hose. It is used to inflate blown sugar.
Equipment
Mixers
Mixers are found in every pastry shop. Their sizes range from small, 5 qt (4.73 L) table-top
models up to 60 qt (56.78 L) floor models. The mixer can perform the work of a person in a
fraction of the time. Pastry chefs are able to mix large quantities of doughs in short periods of
time, which reduces the amount of time a product is in the danger zone.
Vertical Mixer Vertical mixers come in countertop, table, and floor models. In these models,
the bowl remains in place while the attachment moves in a planetary motion, thoroughly mix-
ing all ingredients in the bowl. There are three attachments used in vertical mixers: paddle,
whip, and dough hook.
FIGURE 1.2 Countertop mixer (Image courtesy of Hobart)

FIGURE 1.3a–c Dough hook, paddle, and whip (Images courtesy of Hobart)
1. Paddle—a flat attachment that can be used to combine ingredients. Using the paddle at a
higher speed will incorporate air into a batter. It is not able to incorporate as much as air
as the whip.
2. Whip—also known as a wire whip. The whip is used to incorporate air into cream, eggs, and
batters. When using the whip attachment, be sure to not overfill the bowl. There needs to
be enough space in the bowl for the whip to work properly and aerate the product. This
is dependent on the ingredient you are whipping; it is recommended that the bowl not be
filled over halfway for most applications.
3. Dough hook—a hook-shaped attachment used for developing gluten.
Spiral Mixer Spiral mixers are used for developing gluten in bread doughs. The bowl of the
mixer turns while the mixing attachment stays in a stationary position. Spiral mixers can quickly
develop gluten while not overmixing the dough. They create less friction, resulting in a lower
final dough temperature and ensuring a more consistent fermentation. The shortened mixing
time also prevents oxidation of the flour, leaving the interior of the bread with a darker color.
FIGURE 1.4 Spiral mixer (Image courtesy of Hobart)
Dough Handlers
The production of bread can be facilitated through the use of
dough-handling equipment. This line of products covers a wide
range of items to assist in fermentation and shaping.
Divider The divider does exactly what the name implies: It

divides the dough. Scaling dough by hand for rolls can be a tedious
task, but by using a divider, this process can be handled quickly
and produce uniform pieces of dough. After fermenting the dough,
it is scaled into a large press: Making the press larger will result in
larger rolls. The dough is then briefly rested. The dough is placed
into the divider and cut into equal pieces. The number of pieces
can vary, depending on the size of the machine and the cutter head
that is being used.
Divider Rounder The divider rounder takes the dividing pro-

cess one step further. After cutting the dough into equal portions, it
then mechanically rounds the dough.
Dough Sheeter A dough sheeter is a mechanized rolling sys-

tem. It consists of two c onveyer belts with a pair of adjustable
rollers in the middle. The front of the sheeter has a dial control
that adjusts the opening between the rollers; the numbers refer FIGURE 1.5 Divider (Image FIGURE 1.6 Divider
to the t hickness in millimeters. The lower the number, the thin- courtesy of American Baking rounder (Image courtesy of
ner the dough will become. The dough sheeter can reduce rolling Systems, Inc.) American Baking Systems, Inc.)
times and produce a uniform thickness throughout the entire
piece of dough.
FIGURE 1.7 Dough sheeter (Image courtesy of American Baking Systems, Inc.)
Proof Box A proof box provides the ideal humidity and temperature for fermenting yeast
doughs. The temperature and humidity can be adjusted depending on the type of dough. There
are portable and fixed-mounted proof boxes.
A proofer retarder is closely related to a proof box, with the added feature of being able to
retard the dough. A retarder is a refrigerator that contains moisture to prevent the dough from
drying out. Dough can be placed in the proofer retarder at the end of an evening shift, and a
timer can be set to switch the retarder off and turn on the proof box. This provides the pastry
chefs with dough ready to go into the oven when they arrive in the morning.
FIGURE 1.8 Proof box (Image courtesy of LBC Bakery Equipment, Inc.)
Ovens
The oven is the heart of the pastry shop. There are many styles of ovens available. Often times,
the deciding factor on the type of oven is the amount of space in the pastry shop. Many shops
contain two types of ovens, one conventional and one convection, to meet the baking needs of
different products.
Deck Oven A deck oven is also known as a hearth oven. This oven contains a ceramic deck.
Sheet pans are placed directly on the deck, and in the case of artisan-style breads, they are
baked directly on the deck with no pan. This allows the heat to quickly transfer into the bread
dough. Deck ovens are also equipped with steam injection. Steam injection helps in crust
formation of breads.
FIGURE 1.9 Deck oven (Image courtesy of LBC Bakery Equipment, Inc.)
Rack Oven A rack oven is a convection oven with steam injection. A rack filled with sheet
pans of product is loaded into the oven. The rack is then spun on a carousel inside the oven.
This movement, combined with the convection, provides a good circulation of air and pro-
motes even baking. The rack allows for quick loading of larger quantities of pastries, making it
ideal for production.
FIGURE 1.10 Rack oven (Image courtesy of Baxter)
Mechanical Oven The interior of a mechanical oven is similar to a Ferris wheel. Metal trays
inside the oven rotate the product around the oven, which helps to reduce hot spots. There can
be four to six shelves inside a mechanical oven. Mechanical ovens have a large footprint; they
take up a considerable amount of space in the bakeshop. However, they can also bake a large
quantity of baked goods at one time.
Convection Oven A convection oven forces air through the oven cavity. Pushing hot
air around the food increases the heat transfer. As a rule of thumb, convection ovens are
FIGURE 1.11 Convection oven (Image

courtesy of Baxter)

50°F (10°C) warmer than a conventional oven. Products baked in a convection oven will
bake slightly faster than a conventional oven, resulting in more moisture retention in the
final product.
Combi Oven A combi oven is a multipurpose oven that can function as a steamer or
convection oven, or it can be used as both a steamer and convection oven at the same time.
It is an extremely precise piece of equipment. Combi ovens can also be used to cook sous vide
(under vacuum) in combi mode.
FIGURE 1.12 Combi oven (Image courtesy of Vulcan)
Freezers
Blast Freezer A blast freezer is an extremely cold freezer that rapidly decreases the tem-
perature of foods. Blast freezers can be used to quickly set ice cream extruded from a batch
chiller without losing air, or to set mousses and creams for quick unmolding. The speed at
which the water is frozen in the food produces small crystals, which results in less damage to
the food. Once the food is frozen in the blast chiller, it is transferred to a conventional freezer
for storage.
FIGURE 1.13 Blast chiller (Image courtesy of Irinox North America)
Food Processors
Robot Coupe A Robot Coupe is a professional-grade food processor. It can be used to chop
nuts, purée fruits, and emulsify ganache.
Robot Coupe Blixer The Robot Coupe Blixer is a combination food processor and blender.
It has adjustable speeds and can quickly purée food. It is especially useful for processing
chocolate for rollouts.
FIGURE 1.14 Robot Coupe and Blixer (Photos courtesy of Robot Coupe USA, Inc.)

Vitamix A Vitamix is a high-speed blender that can be used for purées and blending dense
ingredients. It has adjustable speeds and is more powerful than a regular blender.
FIGURE 1.15 Vitamix (Photo

courtesy of Vitamix)
Immersion Blenders Immersion blenders, also known as stick blenders, are used to
blend ingredients. They can be used in the container the products were initially mixed in.
They can be used to emulsify frozen dessert bases, ganache, fruit sauces, and to temper
chocolate using the seeding method. Immersion blenders do not possess the same power
as a Vitamix.
Mise en Place
Mise en place is the French term for “putting in place.” This term is used in professional pastry
shops to refer to the organization of ingredients, equipment, and the individual workstation, as
well as the mental preparation required. All of these things help to reduce the time needed to
prepare items correctly.
If you recall earlier in the chapter, understanding ingredients is a skill that is important
in being successful in the pastry shop. An understanding of ingredients and their function in a
recipe can direct the pastry chef as to how they are to be assembled in a recipe. Now we begin
to connect the dots. We know the ingredients and the method, so the next step is to gather the
tools to complete the recipe. Understanding the method will ensure that the tools are gathered
and the workstation is organized to produce the recipe.
An important part of mise en place is mental preparation. In classes, mental preparation
includes covering reading material before class, arriving to class on time ready to go, and tak-
ing notes to assist with the daily proficiencies. Work is similar—mentally preparing before work
for the day ahead. Whether it is banquet production, cake orders, or service on the line, a great
deal of thought, planning, and preparation goes into making every day successful. Organizing
the production of banquet items to have a smooth flow of work, or organizing prep work and
FIGURE 1.16 Immersion station setup prior to dinner service for working on the line, is critical to the success of the
blender (Image courtesy of Waring) operation.
Key Terms
Physical contamination Sauce gun Deck oven
Chemical contamination Vertical mixer Mechanical oven
Biological contamination Paddle Convection oven
Food danger zone Whip Combi oven
Cross contamination Dough hook Blast chiller
Propane blowtorch Spiral mixer Mise en place
Microplane Sheeter
Questions for Review

1. List the eight major food allergens. 4. How can foodborne illness be prevented?
2. There are five types of ovens used in the pastry shop. Select two 5. What are the four skills necessary for being successful in the
and discuss the differences between them. pastry kitchen?
3. Why is good personal hygiene so critical in stopping the spread
of bacteria?

CHAPTER 2
Bread for the Pastry Chef

The importance of bread can be easily observed by looking back in history to the Roman
Empire. In order to keep the citizens happy, free bread was given at the Coliseum. The impor-
tance of bread cannot be ignored; historically, it has been shown that bread has influenced the
success and failures of war and the ability to feed the hungry. Today, the art of bread baking
is returning to its roots. Pastry chefs and bakers are producing excellent products combining
old-world skills and modern technology.
LEARNING OBJECTIVES

1. Convert a recipe using baker’s percentage.
2. Determine desired dough temperature for straight doughs and doughs with
multiple factors.
3. Identify the difference between a sourdough and preferment.
4. Properly mix dough using the short, intense, and improved mixing methods.
5. Present the 14 steps of bread baking.
Introduction to Bread
As part of a sandwich or an accompaniment with a meal, bread is a part of everyday life. Bread’s
production can be considered more complex than many other items in the pastry kitchen
because it is alive. Yeast is used in bread baking to leaven the bread and develop flavor—this
can only be done by feeding it and providing the correct environment for it to grow. Under-
standing what is happening and how each process impacts the following step will help to
ensure the proper flavor and texture are developed in the baked loaf. Many variables affect the
production of bread. To control the process, it is critical to thoroughly understand ingredients,
formula percentages, fermentation, and mixing methods.
Ingredients and Function

Wheat Flours
Flour can come from a wide variety of sources; it is produced by grinding grains, seeds, or roots.
The earliest evidence of flour was over 30,000 years ago. Throughout history, the rise and fall
of civilizations can be traced back to a simple grain. Napoleon’s quickly advancing army could
21
not maintain the grain supply. As a result, starvation set in; his troops were weakened, and this
eventually led to their defeat. The Civil War was also won by grain; the North had the grains to
feed the troops while the South had cotton. Grains played an important role in history; today,
we still rely on grains for nourishment.
Wheat flour is the main ingredient in bread. Today, flour is easily accessible in many forms
and is grown throughout the United States. It is broken down into six classes: hard red winter,
hard red spring, soft red winter, hard white winter, soft white spring, and durum.
Hard flours are higher in protein content and are best suited for breads. Soft wheat flour
is lower in protein and is milled for use in cakes, cookies, and pastries. Winter wheat is grown
in the southern United States as far north as Kansas. Seeds are planted in October. The wheat
begins to grow, and once winter arrives and temperatures drop, it goes dormant. Once spring
arrives, the wheat continues growing until it is harvested in May. Spring flours are grown from
the same southern region and continue north into parts of Canada. Seeds are planted in spring
and grow during the spring and summer. Harvesting is completed during mid to late summer.
There is no noticeable difference between red and white flours, other than the color. Nutri-
tional values are comparable: The difference lies in the protein contents. Winter wheats have
an average protein content of 11% to 12%, while the average protein in spring wheat is 13% to
15%. Wheat protein holds up better under long fermentation times. The extra protein in spring
wheat makes it ideal for bread baked in pans and breads that contain grains. The extra strength
of the flour helps to support the additional weight of the grains.
When the wheat kernel is harvested, it must be processed into flour. The inner portion of
the wheat kernel is protected by the pericarp. The pericarp is composed of seven layers. Its
main purpose is to protect the wheat kernel. Directly under the pericarp is the bran. Endosperm
is located under the bran. The starch and protein found in white flour is milled from this layer.
The endosperm provides the food for the wheat germ. Wheat germ contains fats, vitamins, and
minerals—this is the part of the embryo of the wheat kernel that creates the next plant.
When milling white flours (bread, all-purpose, cake, and pastry), many nutrients are
lost through the removal of the bran. Many of these flours will state that they are “enriched.”
Enriched foods have the nutrients that were naturally present in the unprocessed state
returned after processing. In the case of wheat flour, thiamin, riboflavin, niacin, folic acid, and
iron are replaced after milling. The requirements for labeling a product as enriched are regu-
lated by the FDA.
Specialty Flours
Wheat isn’t the only grain milled to make bread. Many other grains and seeds can be milled to
produce flour that will change the texture and flavor of the finished product. Utilizing different
flours can provide more than just a different flavor—they contribute to the structure, texture,
and nutritional value of the bread.
Rye Flour
Rye flour comes in many different forms—pumpernickel, dark, medium, light or white rye,
whole rye berries, or cracked rye berries. Rye can be used at lower levels (5% to 10%) and fla-
vor the bread while providing a slightly darker color. When used in higher percentages, the
difference between rye and wheat flour will be very clear.
Compared to wheat flour, rye is considerably lower in gluten and requires more liquid to
properly hydrate. The gluten formed is also very delicate. Mixing at a high speed will cause the
gluten to tear and release water back into the dough, resulting in a sticky dough. This can be
prevented by mixing at lower speeds for shorter periods of time. As the percentage of rye flour
increases, more care must be taken.
22 CH A PT E R 2 Bread for the Pastry Chef

Semolina Flour
Semolina is a finely ground wheat flour produced from durum wheat. When used in bread rec-
ipes, it gives the bread a slightly yellow tint and adds crunch to the crust. It can be used in small
quantities or to replace the flour 100%. The high protein content requires more hydration and
longer mixing times to properly develop the gluten.
Protein Contents in Flours
Protein Content Flour

7% Cake
9% Pastry
11% Rye flour
11% All-purpose
13% Patent
14% High-gluten
15% Clear flour
21% Semolina flour
Grains and Seeds

Grains and seeds are often used in bread to add texture and flavor. Common grains and seeds
used in breads are sunflower, sesame, flax, oats, millet, cracked wheat and rye, wheat berries,
and corn meal. Before using these in bread making, they must first be placed in water. Placing
grains or seeds in an equal amount of water and allowing them to soak for several hours is
known as a soaker. Using the soaker allows the seeds and grains to absorb water. Not soaking
these products will cause moisture to be pulled from the dough during the first fermentation.
When mixed this dough had the proper hydration, but now will be dry and stiff. Soaking also
softens the grains, prevents cutting the gluten strands during mixing, and provides a better tex-
ture to the grains and seeds in the finished product.
Cold and Hot Soakers

There are two ways that grains and seeds can be soaked, cold and hot. A cold soak is the
process of soaking the grains or seeds in room-temperature water, 72°F (22°C), for several hours
or overnight. The cold soak method does require more time; to speed up the process, a hot soak
can be used. To hot soak, bring the water to a boil, pour over grains and seeds to cover, and
allow to soak for a few hours. Be sure the soaked grains have cooled completely before mixing
into the dough. Adding a soaker that is still warm or hot will increase the dough temperature
and speed fermentation.
Which method is the best to use? That depends on how much time you have. If needed
quickly, a hot soak is recommended. What are you soaking? The size and type of grain will
determine which to use. If your grains are still crunchy in the finished product after a cold soak,
test the next time with a hot soak. Ultimately, it comes down to personal preference. The rec-
ipes in this book are presented with what was felt to yield the best results after testing.
Ingredients and Function 23

Liquid
It would be impossible to create bread dough without any liquid. The primary liquid used in
the production of breads is water. Flour is hydrated with liquids, allowing for the formation of
gluten. It goes much further than this; liquids dissolve the yeast, salt, and sugars and disperse
them throughout the other ingredients. Water begins the enzymatic activity. The ratio of flour
to water can create a stiff dough with a tight crumb or a slack dough with a loose crumb and
crispy crust. Water is also used to control fermentation. It is the medium that makes the sugars
available to the yeast. Adjusting water temperature is the simplest way to control fermenta-
tion. If the kitchen is too hot, cold or even ice water can be used. If it is too cold in the kitchen,
warmer water can be used to achieve the desired dough temperature after mixing (more on
desired dough temperature on pages 30–32).
Milk, which is primarily water, is also used in producing bread. Milk is composed of water,
lactose (sugar), fat, and milk solids. The small percentage of fat in milk, 3.6%, is enough to
soften the crust of the dough. Lactose present in the milk browns during baking and gives the
soft crust its deep color and flavor.
Salt
Salt is used to enhance the flavor of the bread that develops during fermentation and baking. If
the bread does not have enough salt, it will have a flat flavor. In most recipes, the salt can range
from 1.8% to 2% of the weight of the flour. This depends on the dough—formulas that include
grains and seeds will have a higher percentage of salt to account for the additional ingredients.
Flavor is only one benefit of salt; this small percentage of salt has profound impacts on
the dough. It strengthens the gluten structure of the bread. Without salt in the dough, it will be
difficult to work and be sticky. Salt can be added directly to the dry ingredients at the start of
the mixing process or at the end. The addition of salt at the end of mixing allows the gluten to
begin forming and allows more time for enzymatic process to occur. (See Autolyse on page 35.)
Yeast also benefits from the addition of salt. Many older bakers will say that salt kills yeast,
but this is not the case: Salt does not technically kill the yeast. Instead, it slows the fermenta-
tion process by water absorption. Too much salt in bread will give a salty flavor, but it will also
hinder fermentation and significantly reduce the final size and extend the fermentation time.
The color of the final loaf is also affected by salt. As a result of salt slowing the sugar consump-
tion by the yeast, there is more sugar available to create a brown crust.
Yeast
Without yeast, bread would not develop the flavor and texture we have come to know and love.
The pastry chef must fully understand yeast to produce great bread. In addition to providing
flavor and leavening, yeast also strengthens and develops gluten in the dough. The role of
yeast is critical in bread baking. A closer examination into how yeast works will provide the
information necessary to understand and control the fermentation process.
Commercial kitchens most commonly purchase yeast in four forms, fresh or cake yeast,
active dry, osmotolerant, or instant. Fresh yeast is a highly perishable but consistent product. It
should be combined with a small amount of the liquid from the recipe to create a paste before
using. Fresh yeast has traditionally been the preferred yeast of bakers and pastry chefs.
However, improvements in the quality of active dry and instant yeast have replaced the
use of fresh yeast for many bakers because they provide convenience and an increase in con-
sistency. Active dry yeast requires rehydration prior to being added to the dough, while instant
yeast can be directly added to the dough. These yeasts products all have different strengths and
cannot be substituted equally in a recipe. The following table provides conversions for yeasts.
Fresh yeast is available through local distributors and is sold in 1 lb (454 g) units, with a
shelf life of 1 to 2 weeks under refrigeration. Active dry and instant yeasts are sold in 1 lb (454 g)

FIGURE 2.1 Instant, active, and fresh yeast.
vacuum bags. They are stored at room temperature. Once opened, they can be refrigerated for
up to 4 months. If unsure if any of these yeasts have expired, combine a small amount of yeast,
sugar, flour, and some water. If the mixture does not begin to ferment after 20 minutes, it is time
to replace it.
Yeast Conversions
Fresh Active Dry Instant

Fresh 1 oz 2 oz 3 oz
Active Dry 0.5 oz 1 oz 1.5 oz
Instant 0.33 oz 0.66 oz 1 oz
Recipes that contain more than 10% sugar and/or fat benefit from using osmotolerant
yeast. Sugar and yeast compete for the available water in the formula, but the sugar can more
easily absorb the water, making it difficult for the yeast to grow. Osmotolerant yeast is able to
ferment in these doughs despite the lack of water. If you do not have osmotolerant yeast avail-
able, substitute instant yeast and increase the quantity by 30%.
In addition to water, yeast requires food. The primary foods for yeast are sugar and carbo-
hydrates. Fermentation occurs when the yeast consumes the sugar and carbohydrates. During
the early stages of fermentation, simple sugars are consumed by the yeast. The more complex
carbohydrates are enzymatically broken down into simple sugars and consumed later in the
fermentation process.
When the dough is first mixed, there is oxygen in the dough and the yeast is aerobic. During
this phase, the yeast produces carbon dioxide and alcohol as byproducts. The oxygen is quickly
consumed and the yeast switches over to an anaerobic state. This means the yeast does not
need oxygen to grow. It is also during this stage that organic acids begin to form. These organic
acids contribute a great deal to the flavor and aroma of the bread as well as strengthen the
dough and increase shelf life.
Sugars
Sugar provides sweetness to the bread and a rich brown crust. It can be found in bread in
many forms, such as granulated sugar, molasses, honey, or malt syrup. Sugar is the primary
food for yeast, but like salt, it absorbs water and can slow down fermentation by pulling
Ingredients and Function 25

water away from the yeast. As the percentage of sugar increases in the recipe, so will the
amount of yeast.
Most breads contain 5% or less of sugar. The more sugar in a recipe, the more it will brown.
Oven temperature may need to be reduced to prevent the crust, or bottom of the bread, from
burning before it fully bakes. Recipes that include a large amount of sugar (20% to 30%) need
to have the sugar added in two steps. Up to 12% can be mixed at the beginning of the mixing,
with the remainder added at the end. Sugar is hygroscopic and absorbs water, adding too much
at the beginning of the mixing will reduce the amount of water available to the flour, creating a
weak gluten structure.
Malt
Malt is produced by germinating grains, typically barley. The grains are soaked in water until they
begin to sprout. Once sprouted, the grains are dried with hot air to stop the sprouting. At this point,
the grain has developed the enzyme amylose, which is necessary to convert the starch in the grain
to maltose. Malt can be purchased in two forms, diastatic and nondiastatic. Nondiastatic malt
is dried at a higher temperature than diastatic malt; as a result, all the enzymes are destroyed.
Nondiastatic malt will provide easily processed sugars to the yeast and sweetness to the bread.
Diastatic malt has some additional benefits due to the some of the enzymes remaining active.
It still maintains the primary function of providing nutrients for the yeast and aids in converting
starch in the dough into sugar, and the additional sugar provides a boost to the yeast.
Eggs
Eggs provide structure, color, and flavor to the bread. The flavor of the egg comes from the yolk
and the fats it contains. These fats also tenderize the bread. If used in larger quantities, they
can also give a rich yellow color to the dough. The white is mostly water and does not contrib-
ute any flavor. Breads with eggs will also develop a brown crust more quickly, and, as a result,
reduced oven temperature may be needed for breads containing eggs.
Fats
Fats are used in bread to add flavor and shorten the gluten. There are many fats available for
baking bread, yet unsalted butter and olive oil are typically used. Unsalted butter is preferred
over salted butter, because it allows greater control over the addition of salt. The function of
fat in the dough is to add flavor and tenderize the dough. All fats shorten the gluten. In small
amounts, the fat controls how much gluten can form, while in larger quantities it can almost
prevent it from forming. In the case of bread dough, too much fat in the recipe added too early
can create a dough with a very weak gluten structure. For more information on adding fat to
bread dough, see the brioche mixing method. Doughs that include fat tend to have a softer
crust and texture.
Math
Baker’s Percentage
Introduction to Baker’s Percentages
As a student starting out in a new career, a recipe is viewed as a list of ingredients and a method
for assembling them. Yet there is much more information contained in this “simple” list of ingre-
dients, such as baker’s percentages. The recipes included in this text will have ingredients in

U.S. and metric quantities alongside baker’s percentage. Baker’s percentage is the percentage
of the weight of an ingredient in relation to the weight of the flour. Through an understanding
of baker’s percentage, a chef can increase or decrease the yield of a recipe, make adjustments
to the ratios, and even know what the recipe produces just by the list of ingredients and the
percentages.
When working with baker’s percentage, there are three rules to remember:
1. The weight of the flour is always 100%, due to the fact that almost all recipes include flour.
If there is more than one flour in the recipe, the total of all flour weights is 100%.
2. To find the percentage of an ingredient, always divide the ingredient by the flour weight.
Example = Sugar weight/Flour weight.
3. The total percentage for the recipe will always be over 100%.
Baker’s percentage is used in recipes that contain flour. As your career continues
and you start to become more familiar with baker’s percentage, you will be able to pre-
dict the consistency of the final product. For example, when examining the percentage
of an ingredient such as water to the flour, the final consistency of the product can be
determined. A recipe that is 50% water would produce a final product having the char-
acteristics of a dough. It can be rolled and cut. As the percentage of water increases, the
mixture will become more of a batter that can be scooped and baked, or even poured.
Recipes in this text that do not contain flour will be based on the total weight of the recipe
being 100%.
Calculating Ingredient Percentages

In the following example, we will calculate baker’s percentage for a baguette formula.
Baguette
Ingredient Pounds Ounces

Bread Flour 2 2
Salt 0.67
Instant Yeast 0.15
Water 1 4
Yields: Five 11 oz loaves
The first step is to convert the amounts to the same unit of measure. When using U.S.
measurements, this can be done by converting all ingredients to pounds or ounces. Due to the
small quantities of yeast and salt in the recipe, it would be best to convert all of the ingredi-
ents to ounces. To begin, multiply the pound weight of the flour by 16 ounces and add this to
the 2 ounces.
Bread flour
2 lb 2 oz
2 × 16 = 32 oz
32 oz + 2 oz = 34 oz
The total weight in ounces of bread flour is 34 ounces. Now perform the same process for
the water.
Math 27
Ingredient Ounces
Bread Flour 34
Salt 0.67
Instant Yeast 0.15
Water 20
The second step is to calculate the percentages of all ingredients. Refer to the rules of cal-
culating baker’s percentage on the preceding page. Remember, the flour is always 100%. So to
calculate the percentage of salt, yeast, and water, divide the weight of these ingredients by the
weight of the flour and multiply this number by 100.
Salt
(0.67 / 34) × 100 = Percentage of salt
0.0197 × 100 = 1.97% salt
Note: It is recommended to keep at least two decimal places when calculating percent-
ages. When converting a recipe from a small test batch to large production batch, rounding
the salt to 2% could result in the dough having too much salt. The same is true when rounding
down. Therefore, when increasing and decreasing recipes, results will be more consistent when
they are not rounded to whole numbers. Using a spreadsheet such as Excel will help you to sim-
plify recipe conversions.
Yeast
(0.15 / 34) × 100 = Percentage of instant yeast
0.0044 × 100 =
0.44% Instant yeast
Water
(20 / 34) × 100 = Percentage of water
0.5882 × 100 =
58.82% Water
After calculating the percentage of all the ingredients, a new table can be created. At
this point, the weights of the ingredients can be discarded; the percentages provide all the
information needed to calculate the quantities.
Ingredient Percentage
Bread Flour 100.00%
Salt 1.97%
Instant Yeast 0.44%
Water 58.82%
The percentages are then added together to calculate the formula’s total percentage.
Remember, when using baker’s percentage, the total percentage of a formula will always be
more than 100%.

Ingredient Percentage
Bread Flour 100.00%
Salt 1.97%
Instant Yeast 0.44%
Water 58.82%
Total 161.23%
Calculating a Formula Using Percentages

The total percentage can now be used to scale the recipe up or down, which is an important
function in the bakeshop. In this next step, we need to know the total amount of dough needed.
The calculations for this example will need to yield a total of 50 baguettes; each baguette will
be scaled at 11 ounces.
To calculate the total weight of dough needed, multiply the amount of loaves by the
weight per loaf:
Total dough needed = loaves × Weight per loaf

Total dough needed = 50 × 11 oz
Total dough needed = 550 oz
The 550 oz of total dough needed is then divided by the total percentage. This will provide
the conversion factor.
Conversion factor = Total dough needed / Total percentage

Conversion factor = 550 oz / 161.23%
Conversion factor = 3.41
The next step is to multiply the percentages of the ingredients.
Conversion Factor
Ingredient Percentage Multiplied by Percentage Ounces
Bread Flour 100.00% 3.41 × 100 = 341
Salt 1.97% 3.41 × 1.97 = 6.72
Instant Yeast 0.44% 3.41 × 0.44 = 1.5
Water 58.82% 3.41 × 58.82 = 200.58
Total 161.23% 549.8
The total dough needed to produce 55 baguettes was 550 ounces. The impact of
carrying only two decimal points before rounding can be witnessed with how close
the conversion was to the original needs. It is always better to have a little extra product
than what is needed when producing bread; making a few ounces of extra dough would
be acceptable.
Math 29
Lastly, convert the ounces to pounds by dividing the ingredient totals by 16. Then multiply
the remaining decimal (0.31 × 16) to convert the decimal back to ounces.
Ingredient Percentage Ounces Final Weights

Bread Flour 100.00% 341 341/16 = 21.31 21 lb 2 oz
Salt 1.97% 6.72 6.72 oz
Instant Yeast 0.44% 1.5 1.5 oz
Water 58.82% 200.58 200.58/16 = 12.54 12 lb 8.5 oz
Total 161.23%
Calculating a Formula with Two or More Flours

Some formulas contain more than one type of flour. In these instances the total of the flours are
totaled to equal 100%.
Example
Calculating Percentage with More Than One Flour
Ingredient Weight
Bread Flour 9.0 lb
Whole Wheat Flour 5.5 lb
The flours above are used together in a formula. Since both are flours, they are combined.
Add the bread flour and the whole wheat flour together: 14.5 pounds represents 100%. To cal-
culate how much each of the two ingredients contributes, divide the individual flour weight by
the total of the flours.
Bread flour/Total flour weight

(9.0 / 14.5) × 100 = Bread flour percentage
62% = Bread flour percentage
Whole wheat flour/Total flour weight

(5.5 / 14.5) × 100 = Whole wheat flour percentage
38% = Whole wheat flour percentage
The percentages of the flours are only used when calculating the weight of bread flour
or whole wheat flour is needed when converting a formula. When calculating the percentage
of the remaining ingredients in the formula, divide them by the total of the flours, in this case
14.5 pounds.
Desired Dough Temperature

The pastry chef needs to understand and control all processes of bread production—scaling,
mixing, dough temperature, shaping, and baking. The series of steps involved in making bread
are affected by the preceding step. When mixing bread dough, it is important to account for
room temperature, ingredient temperature, and friction from mixing. The goal is to provide the
desired dough temperature (DDT) in the range of 75 to 78°F (24–26°C).
This temperature range provides the ideal temperature for fermentation. If the dough is
too hot, fermentation occurs too quickly. The flavor of the bread will be lacking and the dough
will be weak. Dough that is coming off the mixer too cold will ferment slowly and will take
considerably longer to process.
The only variable the pastry chef/baker can truly control is the temperature of the water.
While a certain level of control can be placed on room temperature, there will be changes
throughout the course of a day as well as seasonal changes. The temperature of the flour is
often constant with the room temperature.
DDT is nothing more than the average of the temperatures of the three components.
When calculating for a straight dough the variables are the room temperature, flour temper-
ature, water temperature, and friction from mixing. For this example we will use a DDT of 75°F
(24°C). When calculating for a straight dough, multiply the DDT by 3. This is known as the total
temperature factor.
75°F × 3 = Total temperature factor

225°F = Total temperature factor
Room temperature and flour temperature are taken with a thermometer and recorded
into the formula. Depending on the type of mixer used, speed and time of mixing will change
the temperature increase from friction. Unless calculating the friction factor manually, the
average increase of dough temperature during mixing is 26°F (14.4°C) for most mixers. To cal-
culate the friction factor manually, scale a batch of dough using the average of 26°F (14.4°C).
Calculate the water temperature from the following table. If the dough is 2°F (1°C) warmer
than the DDT, increase the friction factor for this mixer by 2 degrees to 28°F (15.4°C).
DDT for Straight Dough
Total Temperature Factor 225°F
Minus Flour Temperature 72°F
Minus Room Temperature 70°F
Minus Friction Factor 26°F
Water Temperature 57°F
Desired Dough Temperature with Multiple Factors

When calculating the DDT for straight dough, the temperature of the flour, room, and friction
must be accounted for. Many breads contain a preferment or sour. Due to adding another com-
ponent into the dough, adjustments need to be made to calculate water temperature. When
calculating with multiple factors, multiply the DDT by 4 to determine the total temperature
factor. For this example, we will use a DDT of 75°F (24°C).
75°F × 4 = Total temperature factor

300°F = Total temperature factor
DDT with Multiple Factors
Total Temperature Factor 300°F
Minus Flour Temperature 72°F
Minus Room Temperature 70°F
Minus Friction Factor 26°F
Minus Preferment Temperature 78°F
Water Temperature 54°F
Math 31
In this example, the flour, room, and friction factor remained the same from the straight
dough example. The addition of the preferment has decreased the temperature of the water by
3°F (1.6°C). Calculating the DDT is not a proven science. The process helps to create consistency
in fermentation times and flavor of the bread. The best results are achieved through testing and
recording temperatures in a log. This will facilitate the calculation of the water temperature.
Sour Starters
Sourdough bread can be traced back several thousand years. While there is no clearly defined
origin, sourdough starters provided a way to ferment bread when yeast was not commercially
available as it is today. Sourdough bread is often shrouded in mystery. Where does it come
from? How can I make it? Why are there so many steps?
Sour starter is the mixture used to leaven sourdough bread, comprised of flour and water.
Commercial yeast is not used in the production of sourdough bread; instead, it relies on natu-
rally occurring yeast. Yeast is present all around us, on fruits and vegetables, on table surfaces—
even in the air. In nature, the concentrations of the yeast are very low. When making a sour the
natural yeast present on the rye flour is activated when combined with water. Over a period of
24 hours, the yeast begins to ferment and grow, increasing in strength. The yeast, along with
bacteria, begin working together to create the distinctive flavor of sourdough and leaven the
bread. This mixture is then fed over a series of days, increasing the amount of yeast and devel-
oping the flavor of the starter.
FIGURE 2.2 A sour starter (left); and (at right) after fermenting for 12 hours.

The flavor of the starter comes from the bacteria lactobacilli, which is responsible for pro-
ducing lactic acid. There are two types of lactobacilli, homo-fermentive and hetero-fermentive.
Homo-fermentive converts sugars in the dough and produces a mild-flavored lactic acid with
yogurt characteristics. Hetero-fermentive converts sugars into lactic acid, acetic acid, and
carbon dioxide. As the starter is fed and ages, the flavor will continue to become more complex.
In some cases, starters can be made with additional items such as honey, apples, grapes, or
even potatoes. These additional items add flavor to the starter and additional yeast. How does
this happen? Think of the wine-making process: Grapes are crushed, and over a period of time,
the mixture begins to ferment. This is due to wild yeast present on the outside of the grapes.
When making a sour, we capture the yeast that is all around us and provide it with an ideal envi-
ronment to multiply. When beginning a starter, it is suggested that you use whole grain flours
such as whole wheat or rye; unbleached white flour is not recommended. Whole grain flours
contain more nutrients and microorganisms than more processed flours and will facilitate the
growth of the starter. The following process is a starter that uses rye flour and honey.
Starting the Sour
Schedule Ingredients Starter Time before Next Feeding

Day 1 3 oz (85 g) White Rye Flour 24 hours
3 oz (85 g) Bread Flour
0.3 oz (8.5 g) Honey
3 oz (85 g) Water
Day 2 5 oz (142 g) Bread Flour 5 oz (142 g) 24 hours

3 oz (85 g) Water

3 oz (85 g) Water

3 oz (85 g) Water
Day 5 5 oz (142 g) Bread Flour 4 oz (113g) Ferment for 12 hours; starter is

3 oz (85 g) Water now ready to produce bread
Note: After the first day, a portion of the starter is discarded. This is a normal practice. Keeping all of the starter would
result in a large amount of sour that would need to be discarded.
The process listed above depends on many factors; a sour is a combination of science and
art. As a result, the sour starter and feeding procedure may need to be adjusted. The sour will
continue to develop flavor with each feeding. The sour is considered ripe when it is domed in
the container and the center is just starting to collapse. At this point, the yeast is most active
and the flavor is not too acidic. Adjustments to the initial mix quantity in the recipe and tem-
perature of the storage of the sour can help maintain the sour starter, so that it is ready when it
is needed. For example, if the sour is not active enough, you can add a small additional amount
of the previous batch to the feed, or increase the amount of water slightly. Increasing the water
will make the carbohydrates and nutrients in the sour more available to yeast and bacteria,
making them easier to process.
Dough temperature and time will also have an effect on when the sour is mature. The
warmer the temperature, the quicker it will mature. The goal is to have the sour mature when
you are ready to mix the final dough; schedule feedings at the correct time. Temperature is
always an issue in the bakeshop—summers are hot and winters are cold. Try to find a consis-
tent temperature for your starter. This may mean setting a low temperature in proof box during
winter months or near a cold air vent in the summer. Remember, making adjustments is accept-
able and often times needed. Document what you have done so you can be consistent in future
feedings. Maintaining the sour starter can be done indefinitely—observe the ripeness and make
adjustments as needed.
Sour Starters 33
Preferments
Preferments are an easy way to improve bread flavor, aroma, dough strength, and shelf life.
Most are made with flour, water, and yeast. The consistency can range from a dough to a loose
batter. The common types of preferments used in bread production are prefermented dough,
poolish, biga, and sponge.
Prefermented dough, also known as pâte fermentée or old dough, is used in products that
require a shortened first fermentation. It can be made from a simple dough that is water, flour,
yeast, and salt. The dough is allowed to mature and is added during mixing. A more straightfor-
ward approach would be to save a piece of dough from the day’s production. After mixing the
dough, a piece large enough for the next day’s production is removed and allowed to ferment
at room temperature for two hours. It is then placed in the refrigerator overnight. The next day,
the prefermented dough is added to the next batch and the process continues. The old dough
provides flavor (bacteria and fermentation) and strength to the next batch of dough, and the
new dough provides additional food for the yeast. Prefermented dough can be 20% to 30% of
the flour weight.
Poolish is of Polish origin, but was quickly adopted by the French and Austrians. A poolish
is equal parts flour and water, 100% hydration, which creates a very loose batter. The resulting
bread is lighter and less acidic compared to a traditional fermented dough. The Italian coun-
terpart to the poolish is a biga. A biga can range from 50% to 100% hydration. At the lower
percentage, it will be somewhat stiffer, and at higher percentages it will be looser. The biga
adds structure and flavor to the bread. Breads using poolish and biga are highly extensible and
have an increased dough volume. Maturity is noted by these preferments just beginning to col-
lapse in the center. Undermaturing results in less flavor; overmaturing will cause the poolish to
have an unpleasant acidic flavor.
Mixing Methods
Straight
The simplest mixing method is the straight mixing method. In this method, all the ingredients
are added together. There are no additional preferments added to the dough. As a result, the
dough lacks flavor, extensibility, and shelf life.
Sponge
The sponge mixing method is used primarily for rich doughs. These doughs are high in fat and
sugars. The sponge allows the yeast to get a “head start” before being added to the final dough.
The use of a sponge allows the yeast to multiply and begin developing flavor before the fat and
sugar are added, which will slow down fermentation. A sponge is yeast, flour, and liquid, and as
it reaches maturation, the preferment looks like a sponge. There are easily identifiable holes in
the sponge as it just begins to collapse. In addition to increased yeast activity, the sponge pro-
vides strength to an otherwise compromised dough and flavor to the final bread.
Brioche
Brioche is classified as Viennoiserie, and can have as much as 50% of the flour weight in butter.
This is a significant amount of fat. To assist with leavening, the sponge method is used. Adding
all the fat at the beginning of the mixing would make it difficult to develop the dough and would
take a long time. In the brioche mixing method, after the sponge has matured, all ingredients,

with the exception of the butter, are added and developed into a dough. At this point, we can
test the dough with the window test to see if the gluten has fully developed. Once the dough is
developed, the butter is added slowly. Be sure the cold butter is incorporated evenly through-
out the dough and that mixing is done quickly. The mixing time for brioche is long—as much as
15 minutes. Any additional mixing will cause excess friction and increase the final dough tem-
perature. This will make the dough ferment too quickly.
Double Hydration
Soft doughs like ciabatta and pugliese can contain over 70% water. Developing gluten in a highly
hydrated dough can be difficult. To overcome this, in the double hydration method, add 60%
water to the weight of the flour. Allow the dough to develop fully, then add the remaining water.
Minimal Mixing with Folds

Minimal mixing breads are also referred to as no-knead breads. These breads are hydrated
above 70%. When combining the ingredients, they are simply folded together and should look
like a shaggy mass. The dough is then left to rest for 30 minutes. The high hydration of this
dough allows the gluten to develop easily. At the end of the 30 minutes, the dough is folded; this
procedure is done a total of six times. Use care when working with doughs, using the minimal
mixing method to prevent degassing the dough fully and retaining some of the large air cells.
Autolyse
Raymond Calvel developed autolyse in 1974. In his procedure, the water and flour are combined
and rested for 30 minutes without fully mixing. He observed that the gluten developed while
resting. At the end of the rest period, the remaining ingredients are added. The benefit of auto-
lyse is a shortened mix time. This results in a less oxidized dough, giving the dough a creamier
color, large open crumb, and improved flavor. It affects enzymes and hydration rates as well.
Degrees of Mixing
Looking back to the early history of bread baking, all of the mixing was done by hand.
Bread baking was a labor-intensive job. Hand kneading left the dough with very little gluten
development and was a laborious task. The bread would undergo a long first fermentation,
sometimes as long as five hours, with several folds to develop the strength of the bread. This
time-consuming process produced excellent-tasting breads. As mechanical mixers were intro-
duced, the process was sped up, but this decreased the quality of the bread. As the customer’s
appreciation for artisanal breads has increased, the pastry chef has employed new techniques
to meet this need.
There is no right or wrong way to mix a dough, and each method will have a dough that
corresponds to it. The times given in the following sections are estimates and may need some
adjustment, depending on the type of mixer used or dough hydration.
Short Mix
In an effort to get back to the quality produced by a hand-mixed bread while still using
mechanical mixers, the short mix was created. Doughs produced using a short mix are mixed
on low speed for 5 minutes. The short mixing time doesn’t heat up the dough and prevents
Degrees of Mixing 35
FIGURE 2.3 Short mix (l); improved mix (c); intense mix (r)
oxidizing the dough, creating a cream-colored bread. Short mix doughs require several folds
during the longer fermentation to create strength in the bread. The final product is artisan
bread with an open crumb and excellent flavor.
Intense Mix
In an effort to dramatically shorten production times, the intense mix was created. Intense mix
doughs are mixed for 5 minutes on low speed, then 5 to 10 minutes on second speed. While fer-
mentation times are shorter, the bread produced lacks flavor and has a tight, uniform crumb.
The color of these breads is white due to overoxidizing the flour. Doughs made using the intense
mix method have a first fermentation time of 10 to 30 minutes. This short time does not allow
for the production of organic acids. The overdeveloped gluten allows these doughs to trap a
large amount of air, producing a larger loaf.
Improved Mix
The improved mix is the best of both worlds—the longer fermentation of the short mix with
the proper gluten development of the intense mix. In this method, the dough is mixed for
5 minutes on first speed and 2 minutes on second speed. The final bread has an open crumb
with slightly more volume than short mix, and the flour is somewhat more oxidized due to the
longer mixing time.
Note: All mixing times are dependent on the mixer being used. Adjustments may need to
be made to time or speed.

FIGURE 2.4 Proper gluten window FIGURE 2.5 Underdeveloped dough
Gluten Development
The main goal of mixing bread dough is to develop gluten. Several factors contribute to gluten
development. When water is combined with flour and mixed, the gluten is activated. Think of
gluten as a bowl of spaghetti, only this spaghetti has small hooks on the end. As the dough is
worked in the mixer, the gluten is aligned and the ends connect to the gluten next to it. This
creates the network inside the bread that gives the bread the ability to retain gas and structure
to maintain shape after baking.
When testing gluten development of dough, a simple visual examination of the dough is
made. A piece of dough is removed from the mixer and stretched by hand. This is known as a
window pane test. The dough is stretched to a thin membrane—light will easily pass through
the “window.” If the dough tears during the test, additional mixing is required.
Bread Production Stages

14 Steps
There are 14 steps involved in producing yeast breads. The final product will determine how
many steps are used. In some products, there may be less. Some recipes may include several
folds, while others may remove this step entirely. Fermentation times may be long and span
several hours; others may be a short 15-minute rest. Be sure to follow the procedures specified
in the recipe, as each step will impact the following step, and ultimately the final product.
Selecting the Right Ingredients

Bread is often made from just a few ingredients: flour, liquid, salt, and yeast. Many breads are
created with these four ingredients; by changing the ratio or methods, many variations can be
created. Things to consider when selecting ingredients are the type of flour, type of salt, water
or milk, and type of yeast.
Bread Production Stages 37

Scaling
Properly scaling ingredients is the most important step to any recipe: when properly scaled,
the recipe will yield consistent results and quantity of dough. Recipes are balanced based on
how ingredients interact within the recipe and what the final desired results are. Changing one
ingredient can result in a completely different product. Pay particular attention to ingredients
with the smallest quantities, such as salt and yeast.
Mixing
While this might seem like one of the easier steps, mixing begins the process of transform-
ing the ingredients into a dough. Before combining the ingredients, the DDT must be calcu-
lated. During the mixing phase, emphasis is placed on gluten development. Gluten is the
protein in flour that gives dough elasticity, extensibility, and the ability to trap gas, and
it provides structure when combined with liquid. When mixing, the bread ingredients are
equally dispersed throughout the dough, dry ingredients hydrate, and oxygen is introduced
to the dough.
Bulk Fermentation
After the dough has been mixed, it is rounded and allowed to ferment. Fermentation is the
process of yeast converting carbohydrates into carbon dioxide, alcohol, and organic acids.
Carbon dioxide provides the leavening for the bread while the alcohol and organic acids con-
tribute to the flavor. Organic acids add a significant amount of flavor and aroma to the bread.
Additionally, they strengthen dough development and increase shelf life of the final product.
Folding
Folding is a relatively new term—this step was originally referred to as punching. The dough
was literally punched to release the built-up gas. While this method is effective, folding provides
more benefits. Doughs that ferment for longer than 90 minutes, are made with a weak flour, or
are highly hydrated (75% or higher) benefit from folding.
Dough Folding Process:

1. Place dough with the smooth rounded side down on a generously floured worktable.
2. Take one-third of the dough from the close side and fold it over into the center. Gently
press out some of the gas; do not completely degas the dough. Dust any excess flour from
the dough.
3. Complete the same process for one-third of the far side of the dough.
4. Next, work from the left side and fold one-third in toward the center.
5. Finally, from the right side fold in one-third.
6. Carefully turn the folded dough over so the smooth surface is on top.
Note: If this process is completed multiple times on the dough, follow the same procedure.
Folding the dough correctly will accomplish four things. It will first degas the dough. The
high quantity of carbon dioxide present in the dough can retard fermentation. The second
benefit is redistributing the yeast throughout the dough, ensuring equal fermentation. The
third benefit is temperature equalization. The center of the dough will retain heat while the
outside cools; folding makes sure the dough is a consistent temperature. A fourth benefit
is development of gluten. The folding process continues aligning the gluten strands and
strengthens the dough.

FIGURE 2.6a–f The folding process
Dividing
To divide the dough, place the dough onto a lightly dusted worktable. At this point, avoid
folding or overworking the dough; the dough is rested. Gently flatten the dough, but do not
completely degas it. With a metal bench scraper, cut the dough into strips, then place a piece
of the dough on a scale. If it is too light, add additional dough; if too heavy, remove some of
the dough. After this first piece of dough is scaled to the correct weight, the size can be used to
judge the next piece. With some practice, scaling dough can be done quickly and accurately by
eye, and then verified on the scale without needing to make adjustments.
Dividing it quickly will prevent the dough from drying out. If there is a large quantity of
dough to be divided, cover the dough with plastic. Dividing is an important step because it
determines the size of the final loaf. Consistent scaling will produce breads that proof and bake
at the same rate.
Preshaping
The dough is now ready for preshaping. Preshaping is the process of taking the randomly
shaped pieces of divided dough and forming them into consistent shapes. This step is impor-
tant in preparing the dough for final shaping. The final shape of the loaf can change the pre-
shaping form—almost any shape can be made from simply rounding the dough. However,
longer shapes like a baguette can benefit from an oblong preshaping. Regardless of the shape
selected, it is important to keep the dough as even as possible; this will facilitate final shaping.

Intermediate Fermentation
Intermediate fermentation is often referred to as bench proofing. This step is a short fermentation
that allows the gluten in the dough to relax after preshaping. Stiffer doughs will require a longer
rest, while slack doughs could be as short as 15 minutes. After the preshaping is completed, the
dough is placed on a dusted bench, sheet pan, or board and covered to prevent drying.
Final Shaping
After the dough has relaxed enough to be shaped, we move onto the next step. In this step,
the dough is shaped into the final design, a boule, baguette, loaf pan, roll—there are c ountless
Bâtard and Baguette Shaping
FIGURE 2.7 Degassing dough FIGURE 2.8 Beginning FIGURE 2.9 Shaping a FIGURE 2.10 Continue rolling
to roll the dough for bâtard straight bâtard the bâtard thinner to form
and baguette the baguette
Football-shaped Bâtard
FIGURE 2.11 Final step: FIGURE 2.12 Starting the

tightening the dough on a “v” shape for a football-shaped
football bâtard bâtard
Boule
FIGURE 2.13 Shaping a FIGURE 2.14 Shaping a

boule: tightening the degassed boule: final process using hands
dough into a round to tighten the dough

shapes for breads. After shaping, the dough is transferred into bannetons, baker’s couche,
metal pan, or parchment-lined sheet pan.
Proofing
Proofing is the final fermentation of the dough. After shaping the dough, it is allowed rise. Most
pastry shops use proof boxes to facilitate the fermentation. Proof boxes can be adjusted to
provide the ideal temperature and humidity for fermentation while preventing a skin from
forming on the dough. If a proof box is not available, place the covered dough in a warm area
and allow the dough to ferment. A proof box will shorten the amount of time required for the
bread to rise, but the same results can be achieved by allowing the dough to rise at room
temperature.
Scoring
Before placing the dough in the oven, score it with a razor blade or lame. While scoring does
add a decorative element to bread, it also serves other functions. Scoring allows the bread to
expand and reach its maximum fullness. The scoring creates a weakness in the structure of the
bread, this allows the pastry chef to control where and how the dough will expand.
Baking
Once the bread has fully proofed, it is ready to load into the oven. This can be done with a
peel, a mechanical loader, or by placing the sheet pans in the oven. Use care when transferring
dough from bannetons and couches to prevent deflating the dough. Evenly space the dough
on the peel. The dough will not be moved again prior to placing in the oven. Properly spaced
dough will bake evenly and form an evenly browned and crispy crust.
When baking bread, a steam-injected oven can help develop a rich color and crisp crust.
Most breads benefit from steam, with the exception of breads that receive an egg wash prior to
baking. Steaming bread that has been washed would remove the wash from the bread. Steam
causes the starch on the crust of the bread to transform into sugars. This contributes not only
to the color of the bread but also to the flavor.
Shortly after the bread is placed in the oven, the dough begins to heat up. The increased
heat causes the fermentation process to speed up, increasing the production of carbon dioxide.
Moisture in the dough begins to heat and expand. This initial expanding of the bread is referred
to as oven spring. The steam adds to the bread’s ability to rise, and the additional moisture in
the oven prevents the crust from drying and setting. As the crust begins to gain color, the steam
has served its purpose and the vents on the oven can be opened. When steaming bread, be
careful to not oversteam it; too much moisture in the oven prevents crust formation, leading to
a loaf of bread that will collapse.
As the baking process continues, dough temperature reaches 140°F (60°C) and the yeast
begins to die. Starches begin to swell and gelatinize as the temperature reaches 140 to 158°F
(60 to 70°C). The gelatinization of starches is the first sign the crumb of the bread is starting
to set. The gluten protein begins to coagulate when the internal temperature reaches 158 to
176°F (70 to 80°C). At 194°F (90°C), starch gelatinization and protein coagulation is completed
and internal baking is done. The bread remains in the oven until the proper crust color has
been achieved.
Cooling
Once the bread has completed baking, carefully remove it from the oven using a peel or sheet
pan. Baked bread should be placed on cooling racks to allow moisture to evaporate. Leav-
ing the bread on a sheet pan or loaf pan will prevent the steam from escaping and create a
soggy crust. Bread must cool completely to ensure that the proper texture and flavor have
been developed.

Storing
Bread must be completely cooled before considering storage, wrapping a warm loaf of bread
will cause condensation inside the wrap and make the loaf soggy. Using bread the same day
it is baked does not require wrapping. The best wrapper for breads is paper, which allows
the bread to breath and maintains the crust. While storing bread for long periods of time,
it is necessary to wrap the bread in plastic and place in the freezer. Refrigeration is strongly
discouraged. While refrigeration will prevent molding, the bread stales faster at refrigera-
tion temperature. Starch retrogradation is the staling of baked goods. As baked goods age,
they continue to develop structure, and some of the water is squeezed out of the starch and
evaporates.
Troubleshooting for Breads
Issue Cause
Dough splits on the side when baked. 1. Formula contained too much yeast; reduce yeast.
2. Dough was not proofed long enough. Give dough a
longer proof.
3. Dough needed to expand more during baking. Score
dough properly.
When bread cools, crust cracks and The dough needed additional gluten development. Add a fold
looks slightly collapsed. or two during fermentation.
When sliced, bread has a thick crust. The bread was baked too long at too low a temperature.
Reduce the amount of time the bread is baked.
Bread does not rise. 1. Ingredients scaled improperly; check formula

for accuracy.
2. The incorrect yeast was used; check type of yeast.
3. The yeast is expired; check expiration date of yeast.

Recipes
Baguette Pâte Fermentée Baguette Final Dough
Yield: 1 lb 3 oz (539 g) Yield: 4 lb 15 oz (2271 g)

Portions: 1 Portions: 7 loaves
Portion size: 1 lb 3 oz (539 g) Portion size: 11.25 oz (324 g)
Yield description: 1 at 1 lb 3 oz (539 g) Yield description: 7 loaves at 11.25 oz (324 g)
Ingredients U.S. Metric % Ingredients U.S. Metric %

Bread Flour 10.7 oz 312 g 100 Bread Flour 2 lb 3 oz 1000 g 100
Water 8 oz 218 g 70 Pâte Fermentée, cut into pieces 1 lb 3 oz 539 g 54
Malt 0.05 oz 1.6 g 0.5 Water 1 lb 8.7 oz 700 g 70
Instant Yeast 0.05 oz 1.6 g 0.5 Malt 0.17 oz 5g 0.5
Salt 0.2 oz 6.25 g 2 Instant Yeast 0.13 oz 4g 0.4
Salt 0.81 oz 23 g 2.3
Note: After mixing the final dough, remove 1 lb 3 oz (539 g) to replace

Procedure
the pâte fermentée used in the production of the baguette final dough.
1. Mix for 6 minutes on speed 2. Ferment the dough covered for 3 hours at room temperature; then store
2. Ferment for 3 hours at room temperature; then place in refrig- in the refrigerator. The pâte fermentée can be made and stored for 3 days
erator for 12 hours. under refrigeration. Using this method, the pâte fermentée will continue
developing flavor with each batch of baguette dough made. When using
this method, the final dough will produce five baguettes.
Procedure
1. Use improved mix, DDT 78°F (25°C).

2. Allow bulk fermentation 90 minutes; fold once after 45 minutes.
3. Scale loaves at 11.25 oz (324 g).
4. Preshape and rest 30 minutes.
5. Final shape into a baguette procedure on page 40.
6. Proof for 90 minutes at 88°F (31°C).
7. Score dough with five to six cuts.
8. Bake at 450°F (232°C) with 10 seconds steam for 25 to
30 minutes.
Recipes 43
Kalamata Thyme Focaccia
Yield: 4 lb 9.2 oz (2086 g) Yield: 4 lbs 8 oz (2090 g)

Portions: 4 loaves Portions: 1
Portion size: 1 lb 2 oz (520 g) Portion size: 1 full sheet pan
Yield description: 4 loaves at 1 lb 2 oz (520 g) Yield description: 1 full sheet pan at 4 lbs 8 oz (2090 g)

Bread Flour 2 lb 10 oz 1200 g 100 Bread Flour 2 lb 9 oz 1162 g 100
Water 1 lb 11.5 oz 780 g 65 Water 1 lb 7.75 oz 673 g 57.9
Kalamata Olives, chopped and dried 2.1 oz 60 g 5 Sugar 2 oz 57 g 4.9
Thyme, fresh, picked 0.17 oz 4.8 g 0.4 Olive Oil 0.8 oz 22.5 g 1.9
Instant Yeast 0.63 oz 18 g 1.5 Instant Yeast 1.2 oz 34 g 2.9
Salt 0.84 oz 24 g 2 Salt 1.2 oz 34 g 2.9
Sun-Dried Tomatoes, sliced 3.5 oz 100 g 8.6
Rosemary, fresh, chopped 0.3 oz 8g 0.7
Procedure
1. Use improved mix; add kalamata olives and thyme at the end of
Procedure
mixing. Continue mixing until combined. DDT 78°F (25°C).
2. Allow bulk fermentation 90 minutes; fold once after 45 minutes. 1. Soak sun-dried tomatoes in water from recipe for 1 hour.
3. Scale loaves at 1 lb 2 oz (520 g). 2. Use intense mix.
4. Preshape and rest 30 minutes. 3. Allow bulk fermentation 90 minutes.
5. Final shape into a boule procedure on page 40. 4. Brush a sheet pan with olive oil, roll dough to fit sheet pan.
6. Proof for 45 minutes at 88°F (31°C). 5. Proof for 1 hour at 88°F (31°C).
7. Score with three cuts across the dough. 6. Bake 450°F (230C), 3 seconds steam for 5 minutes.
8. Bake at 450°F (232°C) with 10 seconds steam for 25 to 7. Reduce oven temperature to 420°F (215°C) for 15 to 20 minutes.
30 minutes. 8. Remove from oven and brush with olive oil.
FIGURE 2.15 Baguette, Kalamata Thyme, and Focaccia

Beer Bread Poolish Beer Bread Final Dough
Yield: 1 lb 3.2 oz (544.2 g) Yield: 4 lb 3 oz (1904 g)

Portion size: 1 lb 3.2 oz (544.2 g) Portion size: 1 lb 0.75 oz (476 g)
Yield description: 1 at 1 lb 3.2 oz (544.2 g) Yield description: 4 loaves at 1 lb 0.75 oz (476 g)

Bread Flour 9.6 oz 272 g 100 Bread Flour 1 lb 454 g 71.4
Water 9.6 oz 272 g 100 Whole 5 oz 142 g 22.3
Wheat Flour
Instant Yeast 0.007 oz 0.2 g 0.0007
Dark Rye Flour 1.4 oz 40 g 6.3
Beer Bread 1 lb 3.2 oz 544 g 85.5
Poolish
Procedure
Beer 10.9 oz 310 g 48.7
1. Combine ingredients with a dough hook and mix for 8 minutes Water 1.3 oz 37 g 5.8
on second speed.
Instant Yeast 0.1 oz 2.8 g 0.4
2. Ferment at room temperature, 72°F (22°C), for 12 hours.
Salt 0.65 oz 18.5 g 2.9
Bacon, sliced 1⁄8 in. and cooked 4 oz 113 g 17.8
until crispy
Onion, brunoise 5 oz 141 g 22.2
Sauerkraut, rinsed and drained 3.5 oz 100 g 5.1
Caraway Seeds, toasted 0.08 oz 2.3 g 0.4
Procedure
1. Use improved mix DDT 78°F (25°C).

2. Allow bulk fermentation 90 minutes, fold once after 45 minutes.
3. Scale loaves at 1 lb 0.75 oz (476 g).
5. Final shape into a boule procedure, page 40.
6. Brush dough with beer bread topping and dust heavily with
rye flour.
7. Proof for 3 hours at 88°F (31°C).
8. Bake at 450°F (232°C) with 10 seconds steam for 10 minutes.
9. Reduce oven temperature to 420°F (215°C) for 22 to 24 minutes.
Recipes 45
Beer Bread Topping Ciabatta Final Dough
Yield: 11.29 oz (318.2 g) Yield: 4 lb 6.oz (1986 g)

Portion size: 11.29 oz (318.2 g) Portion size: 1 lb 1.5 oz (496 g)
Yield description: 1 at 11.29 oz (318.2 g) Yield description: 4 loaves at 1 lb 1.5 oz (496 g)

Rye Flour 3.9 oz 110 g 100 Bread Flour 1 lb 15.7 oz 900 g 100
Beer 7.1 oz 200 g 181.8 Ciabatta Biga 12.07 oz 341 g 38
Salt 0.21 oz 6g 5.5 Water 1 lb 8.7 oz 700 g 77.8
Instant Yeast 0.08 oz 2.2 g 2 Olive Oil 0.35 oz 10 g 1.1
Instant Yeast 0.35 oz 10 g 1.1
Note: Any additional Beer Bread Topping can be reserved in the
refrigerator for 3 days. Salt 0.9 oz 25 g 2.8
Procedure
Procedure
1. Combine all ingredients.
1. Use improved mix, double hydration, DDT 78°F (25°C).
2. Reserve for beer bread.
2. Allow bulk fermentation 2 hours; fold once every 30 minutes.
3. Turn dough onto heavily floured table.
4. Fold in half and even out dough.
5. Cut into four equal pieces; dust cut ends in flour.
6. Place into floured couche.
Ciabatta Biga 7. Proof for 45 minutes at 88°F (31°C).
40 minutes.
Yield: 12.07 oz (341 g)
Portions: 1
Portion size: 12.07 oz (341 g)
Yield description: 1 at 12.07 oz (341 g)
Ingredients U.S. Metric %

Bread Flour 6.6 oz 186 g 100
Water 5.4 oz 153 g 82
Yeast 0.07 oz 2g 1.1
Procedure
1. Combine ingredients with a dough hook and mix for 8 minutes

on second speed.
2. Ferment at room temperature, 72°F (22°C), for 12 hours.
3. Store in refrigerator for up to 3 days. FIGURE 2.16 Multigrain Bread and Ciabatta

Multigrain Soaker Multigrain Final Dough
Yield: 1 lb 13 oz (820 g) Yield: 4 lb 5.7 oz (1973 g)

Portions: 1 Portions: 4
Portion size: 1 lb 13 oz (820 g) Portion size: 1 lb 1.4 oz (493 g)
Yield description: 1 at 1 lb 13 oz (820 g) Yield description: 4 loaves at 1 lb 1.4 oz (493 g)

Whole Wheat Flour 4.1 oz 116 g 100 Bread Flour 5.6 oz 160 g 100
Multigrain Mix 12.3 oz 348 g 300 Multigrain Biga 1 lb 13 oz 820 g 513
Buttermilk 12.3 oz 348 g 300 Multigrain Soaker 1 lb 13 oz 820 g 513
Salt 0.3 oz 8g 7 Sugar 4.2 oz 118 g 74
Butter 1.1 oz 30 g 19
Note: Cornmeal, flax seed, oats, sunflower seeds, or other grains can be
used in place of multigrain mix. Instant Yeast 0.5 oz 14.5 g 9
Salt 0.37 oz 10.5 g 6.5
Procedure
Procedure
1. Combine all ingredients with a paddle.
1. Cut up soaker and biga, add to remaining ingredients.
2. Store at room temperature 72°F (22°C) for 12 hours.
2. Mix for 8 minutes on second speed, DDT 78°F (25°C).
Multigrain Biga 6. Final shape into batard.

7. Proof for 1 hour 15 minutes at 88°F (31°C).
9. Reduce oven temperature to 420°F (215°C) for 15 to 20 addi-
Yield: 1 lb 13 oz (820 g) tional minutes.
Portions: 1
Portion size: 1 lb 13 oz (820 g)
Yield description: 1 at 1 lb 13 oz (820 g)
Pretzel Bread Poolish
Bread Flour 1 lb 0.5 oz 468 g 100
Water 12.4 oz 350 g 75 Yield: 7.8 oz (220 g)
Instant Yeast 0.1 oz 2g 0.4 Portions: 1

Procedure Ingredients U.S. Metric %
1. Combine ingredients with dough hook. Bread Flour 3.89 oz 109.5 g 100
2. Mix for 5 minutes on second speed. Water 3.89 oz 109.5 g 100
3. Ferment for 1 hour at 72°F (22°C). Instant Yeast 0.02 oz 1g 0.9
4. Refrigerate for 12 hours before use.
Procedure
1. Combine ingredients thoroughly.

2. Ferment for 12 hours at 72°F (22°C).
Recipes 47
Lye Solution
Pretzel Bread Final Dough
Ingredients U.S. Metric
Water, room temperature 4 lbs 1800 g
Yield: 4 lb 7.8 oz (2036 g) Lye, food-grade 2 oz 57 g
Portions: 35
Note: Dipping the dough in a lye solution gives the bread the
Portion size: 2 oz (56.7g) rolls
characteristic soft dark crust and flavor. Gloves and safety glasses are
Yield description: 36 rolls at 2 oz (56.7g) rolls recommended when using lye to prevent burns to skin and eyes.

Procedure
Water 11.3 oz 319 g 29 1. Add lye to water; stir to combine.
Milk, scalded 11.3 oz 319 g 29 2. Place the roll in the lye solution for 20 seconds.
Pretzel Bread Poolish 7.8 oz 220 g 20 3. Drain and place on a silpain or silpat.
Butter 1.1 oz 32 g 2.9 4. Sprinkle with pretzel salt and score.
Brown Sugar 0.5 oz 15.5 g 1.4 5. Bake at 375°F (190°C) for 15 to 18 minutes.
Instant Yeast .27 oz 7.7 g 0.7

Salt .8 oz 23.1 g 2.1
Poaching Liquid
Pretzel Salt As Needed As Needed

Procedure Water 8 lb 3600 g
1. Combine ingredients with poolish, improved mix, DDT Baking Soda 4 oz 115 g
78°F (25°C). Sugar 2 oz 56.7 g
3. Divide the dough into 2 oz (56.7 g) round rolls.
4. Place rolls on a flour-dusted couche and proof for 30 minutes Procedure
at 88°F (31°C). 1. Combine all ingredients and heat to 180°F (82°C).
5. At this point, the rolls can be dipped in the lye solution or 2. Poach rolls for 1 minute, drain, and place on silpain or silpat.
placed in the poaching liquid. Follow the procedure listed next.
3. Brush with egg whites, add pretzel salt, and score.
4. Bake at 375°F (190°C) for 15 to 18 minutes.
FIGURE 2.17 Honey Wheat, Pretzel, and Cottage Cheese Dill

Cottage Cheese Dill Honey Wheat
Yield: 4 lb 12.8 oz (2204 g) Yield: 3 lb 14.4 oz (1800 g)

Portion size: 2 oz (56.7g) Portion size: 2 oz (56.7 g)
Yield description: 38 rolls at 2 oz (56.7g) Yield description: 31 rolls at 2 oz (56.7 g) rolls

Bread Flour 2 lb 6 oz 1100 g 100 Bread Flour 1 lb 5.5 oz 610 g 61.3
Cottage Cheese 1 lb 6.1 oz 627 g 57 Whole Wheat Flour 13.5 oz 385 g 38.7
Milk 7.4 oz 210 g 19 Water 1 lb 3 oz 538 g 54.1
Sugar 2.1 oz 60 g 5.4 Honey 4.75 oz 135 g 13.6
Butter 2.7 oz 77 g 7 Sugar 1.2 oz 34 g 3.4
Fresh Dill, chopped 0.4 oz 11 g 1 Butter 1.2 oz 34 g 3.4
Whole Egg 2.7 oz 77 g 7 Instant Yeast 0.73 oz 21 g 2.1
Instant Yeast 0.7 20 g 1.8 Salt 0.9 oz 26 g 2.6
Salt 0.75 22 g 2
Kosher Salt As needed As needed
Procedure
Procedure 1. Use intense mix.

2. Allow bulk fermentation 90 minutes.
1. Use intense mix, DDT 78°F (25°C).
3. Scale at 2 oz (56.7 g) and shape into rolls.
2. Allow bulk fermentation 1 hour.
4. Proof for 1 hour at 88°F (31°C).
3. Scale rolls at 2 oz (56.7 g).
5. Egg wash (see below) and bake at 350°F (175°C).
5. Final shape into knots.
7. Egg wash (p. XXX) and sprinkle with kosher salt.
Egg Wash
Yield: 10.6 oz (300 g)

Portions: 1

Whole Eggs 7.1 oz 200 g
Egg Yolks 3.5 oz 100 g
Salt Pinch Pinch
Procedure
1. Combine all ingredients and whisk.

2. Strain through a chinois.
Recipes 49
Sour Starter Sour Dough
Yield: 4 lb (916 g) Yield: 4 lb 11 oz (2124 g)

Portion size: 3 lb 12 oz (803 g) Portion size: 1 lb 2.75 oz (531 g)
Yield description: 1 at 3 lb 12 oz (803 g) Yield description: 4 loaves at 1 lb 2.75 oz (531 g)

Day 1 Bread Flour 2 lb 6 oz 1075 g 100
White Rye Flour 3 oz 85 g 50 Water 1 lb 8.5 oz 695 g 65
Bread Flour 3 oz 85 g 50 Sour Starter (see this page) 11.5 oz 326 g 31.4
Honey 0.3 oz 8.5 g 10 Salt 1 oz 28.3 g 2.7
Water 3 oz 85 g 50
Days 2–4 Feed
Sour from previous feed 5 oz 142 g 100
Procedure
Bread Flour 5 oz 142 g 100
1. Use improved mix, DDT 78°F (25°C).
Water 3 oz 85 g 60
Day 5 Feed
Sour from previous feed 4 oz 113.4 g 11.5
Bread Flour 2 lb 908 g 100
5. Final shape into a boule.
Whole Wheat Flour 4 oz 113.4 g 11.5
Water 1 lb 8 oz 680 g 69.4
7. Score with three deep cuts.
Note: When starting the sour, a portion is discarded during days 2–5. Not
discarding this portion would result in a very large amount of waste at the 8. Bake at 450°F (232°C) with 10 seconds steam for 25 to
start of the fifth day. The remaining mature starter at the end of the day 30 minutes.
will not produce the desired results and should be discarded, leaving only
enough to be fed for the following day. This will help to maintain a healthy
and balanced environment for the wild yeast to naturally ferment. Working
with a sour requires planning. Schedule the breads for production the
following day and scale the day 5 feed to accommodate this.
Procedure Day 1
1. Combine ingredients and mix to a stiff dough consistency.

2. Store uncovered at room temperature, 72°F (22°C), for 24 hours.
Procedure Days 2–4
1. Scale 5 oz (142 g) of dough from previous day; discard

remaining dough.
2. Combine ingredients and mix by hand.
3. Store covered at room temperature, 72°F (22°C), for 24 hours.
4. Repeat this process for days 2, 3, and 4.
Procedure Day 5
1. Scale 4 oz (113.4 g) of dough from previous day, discard

remaining dough.
2. Combine ingredients and mix at second speed for 6 minutes.
3. Store covered at room temperature, 72°F (22°C), for 12 hours.
4. Refrigerate for up to 2 days, then repeat day 5 procedure.

Semolina Chocolate Cherry Bread

Portion size: 1 lb 9 oz (716 g) Portion size: 1 lb 3 oz (540 g)
Yield description: 3 loaves at 1 lb 9 oz (716 g) Yield description: 4 loaves at 1 lb 3 oz (540 g)

Bread Flour 1 lb 4.3 oz 578 g 55 Bread Flour 1 lb 15.7 oz 900 g 100
Semolina 1 lb 1.6 oz 472 g 45 Sour Starter (p. 50) 9.5 oz 270 g 30
Sour Starter (p. 50) 12.3 oz 350 g 33 Cocoa Powder 1.6 oz 45 g 5
Water 1 lb 8 oz 685 g 65 Water 1 lb 3.4 oz 550 g 61.1
Olive Oil 0.9 oz 24 g 2.3 Dark Chocolate 55%, melted 2.1 oz 60 g 6.7
Sugar 0.37 oz 10.5 g 1 Salt 0.9 oz 25 g 2.8
Salt 0.93 oz 26.3 g 2.5 Chocolate Chips 5.4 oz 155 g 17.2
Dried Cherries, rinsed in warm water 5.4 oz 155 g 17.2
Sesame Seeds As needed As needed
Procedure
Procedure 1. Combine first six ingredients and mix for 6 minutes at first speed.
1. Use improved mix, DDT 78°F (25°C). 2. Add Chocolate Chips and Dried Cherries; mix for 2 minutes sec-
2. Allow bulk fermentation 90 minutes; fold after 45 minutes. ond speed, DDT 78°F (25°C).
3. Scale loaves at 1 lb 9 oz (716 g). 3. Allow bulk fermentation 90 minutes; fold once after 45 minutes.
4. Preshape and rest 30 minutes. 4. Scale loaves at 1 lb 3 oz (540 g).
5. Final shape and roll in sesame seeds; place into greased 5. Preshape and rest 30 minutes.
loaf pan. 6. Final shape into a bâtard.
6. Proof for 2 hours and 15 minutes at 88°F (31°C). 7. Proof for 2 hours and 15 minutes at 88°F (31°C).
7. Bake at 450°F (232°C) with 10 seconds steam for 25 to 8. Score with three cuts.
30 minutes. 9. Bake at 450°F (232°C) with 10 seconds steam for 5 minutes.
FIGURE 2.18 Semolina and Chocolate Cherry Bread
Recipes 51
Potato Onion Bread Pizza Dough

Portion size: 1 lb 1.5 oz (498 g) Portion size: 9 oz (255 g)
Yield description: 4 loaves at 1 lb 1.5 oz (498 g) Yield description: 8 pieces at 9 oz (255 g)

Bread Flour 1 lb 5.6 oz 615 g 78.3 00 Flour 2 lb 9.6 oz 1180 g 100
Whole Wheat Flour 6 oz 170 g 21.7 Sour Starter (p. 50) 4.2 oz 118 g 10
Sour Starter (p. 50) 12.7 oz 360 g 45.9 Water 1 lb 9 oz 708 g 60
Water 1 lb 2.7 oz 530 g 67.5 Instant Yeast 0.04 oz 1g 0.1
Yukon Gold Potato, small dice, 9 oz 255 g 32.5 Salt 1.6 oz 47 g 4
roasted
Yellow Onion, 1⁄8 in. sliced, 10.6 oz 300 g 38.2
caramelized
Salt 0.9 oz 26.4 g 3.4 Procedure
Black Pepper, ground 0.2 oz 6g 0.7 1. Combine half of the 00 Flour with the remaining ingredients.
2. Mix for 10 minutes on speed 2.
Note: Potatoes and onions are cooked after scaling.
3. Add remaining flour and mix for 5 additional minutes.
4. Rest dough for 45 minutes.
Procedure 5. Divide into 9 oz (255 g) pieces and round.
1. Use improved mix, adding potatoes and onions at the end of 6. Retard for 12 hours in refrigerator.
mixing. Continue mixing until incorporated DDT 78°F (25°C). 7. Roll dough into 10-in. (25-cm) circles.
2. Allow bulk fermentation 90 minutes; fold after 45 minutes. 8. Top and bake at 500°F (260°C).
5. Final shape into a boule.
7. Score in an X.
30 minutes.

Raisin Walnut Sour Rye Sour Starter
Yield: 4 lb 6.9 oz (2019 g) Yield: 3 lb 14 oz (1820 g)

Portion size: 1 lb 1.7 oz (504 g) Portion size: 3 lb 14 oz (1820 g)
Yield description: 4 loaves at 1 lb 1.7 oz (504 g) Yield description: 1 at 3 lb 14 oz (1820 g)

Bread Flour 15.5 oz 440 g 55 Bread Flour 1 lb 10.4 oz 750 g 75
Whole Wheat 12.7 oz 360 g 45 Dark Rye Flour 8.8 oz 250 g 25
Flour
Water 1 lb 6.6 oz 700 g 70
Sour Starter 12.7 oz 360 g 45
Sour Starter (p. 50) 4.2 oz 120 g 12
(p. 50)
Water 1 lb 2 oz 512 g 64
Raisins, rinsed 6.3 oz 184 g 23
Walnuts, toasted and chopped 4.5 oz 128 g 16 Procedure
Salt 1.2 oz 35 g 4.4 1. Combine all ingredients in a mixer with a paddle to form a paste.
2. Store at room temperature 72°F (22°C) for 12 hours.
Procedure
1. Use improved mix; add raisins and walnuts at the end of mix-
ing. Continue mixing until incorporated. DDT 78°F (25°C).
2. Allow bulk fermentation 90 minutes, fold once after 45 minutes.
5. Final shape into a bâtard.
6. Proof for 2½ hours at 88°F (31°C).
7. Score with three deep cuts.
Recipes 53
Sour Rye
Yield: 4 lb 6 oz (1995 g) Procedure

Portions: 4 1. Use intense mix, DDT 78°F (25°C).
Portion size: 1 lb 1.5 oz (498 g)
2. Allow bulk fermentation 2 hours; fold every 30 minutes.
Yield description: 4 loaves at 1 lb 1.5 oz (498 g)
3. Scale loaves at 1 lb 1 oz (495 g).
Ingredients U.S. Metric % 4. Preshape and rest 15 minutes.

5. Final shape into a batard.
6. Proof for 2½ hours at 88°F (31°C).
High-Gluten Flour 8.8 oz 250 g 25
Dark Rye Flour 8.8 oz 250 g 25
30 minutes.
Water 1 lb 7 oz 650 g 65
Caraway Seeds, toasted and cooled 0.5 oz 15 g 1.5
Rye Sour Starter 10.5 oz 300 g 30
Salt 1 oz 30 g 3
FIGURE 2.19 Raisin Walnut Sour Bread and Sour Rye

Key Terms
Pericarp Total temperature factor Minimal mixing
Endosperm Preferments Autolyse
Wheat germ Straight mixing method Short mix
Soaker Sponge mixing method Intense mix
Baker’s percentage Brioche mixing method Improved mix
Desired dough temperature (DDT) Double hydration Gluten

1. Discuss the differences between short mix, intense mix, and 3. When is steam used, and how does it affect the crust of bread?
improved mix. 4. Why is bread scored?
2. Discuss how preferments benefit breads.

CHAPTER 3
Viennoiserie
Croissants, pain au chocolate, and brioche evoke memories of France—sitting in a small café
with a freshly baked, flaky croissant and a cup of coffee. While the French are often credited
with Viennoiserie, it originates in Austria. It was Marie Antoinette who brought the croissant to
France. The French built on the popularity of the Viennoiserie, continuing to make and improve
the techniques—much like pastry chefs do with all products in their kitchen.
LEARNING OBJECTIVES

1. Demonstrate the single and book-fold methods for laminating dough.
2. Identify the ingredients used in Viennoiserie and their function.
3. Prepare a variety of laminated and enriched products.
4. Prepare puff pastry.
5. Demonstrate the technique for mixing and laminating doughs.
Introduction to Viennoiserie
Flaky, buttery, and rich are the words that best describe Viennoiserie. These yeast-raised
products include more sugars, fats, milk, and eggs when compared to the lean doughs from
Chapter 2. Viennoiserie can be broken down into two main groups: laminated and enriched
doughs. Lamination is the process of layering dough and fat to produce a flaky pastry, such
as those used for croissants and Danishes. An enriched dough incorporates additional fats or
sugars during the mixing process. Examples include brioche, kugelhopf, and sweet roll dough.
Ingredients and Function

Liquid
Viennoiserie relies on water, milk, and eggs to hydrate the flour. Eggs will be addressed in the
following section, as they provide more than just liquid to the recipe. Liquids are used to incor-
porate all ingredients to form a dough. If used alone, water will create a crispy crust; however,
most Viennoiserie incorporates both water and milk. Milk provides fat, sugar, protein and vita-
mins to the bread. The small percentage of fat in milk helps to make the crumb more tender
and produce a soft crust. The additional sugar assists in the browning of the crust when baking.
57
Milk contains enzymes that can weaken the bond of the gluten. Denaturing these enzymes is
accomplished by scalding the milk. Sugar contributes to the browning of the dough, and the
fat makes the baked bread soft.
When scalding milk, scale slightly more than needed and heat until a skin forms on the top
of the milk or to a temperature of 190°F (88°C). During processing, pasteurized milk is heated to
161°F (72°C), but this is not sufficient to completely destroy all of the enzymes, which weaken
gluten. After scalding the milk, cover tightly with plastic wrap and cool quickly on an ice bath;
this helps to reduce any possible evaporation. Scale the milk after it has cooled to 80°F (17°C).
To save time and avoid the need of scalding the milk, powdered milk can be used. Pow-
dered milk is available as whole milk powder and milk solids nonfat (MSNF). Powdered milk
products are heated to 200°F (94°C), which destroys the gluten-weakening enzymes. MSNF has
an increased shelf life due to defatting, and is easily available through most distributors.
To convert a recipe from whole milk to MSNF, use the following procedure.
In this example, the recipe calls for 32 oz of whole milk.

To calculate the amount of MSNF needed, multiply the amount of milk needed by 0.10.
32 oz × 0.10 = Amount of MSNF
3.2 oz = Amount of MSNF
In the next step, the amount of MSNF is subtracted from the amount of whole milk. This
will yield the amount of water needed.
Whole milk − MSNF = Weight of water

32 oz − 3.2 oz = Weight of water
28.8 oz = Weight of water
Thus, to convert 32 oz whole milk in a recipe using MSNF, the recipe would need 28.8 oz of
water and 3.2 oz of MSNF.
Eggs
Eggs are 76% water. Like milk and water, eggs also hydrate the flour. Brioche and Danish use eggs
to give the dough flavor and a rich yellow color. Fats present in the yolk create a smooth and ten-
der dough. At the same time, the yolk softens the crust of the bread and facilitates browning. Dur-
ing the baking process, the egg proteins coagulate, adding structure and strengthening the bread.
Flour
Viennoiserie products differ from yeast breads described in Chapter 2. Many of these doughs
are mixed, laminated, shaped, and fermented. All of these steps contribute to the development
of gluten. In some formulas, high-gluten flour is used to combat the shortening effects of fats.
Some formulas may contain a blend of stronger flours (high-gluten and bread) and weaker
flours (cake and pastry) to create a more tender dough. Flours vary a great deal, and adjust-
ments to formulas may need to be made. The goal is to use the correct flour or blend of flours
to support the extra ingredients in the dough.
Sugar
Sugar adds sweetness to the bread, provides food for the yeast, controls gluten development,
and retains moisture. The amount of sugar in a formula can range from 12% to 30%. Additional
sugar also creates a denser dough with a fine crumb. Granulated sugar is most frequently used
in Viennoiserie formulas. However, honey, maple syrup, and even brown sugar can be used to
58 CH A PT E R 3 Viennoiserie
add additional flavor. Since products that are higher in sugar will brown more easily than the
breads produced in Chapter 2, be sure to adjust oven temperatures.
Yeast
The same guidelines discussed in Chapter 2 are used in production of Viennoiserie. Yeast pro-
vides flavor and leavening for the breads. Osmotolerant yeast is preferred for Viennoiserie
because many of these products contain more than 10% of sugar and/or fat. Using osmotol-
erant yeast will provide more consistent results and increased volume in the final product. If
osmotolerant yeast is not available, increase the amount of yeast in the recipe by up to 30%.
Salt
The flavor of salt helps to balance the sweetness often found in Viennoiserie. Salt also controls
fermentation, and can range from 1% to 2.3%. Higher percentages of salt in the dough will
retard fermentation.
Fat
Viennoiserie is identified by the yellow color of the doughs, soft rich dough, and flaky laminated
doughs. This is done with the use of eggs and fat. The quality of the fat that goes into the dough
will ultimately change the color and flavor of the dough. Butter is the preferred fat because it
provides the best flavor, color, and mouth feel to the dough. In regards to laminated dough,
butter can be very hard when cold and extremely soft at room temperature. This increases the
difficulty when laminating the dough. Shortening is more workable at refrigerator temperature
and at room temperature. It maintains a plastic consistency that is easy to roll in laminated
dough, but it provides no flavor. Margarine has more yellow color than butter, and has some of
the characteristics of shortenings, including ease of rolling. Margarine contains salt, so adjust-
ments to the recipe need to be made when changing to margarine.
Most Viennoiserie products have all the fat added during the mixing process, while croissants
and Danish have a majority of the fat added during the lamination process. Laminated doughs
have a small amount of fat included in the dough to increase flexibility and extensibility. The
amount of fat typically ranges from 5% for laminated dough, up to 70% for an enriched dough.
Laminated doughs commonly have an additional 25% of butter added for the roll-in.
Croissant and Danish dough have a small percentage of fat, which can be added during the
mixing process without any adverse effects. Enriched doughs contain much more fat. Once the
percentage starts to reach 10% fat, it is added at the end of mixing, just as the dough reaches
full development. Do not include the fat in the beginning of the mix because it will dramatically
increase the amount of mixing time. During this extended mixing time (sometimes as much as
double the time), the dough may become overoxidized and too warm. As a result, fermentation
may occur too quickly. When mixing doughs with a fat percentage above 10%, follow the
brioche method on pages 34–35 in Chapter 2.
Laminated Doughs
Laminated doughs have fat incorporated through a series of folding and turns to create thin layers
of fat and dough. Croissant and Danish are two varieties of yeasted doughs. Croissants are made
from a lean dough, low in fat and sugar, with a butter roll-in. Danish are made with a rich dough,
higher in fat and sugar, with a butter roll-in. Danish doughs might also include s pices. There are nine
key steps to producing properly laminated dough: mixing, roll-in fat preparation, enclosing the fat,
rolling and folding, shaping, proofing, filling and egg washing, baking, and finishing and storage.
Laminated Doughs 59
Mixing the Dough
The mixing of the dough is one of the most important of the nine steps. When making lami-
nated dough, the gluten does not need to be fully developed. Gluten development will continue
during the rolling and folding process. A short mix is sufficient to develop the dough. The dough
should be mixed to the point that it is not completely smooth and free of holes or tears. Refer
to Figure 3.1. The dough on the left is croissant dough mixed for 5 minutes: It is not as smooth
as the doughs prepared in Chapter 2. The dough on the right was mixed for 3 minutes: the holes
and tears are easily identifiable. This dough does not have enough structure to hold the roll-in
fat and will tear easily during rolling. The final product will not rise as high due to lack of struc-
ture. By contrast, using dough that has been fully developed, as discussed in Chapter 2, will
result in tough final dough. This will require additional resting time between folds.
After mixing the dough it is rested under refrigeration for a minimum of 1 hour, or as long
as 12 hours.
FIGURE 3.1 1. Properly mixed dough; 2. Undermixed dough
Roll-in Fat Preparation

The next step is shaping the butter into a slab in preparation of enclosing. To do this, slice a
pound of cold butter slightly thicker than ½ in. (15 mm). A pound of butter will yield nine slices.
Lay the butter slices out on a sheet of plastic wrap in three rows, three slices across, with the
slices touching. This will form a 3 × 3 square. Cover the butter slices with another piece of plas-
tic wrap. Gently press the butter with a rolling pin to maintain an even thickness of the butter.
The goal is to press the butter into one solid piece and begin to soften it. The final thickness
of butter will be ½ in. (15 mm) and measure 8 in.2 (21 cm2). Allow the butter slab to continue
softening at room temperature until the dough has finished fermenting.
FIGURE 3.2 Left: Butter placed on plastic wrap; Right: Butter flat-
tened into slab
FIGURE 3.3 1. Properly laminated croissant dough; 2. Improperly laminated croissant dough
Enclosing the Fat

Enclosing the fat in the dough is as important as the first step of mixing the dough. The consis-
tency of the butter and dough must be the same. This step requires the pastry chef to under-
stand what happens when the butter and dough are combined. The aim of lamination is to
layer the fat evenly between the layers of dough.
Butter that is too cold will create lumps when added to the chilled dough. Rather than roll
with the dough, the butter will break up, not spreading evenly between the layers. On the other
hand, butter that is too warm will spread too easily, creating uneven layers of fat and dough.
Since the butter spreads easier than the dough, this will cause the butter to push through the
ends of the dough when rolling.
To check the consistency, feel both the butter and the dough. Separately, they should feel
the same. If the dough is stiffer than the butter, place the butter in the cooler until it firms; this
may take as little as 5 minutes. If the butter is too firm, allow it remain at room temperature
until the butter softens to the consistency of the refrigerated dough. Since there can be range of
temperatures for coolers and room temperature, these times are approximate and may require
some adjustments to yield the optimal results. Be sure to check the consistency of dough and
fat before proceeding. This step is the same when enclosing butter using the traditional or
blunt cross method.
Traditional Method
When using the traditional method, roll the dough to 1.5 times the length of the butter. The
dimensions of the dough will be 9 × 13 in. (23 × 33 cm). Place the butter slab on the left side of
the dough, being sure to allow some dough to remain exposed on the sides of the butter. The
seam will ensure the dough closes and the butter will remain inside while rolling. To enclose the
butter, fold the dough on the uncovered dough on the right side over the butter. This will reach
the center of the butter slab. Then fold the dough from the left over the center of the dough and
gently close the ends.
FIGURE 3.4 1. Place the butter on FIGURE 3.5 2. Fold the right side over FIGURE 3.6 3. Fold the left side over
the dough. the butter. the center.
Laminated Doughs 61
This method gives the dough more layers of lamination than the blunt cross. After enclosing
the butter there are five layers: two layers of butter and three layers of dough.
Blunt Cross Method

The blunt cross method involves rolling the dough into a cross shape and placing the butter
into the center. Using this method the butter is fully enclosed in the dough and less likely to
escape from the sides during rolling.
When preparing to enclose the fat, roll the dough into a cross with rounded edges. The
dough in the center of the cross is slightly thicker and the arms are rolled so the edges are
thinned. It is important to roll the dough with the varying thickness to ensure the butter has
equal amounts of dough on each side. Measuring the blunt cross through the center, the dis-
tance from the tips of the arms will be 18 in. (45 cm). The arms are then folded over into the
center and the dough is pinched to seam the pieces.
FIGURE 3.7 1. Place the butter on FIGURE 3.8 2. Fold over the closest side. FIGURE 3.9 3. Repeat, folding in the
the dough. remaining sides.
Rolling and Folding

After enclosing the fat, the next step is to begin rolling and folding the dough. It is important to
decrease the thickness of the dough gradually to create even layers of butter and dough. The
dough is rolled to ¼ in. (6 mm) thick—be sure to brush any remaining dusting flour from the top
of the dough. The extra flour left on the dough will not be absorbed by the dough. If too much
flour is applied, it will be visible in the lamination of the final dough; additionally, this flour will
not taste good when eaten. When it comes to folding, there are two options: single fold and
book fold.
A single fold, or three-fold, is done by visually dividing the dough in thirds. The third on
the right side is folded over the center portion, and the piece on the left is then brought over
the center section. When using the three fold method, this process will need to be completed a
total of three times.
1. 2. 3.
FIGURE 3.10 Single-fold procedure: 1. Already-rolled dough is marked with dotted lines for thirds.
2. Fold the dough from the right side. 3. Fold the dough from the left side.
To execute the book-fold procedure, or four-fold, fold the dough over from both the right
and left side so they touch. It is best to offset the point where the two sides meet. Fold the
right side in 75 percent and the left side 25 percent. This helps to evenly distribute the layers of
dough. The dough is then folded in half. Yeast-leavened laminated doughs that use the book-
fold procedure start with one single fold, followed by a book fold. There are only two rolling and
folding steps in this process. This speeds up production but will result in less lamination. The
types and amount of folds are strictly based on personal preference. The following table exams
how many layers will be present in the final dough.
1. 2.
3. 4.
FIGURE 3.11 Book-fold procedure: 1. Already-rolled dough is marked on right and left side of dough ¼.
2. Right side is folded over 25%. 3. Left side is folded over 25%. 4. Dough is folded in half.
Layer Count for Laminated Dough Using Traditional Butter Lock in Procedure
Type of Fold Lock in Layers 1st Fold 2nd Fold 3rd Fold
Single fold 5 15 45 135
1 single fold and 1 book fold 5 15 60
Layer Count for Laminated Dough Using Blunt Cross Procedure
Type of Fold Lock in Layers 1st Fold 2nd Fold 3rd Fold
Single fold 3 9 27 81
1 single fold and 1 book fold 3 9 36
The dough will need to rest under refrigeration for a minimum of 20 minutes between folds
when using a mechanical sheeter, and 45 minutes for hand rolling. This serves three purposes:
it relaxes the gluten, retards fermentation, and solidifies the fat. After relaxing the dough, the
additional rolling and folding can be done. When rolling the rested dough, be sure to turn
90 degrees, so that the gluten is developed equally in all directions. Once the desired folds are
in place, rest the dough for 60 minutes in the refrigerator.
There are many steps in the production of laminated doughs. Following is a sample sched-
ule to assist in the manufacturing of the dough. As each procedure is executed, enter the rest
time on the sheet. This will help to make sure the correct number of folds are completed and
that the dough has had a sufficient rest period before moving to the next step.
Laminated Doughs 63
Schedule for Producing Croissant Dough
Step Dough Resting Time Start Time 7:00 AM

Mixing dough 60 minutes 8:00 AM
Butter lock-in and first fold 20 minutes
Second fold 20 minutes
Third fold 60 minutes
Final rolling 15 minutes in freezer
Cutting and shaping
Shaping
The dough is now ready for final rolling. Roll the dough in the same direction as the previous
roll until the desired width is reached. Then turn the dough and continue rolling to a thick-
ness of 1⁄8 in. (3 mm). When using a dough sheeter, roll the dough through on the final thick-
ness two times. At this point, the thickness of the dough will determine the final size of the
products. In the next step the dough is cut to the desired size. Assuming the thickness of the
dough is even, the cut and shaped pastries will be the same size.
After rolling the gluten needs a short rest to relax, which prevents the dough from shrinking
after it is cut. Place the dough in the freezer for 15 to 20 minutes. Completely freezing the dough
is not necessary. In the freezer, the dough will relax and the fat will harden, which will help
to achieve a clean cut. If the dough is too warm, the fat and dough will c ompress and stick
together, and lamination will not be visible on the edges of the dough.
While the dough is in the freezer, gather the tools needed for cutting and shaping. Many
shapes are easily achievable with a sharp knife and ruler. Even though the dough is in the freezer,
it is sheeted very thinly and will thaw quickly, so it is important to be organized and move quickly.
The ruler is critical in measuring the dough and ensuring the pieces are the same size. Consistency
in cutting and shaping will provide consistent products that proof and bake at the same rate.
After shaping the dough, there are two options: The dough can continue moving on the fol-
lowing steps or it can be retarded or frozen. If freezing a shaped product, place it on parchment-
lined sheet pans and wrap tightly. It is recommended to not store the product in the freezer
for longer than two weeks. When ready to use the frozen product, space the dough out on a
parchment-lined sheet pan. Allow the items to thaw completely before placing in the proof
box. This can also be done overnight in the refrigerator. Then continue with the following steps.
FIGURE 3.12a–d Croissant-shaping procedure:
1. Cut the dough. 2. Stretch the length. 3. Stretch the arms. 4. Roll the croissant.
FIGURE 3.13a–c Pain Au Chocolate:
1. Cut the dough. 2. Fill with chocolate. 3. Roll the dough.
FIGURE 3.14a–b Pocket fold:
1. Cut the dough. 2. Fold and press the corners in

the center.
FIGURE 3.15a–c Pinwheel fold:
1. Cut the dough. 2. Cut the “X” 3. Fold the corners.
FIGURE 3.16a–d Shaping snails:
1. Cut the strip. 2. Twist the dough. 3. Roll the dough out. 4. Wrap the dough.
Laminated Doughs 65
FIGURE 3.17a–d Cinnamon rolls:
1. Coat the dough with 2. Roll the dough. 3. Cut the dough. 4. Tuck the end of the dough
cinnamon sugar mixture. under the roll.
Proofing
After shaping the dough, apply a coat of egg wash. This coat will help to prevent a skin
from forming while proofing. Proofing can be done covered at room temperature at 68–70°F
(20–22°C) or in a proof box. When using a proof box, set temperature at 80°F (27°C) and
humidity at 80%. The inclusion of butter in Viennoiserie requires the proofing temperature
to be below 86°F (30°C) to prevent the butter from melting out of the dough. Due to the
delicate nature of the dough, it cannot be fully proofed without risking the baked products
collapsing, so proofing is completed at 75%. Remember that the additional sugar in the
dough will slow down fermentation, and it may take as long as 90 minutes for the dough to
be proofed properly.
Visually, it may be difficult to identify if the dough is properly proofed. Gently shake the
pan: The movement of the dough can help determine if the dough is properly proofed. Under-
proofed dough will look stiff and will not move when the sheet pan is moved. Properly proofed
dough will jiggle slightly when the sheet pan is moved. Overproofed dough will jiggle, but may
collapse and will be difficult to egg wash. Be careful, though, when testing: Shaking too hard or
excessively will cause the dough to deflate.
Filling and Egg Washing

After the dough is finished proofing, it is prepared for baking. At this point, Danish and some
croissants require fillings to be added. Fillings can include marmalade, cheese, spinach, sun-
dried tomatoes, or pastry cream. Before applying the filling, gently degas the dough with your
fingers where the filling will be deposited. Omitting this step may cause the filling to fall off the
dough during baking.
The dough now undergoes a second egg washing. Remove the product from the proof box
and allow it to sit at room temperature for 5 minutes. This step allows the dough to cool slightly,
making it easier to egg wash. The moisture of the proof box can make the outer layer of the
dough very soft. The short rest at room temperature will allow this layer to dry slightly, allowing
the brush to slide over the dough, rather than sticking.
Egg wash gives the crust a deeper color and shine. When egg washing the dough, it is
important to apply a thin coat and avoid the egg wash from pooling on or around the dough.
Egg wash that pools on the dough will not only look unattractive, but it could also add a strong,
undesirable egg flavor to the finished product. A soft brush works best, and a gentle touch will
prevent deflating the proofed dough. Apply the egg wash to the dough in the same direction
as the dough is laminated. For example, a croissant should be brushed following the same way
it was rolled, not from end to end. Brushing over the cut edges of the dough will prevent the
edges from fully expanding as the egg coagulates first.
Baking
Laminated dough relies on steam and yeast to leaven the dough. The correct oven tempera-
ture will ensure that enough steam is developed before the outer layer of the dough sets. The
initial oven temperature of 375°F (190°C) will provide enough heat to quickly create steam and
increase the volume of the Viennoiserie. To prevent the crust from forming too quickly, 2 to
3 seconds of steam can be injected in the oven. A small amount of steam will not rinse off the
egg wash, just allow the dough a little more oven spring.
Once the dough has begun to color, vent the oven, allowing any extra steam to dissipate. It
is possible to have a croissant that looks fully baked with an underbaked interior that will col-
lapse. In order to prevent this, after 5 to 7 minutes, continue baking at 350°F (180°C) until done.
To determine the doneness of Viennoiserie, the dough should be evenly colored a deep golden
brown; the sides of croissants should be the same color as the top and bottoms. If too much
browning is observed on the bottom of the product, double panning may be needed. Remem-
ber: All ovens have unique characteristics, so testing of oven settings will need to be conducted
to achieve the best results.
Croissants and Danish are very fragile when warm, and care must be used when handling
them right out of the oven. Allow them to cool before moving to the next step.
Finishing and Storing

After cooling, some croissants and Danish receive additional garnishes. They may be dusted
with powdered sugar, brushed with apricot glaze, piped with chocolate, garnished with fresh
fruit, or have a sugar glaze applied. Store the products uncovered at room temperature. Due
to the delicate nature of the croissant and Danish, they are best consumed the same day they
are produced.
Enriched Breads
Enriched breads cover a wide variety of yeasted doughs, sweet dough, brioche, coffee cakes,
stollen, and donuts. The process of making enriched breads is similar to those used in Chapter 2.
The main difference is that they include larger quantities of eggs, sugar, and fat.
Mixing
Due to the large quantity of fats and sugar, enriched breads benefit from using the sponge
method and brioche method described in Chapter 2. Some enriched breads that contain lower
percentages of sugar and fat can be mixed using the straight dough method. Formulas that
contain over 10% sugar or fat benefit from developing the dough before adding the sugar or
fat. Adding the sugar and fat early in the development of the dough increases the mixing time,
resulting in an overoxidized, warm dough.
After mixing, refer to the 14 steps of bread production in Chapter 2. When working with
enriched bread, consider temperature. These doughs will be softer due to the higher percentage
of fat. Chilling the dough will make it easier to shape and handle. It will also slow down fermen-
tation and provide a better flavor to the dough.
Enriched Breads 67
Proofing and Baking
Enriched breads, much like croissants and Danish, benefit from a lower proofing tempera-
ture. To prevent the butter in the dough from melting, a proof box temperature of 80°F (27°C)
and humidity at 80%, work best. After proofing, all enriched breads must be egg washed.
Remove the dough from the proof box and let it rest for 5 minutes at room temperature before
egg washing.
Most enriched breads will be baked in a moderate oven at 350°F (180°C). Larger loaves
may require the temperature of the oven to be lower, to finish baking the interior of the bread
and avoid undesired overbrowning of the crust. Monitor the bread during the baking process
to ensure the dough, especially the bottom, is not browning too quickly. If the bottom of the
dough is taking on too much color, double panning may be necessary.
Products baked in pans will need to be unmolded to allow excess moisture to escape
from the cooling product. The bread must cool slightly before unmolding, allowing the bread
to stabilize. Unmolding too quickly will cause the bread to collapse under its own weight.
Place the unmolded loaf on a cooling rack, preventing moisture from building up under
the dough.
Puff Pastry
Puff pastry is a laminated dough that does not contain yeast or sugar. The richness of the
dough comes from the butter used for lamination. The amount of butter for the roll-in can
be up to 50% of the final dough. It is used in the production of turnovers, mille feuille, St
Honoré, and arlettes. Because the dough does not contain sugar, it can be used for savory
applications.
There are three different types of puff pastry: traditional, blitz, and reverse. Traditional
puff pastry is made in a similar fashion as the laminated Viennoiserie. A dough is made and
then laminated. The difference is that puff pastry uses four book folds to create the layers.
Traditional puff pastry may contain as many as 1,000 layers of dough and fat. Reverse puff
pastry has an equal amount of layers. Blitz puff pastry is comparable to a pie dough with an
increased amount of fat. Blitz puff pastry gets its name from the fact that is quickly mixed, rest-
ed for a short period of time, and laminated quickly at one time. The layers are not as clearly
defined and it will not be as flaky as the traditional or reverse puff pastry. It is an excellent
option when the desire is for the buttery flavor and a flaky dough that does not need to rise as
high. When traditional puff pastry is baked, it can rise almost eight times the original thickness.
This is done by steam alone. It takes a considerable amount of time to produce puff pastry, but
the end result is flaky, light dough.
Traditional puff pastry is laminated in the same way as croissant and Danish dough.
Enclosing the fat can be done using the traditional or blunt cross methods, followed by four
book folds. During folds, the dough is rolled to a thickness of ¼ in. (6 mm). Resting periods
between folds remain at 20 minutes. The following schedule will provide a way to monitor the
production of traditional puff pastry.
Baking Puff Pastry

Puff pastry requires steam to create the flakiness associated with the dough. To create the
steam, the dough is started in a hot oven 425°F (220°C). Once the dough has risen and begun
to set, baking is finished at 350°F (180°C) to bake through the center. Since puff pastry does not
contain any sugar, it can withstand the higher temperature and longer baking time.
Schedule for Producing Puff Pastry Dough
Step Amount of Dough Resting Time Start Time 7:00 AM

Mixing dough 60 minutes 8:00 AM
Butter lock-in and first book fold 20 minutes
Second book fold 20 minutes
Third book fold 20 minutes
Fourth book fold 60 minutes
Final rolling 15 minutes in freezer
Cutting and shaping
Some products require a flaky dough, but not as flaky as traditional puff pastry. To create
a flaky dough that can be made quickly, pastry chefs use Blitz Puff Pastry. This dough is simi-
lar to pie dough with a higher percentage of fat. The dough is mixed like a pie dough and then
allowed to rest in the refrigerator for 15 minutes and then rolled. The dough is rolled to 1⁄8 in.
(3 mm) and then given a book fold. The dough is turned 90 degrees, and this process is com-
pleted two more times without resting the dough. At this point, the dough is rested again for
30 minutes and then rolled to the desired thickness, ready for use.
Reverse puff pastry has the butter encasing the dough. It is difficult to imagine rolling
butter with a rolling pin, and cannot be done without adding flour to the butter. This helps to
make the butter more dough like, and absorb moisture in the butter so it does not stick to the
rolling pin. The advantage of reverse puff pastry is that it does not shrink as much during the
baking process.
Troubleshooting for Vienoisserie
Issue Cause/Solution
When laminating dough the 1. Fat has hardened due to low refrigerator temperature or extended
butter can be seen through time in the refrigerator, reduce resting time in refrigerator
the dough in chunks 2. Fat is too cold, use butter that is the same consistency
of the dough
When laminating the dough 1. Fat is too soft, use butter that is the same consistency
the fat breaks through the end of the dough
of the dough 2. The dough is rolled down too quickly, gradually reduce the
thickness of the dough when rolling to ensure dough and fat roll
at the same rate.
Laminated product The dough was rolled too thin, follow the thickness guidelines in the
is not flaky section rolling and folding. Rolling the dough too thin will compress
the layers and reduce flakiness.
Butter runs out of the dough The proof box temperature was too high. Reduce the temperature of
in the proof box the proof box
Butter runs out of laminated The dough was not laminated properly; the fat is too thick in the
dough when baking dough and runs out.
Croissants unroll when baking 1. The dough is too tough, reduce mixing time for the next batch.
2. When shaping the croissant the dough was rolled too tightly, roll
looser next time
Puff Pastry 69
Recipes
Croissant Whole Wheat Croissant

Portion size: 2.7 oz (76 g) Portion size: 2.7 oz (78 g)
Yield description: 24 croissants at 2.7 oz (76 g) Yield description: 23 croissants at 2.7 oz (78 g)

Bread Flour 1 lb 12 oz 795 g 100 Bread Flour 1 lb 5.1 oz 600 g 75
Milk, scalded and cooled 1 lb 0.8 oz 477 g 60 Whole Wheat Flour 7 oz 200 g 25
Butter, soft 2.5 oz 70 g 8.9 Water 14.1 oz 400 g 50
Sugar 1.5 oz 43 g 5.4 Milk Powder 0.7 oz 20 g 2.5
Instant Yeast 0.5 oz 14 g 1.8 Egg Yolk 2.25 oz 64 g 8
Salt 0.65 oz 18 g 2.3 Salt 0.6 oz 16 g 2
Sugar 3.1 oz 88 g 11
Butter for roll-in 1 lb 454 g 57.1 Instant Yeast 0.28 oz 8g 1
Butter, soft 1.1 oz 32 g 4
Procedure
Butter for roll-in 12.9 oz 368 g 46
1. Combine all ingredients with exception of the roll-in butter.
2. Mix for 5 minutes on second speed, DDT 76°F (24°C)
3. Allow bulk fermentation, 1 hour. Procedure
4. Refrigerate for 1 to 12 hours. 1. Combine all ingredients with exception of the roll-in butter.
5. Follow rolling and folding procedure on page 65. 2. Mix for 5 minutes on second speed, DDT 76°F (24°C).
4. Refrigerate for 1 to 12 hours.
5. Follow rolling and folding procedure on page 64.
FIGURE 3.18 Croissant and Whole Wheat Croissant
Danish Dough

Portions: 25 1. Combine all ingredients with exception of the roll-in butter.
Portion size: 2.25 (65 g)
2. Mix for 8 minutes on second speed, DDT 76°F (24°C).
Yield description: 25 Danish at 2.25 (65 g)
3. Allow bulk fermentation, 1 hour.
Ingredients U.S. Metric % 4. Refrigerate for 8 to 12 hours.

5. Follow rolling and folding procedure on pages 65–66.
Water 11.9 oz 338 g 45
Sugar 4 oz 112 g 15
Eggs 2.9 oz 83 g 11
Butter, soft 1.3 oz 38 g 5
Milk Powder 1.3 oz 38 g 5
Cardamom 0.13 oz 3.8 g 0.5
Osmotolerant 0.31 oz 9g 1.2
Yeast
Salt 0.53 oz 15 g 2
Butter for roll-in 13.2 oz 375 g 50
FIGURE 3.19 Assorted Danish: Blueberry Almond Cream Danish (top), Pain au
Chocolate (right), Apricot Almond Cream (front)
FIGURE 3.20 Assorted Danish: Bear Claw (top), Cinnamon Cream Cheese (right), Fresh Fruit Pinwheel (front)
FIGURE 3.21 Assorted Rich Doughs (From top left going clockwise): Kugelhopf, Brioche Loaf, Stollen, Pain Au Lait with Poppyseeds
Kugelhopf Sponge Kugelhopf
Yield: 11.35 oz (321 g) Yield: 3 lb 14.6 oz (1780 g)

Portion size: 11.35 oz (321 g) Portion size: 1 lb 15 oz (890 g)
Yield description: 1 at 11.35 oz (321 g) Yield Description: 2 loaves at 1 lb 15 oz (890 g)

Bread Flour 6.75 oz 191 g 100 Bread Flour 1 lb 2.75 oz 532 g 100
Water 4 oz 113 g 59.1 Milk, scalded and cooled 4 oz 169 g 31.8
Instant Yeast 0.6 oz 17 g 0.9 Eggs 8 oz 169 g 31.8
Osmotolerant Yeast 0.05 oz 1.6 g 0.3
Salt 0.17 oz 5g 0.9
Procedure Sugar 4 oz 113 g 21.2
1. Combine ingredients; mix for 6 minutes at second speed, DDT Butter 7.25 oz 205 g 38.5
76°F (24°C). Soaked Raisins 9.25 oz 263 g 49.4
2. Ferment for 1 hour. Kugelhopf Sponge 11.35 oz 321 g 60.3
Procedure
1. Use intense mix for all ingredients except raisins, DDT

Kugelhopf-Soaked Raisins 76°F (24°C).
2. Add raisins and mix until combined.
Yield: 9.25 oz (263 g) 4. Refrigerate for 8 to 12 hours.
Portions: 1 5. Scale loaves at 1 lb 15 oz (890 g).
Portion size: 9.25 oz (263 g) 6. Allow bench fermentation 30 minutes.
Yield description: 1 at 9.25 oz (263 g) 7. Degas and shape into a ring.
8. Place the dough into buttered fluted mold (9 in. × 4 in.; 22.8
cm × 10 cm).
Raisins 7.75 oz 220 g 9. Proof for 2 hours at 85°F (29°C).
Rum 1.5 oz 43 g 10. Bake at 350°F (175°C) 40 to 45 minutes.
11. Remove from pans and place on cooling racks.
12. Once bread is completely cooled, dust with powdered sugar.
Procedure
1. Rinse raisins to remove excess sugars.

2. Drain and dry on paper towels.
3. Pour rum over fruit and soak for 24 hours.
Recipes 75
Pain au Lait Stollen Sponge
Yield: 4 lb 3 oz (1908 g) Yield: 10.25 oz (276 g)

Portion size: 2 oz (57 g) Portion size: 10.25 oz (276 g)
Yield description: 33 rolls at 2 oz (57 g) Yield description: 1 at 10.25 oz (276 g)

Bread Flour 2 lb 1.8 oz 960 g 100 Bread Flour 3 oz 80 g 100
Sugar 3.4 oz 96 g 10 Water 6 oz 160 g 200
Osmotolerant Yeast 0.27 oz 8g 0.8 Milk Powder 0.75 oz 20 g 25
Salt 0.71 oz 20 g 2 Instant Yeast 0.5 oz 14 g 18
Eggs 5.1 oz 144 g 15 Honey 0.09 oz 2.4 g 3
Milk, scalded and cooled 1 lb 0.9 oz 480 g 50
Butter, soft 7.1 oz 200 g 20.8
Procedure
1. Combine ingredients with paddle and mix for 5 minutes.

Procedure 2. Ferment for 1 hour at 72°F (22 C).
1. Use intense mix, DDT 76°F (24°C).
2. Allow bulk fermentation, 1 hour.
3. Refrigerate overnight.
4. Scale into 2 oz (56.7 g) rolls.
5. Proof for 90 minutes at 85°F (29°C). Stollen Fruit
6. Egg wash.
7. Bake 350°F (176°C).
Yield: 1 lb 3.5 oz (562 g)
Portions: 1
Yield description: 1 at 1 lb 3.5 oz (562 g)

Golden Raisins 8.25 oz 238 g
Raisins 8.25 oz 238 g
Candied Orange Peel 1.25 oz 36 g
Rum 1.75 oz 50 g
Procedure
1. Rinse all fruit to remove excess sugars.

2. Drain and dry on paper towels.
3. Pour rum over fruit and soak for 24 hours.
Stollen Almond Paste Stollen Final Dough
Yield: 8 oz (240 g) Yield: 4 lb 8 oz (2092 g)

Yield description: 5 pieces at 1.5 oz (43 g) Yield description: 4 loaves at 1 lb 2 oz (520 g)
Ingredients U.S. Metric Ingredients U.S. Metric %

Almond Paste 8 oz 225 g Bread Flour 1 lb 6 oz 635 g 100
Whole Eggs 0.5 oz 15 g Sponge 9.4 oz 273 g 43
Water 1.4 oz 40 g 6.3
Sugar 2.2 oz 63.5 g 10
Whole Eggs 4.1 oz 120 g 18.8
Procedure
Butter 11 oz 317 g 50
1. Mix ingredients to combine.
Salt 0.4 oz 12.7 g 2
2. Scale almond paste mixture at 1.5 oz (43 g) and roll into a
Stollen Fruit 1 lb 3.5 oz 562 g 88.5
cylinder 7 in. (17 cm) long.
Sliced Almonds 2 oz 57 g 9
3. Reserve in refrigerator for final bread shaping.
Lemon Zest 0.2 oz 6g 1
Spice Blend 0.2 oz 6g 1
Note: Spice blend is equal parts nutmeg and mace by weight.
Procedure
1. Combine first seven ingredients using intense mix, DDT

76°F (24°C).
2. Add remaining ingredients and mix for an additional 2 minutes.
4. Scale loaves at 1 lb 2 oz (520 g).
5. Allow bench fermentation 30 minutes.
6. Degas and flatten center of loaf with a rolling pin.
7. Enclose the almond paste mixture in the dough; fold the
dough over.
9. Bake at 350°F (175°C) 30 to 35 minutes.
10. While loaves are still warm, brush all surfaces including the bot-
tom with 6 oz (170 g) of melted butter and dredge in sugar.
11. Once bread is completely cooled, dust with powdered sugar.
Recipes 77
Brioche Sweet Dough

Portion size: 1 lb (454 g) Portion size: 2.29 oz (60 g)
Yield description: 4 loaves at 1 lb (454 g) Yield description: 24 cinnamon rolls at 2.29 oz (60 g)

Bread Flour 1 lb 13.1 oz 825 g 100 Bread Flour 1 lb 12.2 oz 800 g 80
Milk 7.1 oz 200 g 24.2 Milk, scalded and cooled 11.6 oz 330 g 41
Eggs 10.9 oz 310 g 37.6 Eggs 3.1 oz 88 g 11
Sugar 1.8 oz 50 g 6.1 Butter 4.8 oz 135 g 17
Salt 0.6 oz 16 g 1.9 Sugar 4.8 oz 135 g 17
Instant Yeast 0.26 oz 7.3 g 0.9 Osmotolerant Yeast 0.3 oz 9.5 g 1.1
Salt 0.2 oz 5.6 g 0.7
Butter, cold and cubed 14.5 oz 410 g 49.7 Vanilla Paste 0.2 oz 5.6 g 0.7
Procedure Procedure
1. Mix all ingredients except butter for 8 minutes on second speed, 1. Use straight dough method.
DDT 78°F (25°C). 2. Mix for 8 minutes.
2. Add the butter and continue mixing until it is incorporated. 3. Ferment dough for 1 hour at room temperature, 72°F (22°C).
3. Allow bulk fermentation 1 hour. 4. Refrigerate for 12 hours before using dough.
4. Refrigerate overnight. 5. Roll dough to 12 in. (40 cm) wide and thickness of 1⁄8 in. (3 mm).
5. Scale into 1 lb (454 g). 6. Spread a thin layer of cinnamon smear on dough and roll.
6. Shape into loaves and place into greased loaf pans. 7. Cut into 0.75 in. (20 mm) thick pieces.
7. Proof for 2 hours at 85°F (29°C). 8. Proof for 2 hours at 85°F (29°C).
8. Egg wash. 9. Bake at 350°F (175°C) for 15 to 20 minutes.
Cinnamon Smear Sticky Bun Smear
for Cinnamon Rolls
Yield: 1 lb 3.25 oz (577.5 g)
Portions: 3
Yield: 1 lb 10.5 oz (752 g)
Portion size: 10-in. (25-cm) cake pans
Portions: 1
Yield description: Three 10-in. (25-cm) cake pans
Yield description: 24 cinnamon rolls at 1.1 oz (31 g) Ingredients U.S. Metric
Ingredients U.S. Metric Brown Sugar 10 oz 300 g

Butter 4 oz 120 g
Brown Sugar 1 lb 454 g
Honey 2.5 oz 75 g
Butter, soft 8 oz 227 g
Corn Syrup 2.5 oz 75 g
Cinnamon 1 oz 28 g
Vanilla Bean Paste 0.25 oz 7.5 g
Egg Whites 1.5 oz 43 g
Procedure
Procedure
1. Cream butter and sugar.
1. Cream butter, brown sugar, and cinnamon on low.
2. Add honey and corn syrup on low speed.
2. Slowly add egg whites, scraping often.
3. Add vanilla on low speed.
3. Reserve in refrigerator.
4. Mix until combined.
5. Spread a thin layer into a 10-in. (25-cm) cake pan.
6. Top with 8 cinnamon rolls.
7. Follow proofing and baking directions for cinnamon rolls.
Recipes 79
Almond Cream Bear Claw Filling

Portion size: 1 lb (452 g) Portion size: 1 lb 15 oz (878 g)
Yield description: 1 at 1 lb (452 g) Yield description: 1 at 1 lb 15 oz (878 g)
Ingredients U.S. Metric Ingredients U.S. Metric

Almond Flour 4 oz 113 g Almond Paste 4 oz 113 g
Sugar 4 oz 113 g Sugar 4 oz 113 g
Butter, soft 4 oz 113 g Butter, soft 4 oz 113 g
Whole Eggs 4 oz 113 g Cake Crumbs 1 lb 454 g
Eggs 3 oz 85 g
Note: Observe mixing speeds when making almond cream. Incorporating
air during mixing will cause the cream to collapse after baking.
Procedure
Procedure
1. Cream almond paste and sugar on low speed.
1. Combine almond flour, sugar, and butter. 2. Add butter and cake crumbs.
2. Mix with paddle attachment on low speed until combined. 3. Slowly add eggs, scraping often.
3. Slowly incorporate eggs in three additions, scraping thoroughly. 4. Reserve in refrigerator.
Oatmeal Streusel Cream Cheese Filling

Portion size: 1 lb 14.85 oz (874 g) Portion size: 1 lb 9.4 oz (721 g)
Yield description: 1 at 1 lb 14.85 oz (874 g) Yield description: 1 at 1 lb 9.4 oz (721 g)

All-Purpose Flour 8.75 oz 248 g Cream Cheese 1 lb 454 g
Oatmeal 6 oz 170 g Sugar 8 oz 227 g
Brown Sugar 8 oz 227 g Salt 0.2 oz 5.6 g
Cinnamon 0.1 oz 2.8 g Vanilla Paste 0.25 oz 7.1 g
Butter 8 oz 227 g Egg Yolk 1 oz 28 g
Procedure Procedure
1. Cube butter into 1⁄4-in. cubes and place in the refrigerator 1. Cream sugar and cream cheese on low speed, scraping often.
2. Place dry ingredients in a mixing bowl. 2. Add remaining ingredients and mix until smooth.
3. Blend dry ingredients. 3. Shape Danish dough using the cinnamon roll procedure, p. 66.
4. Add cold fat and continue mixing until fat is a cornmeal 4. After proofing, fill the Danish dough using the filling procedure,
consistency. p. 66.
5. Top Danish or other pastries as desired before baking. 5. Pipe the cream cheese filling into the indention created in the
6. Refrigerate any additional Oatmeal Streusel for up to 7 days. Danish dough.
6. Top with Oatmeal Streusel and bake following the procedure
on p. 67.
7. Cool completely and dust with powdered sugar.
Recipes 81
Puff Pastry Blitz Puff Pastry

Yield description: 1 at 3 lb 1.75 oz (1414 g) Yield description: 1 at 2 lb 8 oz (1143 g)

Bread Flour 1 lb 454 g 69.5 All-Purpose Flour 1 lb 454 g 100
Water 7 oz 200 g 30.5 Butter 1 lb 454 g 100
Butter, melted 5.3 oz 150 g 22.9 Water, ice cold 8 oz 227 g 50
Salt 0.35 oz 10 g 1.5 Salt 0.3 oz 8.5 g 2
Butter for roll-in, cubed 14.1 oz 400 g 61.2
Bread Flour for roll-in 7 oz 200 g 30.5
Procedure
1. Cut butter into 1⁄4-in. cubes and place in refrigerator.

Procedure 2. Cut cold butter into flour on low speed.
1. Combine first four ingredients and mix for 5 minutes on second 3. Dissolve salt in water.
speed with dough hook. 4. When mixture is pea size, add ice-cold water and mix until a
2. Combine butter and flour for roll-in in a mixer. dough forms.
3. Cover dough and rest under refrigeration for a minimum of 1 hour. 5. Place dough in the refrigerator for 1 hour.
4. To complete laminating dough, follow the schedule for produc- 6. Roll dough to ¼ in. and complete a three-fold.
ing puff pastry on page 69. 7. Immediately turn the dough 90 degrees and repeat steps 6 and
7 two more times.
8. Refrigerate the dough for 30 minutes.
9. Roll dough to desired thickness.
Key Terms
Lamination Danish Enriched breads
Scalding Blunt cross Traditional puff pastry
Osmotolerant yeast Single fold Reverse puff pastry
Croissant Book fold Blitz puff pastry

1. Discuss how fat is used in Viennoiserie and enriched doughs to 4. Why are laminated doughs rested between rolling and folding?
produce different products. 5. Each type of puff pastry has an advantage. Describe the benefits
2. What is osmotolerant yeast? associated with all three.
3. Identify the advantages and disadvantages associated with butter, 6. Why is it important to scald milk?
shortening, and margarine in laminated doughs.

CHAPTER 4
Modern Pastry
Techniques
Pastry chefs are constantly looking for ways to enhance the experience of their guests through
the use of new techniques and ingredients. A spoon of a flavorful gravity defying foam, adding
something crunchy, or even a fruit flavored caviar added to a dish, all of this can be achieved
through the use of modern cooking techniques. The use of these ingredients is nothing new,
they have been used for years to improve the quality of products we eat every day. As these
ingredients have become more easily available chefs and pastry chefs have a chance to
experiment and create new experiences for their guests.
LEARNING OBJECTIVES

1. Prepare foams using various hydrocolloids.
2. Explain bloom strength of gelatin.
3. Describe the difference between spherification and reverse spherification.
4. Identify how hydrocolloids can be used to improve existing recipes.
Modern Cuisine
Many of the top restaurants in the world have gained a reputation through a use of modern
cooking techniques. ElBulli in Spain was first credited with using the ingredients and tech-
niques in a full-service restaurant. The techniques used in ElBulli kitchens made them the top
restaurant in the world a total of five times. There are many other restaurants around the world
that build on the popularity of modern techniques, using ingredients that have been around for
a long time and have only recently worked their way into the kitchen.
Originally, the manufacturing industry used these ingredients in foods that were readily
available in the corner grocery store. Manufacturers used large quantities of the ingredients.
Finding them in smaller quantities was a challenge to restaurant chefs. Acquiring these ingre-
dients became easier due to the increase in popularity and smaller packaging made it possible
for many smaller restaurants to experiment with the ingredients.
As more and more restaurants began using modern techniques and ingredients, the
industry adopted the phrase molecular gastronomy to identify this style of cooking. This term
conjures up thoughts of using chemicals in food, yet nothing could be further from the truth.
85
Modern cuisine is a better way to describe this style of cooking. It incorporates ingredients and
different techniques to create food. There are no unnatural additives used; most of the ingre-
dients used are plant-based, with the exception of gelatin, which is animal-based—and these
ingredients are consumed every day.
Basics of Modern Pastry

Getting Started
The correct name for the group of ingredients used for creating modern cuisine is h
ydrocolloids,
a substance that forms a gel in the presence of water. Hydrocolloids bind the water molecules
and affect the texture and viscosity of foods. The most common uses include thickening, gel-
ling, emulsifying, and stabilization. It is important to understand how the ingredients in the
recipe interact with one another. The ability to gel or thicken a product is based on the type of
hydrocolloid, the quantity, the pH of the ingredients, and the temperature of the ingredients.
Equipment
If precision were an ingredient in modern cuisine, it would be the most important part of the
recipe. Many of the recipes throughout this book use small quantities of ingredients that would
be extremely difficult to scale using ounces, and volume is not an accurate way to scale these
ingredients. As a result, it is necessary to use a small gram scale that can measure to 1/100 of a
gram. The more precision used in scaling will yield the most consistent results. The only other
equipment needed is an immersion blender, blender, and probe thermometer. Immersion
blenders and blenders are used to create powders and foams. Probe thermometers can give
accurate readings of solutions and ingredients. Remember that modern cuisine relies greatly
on science and precision to get the correct results.
Additional equipment associated with modern cuisine includes immersion circulators,
vacuum sealers, ISI cream whippers, and dehydrators. An immersion circulator offers a pre-
cisely controlled temperature and is adjustable to 1/10°F (0.05°C). It can be precisely adjusted
to the temperature and circulate the water around the food, ensuring quick and even cooking.
A combi oven can be used in the same way, with very similar results. Set the oven to combi
cooking mode with the temperature needed and 40% steam. Both of these methods provide
accurate cooking temperatures. The precision at which they operate allows for the food to
cook to the proper temperature without overcooking. Whichever of these methods are used,
it is necessary to have a vacuum sealer. The food must be completely sealed in a vacuum bag.
Cooking in this style is referred to as sous vide, which literally translates from French to “under
vacuum.” During the cooking process, this prevents moisture from getting into the food, and
shortens the cooking time. The vacuum bag must be completely free of air. Air is a poor conduc-
tor of heat and prevents the warm water of the immersion circulate from coming into contact
with the food in the vacuum bag. The bag must be sealed and completely vacuumed to allow
the heat to penetrate the food equally from all sides. Vacuum sealers can also be used to com-
press fruits for plated desserts.
One of the easiest techniques to start with when beginning with modern techniques is
making foams. They are a fun way to add flavor and visual texture to a plate. A foam is a frothed
mixture; it can be fruit based, coffee, vanilla, or chocolate—the possibilities are endless. There
are many different ways to create foams—one way is to use an ISI cream whipper with nitrous
oxide (N2O). N2O creates a dense foam similar to shaving cream. Hot or cold foams can be made.
The cream whipper can also be charged with carbon dioxode (CO2). CO2 does not produce a
stable foam but can be used to create customs carbonated sodas for desserts. Fresh fruit, such
86 CH A PT E R 4 Modern Pastry Techniques

FIGURE 4.1 Properly sealed vacuum bag (left) and improperly sealed vacuum bag (right)
as cherries, can also be placed inside the cream whipper and charged with CO2. This infuses the
fruit with CO2; as the fruit is eaten, it fizzes just like soda.
Dehydrators are used to dry out fruits and fruit leathers, and can be used to hold products
at specific temperatures. While cooking cannot be accomplished in a dehydrator, some models
reach high enough temperatures to hold food at safe temperatures. Most of the time, dehydra-
tors are used strictly to dry products or even reduce liquids that do not need to be cooked. Low
temperatures allow extra moisture to evaporate from a fruit purée without overheating and
changing the flavor or color. If a dehydrator is not available, the same results can be achieved
by using a low oven.
Animal-Based Hydrocolloids
Gelatin
It seems hard to believe that gelatin is a hydrocolloid, considering it is readily available in
almost every pastry shop. Gelatin is used to stabilize mousse, create foams, and clarify liquids.
As other hydrocolloids such as carrageenan and agar have become more readily available, the
role of gelatin has decreased. These newer products create firmness in mousses and gels and
provide a texture.
Gelatin is produced through chemically denaturing collagen from the bones, connective
tissue, and skins of pork, beef, or fish. Pork is the primary source for gelatins used in the
pastry kitchen. When processing pork products into gelatin an acid is added to the water to
Animal-Based Hydrocolloids 87
transform the collagen into gelatin. The gelatin is then filtered, purified, and reduced to a pow-
der or sheet form.
Gelatin is easily usable and works in most applications, but there are some areas that need
to be addressed when working with gelatin. One drawback to gelatin is that it is an animal-
product base. Including gelatin in recipes means that a small percentage of the population,
such as vegetarians and individuals with special dietary restrictions or religious beliefs, cannot
eat these products.
There are not many ingredients that inhibit the setting of gelatin. Tannins in tea, salts,
acids, alcohol, and bromelain cause gelatin to lose setting strength. Bromelain is an enzyme
present in many tropical fruits such as pineapple, kiwi, mango, papaya, peach, and guava. How-
ever, if you heat the fruit to 185°F (85°C), it will denature the enzyme and allow the gelatin to set.
Blooming Gelatin
Gelatin must be bloomed prior to use. Blooming gelatin is the process of hydrating the gelatin
in a liquid. Recipes using powder gelatin will also have the amount of liquid to bloom. Typically,
this is 4 parts liquid to 1 part gelatin. Blooming powder gelatin in warm water may cause the gel-
atin to form clumps before hydrating fully, reducing the setting strength. When blooming sheet
gelatin, it is completely covered with cold water until it softens. Some recipes will specify the
amount of liquid to use when blooming sheet gelatin, amount of time, or the weight of the gel-
atin after blooming. It is critical to properly bloom the gelatin. Not following the procedure cor-
rectly can produce a product that is too soft and falls apart or is too stiff and unpleasant to eat.
After the gelatin is bloomed, it must be dissolved over a water bath or carefully in a
microwave. Gelatin is thermoreversible, meaning it can be melted and set repeatedly without
losing any strength. However, use caution when heating gelatin to not boil it, as this will reduce
the setting strength.
When using gelatin, it is important to think about the temperature at which the gelatin will
be served. Food containing gelatin will be firmer at cold temperatures—for example, a plated
dessert served right out of the cooler. An item placed on the buffet will gradually warm to room
temperature. As the temperature increases, the gelatin will begin to soften and lose some of the
structure it had when cold. Consider a small increase in the amount of gelatin when preparing
items that will be served on a buffet. Gelatin melts below body temperature. When eating the
dessert the gelatin melts in the mouth, which adds a desirable mouth feel. The characteristics
of gelatin are what make it great as a way to set desserts.
Bloom Strength
Oscar Bloom is credited with inventing a way to test the strength of gelatin. Bloom strength of
gelatin varies; the higher the number, the stronger the gelatin will set. The bloom strength of
powder gelatin is listed on the packaging or can be acquired through the distributor. The pow-
der gelatin used in this book has a bloom strength of 225.
Sheet gelatin is available in different grades: bronze, silver, gold, or platinum. When sheet
gelatin is used in a recipe it can be scaled by the sheet or by weight. Recipes in this text will
specify sheet gelatin by the piece. Gelatin counted by the sheet can be interchanged between
the different grades without making any quantity changes. The Gelatin Bloom Strengths chart
below states the weights and bloom strength per sheet. Platinum gelatin contains fewer impu-
rities than gold gelatin. A more refined gelatin will not impart any color, flavor, or odor in the
final product. The difference in the sheet weight is mostly impurities. Removing these impu-
rities from the platinum gelatin create a lighter sheet that still has the same setting strength as
a sheet of gold gelatin. The recipes included in this text use gold sheet gelatin.

Gelatin Bloom Strengths
Name Bloom Strength Grams per Sheet

Bronze 140 3.3
Silver 160 2.5
Gold 200 2
Powder 225
Platinum 250 1.7
Gelatin Conversion
It is important to work with both sheet and powder gelatin. The formula below can be used to
adjust between powder and sheet gelatin.
For this example, we need to convert from 10 grams powder gelatin to platinum
sheet gelatin. In the formula the powder will be GelatinA, and platinum sheet gelatin will
be GelatinB.
GelatinB = GelatinA × (Bloom Strength GelatinA/Bloom Strength GelatinB)

The first step is to place the numbers into the formula:
GelatinB = 10 g × (225/250)
Now divide the bloom strengths.
Gelatin B = 10 grams × 0.9
Multiply the weight by 0.9 to get the answer.
GelatinB = 9 grams of platinum sheet gelatin
When calculating the replacement values from powder to sheet, be sure to remember the
answer is in weight, not in sheet count.
Gelatin
Origin Animal collagen

Thermoreversible Yes
Texture Soft gel, melts below body temperature
Clarity Clear
Dispersion Blooms in cold water
Melting Temperature 95°F (35°C)
Setting Temperature 69°F (20°C)
Setting Speed Slow, hours
Promoters Sugar, milk
Inhibitors Alcohol, salt, acid, tannins
Animal-Based Hydrocolloids 89
Plant-Based Hydrocolloids
Agar
Also referred to as agar-agar, the name originates from the Malay language for the red algae
used to produce the agar. Agar has been used in Asia for over 400 years to produce jelly des-
serts. Its discovery was made when red algae was boiled with water. As the liquid cooled, it set
into a firm gel. Today, the agar is extracted much in the same way. After extraction, the agar is
filtered and then freeze-dried and ground into a powder.
Agar is also known as a vegetarian form of gelatin. It can be used to stabilize mousses,
creams, and jellies. When using agar, the powder is added to a cold or hot liquid and heated
to a boil. The gel will set at 105°F (40°C). This is a special property of agar—the high melting
point and low setting point is known as hysteresis. Warming the agar gel back to 185°F
(85°C) will return the jelly to a liquid, that will set again. Products made with agar can with-
stand higher temperatures without melting or weeping. They can even be served hot and
still maintain a gelled consistency. When agar is set, it forms a brittle gel that will not melt
in the mouth.
Agar
Origin Red algae
Texture Heat resistant, brittle
Clarity Semi opaque
Dispersion Cold or hot water
Melting Temperature 195°F (90°C)
Setting Temperature 105°F (40°C)
Setting Speed Fast, minutes
Promoters Sugar, sorbitol and glycerol
Inhibitors Tannic acid
Carrageenan
Carrageenan, like agar, is extracted from red algae. Carrageenan can produce a thickening
effect in a sauce to firm gels. A range of textures in the gels can be achieved from soft and
elastic to firm and brittle. The name comes from the Gaelic term for moss, carraigin. Dating
back more than 200 years, the red algae was boiled in milk, and this mixture thickened into a
custard as it cooled. It wasn’t until the 1930s that carrageenan became an ingredient used by
manufacturers of food.
Carrageenan can be used to increase the viscosity of a liquid, set a custard, suspend parti-
cles, and substitute fat. Soy milk uses carrageenan to create a texture similar to milk; without
this, the soy milk would have a watery consistency. It is also added to milkshakes to create a
thicker mouthfeel. Italian dressing uses carrageenan to suspend particulate in the dressing.
Chocolate milk also benefits from the carrageenan’s ability to suspend particles—without it,
the cocoa solids would settle out of the milk.
Carrageenan can be used as a vegetarian form of gelatin to stabilize mousse and creams.
When using carrageenan, the powder is combined with sugar, then added to the cold liquid.
The mixture is then brought to a boil, poured into molds, and allowed to set.

Carrageenan
Iota Kappa
Origin Red seaweed Red seaweed
Thermoreversible Yes Yes
Texture Soft gel when used with calcium Firm, brittle gel when used with potassium
Clarity Opaque Cloudy
Dispersion Cold water, combine with sugar Cold water, combine with sugar
Melting Temperature 176°F (80°C) 176°F (80°C)
Setting Temperature 158°F (70°C) 158°F (70°C)
Setting Speed Fast, during cooling Fast, during cooling
Promoters Calcium Potassium
Inhibitors N/A Salts
Gellan
Gellan is a unique gum produced by fermenting algae. It is available in two forms: low acyl and
high acyl. Gellan is used to create gels, reduced-sugar jams, baked fillings, and spherifications.
Spherification is the process of shaping liquids into spheres by adding drops of one liquid into
a second solution. It is one of the most flexible hydrocolloids, and can be used with almost any
ingredient regardless of the acidity. It sets quickly, can be easily molded, and does not impart
any flavor.
Modern cuisine is not just about ingredients and procedures. It also incorporates textures
in the experience. Gellan gum has many unique properties. For instance, the texture of the gel
has a unique mouthfeel. Using gellan along with pectin in a fruit filling creates a filling that will
not run when heated, reducing the possibility of running out and burning. The low acyl pro-
duces a firm gel similar to agar and kappa carrageenan, while the high produces a softer gel. As
the gel is broken apart, it feels as if it is going from a solid back to a liquid. High acyl gellan has a
short hysteresis, which makes it suitable for quickly setting products along with gelatin or other
hydrocolloids for fast unmolding.
Gellan
Low Acyl High Acyl

Origin Fermentation of Algae Fermentation of Algae
Thermoreversible No Yes
Texture Brittle gel Elastic gel
Clarity Transparent Opaque
Dispersion Cold water Cold water
Melting Temperature Does not melt 176°F (80°C)
Setting Temperature 140°F (60°C) 158°F (70°C)
Setting Speed Quick set, minutes Quick set, minutes
Promoters Calcium, sodium, potassium, acids N/A
Inhibitors Sodium/calcium salts N/A
Plant-Based Hydrocolloids 91
Lecithin
Lecithin is not technically a hydrocolloid, but it is incorporated in many modern cuisine recipes.
Increased flexibility of this ingredient is due to being a phospholipid—it is able to dissolve in
fats and liquids. It is used primarily for creating foams, as an emulsifier, and to improve the elas-
ticity of bread. Foams, a light airy soap-bubble-like type of sauce, are one of the most popular
techniques and one of the easiest to test.
Lecithin dissolves best in cold solutions. Incorporating excessive quantities of lecithin in a
recipe will not produce a stable foam. When testing, start with smaller quantities and then work
up until the desired foam is achieved. Adding a few drops of fat to a foam will help to create a
stronger foam.
Foams can be either a cold or hot preparation. To foam the mixture, use an immersion
blender and start at the top of the liquid. This will help to incorporate air. As the mixture begins
to foam, move the immersion blender down into the mixture. Allow the foam to rest for a min-
ute before using. This will allow some of the liquid in the foam to settle down to the bottom of
the foam and prevent the foam from bleeding on the plate. Carefully spoon the foam from the
top and add to the dessert.
Lecithin
Origin Soybeans
Thermoreversible N/A
Texture N/A
Clarity N/A
Dispersion Cold liquid or fat
Melting Temperature N/A
Setting Temperature N/A
Setting Speed N/A
Promoters N/A
Inhibitors N/A

FIGURE 4.3a–e Foaming procedure
1. Passion Fruit Purée, lecithin, distilled 2. Sugar and lecithin are added to passion 3. Holding container is at an angle starting
water, sugar, and immersion blender fruit purée and water to foam
4. Foam rests in the container for 3 to 5. Foam is applied to a dessert

5 minutes
Methylcellulose
Methylcellulose is derived from cellulose, the main component of cellulose-rich plant cell
walls. When it is heated, it forms a solid gel—think of a warm panna cotta. As it cools, it
returns to a liquid state, oftentimes referred to as melting. Think of the experience of serv-
ing a warm “ice cream” that turns into a liquid as it cools. This is the opposite of what is
expected to happen. Normally, food softens as it warms, and in the case of ice cream, it
melts when it warms.
Creating warm custards is a fun way to work with methylcellulose, but there are many
practical applications as well. Many baked fillings lose shape as they bake. Methylcellulose can
help to retain the shape of these items while they are heated. In a cold state, methylcellulose
can increase the viscosity of sauces as well as create foams. The foam is prepared when the
liquid is cool. After foaming, the foam is placed in a warm oven, setting the methylcellulose.
Dried overnight, the results are a crisp, light foam.
Methylcellulose
Origin Cellulose-rich plants
Texture Cold—Foams
Hot—Soft elastic gel
Clarity Opaque
Dispersion Hot or cold
Melting Temperature Melts below 140°F (60°C)
Setting Temperature Gels at 140°F (60°C)
Setting Speed Quick, minutes
Promoters Alcohol
Inhibitors Salt
Pectin
Pectin is produced from many fruits—citrus, apples, apricots, and cherries. Apple pomace
and citrus peels account for the majority of pectin used today. Marmalades and jellies
are set with the use of pectin. They are classified into two groups: low methoxyl (LM)
and high methoxyl (HM). Pectin requires additional ingredients, calcium or acid, to act
as jellifiers. Be sure to check the pectin used in the recipe to ensure the desired results
are achieved.
All LM pectins are thermoreversible, can gel in low sugar environments, and require
calcium to set. NH, a subcategory under LM, is used for glazes and fillings. This pectin is
a blend of LM pectin and calcium. HM Pectins are not reversible, need a high percentage
of sugar, and need an acid to set the pectin. These pectins are used for jams, jellies, and
pâte de fruit.
When adding pectin to a recipe, combine it with some of the granulated sugar to prevent
encapsulation. Encapsulation occurs when a fine powdered ingredient is combined with a
liquid. The liquid quickly forms a shell around the dry powder. Once this happens, it is extremely
difficult to break the sphere of dry pectin. This creates lumps in the mixture and reduces the
setting strength due to a reduction in the amount of pectin.

Pectin
Low Methoxyl (LM) High Methoxyl (HM)

Origin Citrus peel and apple pomace Citrus peel and apple pomace
Thermoreversible Yes No
Texture Gel Gel
Clarity Transparent Transparent
Dispersion Cold or hot water Cold or hot water
Melting Yes No
Setting Temperature Varies 140°F (60°C)
Setting Speed Slow Slow
Promoters Calcium Acid, high sugar %
Inhibitors High sugar % N/A
Sodium Alginate
Sodium alginate, a product of brown algae, is used in the spherification process. Almost any
liquid can be used to create spheres of “caviar.” Sodium alginate is added to a flavored liquid
and dropped into a solution of calcium chloride. As the spheres are dropped into the calcium
chloride, the solutions interact and create a membrane around the droplet. For small drops,
30 seconds is adequate to form the membrane. Remove the spheres and rinse under cold
running water to remove any excess calcium chloride. This process continues to transform the
sphere into a solid. After removing from the calcium chloride and thoroughly rinsing, they must
be served immediately to maintain a liquid center.
When working with acidic fruits with a pH lower than 4, sodium citrate can be added to
neutralize the acid. The pH can be tested with paper test strips or a digital meter. Acidic fruit
will cause the sodium alginate to gel prematurely, which makes it difficult to form droplets, as
the mixture will be too thick.
Reverse spherification changes the way the solutions are combined. The flavored liquid
is combined with the calcium chloride and placed into a sodium alginate bath. An immersion
blender is used to combine the alginate and water. As the alginate hydrates, the liquid
becomes viscous and traps small bubbles. To create a smooth, clear sphere, this solution
needs to rest for several hours. Using reverse spherification, larger spheres with liquid center
can be made. When the sphere is removed from the alginate bath, the reaction between the
two solutions stops.
Sodium Alginate
Origin Brown algae

Thermoreversible No
Texture Spherification—Firm, solid gel
Reverse spherification—Firm gel with liquid center
Clarity Clear
Dispersion Cold water
Melting Temperature No
Setting Temperature Independent of temperature
Setting Speed Depends on size; 30 seconds to 5 minutes
Promoters Calcium for gelling
Inhibitors pH less than 4
Tapioca Maltodextrin
Tapioca maltodextrin is a starch that has the ability to absorb oil. Flavorful powders can be
created with any fat-based items. A ratio of 2 parts tapioca maltodextrin to 1 part fat is the rec-
ommended starting point. The liquid fat is streamed into a food processor containing tapioca
maltodextrin. When combined at high speed, the fat is dispersed in small globules; mixing at a
slower rate will cause larger lumps. When eaten, the powder dissolves when it comes in contact
with water in the mouth, leaving the flavor of the fat behind. Tapioca maltodextrin can be used
with olive oil, chocolates, Nutella, butter, caramel, and even bacon fat.
Tapioca Maltodextrin
Origin Tapioca
Thermoreversible no
Texture Dry powder that absorbs fat
Clarity Opaque
Dispersion N/A
Melting Temperature Melts on contact with water
Setting Speed N/A
Promoters N/A
Inhibitors N/A
Xanthan
Xanthan is produced by the fermentation of glucose, sucrose, or lactose. It is most commonly
used as a thickener, foam, and emulsifier. Gluten-free products that contain a large percentage
of water can use Xanthan to help absorb the water. Since xanthan does not need to be heated,
it is an excellent thickener for fruit sauces. It emulsifies the pulp of the fruit with the water and
prevents the sauce from bleeding on the plate. Adding too much Xanthan can create a stringy
texture that is not desirable.
Xanthan
Origin Fermentation of Glucose, Sucrose, or Lactose
Texture High viscosity
Clarity Clear
Dispersion Cold
Melting Temperature N/A
Setting Speed N/A
Promoters N/A
Inhibitors N/A

Gelatin Recipes
Strawberry Water (gelatin clarification)

Portions: 1 1. To bloom the gelatin, sprinkle the gelatin powder on top of the
Portion size: 1 lb 1 oz (540 g) cold strawberry juice.
Yield description: 1 at 1 lb 1 oz (540 g) 2. Allow gelatin to bloom for 15 minutes.
3. Warm to 85°F (30°C). Be careful to not overheat this mixture, as
it will cause the color and flavor to change.
4. Place juice into a hotel pan and place in freezer overnight.
Strawberry Juice 2 lb 3.3 oz 1000 g
5. While still frozen, carefully cut frozen juice into 2 in. (5 cm)
Gelatin Powder 0.26 oz 7.5 g squares; this will yield more juice as the mixture thaws.
Note: To make the strawberry juice, process fresh strawberries through a 6. Line a chinois with rinsed cheesecloth and place the cut juice
juicer. Any fruit juice can be clarified using this method. pieces inside the cheesecloth.
7. Place the chinois into a bain marie and cover with plastic wrap.
8. Allow mixture to thaw under refrigeration for 2 days.
FIGURE 4.2 Gelatin clarification: clarified strawberry juice (left) and strawberry juice (right)
Gelatin Recipes 97
Vanilla Bean Vodka Foam
Yield: 14.1 oz (400 g)

Portions: 1

Vodka 12 oz 340 g
Sugar 2.1 oz 60 g
Gelatin Sheets, bloomed 3 each 3 each
Vanilla Beans, split and scraped 2 each 2 each
Note: After charging the ISI siphon with the carbon dioxide, the container
is under high pressure. Be sure to release all pressure before attempting
to open the siphon.
Procedure
1. Combine all ingredients and warm to dissolve sugar.

3. Place into an ISI siphon and charge with 2 nitrous oxide charges,
shaking between additions.
4. Place in refrigerator for 4 hours.
5. Dispense as needed.

Raspberry Cloud
Yield: 14.1 oz (400 g)

Portions: 1

Raspberry Purée 11.8 oz 335 g
Sugar 2.3 oz 65 g
Procedure
1. Heat 100 g of purée with sugar and gelatin to dissolve sugar.

2. Place remaining 235 g of cold purée in a mixer with a whip
attachment.
3. Turn mixer to high speed and add warmed purée mixture.
4. As the gelatin begins to set, it will incorporate air.
5. Mixture can be used as a loose foam on top of a dessert or refrig-
erated for 4 hours and then shaped into a quenelle for service.
Gelatin Recipes 99
Agar Recipes
Dehydrated Curd Milk Chocolate Agar Mousse

Yield description: 1 at 2 lb 8.8 oz (1164 g) Yield description: 9 portions at 4 oz (113 g)

Lemon Juice 9.5 oz 270 g Milk Chocolate 10.5 oz 300 g
Whole Eggs 9.5 oz 270 g Milk 7 oz 200 g
Sugar 9.5 oz 270 g Sugar 1.75 oz 50 g
Butter, cold and cubed 12.3 oz 350 g Agar 0.28 oz 8g
Agar 0.14 oz 4g Heavy Cream, whipped to 1 lb 1.7 oz 500 g
soft peaks
Procedure
Procedure
1. Combine lemon juice, eggs, sugar, and agar in a heavy-bottom
saucepan and bring to a boil. 1. Melt milk chocolate.
2. Boil mixture for 1 minute while whisking constantly. 2. Mix agar with sugar and then whisk into milk.
3. Pour mixture into a blender and add 2 cubes of butter at a time. 3. Bring milk mixture to a boil and combine with melted chocolate
to make a ganache.
4. Strain through a chinois and refrigerate for 12 hours.
4. Cool ganache to 105°F (40°C) and fold in whipped cream.
5. Mix the curd with a whisk to soften and smooth mixture.
5. Pour into molds and refrigerate.
6. Spread a thin layer on a silpat and dehydrate at 135°F (60°C)
until completely dried.
7. Store in an airtight container.
100 C H A PT E R 4 Modern Pastry Techniques

Bakeproof Raspberry Jam Pliable Ganache

Portion size: 1 lb 13 oz (825 g) Portion size: 2 oz (56 g)
Yield description: 1 at 1 lb 13 oz (825 g) Yield description: 16 portions at 2 oz (56 g)

IQF Raspberries 14.8 oz 420 g Heavy Cream 12.7 oz 360 g
Sugar 14.1 oz 400 g Sheet Gelatin, bloomed 1.5 each 1.5 each
Agar 0.18 oz 5g White Chocolate 15.9 oz 450 g
Distilled Water 1.97 oz 56 g
Sorbitol 3.5 oz 100 g
Procedure Agar 0.14 oz 4g
1. Combine sugar and agar. Glucose 0.14 oz 4g
2. Add sugar mixture to IQF raspberries in a heavy-bottom Salt 0.11 3g

saucepan. Orange Blossom Water 20 drops 20 drops
3. Heat on low until raspberries start to break down.
4. Strain to remove seeds.
5. Return liquid to heat and bring to a boil. Procedure
6. Place in a container and cool; store in refrigerator. 1. Combine heavy cream, distilled water, sorbitol, agar, glucose,
and salt in a heavy-bottom saucepan.
2. Bring to a boil.
3. Pour liquid over chocolate and emulsify.
4. Add gelatin and orange blossom water.
5. Strain through a chinois directly into metal frame 12 × 12 in.
(30 × 30 cm) placed on a silpat.
6. Allow to set at room temperature for 10 minutes; cover with
plastic wrap touching the surface of the ganache.
7. Refrigerate for 4 hours.
8. Cut into desired shape.
Agar Recipes 101

Carrageenan Recipes
Olive Oil Gel Peanut Butter Panna Cotta
Yield: 14.2 oz (405 g) Yield: 1 lb 14 oz (854 g)

Portion size: 1 oz (28.3 g) Portion size: 3 oz (85 g)
Yield Description: 14 portions at 1 oz (28.3 g) Yield Description: 10 portions at 3 oz (85 g)

Extra Virgin Olive Oil 7.05 oz 200 g Heavy Cream 9.5 oz 270 g
Distilled Water 7.05 oz 200 g Milk 9.5 oz 270 g
Iota Carageenan 0.18 oz 5g Peanut Butter 3.5 oz 100 g
Vanilla Bean Paste 0.35 oz 10 g
Sugar 7.1 oz 200 g
Procedure Salt 0.07 oz 2g
1. Bring distilled water to a boil. Iota Carageenan 0.14 oz 4g
2. Whisk in iota carageenan slowly.

3. Using an immersion blender, add oil to water mixture. This
must be done on a low speed to maintain the emulsion. Procedure
4. Pour into silicone molds and refrigerate until set. 1. Combine milk, vanilla paste, sugar, and salt in a blender.
2. While blender is running, add iota carageenan.
3. In a saucepan, combine milk mixture with the cream and bring
to a boil.
4. Use an immersion blender to incorporate peanut butter.
5. Mold immediately and place in the refrigerator for 2 hours.

Chocolate Gel
Yield: 2 lb 4 oz (976 g)
Portions: 17
Portion size: 2 oz (56 g)
Yield description: 17 portions at 2 oz (56 g)

Heavy Cream 12.87 oz 365 g
64% Chocolate 8.82 oz 250 g
Sugar 2.1 oz 60 g
Iota Carageenan 0.028 oz 0.8 g
Kappa Carageenan 0.028 oz 0.8 g
Procedure
1. Bring cream to a simmer.

2. Pour over chocolate, mix to emulsify the ganache.
3. Using an immersion blender, add iota carageenan and kappa
carageenan to distilled water.
4. Heat the water mixture to a boil.
5. Combine water mixture with ganache.
6. Mold into metal rings and refrigerate until set.
Carrageenan Recipes 103

Gellan Recipes
Passion Fruit Cubes Reduced Sugar Strawberry Jam

Yield description: 49 portions at 0.4 oz (11 g) Yield description: 1 at 2 lb 4 oz (1000 g)

Passion Fruit Purée 1 lb 1.6 oz 500 g IQF Strawberries 1 lb 0.87 oz 450 g
Lemon Juice 0.70 oz 20 g Sugar 10.05 oz 285 g
Sugar 0.53 oz 15 g Distilled Water 9.17 oz 260 g
Gellan, Hi-Acyl 0.07 oz 2g Gellan, Hi-Acyl 0.088 oz 2.5 g
Gellan, Low-Acyl 0.07 oz 2g Citric Acid Solution 0.088 oz 2.5 g
Note: Citric acid solution is equal parts citric acid and water.
Procedure
Procedure
1. Combine both hi-acyl and low-acyl gellans and sugar.
2. Heat purée to 115°F (45°C). 1. Pulse frozen strawberries in a food processor to break into
smaller pieces.
3. Whisk in sugar and gellan mixture; bring to a boil.
2. Combine sugar and hi-acyl gellan.
4. Add lemon juice.
3. Whisk sugar and gellan mixture into distilled water.
5. Pour into mold and refrigerate for 2 hours.
4. Add the fruit and bring the mixture to a boil for 2 minutes
6. Cut into desired shapes.
while stirring.
5. Remove from heat, place in mason jars, and seal.

Yogurt Sphere Orange Veil
Yield: 14.1 oz (400 g) Yield: 8.8 oz (227 g)

Portion size: 0.5 oz (14 g) Portion size: 1 oz (28 g)
Yield description: 28 spheres at 0.5 oz (14 g) Yield description: 8 portions at 1 oz (28 g)

Yogurt Sphere Orange Juice 5.29 oz 150 g
Yogurt 14.1 oz 400 g Sugar 1.76 oz 50 g
Milk As needed As needed Distilled Water 0.88 oz 25 g
Yogurt Sphere Bath Gellan, Low-Acyl 0.035 oz 1g
Distilled Water 1 lb 1.6 oz 500 g Gellan, Hi-Acyl 0.035 oz 1g
Gellan, Low-Acyl 0.79 oz 2.25 g Vanilla Bean, split and scraped 2 each 2 each
Sodium Hexametaphosphate 0.0088 oz 0.25 g
Note: The amount of milk will vary, depending on the type of yogurt
used. A thicker Greek yogurt will require more milk than a standard Procedure
yogurt. The goal is to create a fluid that will flow when the sphere
1. Combine dry ingredients.
is broken.
2. Combine dry ingredients, distilled water, and orange juice in a
saucepan using a whisk.
Procedure 3. Warm ¼ sheet pan in the oven. The pan does not need to be
hot. Warming the pan helps to ensure a thin veil when casting.
1. Adjust consistency of the yogurt using milk. If the yogurt is too
stiff, the finished spheres will not flow. The thinner the consis- 4. Bring the mixture to a boil and pour onto the warm ¼ sheet pan.
tency of the yogurt, the better the flow. 5. Refrigerate for 2 hours; cut into desired shapes.
2. Dissolve sodium hexametaphosphate in distilled water, then
add low-acyl gellan.
3. Using a teaspoon, place a spoon of the yogurt mixture into the
yogurt sphere bath.
4. Allow the yogurt to remain in the yogurt sphere bath for
2 minutes.
5. Remove the yogurt and rinse in cold water.
6. Hold in a simple syrup bath (p. 109) for service.
Gellan Recipes 105

Lecithin Recipe
Passion Fruit Foam
Yield: 1 lb 3.4 oz (601.5 g)

Portions: 1
Yield Description: 85 portions at 0.25 oz (7 g)

Passion Fruit Purée 7.94 oz 225 g 37.4
Distilled Water 7.94 oz 275 g 45.7
Sugar 3.53 oz 100 g 16.6
Lecithin 0.053 oz 1.5 g 0.3
Procedure
1. Combine purée, distilled water, and sugar with an immersion

blender.
2. Continue mixing with the immersion blender and sprinkle leci-
thin into the center of the container.
3. Once all lecithin is incorporated, begin lifting immersion blender.
4. After forming the foam, allow it to rest for 3 to 5 minutes (this
will create a more stable foam).
5. Use a spoon to apply the foam to the dessert.

Methylcellulose Recipes
Crispy Raspberry Foam Hot Ice Cream
Yield: 7 oz (200 g) Yield: 1 lb 0.9 oz (487 g)

Yield description: 14 portions at 0.5 oz (14 g) Yield description: 16 scoops at 1 oz (28 g)

Raspberry Water, recipe on page 98 2.47 oz 70 g Hot Ice Cream Base
Sugar 5.29 oz 150 g Cream Cheese 7.05 oz 200 g
Distilled Water 10.23 oz 290 g Butter 1.76 oz 50 g
Methylcellulose 0.56 oz 16 g Sugar 3.53 oz 100 g
Salt 0.07 oz 2g
Vanilla Bean, split and scraped 1 each 1 each
Procedure Distilled Water 4.23 oz 120 g
1. Combine distilled water, raspberry water, and sugar in a bowl. Methylcellulose 0.52 oz 15 g
2. Whisk in methylcellulose. Hot Ice Cream Warming Bath
3. Immediately transfer the mixture to a mixer fitted with a whip. Distilled Water 2 lb 3.3 oz 1000 g
4. Whip on high speed to create the foam, which resembles a stiff Sugar 8.82 oz 250 g
meringue when done. Vanilla Bean, split and scraped 2 each 2 each
5. Spread on a silpat-lined sheet pan 0.75 in. (2 cm) thick.
6. Place in a 150°F (65°C) oven for 12 hours or until completely dry.
7. Store in an airtight container. Procedure
8. Break into desired size pieces. 1. In a blender, combine cream cheese, butter, sugar, salt, vanilla
bean seeds, and salt.
2. Whisk methylcellulose into water and add to blender while
running.
3. Refrigerate the base for 12 hours.
4. Combine distilled water, sugar, and vanilla bean.
5. Heat to dissolve.
6. Reserve for hot ice cream at a temperature of 193°F (90°C).
7. Scoop the Hot Ice Cream base with a #30 portioner.
8. Submerge the scoop into the Hot Ice Cream Warming Bath for
30 seconds. This will set the outside of the hot ice cream, to
help hold its shape.
9. Release the hot ice cream into the warming bath and cook for
an additional 2 minutes.
10. Remove with a perforated spoon and serve.
Methylcellulose Recipes 107

Pectin Recipes
Pectin Fruit Gelee Nut Tuille
Yield: 12 oz (343 g) Yield: 1 lb 1.8 oz (506.5 g)

Portion size: 12 oz (343 g) Portion size: 0.5 oz (14 g)
Yield description: 1 at 12 oz (343 g) Yield description: 32 tuilles at 0.5 oz (14 g)

Fruit Purée 8.8 oz 250 g Sugar 5.29 oz 150 g
Glucose 1.94 oz 55 g Butter 4.41 oz 125 g
Pectin NH 0.12 oz 3.5 g Yellow Pectin 0.05 oz 1.5 g
Sugar 1.23 oz 35 g Glucose 1.76 oz 50 g
Almonds, sliced 5.29 oz 150 g
Pecans, chopped 1.06 oz 30 g
Procedure
1. Combine pectin and sugar.

2. Warm the purée and glucose. Procedure
3. While whisking the purée mixture and add in the sugar/pectin 1. Combine sugar and yellow pectin.
mixture. 2. Place the butter and glucose in a heavy-bottom saucepan and
4. Bring to a boil. heat to melt.
5. Pour into mold and freeze. 3. Add the sugar/pectin mixture to the sauce pan and bring
to a boil.
4. Add the nuts to the mixture and refrigerate.
5. Roll the mixture between two pieces of parchment paper to
1
⁄8 in. (3 mm).
6. Remove the top piece of paper and bake at 375°F (190°C) until
golden brown.
7. Cut into desired shape.

Apricot Glaze Clear Glaze

Portion size: 1 lb 8.4 oz (782 g) Portion size: 1 lb 11.7 oz (787 g)
Yield description: 1 at 1 lb 8.4 oz (782 g) Yield description: 1 at 1 lb 11.7 oz (787 g)

Sugar 7.05 oz 200 g Pectin NH 0.85 oz 24 g
Pectin NH 0.78 oz 22 g Sugar 7.05 oz 200 g
Water 14.11 oz 400 g Water 1 lb 1.6 oz 500 g
Apricot Purée 0.35 oz 100 g Glucose 1.76 oz 50 g
Lemon Juice 0.35 oz 10 g Vanilla Beans, used 2 each 2 each
Glucose 1.76 oz 50 g Orange Zest 0.11 oz 3g
Lemon Juice 0.35 oz 10 g
Note: If glaze is not thick enough, continue boiling for an additional 1 to
2 minutes. If too thick, add water to achieve desired consistency. Note: If glaze is not thick enough, continue boiling for an additional 1 to
2 minutes. If too thick, add water to achieve desired consistency.
Procedure
1. Combine sugar and pectin. Procedure
2. In a heavy-bottom saucepan, combine the water, apricot purée, 1. Combine sugar and pectin.
and glucose. 2. In a heavy-bottom saucepan combine the water, glucose, zest,
3. While whisking the water mixture, add pectin/sugar mixture and vanilla bean.
and boil for 10 minutes. 3. While whisking the water mixture, add pectin/sugar mixture
4. Add lemon juice and strain through a chinois. and boil for 10 minutes.
5. Store in refrigerator. 4. Add lemon juice and strain through a chinois.
5. Store in refrigerator.
Pectin Recipes 109

Sodium Alginate Recipes
Coffee Caviar (spherification)
Yield: 1 lb 1.7 oz (502.5 g) Procedure

Portions: 1 1. Combine coffee with sodium alginate using an immersion
Portion size: 1 lb 1.7 oz (502.5) blender; allow to set for 15 minutes.
Yield description: 1 at 1 lb 1.7 oz (502.5) 2. Combine calcium chloride with distilled water, using a whisk.
3. Using a dropper, deposit small drops of the coffee caviar solu-
tion into the caviar setting bath.
4. After 30 seconds, remove the coffee caviar and rinse with
Coffee Caviar cold water.
Coffee 1 lb 1.63 oz 500 g
Sodium Alginate 0.088 oz 2.5 g
Caviar Setting Bath
Distilled Water 1 lb 1.63 oz 500 g
Calcium Chloride 0.088 oz 2.5 g
FIGURE 4.4a–c
1. Drop the coffee solution into the setting 2. Remove the caviar (step 4) 3. Finished caviar
bath (step 3)

Mango Sphere (reverse spherification)
Yield: 8.6 oz (245 g) Procedure

Portions: 1
1. Combine calcium gluconate with mango purée.
2. Deposit mango purée into desired shape flexipan and freeze.
Yield description: 16 spheres at 0.5 oz (14 g)
3. Combine sodium alginate and sugar.
4. While slowly whisking distilled water, stir in algin mixture.
Ingredients U.S. Metric 5. Allow this to set for 15 minutes and release any bubbles formed
during mixing.
Mango Sphere
6. Combine distilled water and sugar to make the simple syrup
Mango Purée 8.47 oz 240 g
bath.
Calcium Gluconate 0.18 oz 5g
7. Boil to dissolve sugar and cool on an ice bath.
Alginate Bath
8. Submerge frozen purée mixture into alginate bath for
Distilled Water 2 lb 3.3 oz 1000 g 30 seconds.
Sugar 1.76 oz 50 g 9. Carefully transfer the spherified mango from the alginate bath
Sodium Alginate 0.18 oz 5g to a bowl with cold water to rinse.
Simple Syrup Bath 10. After rinsing, the spheres can be held in a simple syrup bath.
Distilled Water 1 lb 5.16 oz 600 g
Sugar 14.11 oz 400 g
Note: The purée used in the sphere can be thickened slightly with a
small amount of xanthan gum. This will vary, depending on the selected
purée or juice.
FIGURE 4.5a–c
1. Deposit purée into a mold (step 2) 2. Place frozen purée mixture into alginate 3. Demonstrating the liquid center of the
bath (step 8) sphere (left); the finished sphere is on
the right
Sodium Alginate Recipes 111

Thin Film
Yield: 8.8 oz (254 g)

Portions: 4
Yield description: 4 at 2 oz (56 g)

Thin Film
Apple Juice 7.05 oz 200 g
Sodium Alginate 0.14 oz 4g
Sugar 1.76 oz 50 g
Thin Film Spraying Solution
Calcium Lactate 0.35 oz 10 g
Procedure
1. Combine sugar and align.

2. Using an immersion blender, combine the sugar/sodium algi-
nate mixture and apple juice. Allow any bubbles to dissipate
before use.
3. Combine calcium lactate and distilled water with whisk and
place in a spray bottle.
4. Pour a thin layer of the apple juice mixture onto a plate.
5. Spray the thin film spraying solution mixture over the plate.
6. Allow 5 minutes for the thin film to set.
7. Microwave in 5-second intervals to evaporate the extra spray.

Tapioca Maltodextrin Recipes
Dry Caramel Nutella Powder
Yield: 9.3 oz (265 g) Yield: 7 oz (200 g)

Yield description: 1 at 9.3 oz (265 g) Yield description: 28 at 0.25 oz (7 g)

Caramel Nutella 4.23 oz 120 g
Sugar 2.10 oz 60 g Tapioca Maltodextrin 2.82 oz 80 g
Glucose 1.96 oz 55 g
Butter 0.56 oz 16 g Procedure
Dry Caramel Powder 1. Combine Nutella and tapioca maltodextrin in a food processor.
Caramel 7.41 oz 210 g 2. Process until mixture resembles coarse cornmeal.
Tapioca Maltodextrin 2.30 oz 65 g 3. Store in an airtight container.
Procedure
1. Combine sugar, glucose, cream, and butter.

2. Over medium heat, cook to 257°F (125°C).
3. Pour onto a silpat and cool completely.
4. Break up caramel into small pieces.
5. Combine broken caramel and tapioca maltodextrin in food
processor.
6. Mix until caramel mixture is absorbed by tapioca maltodextrin.
Tapioca Maltodextrin Recipes 113

Brown Butter Nuggets
Yield: 11.6 oz (330 g)

Portions: 1
Portion size: As desired
Yield description: 1 at 11.6 oz (330 g)*

Brown Butter 8.82 oz 250 g
Tapioca Maltodextrin 2.65 oz 75 g
Salt 0.18 oz 5g
*Note: There is no true way to control the size of the balls; they are
random and meant to be so. Maltodextrin is incredibly light, and even
using an accurate microgram scale, the balls would be difficult to weigh.
Procedure
1. Strain brown butter of all solids, keep warm.

2. Place tapioca maltodextrin in a food processor.
3. Turn on the food processor and stream in brown butter.
4. When a paste forms stop adding the butter.
5. Using your hands, form the paste into small balls.
6. Place on a silpat-lined sheet pan and bake at 375°F (190°C) for
5 minutes.
7. After cooling, store in an airtight container.

Xanthan Recipes
Clear Strawberry Sauce Fruit Sauce
Yield: 10.9 oz (310.7 g) Yield: 11.6 oz (330.2 g)

Yield description: 20 portions at 0.5 oz (14 g) Yield description: 23 portions at 0.5 oz (14 g)

Strawberry Water, recipe on p. 98 8.11 oz 230 g Fruit Purée 10.58 oz 300 g
Sugar 2.82 oz 80 g Trimoline 1.06 oz 30 g
Xanthan Gum 0.025 oz 0.7 g Xanthan Gum 0.007 oz 0.2 g
Note: This sauce does not need to be cooked and maintains the fresh
flavor of the fruit.
Procedure
1. Combine xanthan and sugar.

Procedure
2. Whisk into strawberry water.
1. Combine purée, xanthan, and trimoline with immersion
3. Allow sauce to rest overnight to remove any bubbles.
blender.
Xanthan Recipes 115

Carbonated Coco Gluten-Free Flour Replacer
Yield: 9.9 oz (281 g) Yield: 4 lb 7.2 oz (2020 g)

Portion size: 1.5 oz (42 g) Portion size: 4 lb 7.2 oz (2020 g)
Yield Description: 6 portions at 1.5 oz (42 g) Yield Description: 1 at 4 lb 7.2 oz (2020 g)

Coconut Water 7.05 oz 200 g Potato Starch 1 lb 8.69 oz 700 g
Coconut Rum 1.06 oz 30 g Tapioca Starch 15.87 oz 450 g
Amaretto 0.71 oz 20 g White Rice Flour 15.87 oz 450 g
Sugar 1.06 oz 30 g Brown Rice Flour 7.05 oz 200 g
Xanthan Gum 0.035 oz 1g Nonfat Milk Powder 7.05 oz 200 g
Xanthan Gum 0.71 oz 20 g
Note: After charging the ISI siphon with carbon dioxide, the container is
under high pressure. Be sure to release all pressure before attempting to Note: This formula can be used in place of flour in many recipes. Some
open the canister. slight modifications to the recipe may be necessary, such as increasing
leaveners.
Procedure
1. Combine coconut water, coconut rum, amaretto, and sugar Procedure

with an immersion blender. 1. Combine all ingredients in a food processor and mix until
2. While immersion blender is running, incorporate xanthan gum. combined.
3. Place mixture into an ISI siphon. 2. Store covered at room temperature.
4. Charge twice with carbon dioxide cartridges, shaking between
each addition.
5. Dispense Coco-Cola into glasses and serve immediately.

Summary
Many hydrocolloids are used in small percentages in the recipe. Great the ability of the hydrocolloid to gel. An understanding of basic pastry
care must be taken to accurately scale all ingredients. Follow the pro- techniques, ingredients, and procedure are necessary to produce suc-
cedures included with the recipes. When making adjustments to the cessful results.
recipes, be sure to test carefully, as changes in ingredients can impact
Key Terms
Hydrocolloids Thermoreversible Encapsulation
Foam Hysteresis Reverse spherification
Bromelain Spherification
Blooming Phospholipid

1. How can pH affect spherification? 3. Discuss the difference between low-acyl and high-acyl gellan.
2. What does thermoreversible mean? 4. What is the enzyme in tropical fruits that destroys gelatin?

CHAPTER 5
Creams and Mousses

In 1755, French writer Menon described a drink containing chocolate, boiling water, and beaten
egg as a favorite of King Louis XV. This is the earliest record of a mousse-like dessert being
served. Technology and understanding of ingredients have changed a great deal in the last
400 years. Today, pastry chefs continue to build on these classical desserts and strive to impress
their guests with their creations.
LEARNING OBJECTIVES

1. Identify the temperatures at which egg proteins coagulate.
2. Prepare baked and stirred custards.
3. Explain the difference between a Bavarian, diplomat, mousse, and Chiboust.
4. Describe the three components of a mousse.
5. Differentiate between a pastry cream and crème anglaise.
6. Demonstrate how to temper gelatin for a warm and cold process.
Custard
Custards are one of the fundamental building blocks used in every kitchen. A simple crème
anglaise can be used as a sauce on a plated dessert, as a part of a recipe to create a light and
airy Bavarian, or baked with corn and leeks and served warm as part of an entrée. Custards
provide the pastry chef a base recipe that can be flavored with spices, nuts, fruits, or chocolate;
the possibilities are only limited by the imagination of the chef. Just as flavors are added, new
creations based on these fundamental recipes are being invented.
The Custard Family Tree demonstrates how closely related all of the custards are. By
changing one ingredient, the ratio of ingredients or the process in which they are mixed and
cooked, a completely different product can be made. This chapter focuses on the ingredients,
base recipes, and processes used in making them to further the understanding of the recipes.
Custards are used in all aspects of the pastry kitchen. Mastering them and the versatility they
offer will allow pastry chefs to expand their repertoire of recipes.
Custard is typically classified as a product thickened by the coagulation of egg proteins.
Eggs are an excellent way to set the custard, and can be used to adjust the consistency of the
finished product. Understanding the function of eggs in a recipe and how they interact with the
other ingredients in the recipe will provide insight into how the recipe is executed. Addition-
ally, having a working knowledge of the ingredients will ensure that the final product will be
executed correctly.
119
Non-Egg Egg
Panna Cotta Blancmange Sabayon Milk Curd Cream
Bread Pastry Milk and Crème

Flan
Pudding Cream Cream Brulee
Chiboust Mousseline Diplomat Anglaise
Paris Brest Ice Cream

Cremeux Bavarian
Cream Base
FIGURE 5.1 Custard Family Tree
Egg Tech
Eggs provide structure, color, and flavor to many types of custard. Eggs are a commodity
that is readily available to the chef in a variety of forms, providing ease of use. In the pastry
shop, the egg is used as a whole, as separate parts (white and yolk), or together in a variety of
ratios. By making adjustments to the part(s) of the egg used in a formula, the final product can
be changed.
An egg is composed of approximately 43% yolk and 57% egg white. The yolk is 50% water,
33% fat, and 16% protein; the remaining 1% is lecithin, iron, and color. Fat in the yolk provides
flavor and color to the recipes. It is used when the desired set of the custard is creamy and
soft. The white is 85% water; the remaining 15% is albumin and ovalbumin. The egg white is
typically not used alone in custard recipes, but as part of the whole egg. Custards set with egg
whites tend to be firmer.
Egg proteins coagulate at different temperature ranges. At the lower end of the tempera-
ture range the egg will begin to gel, and as the higher temperatures are reached the white and
yolk will no longer flow. Specific temperatures can be found on the following Egg Coagulation
Temperature table. Gentle cooking of custards will help to achieve the proper texture in the
final product. Baked custards should be placed in a water bath in the oven at 300°F (149°C),
while stirred custards should be cooked over low to medium direct heat or in a double boiler.
Yolk
The Shell Shell Membranes
Chalazae
Air Cell
Inner Thick Albumen

Outer Thin Albumen
(White)
(Egg White)
FIGURE 5.2 Components of an egg
120 C H A PT E R 5 Creams and Mousses

FIGURE 5.3 Properly baked crème brûlée (left) and overbaked crème brûlée (right)
Reducing the intensity of the heat during the cooking process allows proteins to coagulate
at a more even rate. Custards can be easily overcooked while being heated or through carry-
over cooking.
Carryover cooking is not a typical topic discussed in the pastry shop. Custards can easily
become overcooked if they remain in the pan they were cooked in for any additional time. To
avoid overcooked custards, proper mise en place should be followed. Having all equipment in
place and understanding the process will help to prevent this from happening.
When eggs cook for too long or are cooked to a temperature that is too high, syneresis occurs.
Syneresis occurs when the liquid or moisture that is contained with protein molecules is expelled.
As the custard begins to overcoagulate, the proteins begin to shrink as a result of overcooking
and water is released. As the water is released, the final texture becomes coarse and grainy. The
resulting curdled mixture develops a strong egg flavor as well as an unpleasant texture.
Egg Coagulation Temperatures
Low High
Whole Egg 140°F (60°C) 165°F (74°C)
Egg Yolk 149°F (65°C) 158°F (70°C)
Egg White 140°F (60°C) 149°F (65°C)
The temperatures in the Egg Coagulation Temperatures table are for eggs cooked alone.
Several factors, at the control of the pastry chef, can change the coagulation temperature. As
previously mentioned, the intensity of the heat and duration of cooking play a critical role in
the procedure. The concentration of egg product in the recipe can change the coagulation tem-
perature. The addition of ingredients to the eggs can help to lower or raise the coagulation
temperatures Adding sugar, dairy products, or decreasing the amount of egg product results
in an increased temperature. Once dairy products are added, the coagulation temperature
increases to 175°F (80°C). Conversely, increasing the amount of egg in the recipe, or by adding
salt or acids result in coagulation occurring at a lower temperature.
When working with eggs, it is important to follow all local sanitation regulations. Keep
in mind that salmonella is killed instantly when subjected to temperatures of 165°F (74°C) or
higher. As a general rule, custards should be kept for no longer than 3 days under refrigeration.
Custard 121
Stirred Custards
Stirred custards provide a base for the pastry chef to work with; they can be used indepen-
dently or as a part of a recipe. They can be broken down into two groups—those containing
eggs and those without. One thing they all have in common is that they are cooked on the
stove. The final texture of these products is a softer set than their baked counterparts. As the
custard is stirred on the stove, the eggs coagulate. The stirring helps to disconnect the coagu-
lated particles, and make sure the custard cooks evenly. It is recommended that these custards
be cooked in heavy-bottom stainless steel pans to prevent scorching.
1. Egg-based custards rely on coagulated egg proteins to create the texture of the custard:
• Pastry cream
• Crème anglaise
• Curd
2. Non–egg-based custards do not contain any egg product and set with the addition of
gelatin, cornstarch, or agar.
• Cornstarch-based (blancmange)
• Gelatin-bound (panna cotta)
Egg-Based Custards
Eggs provide an excellent thickener for custards, adding to the smooth, creamy richness asso-
ciated with these products. There are some guidelines that can be applied to all egg-based cus-
tards, regardless of the final product. Pans, whisks, and bowls need to be stainless steel. Using
aluminum pans will cause the custard to become gray, due to the whisk scraping the pan and
removing small amounts of aluminum.
Cooking custards properly will help to produce the proper final consistency; key steps
make this easy to achieve. Before tempering, a small amount of the sugar is added to the eggs,
which begins denaturing the egg proteins in preparation of the hot liquid that is to be added.
Tempering is the process of gradually warming the eggs with a hot liquid, and then return-
ing the warmed egg mixture to saucepan to continue cooking. Adding the eggs directly to the
hot pan will cause them to curdle immediately. Once the tempering process is completed,
FIGURE 5.4 When combining eggs and sugar, make sure to properly stir the mixture. Otherwise, the
sugar will begin to coagulate the egg proteins, creating a coarse texture in the custard and reducing
the thickening power of the eggs.

the custard is returned to the heat. At this point, continue stirring the custard even after it is
removed from the heat source. This will prevent overcooking the custard; there is still sufficient
heat in the pan when it is removed from the heat to cause this. After cooking, all stirred custards
need to be strained.
Pastry Cream
Pastry cream is used on a daily basis in the pastry shop. It is made from milk, egg, egg yolk,
sugar, cornstarch, vanilla, and butter, one of the most delicious items and also an interesting
one. A variety of ingredients can be used to flavor pastry cream, including vanilla, chocolate,
liquor, nut pastes, and spices. Taking a look at the pastry cream recipe, two things are clear: The
eggs cannot be cooked over 185°F (85°C), and the cornstarch must be boiled to 212°F (100°C) to
cook out the starch. How can this be?
There is a dual purpose to boiling the pastry cream. In order to produce a smooth, creamy
consistency with good mouthfeel and flavor, the starch must be boiled. Additionally, eggs con-
tain an enzyme called amylase. Amylase will reduce the thickening power of the starch over
time as it destroys the starch. By boiling the cream, the amylase is neutralized.
Pastry Cream Method

1. Combine milk, first sugar, and scraped vanilla bean in a heavy-bottom saucepan and bring
to a boil.
2. In a stainless steel bowl, combine second sugar and cornstarch; mix to disperse cornstarch
in sugar.
3. Add eggs and egg yolks to cornstarch mixture; whisk to combine.
4. Carefully whisk half of the boiling milk into the egg mixture.
5. Continue the tempering process by returning the warmed egg mixture to the saucepan.
6. Return the saucepan to the heat and bring pastry cream to a boil for 2 minutes while whisking
constantly. At this point, the cream can be tasted to ensure all the starch has been cooked out.
7. Remove from the heat and incorporate the butter.
8. Press the pastry cream through a tamis.
9. Place the finished pastry cream into a shallow pan and cover with plastic wrap directly on the
cream to prevent a skin from forming.
10. Place on an ice bath inside the refrigerator.
Crème Anglaise
Crème anglaise, also referred to as English cream, is used as a sauce, base for Bavarian Cream,
crémeux, and ice cream. It can be flavored in many ways similar to pastry cream. One major
difference must be remembered: Crème anglaise is not boiled when cooking. The final temper-
ature of the cooked crème anglaise is 175°F (80°C). A properly cooked crème anglaise will have
the correct viscosity due to fully coagulating the egg proteins.
An overcooked cream will present a curdled texture and strong egg flavor. Although this
is not the desired final product, the cream can be returned to a smooth consistency with an
immersion blender or food processor. In most cases, it is advised to cook the crème anglaise
again, and carefully follow the procedure to avoid overcooking.
Keep in mind that using low to medium heat and constantly stirring will evenly cook the
custard. A higher heat may bring the custard to the correct temperature quicker but as a result
chance of curdling increases. Additionally, the use of thermal circulators and combi ovens pro-
vide another way to cook custards. These methods provide a more controlled cooking process
through closely monitored temperature, ensuring that the cream is not overcooked.
Custard 123
Crème Anglaise Method
1. Combine milk, cream, and half the sugar in a saucepan and bring to a boil.
2. Whisk remaining sugar and egg yolks in a stainless steel bowl.
3. Temper half of the boiling mixture into the egg yolk mixture.
4. Continue the tempering process by returning the warmed egg mixture to the saucepan.
5. While stirring with a heat-resistant rubber spatula, return to a low to medium heat and cook
to 175°F (80°C).
6. Immediately strain through a chinois and place in an ice bath to cool.
Curd
Curds are intensely flavored custards that contain a large percentage of butter, providing
a smooth creamy texture. Typically, strong-flavored acidic fruits are used in curds. They can
include lemon, lime, orange, passion fruit, or mango. The strong acidity of these fruits helps to
balance out the large quantity of butter in the recipe.
Curd Method
1. Combine juice with half the amount of sugar in a saucepan and heat to a boil.
2. Whisk remaining sugar with eggs.
3. Temper all of the boiling juice mixture with eggs.
4. Finish cooking the custard over a double boiler to a temperature of 175°F (80°C).
5. Strain and cool the custard to a temperature of 96°F (36°C).
6. Add the softened butter.
7. Mix with an immersion blender on high for 5 minutes to completely emulsify the curd.
8. Cover with plastic wrap; it’s important that the plastic wrap makes contact with the curd.
Non–Egg-Based Custards
While eggs contribute a great deal to custards, non–egg-based custards provide another recipe
in the repertoire of the pastry chef. The textures of these custards are different from egg-based
ones due to the fact they are set with gelatin, cornstarch, or carrageenan (see Chapter 4). In
addition to differing textures, different flavors can be achieved. The richness of custard comes
from the eggs; color and flavor change from the eggs. Custards without the addition of eggs tend
to be white in color and have a stronger dairy flavor. They also tend to be lighter in mouthfeel
as a result of decreased fat in the recipe. Non–egg-based custards also provide an alternative
to customers with egg allergies or an increased sensitivity to eggs.
Blancmange
Blancmange is a custard set using cornstarch, and in some cases, carrageenan is used. The
earliest record of blancmange was in the Middle Ages, and its origin is difficult to locate. It was
served to royalty during festive occasions, colored with very intense colors. Served in today’s
restaurants, it would be left its original color and garnished with colorful berries. The flavor of
the blancmange is lightly sweet with a mild dairy flavor.

Panna Cotta
The name translates from Italian to “cooked cream.” In recent years, panna cotta has seen an
increase in popularity on restaurant menus. It is a light dessert perfect for summer, as a layer
inside an entremets or on a buffet. Milk, cream, sugar, vanilla bean, and gelatin are warmed just
to dissolve the sugar and gelatin, strained, and chilled in the refrigerator.
Baked Custards
There are many items used in the pastry shop that can be included under baked custards: crème
brûlèe, flan, bread pudding, and cheesecake. These items can prove challenging in determin-
ing doneness, it is through practice and understanding the process it can be simplified. Unlike
stirred custards, baked custards eggs coagulate in the oven. As the egg coagulates, a firmer tex-
ture is created due to the fact they are not disturbed during coagulation.
Ingredients
Baked custards contain dairy products, egg, sugar, and flavorings. Some may contain other
items such as large quantities of bread in bread pudding. Changing the ingredients will impact
the consistency and flavor of the final product.
Crème brûlée is characterized by a soft, creamy texture. The use of heavy cream and egg
yolks are used to achieve this. Adjusting the recipe to include whole eggs in place of some of
the yolk will result in the crème brûlée having a firmer texture. The additional egg white will
produce a firmer setting custard. In the same recipe if we remove a portion of the cream and
replace it with milk, the final product will be firmer. The crème brûlée may almost start to rep-
resent the texture of flan, having the ability to be unmolded.
If the consistency of a custard is too firm or soft, refer to the Adjusting Custard Consis-
tency table below. Slight changes in the quantity or type of ingredient used will change the
final texture of the custard. Softening a custard can be done by decreasing the amount of egg,
changing the type of egg product to egg yolk, or replacing milk with cream. The custard can be
made firmer by increasing the quantity of egg, replacing the egg in the recipe with whole eggs
or egg whites, or replacing heavy cream with milk. Slight changes in the ingredients will have a
significant impact on the final product. When testing new formulations, only change one ingre-
dient at a time. This will make it easier to identify what ingredient change provided the correct
final result.
Adjusting Custard Consistency
Softer Firmer
Decrease egg product Increase egg product
Egg Yolks Whole eggs
Heavy Cream Egg whites
Milk
Baking Procedure
Baked custards are delicate items that need the same care and attention that is given to stirred
custards. A gentle cooking process is used to be certain that the custard is cooked evenly
throughout. Baked custards should be baked at a temperature no higher than 300°F (149°C) in
Baked Custards 125

a water bath. A larger-size container may require a lower baking temperature. The water bath
helps to insulate the custard; this slows down the heat transfer and prevents the custard from
overcooking on the outer edges.
Tools available to the chef continue to improve, providing the pastry chef more control
to save time and produce a consistent product. A combi oven is an excellent tool to assist in
the baking of custards. These ovens are convection ovens that can cook in a dry, moist, or
combination method. Custards baked in a combi oven can be baked faster and more evenly.
A lower baking temperature and a small amount of steam is used to help transfer the heat in the
oven into the custard. If using a combi oven to prepare baked custards, set the oven in combi
mode and reduce fan speed. Bake the custard in a water bath as you would in a conventional
oven at 250°F (121°C) and 20% steam with a reduced fan speed.
Testing for Doneness

Time can give us an estimate of when the custards will be done, but many other factors play
into time. The best way to check a custard is by sight or feel. When using sight, consider how
the heat transfers into the custard. The heat coagulates the eggs from the edge of the pan or
ramekin and works in toward the center.
A gentle tap on the side of the container will show how set the custard is. The custard
should wiggle slightly and stop, this is referred to as the wiggle test. A good way to think about
this is a calm swimming pool. If the custard is not set, it will ripple in waves, similar to the
way the water would move if a rock were thrown into it. When performing the wiggle test,
the custard may appear to be solid on the edge and only ripple in the center. This indicates that
the custard is baking and only the center needs to cook.
In some instances, such as a cheesecake or bread pudding, the test can be performed by
touch or sight. By gently touching the cheesecake it should feel soft, but firm. If the cake has a
liquid-like movement when pressed, the center is not baked. Use caution when testing using
touch, as these products are hot. Sight is the preferred method for testing, while touch can be
helpful along with the visual. Remember, during the baking process our ingredients undergo
many changes. Sugars become liquids and fats become more fluid, as the custard cools the
fats and sugars solidify and become firm again. A properly baked custard will still feel soft to
the touch.
Overbaked custards provide some signs that something went wrong. When checking the
custards, they should appear smooth. Bubbling along the edge and not set in the middle is an
indication that the oven temperature was too high or the baking time was too long. The egg
proteins are overcoagulated; the results will be a curdled watery custard. Cheesecakes differ
slightly; normally, boiling is not noticed, as this custard is much thicker. The cheesecake will
begin to rise as it bakes due to the creation of steam inside the cake. When the cake cools and
the steam dissipates, the cake collapses. There is no structure inside the cake to hold it up; this
will give the cake a grainy, dry texture and large cracks across the top.
Types of Baked Custards

Crème Brûlée
Crème brûlée translates from French to “burnt cream.” Simple ingredients are combined with
careful preparation to create this famous creamy, rich custard. After the custard is baked and
cooled, a thin coating of sugar is placed on top and burned under a broiled or with a torch.
A warm, crispy, caramelized sugar layer on top of a cold, creamy custard, providing textural and
temperature contrasts in one dish.
Preparing the crème brûlée custard is almost identical to the crème anglaise method. In
the crème brûlée method, the warmed cream is added to the eggs to start the cooking process
and help the custard to cook more evenly when it is placed in the oven.

Crème Brûlée Method
1. Combine half the sugar with the heavy cream and scraped vanilla bean in a heavy-bottom
saucepan and heat to a boil.
2. Add remaining sugar to the egg yolks and whisk to combine.
3. Temper all of the boiling cream mixture into the egg yolks.
4. Strain through a chinois and fill ramekins.
5. Bake in a water bath 300°F (149°C).
Flan
Flan, also referred to as crème caramel, is a firmer custard baked with caramelized sugar in
the ramekin. The caramelized sugar adds color to the top of the custard when it is unmolded,
as well as producing a sauce as the caramel dissolves in the ramekin. The traditional flavor of
flan is vanilla. However, chocolate, spices, and even fruit purées can be added to the custard
to customize the flavor. Flan or a closely related variety can be found in most every country
throughout the world.
The use of evaporated milk and sweetened condensed milk in the formula produces
a style of flan that is traditional in Latin American countries. Some formulas contain milk and
sugar and produce an even firmer custard. In the case of a milk-based flan formula, the sugar
and caramel can be removed to produce a savory custard or royale, which can be used to
garnish consommé or an entrée.
Wet Caramel Method

1. Place water in saucepan; add sugar and corn syrup. Make sure the sugar is in the water but do
not stir. Stirring causes sugar crystals to form on the side of the pan. If crystals do form, use a
brush and cold water to clean the sides of the pan.
2. Heat over high heat until sugar caramelizes.
3. Immediately shock the pan in an ice bath.
4. Pour caramel into ramekins and allow to cool completely.
Flan Method
1. Combine evaporated milk, sweetened condensed milk, eggs, and flavorings in a bowl and mix
until combined.
3. Fill ramekins in a hotel pan.
5. Store in refrigerator overnight.
6. Unmold for service.
Baked Custards 127

Bread Pudding
Bread pudding is custard that many can identify with. Originally, it provided an excellent
way to use old bread that would be otherwise thrown away. In an effort to find new ways to
reinvent this classic dessert, pastry chefs have turned to using croissants, Danish, and even
donuts to add a twist to the familiar flavor. Other ingredients such as chocolate chips, fruit, or
toasted nuts can be used for additional flavors and textures. Reducing the sugar and adding
cheese, dried fruits, vegetables, and even foie gras can be used to create savory applications
for bread pudding.
Bread Pudding Method

1. Combine milk, sugar, eggs, and flavorings.
3. Combine with bread.
4. Allow this mixture to rest for 4 hours under refrigeration, allowing the bread to absorb
the custard.
5. Fill containers and wrap in plastic wrap covered in foil; steam to a temperature of 175°F (80°C).
6. Remove plastic wrap and bake at 400°F (205°C) for 7 to 10 minutes to crisp top of pudding
slightly.
Cheesecake
Cheesecake is found in bakeries and menus at restaurants around the world. In the United
States, cheesecake is made with cream cheese, in France it is be made with fromage blanc,
and ricotta is used in Italy. Each of these cheeses has a distinct flavor and texture. The flavor of
cheesecake is easily recognizable; it can be served as simple as a slice of vanilla cheesecake or
can be used as a layer in a dessert.
Technique can be used to make a good cheesecake great. Room temperature cream
cheese mixes best. Avoiding lumps during mixing will also ensure a smooth consistency.
Lumps in the cheesecake will be noticeable once the cake is baked a sliced, the lumps will
not be mixed as evenly with the eggs. This will give them a lighter color compared to the
rest of the custard. Be sure to mix the custard on low at all times to avoid incorporating air
into the mix.
A dense, creamy cheesecake has an excellent mouthfeel. Additional air in the mix cre-
ates steam during the baking process and causes the cheesecake to rise. As the cake cools, the
steam dissipates and the custard will shrink and possibly crack. This lighter airy texture also
makes it more difficult to determine when the cheesecake is finished baking.
Cheesecake Method
1. Using a paddle attachment, mix cream cheese on low.
2. Add half the amount of sugar to the cream cheese.
3. Mix for 2 minutes and scrape the bowl and attachment.
4. Add remaining sugar mix for 2 more minutes and scrape.
5. Slowly add eggs, stopping to scrape the bowl three times while adding all the eggs.
6. Fill pans and bake in a water bath 300°F (149°C) until done.
Note: If batter is lumpy, a food processor or immersion blender can be used.

Mousse and Creams
The light and airy texture of a mousse is in direct contrast to the dense, creamy custards previ-
ously discussed. Building on a base recipe with the addition of an ingredient such as whipped
cream, or another recipe such as an Italian meringue, simple pastry cream can be transformed
into a diplomat cream or chiboust.
Bases
Bases are used as a starting point for assembling a mousse or cream. Crème anglaise, pastry
cream, ganache, curd, and fruit purée can all be used as a base. These bases can be used alone
or in a combination together. Ganache is an example of this. A ganache is a fat-in-water emul-
sion created when a liquid is combined with chocolate. In the most common form, ganache is
cream and chocolate; for some mousse bases, an anglaise-based or fruit purée ganache can be
used. More information can be found on ganache in Chapter 13, “Chocolate Work.”
Emulsion Improper Emulsion
Cocoa butter Milk fat

Cocoa solid Water
FIGURE 5.5 An emulsion is a fine dispersion of

two or more ingredients that under normal condi-
tions do not mix. Emulsions can be either fat in
water or water in fat.
Aerators
The final texture of a mousse should be light and airy. This can be achieved through the use of
egg foams and whipped cream. Some applications use both, while others use one. The aerators
can impact the flavor, consistency, and stability of the mousse.
Whipped Cream
The most basic form of chocolate mousse can be made with sweetened whipped cream and
chocolate. Whipped cream is the most common aerator and can be found in most mousses and
creams. When whipping cream, air is trapped between fat particles. The optimal temperature
for whipping cream is 40°F (5°C). Creams with lower fat percentage whip best; 30% fat is ideal.
Higher-fat creams can whip to a stiffer consistency, but are more prone to overwhipping. The
additional fat will also reduce the intensity of flavors, as the fat coats the mouth.
Properly whipped cream is doubled in volume with soft peaks. As the cream is whipped,
the fat particles grow into larger clusters. Proceeding to whip the cream past stiff peaks will
cause more of the fat particles to bind together; extremely overwhipped cream will result in a
complete separation of fat from liquid.
Mousse and Creams 129

FIGURE 5.6 Underwhipped cream (left), properly whipped cream (center), and overwhipped cream (right)
Continuing to whip the cream will produce a stiffer cream with no additional gain in vol-
ume. Cream that has very stiff peaks will be difficult to fold into the mousse, and it runs the risk
of overmixing during the making of the mousse. Properly whipped cream will give the mousse a
stable volume and correct final texture. If cream is whipped and left to sit before use, the fat and
liquid will begin to separate. The heavier liquid will settle on the bottom, with the lighter fat on
top. Be sure to whisk for a short time to make sure the cream is whipped properly before using.
Egg Foams
Egg foams are used in a similar way as cream to lighten the mousse. The part of the egg used
and how we treat the eggs will impact the final texture. Eggs can add flavor, richness, volume,
and texture to a mousse. Common egg foams found in mousse and creams are French meringue,
Italian meringue, and pâte à bombe. A meringue is a mixture of egg white and sugar. Ovalbumin
and albumin are proteins found in egg whites that are whipped and can be stabilized to main-
tain the volume they have gained during whipping. Ovalbumin is the protein in egg whites that
coagulates when heated, making the meringue resistant to collapsing and creating a crispy
texture. Albumin is the protein found in egg whites that creates a stable foam when whipped.
Mousse prepared using a meringue will have a lighter consistency compared to using
the pâte à bombe. The albumin in the egg white allows the meringue to increase up to eight
times the original volume. However, an uncooked meringue is extremely fragile. Cooking the
meringue, creating a Swiss or Italian meringue, will produce a foam that is more stable and
slightly denser due to the increased amount of sugar. Pâte à bombe will roughly double in size.
Pâte à bombe is a mixture of whipped egg yolks and cooked sugar. The sugar is cooked to 248°F
(120°C) and added to the whipped yolks, transforming the mixture into a creamy, airy mass.
These three foams not only affect texture and flavor but also how the mousse is going to be
used and can also play a factor in which egg foam or recipe should be used. French meringue
has the ability to add lightness to a mousse, but it is not a stable foam, nor has it been cooked.
Salmonella and other microorganisms may be present in the uncooked egg whites. It is recom-
mended to use pasteurized egg whites when making a French meringue that will not undergo
any additional cooking to reduce this risk. Italian meringue and pâte à bombe are both fully
cooked and provide the most stable forms of egg foams.
Italian meringue is mostly used in Chiboust and fruit mousses. The meringue provides
lightness to the mousse, and gives a creamy mouthfeel. Fruit purées have a light flavor that is
enhanced by the meringue. Pâte à bombe is occasionally used in fruit mousse. The egg yolks
contribute a flavor and richness that does not work well with some lighter flavored fruits. Fruit
purées also have a delicate color that the pâte à bombe may cover up or wash out. Some stron-
ger flavored fruit mousses may benefit from the use of a pâte à bombe.

Pâte à bombe is typically used in chocolate mousse, the richness and flavor pair well with
the chocolate. Color is not an issue due to the deep color of the chocolate. In some instances, a
French meringue can be used in a chocolate mousse to lighten the mousse slightly. Due to the
French meringue’s lack of stability, it is best suited in applications where the mousse would be
served in a glass or other dish.
Stabilizers
Mousses and creams are fragile recipes that need some sort of a stabilizer to maintain their
structure. Whether they are served in a container or as cake on a buffet, the fat and waters
inside must be stabilized. This can be done with the use of cocoa butter, gelatin, or agar. Addi-
tional information on gelatin and agar can be found in Chapter 4.
Tempering Gelatin
1. Bloom gelatin.
• Sheet gelatin is bloomed in ice water for 15 minutes.
• Powder gelatin is bloomed in liquid specified in recipe, if no liquid is specified, then use
4 times the weight of the gelatin in water for 5 minutes.
2. Dissolve gelatin.
• Warm process such as Bavarian cream—add gelatin to warm anglaise.
• Cold process such as fruit mousse—warm over a double boiler.
3. Add 10% of mousse mixture to dissolved gelatin.
4. Warm to 100–105°F (38–40°C).
5. Return warmed gelatin mixture to mousse.
Whether the mousse is stabilized with cocoa butter or gelatin there are visible signs that
show the process was done correctly. The mousse should appear free of lumps and smooth.
Chocolate mousse should be smooth, shiny, and elastic after the chocolate is added. This is evi-
dence that the cocoa butter was the proper temperature and has not crystallized during the mix-
ing process. When working with stabilizers, special attention must be paid to the temperatures
of these products, the quantity in the recipe and the process of tempering them into the recipe.
FIGURE 5.7 Proper incorporated gelatin (left); improper incorporation (right)

Mousse Methods
Pâte à Bombe Method

1. Whip egg yolks on high speed for 5 minutes. 5. Fold whipped cream and pâte à bombe together.
2. Combine water and sugar in a saucepan and cook to 248°F 6. Melt chocolate to 110°F (43°C).
(120°C). 7. Fold chocolate into whipped cream mixture.
3. Carefully pour sugar syrup into whipping yolks and allow
to cool.
4. Whip cream to soft peaks.
FIGURE 5.8a–d
1. Adding the sugar to the water 2. Sugar boiling in the pan (note that the sides of
the pan are clean)
3. Pan that has been stirred (crystals form on the 4. Washing the side of the pan with a clean brush
side of the pan) and cold water

FIGURE 5.9 Final dark chocolate mousse with chocolate incorporated: too cool (left), just right (center), too warm (right)
Anglaise-Based Method
1. Prepare a crème anglaise and strain into half-melted chocolate.
2. Add purée or liquor to ganache and cool to 105°F (41°C).
4. Fold cream into ganache.
Fruit Mousse Method

1. Bloom gelatin.
2. Prepare an Italian meringue.
4. Fold cream, purée, and meringue together.
5. Temper gelatin into mousse.
Bavarian Method
1. Bloom gelatin.
2. Prepare a crème anglaise; add gelatin to dissolve.
4. Cool crème anglaise to 75° to 85°F (24° to 29°C).
5. Fold in whipped cream.
Chiboust Method
1. Bloom gelatin.
2. Prepare a pastry cream.
3. Add gelatin to warm pastry cream base; cover and reserve.
4. Prepare an Italian meringue.
5. When meringue is cooled, fold into pastry cream base.
Diplomat Method
1. Prepare a pastry cream and cool completely.
2. Bloom gelatin.
4. Soften pastry cream and fold in whipped cream.
5. Temper gelatin using the cold process.

Troubleshooting for Custards, Mousses, and Creams
Stirred custard is slightly curdled. 1. Heat of the stove was too high; reduce heat on stove and cook slower.
2. Thermometer is not calibrated; recalibrate thermometer.
Pastry cream appears curdled and greasy. Cooked over too high of a heat or mixture boiled too long after eggs were added; reduce
heat and cook less.
Baked custard is curdled on the edges. 1. Custard is overcooked; reduce oven temperature.
2. Water bath was not high enough or evaporated during baking; make sure that the
water bath is high enough.
Only have a convection oven to work with and The convection fan has dried out the top of the custard. Bake the custard in a hotel pan
the custard is forming a skin. covered in foil; this will prevent the skin from forming.
Bavarian looks curdled and broken after The mixture was overmixed; the gelatin structure that formed was broken by mixing.
folding in cream.
Chocolate mousse has a gritty mouthfeel. 1. Chocolate was not at the correct temperature before folding in the cream. Melted
chocolate needs to be warmed to temperature specified in the recipe.
2. Chocolate was not folded into the cream mixture fast enough. Incorporate the cream
into the chocolate faster or increase chocolate temperature by a few degrees.
Gelatin stabilized mousse has lumps. 1. The gelatin powder was not completely hydrated; bloom gelatin properly.
2. The gelatin was not completely melted; dissolve gelatin properly.
3. The temperature of gelatin and 10% mousse base was not heated high enough;
increase temperature by 2 degrees above the temperature in the recipe.

Recipes
Chocolate Mousse (Pâte à Bombe) Chocolate Mousse (Anglaise Based)
Yield: 3 lb 4 oz (1479 g) Yield: 4 lb (1840 g)

Portion size: 4 oz (113 g) Portion size: 4 oz (113 g)
Yield description: 13 portions at 4 oz (113 g) Yield description: 16 portions at 4 oz (113 g)

Egg Yolks 5 oz 143 g Milk 6.7 oz 190 g
Sugar 5 oz 143 g Heavy Cream 6.7 oz 190 g
Water 1.3 oz 38 g Sugar 1.4 oz 40 g
Dark Chocolate 58%, melted 1 lb 0.9 oz 480 g Egg Yolks 2.8 oz 80 g
Heavy Cream, whipped to soft peaks 1 lb 9.1 oz 713 g Bittersweet Chocolate 1 lb 2 oz 510 g
Rum 1.8 oz 50 g
Heavy Cream, whipped to soft peaks 1 lb 11.5 oz 780 g
Procedure
Note: The rum can be replaced with fruit purée or other liquor.
1. Pâte à bombe method on page 132.
Procedure
Variation
1. Anglaise-based method, on page 133.
Milk or White Chocolate Mousse
Milk and white chocolate can be substituted in place of the dark
chocolate.

Milk Chocolate or White 1 lb 9.2 oz 715 g
Chocolate 33%, melted
Recipes 135
Fruit Mousse White Chocolate Coconut Mousse

Portions: 12 Portions: 11–19

Fruit Purée (see note) 1 lb 454 g Coconut Purée 10.6 oz 300 g
Egg Whites 6 oz 170 g White Chocolate 8.5 oz 240 g
Sugar 12 oz 340 g Powder Gelatin 0.5 oz 15 g
Water 3 oz 85 g Water #1, cold 2.1 oz 60 g
Gelatin Sheets, bloomed 8 each 8 each Egg Yolk 3.6 oz 102 g
Heavy Cream, whipped to 1 lb 454 g Sugar 3.6 oz 102 g
medium peaks
Water #2 1 oz 27 g
Heavy Cream, whipped 1 lb 2.1 oz 515 g
Note: Use any fruit purées, excluding orange, blood orange, lemon, lime, to soft peaks
or passion fruit.
Procedure Procedure
1. Fruit mousse method on page 133. 1. Bloom powder gelatin in cold water #1.
2. Make a pâte à bombe with egg yolks, sugar, and water #2.
3. Heat coconut purée and combine with white chocolate to make
a ganache.
4. Add gelatin mixture to warm ganache and emulsify; reserve
ganache at 90°F (32°C).
5. Fold cooled pâte à bombe and whipped heavy cream together.
6. Fold ganache mixture into whipped cream mixture.

Citrus Mousse Vanilla Mousse

Yield description: 17 portions at 4 oz (113 g) Yield Description: 16 portions at 4 oz (113 g)

Curd (p. 139) 1 lb 3.8 oz 560 g Egg Yolks 14.1 oz 400 g
Gelatin Sheets, bloomed 4 each 4 each Sugar 12.3 oz 350 g
Egg Whites 4.5 oz 128 g Water 3.5 oz 100 g
Sugar 9 oz 256 g Vanilla Beans, split 2 each 2 each
and scraped
Water 2.3 oz 64 g
Heavy Cream, whipped 2 lb 8.6 oz 1150 g
Heavy Cream, whipped 2 lb 3 oz 1000 g
to medium peaks
to medium peaks
Note: Orange, blood orange, passion fruit, lemon or lime curd can be
used in this recipe. Note: Cook pâte à bombe syrup with vanilla beans; remove before
adding sugar to the whipping yolks.
Procedure
Procedure
1. Fruit mousse method on page 133.
1. Make a pâte à bombe with sugar, water, vanilla beans, and egg
yolk.
2. Fold cooled pâte à bombe and whipped cream together.
3. Temper in gelatin.
Recipes 137
Passion Fruit Chiboust Diplomat Cream


Passion Fruit Purée 7 oz 200 g Pastry Cream (p. 140) 1 lb 454 g
Heavy Cream 8.8 oz 250 g Heavy Cream, whipped 1 lb 454 g
to medium peaks
Egg Yolks 7 oz 200 g
Gelatin Powder 0.5 oz 14 g
Sugar 3.5 oz 100 g
Water, cold 2 oz 57 g
Cornstarch 1.8 oz 50 g
Procedure
Sugar 10.6 oz 300 g 1. Diplomat method on page 133.
Water 2.8 oz 80 g
Note: The Italian meringue in this recipe has a lower percentage of sugar,
which can lead to overwhipping the meringue. To prevent this after the
sugar is added turn the mixer to the lowest setting to cool the meringue.
Praline Mousseline
Procedure
1. Chiboust method on page 133. Portions: 26
Variation
Vanilla Chiboust
Replace passion fruit purée with milk and add vanilla bean. Ingredients U.S. Metric
Pastry Cream (p. 140) 1 lb 454 g
Praline Paste 12 oz 340 g
Milk 7 oz 200 g
Butter, soft 1 lb 8 oz 680 g
Note: When the cold pastry cream is added to butter, it will cause
the mixture to break. Continue mixing until the ingredients come
back together.
Procedure
1. Whip butter and praline paste with a paddle attachment.

2. Slowly add pastry cream.
3. Mix until mixture is light and fluffy.

Vanilla Bavarian Buttermilk Panna Cotta
Yield: 3 lb (1360 g) Yield: 2 lb 7.5 oz (1119 g)

Yield Description: 12 portions at 4 oz (113 g) Yield description: 13 portions at 3 oz (85 g)

Milk 9.2 oz 260 g Heavy Cream 1 lb 454 g
Heavy Cream 9.2 oz 260 g Granulated Sugar 6 oz 170 g
Vanilla Bean, split and scraped 2 each 2 each Vanilla Bean, split and scraped 1 each 1 each
Sugar 7.1 oz 200 g Gelatin Powder 0.5 oz 14 g
Egg Yolks 3.5 oz 100 g Water, cold 2 oz 56 g
Gelatin Sheets, bloomed 7 each 7 each Buttermilk 15 oz 425 g
Heavy Cream, whipped to medium peaks 1 lb 3 oz 540 g
Note: To make a fruit-flavored Bavarian, replace the milk with purée. Add
the purée after the crème anglaise has been cooked to avoid altering the
Procedure
flavor of the purée.
1. Bloom gelatin in water.
2. Combine heavy cream, sugar, and vanilla bean in a saucepan
Procedure and heat to dissolve sugar.
1. Bavarian method on page 133. 3. Add gelatin mixture, and cool to 98°F (36°C).
2. Pour into molds and freeze. 4. Add buttermilk and strain through a chinois.
5. Pour into molds or glasses and refrigerate for 4 hours.
Citrus Curd
Portions: 12

Eggs 5.8 oz 165 g
Sugar 6.7 oz 190 g
Citrus juice or purée 4.7 oz 132 g
Butter, soft 8.7 oz 247 g
Note: Mango, passion fruit, lemon, lime, or orange can be used to

flavor the curd.
Procedure
1. Curd method on page 124.
Recipes 139
Flan Pastry Cream

Yield description: 12 portions at 4 oz (113 g) Yield Description: 12 portions at 2 oz (56 g)

Flan Custard Milk 1 lb 454 g
Evaporated Milk 1 lb 10 oz 737 g Sugar #1 2 oz 56 g
Sweetened Condensed Milk 14 oz 396 g Egg Yolks 1.25 oz 35.4 g
Eggs 12 oz 340 g Whole Eggs 1.75 oz 50 g
Vanilla Paste 0.5 oz 14 g Cornstarch 1.25 oz 35.4 g
Flan Caramel Sugar #2 2 oz 56 g
Sugar 1 lb 454 g Butter 1 oz 28 g
Corn Syrup 2 oz 56 g Vanilla Bean, split and scraped 1 each 1 each
Water 4 oz 113 g
Procedure
Procedure 1. Pastry cream method on page 123.
1. Prepare Flan Caramel using the wet caramel method, p. 127.
2. Pour the caramel into 13 ramekins.
3. Prepare the Flan Custard using the flan method on p. 127.
Vanilla Cremeux
Crème Brûlée Yield: 1 lb 3 oz (551 g)

Portions: 9
Portions: 13 Ingredients U.S. Metric
Milk 7 oz 198 g
Cream 7 oz 198 g
Ingredients U.S. Metric Egg Yolks 3.3 oz 93 g

Sugar 2.2 oz 62 g
Heavy Cream 2 lb 907 g
Gelatin, bloomed 3.5 sheets 3.5 sheets
Sugar 8 oz 226 g
Procedure
Procedure 1. Crème anglaise method on page 124.

2. Add bloomed gelatin before straining.
1. Crème brûlée method on page 127.

Eggless White Chocolate Cremeux Coconut Rice Pudding


Milk 7 oz 200 g Jasmine Rice 6 oz 170 g
Lemon Zest 0.4 oz 10 g Milk 1 lb 8 oz 680 g
Glucose 0.4 oz 10 g Coconut Purée 8 oz 227 g
Gelatin, bloomed 3 each 3 each Eggs 6 oz 170 g
White Chocolate 12 oz 340 g Sugar 4 oz 113 g
Heavy Cream 14.1 oz 400 g Vanilla Bean, split and scraped 1 each 1 each
Heavy Cream 8 oz 227 g
Procedure
1. Melt white chocolate and add glucose. Procedure
2. Combine milk and zest; bring to a simmer. 1. Combine milk and purée in a heavy-bottom saucepan and
3. Add milk to chocolate mixture. bring to a boil.
4. Add heavy cream and emulsify with immersion blender. 2. Add jasmine rice and cover.
5. Strain through a chinois and refrigerate for 6 hours before using. 3. Bake at 350°F (175°C) for 30 minutes, check rice for doneness.
4. Combine eggs and sugar.
5. Temper rice mixture into eggs, be careful to not break up the rice.
6. Return to a low-medium heat and cook to 175°F (80°C).
7. Add heavy cream.
8. Place in an ice bath to cool.
Recipes 141
Ganache Soft Ganache

Yield description: 1 lb 9.5 oz (724 g) Yield description: 1 lb 11 oz (766 g)

Heavy Cream 12.75 oz 362 g Heavy Cream 12 oz 340 g
Semisweet Chocolate 58% 12.75 oz 362 g Milk 4 oz 114 g
Butter 1 oz 28 g
Semisweet Chocolate 58% 10 oz 284 g
Procedure
1. Bring heavy cream to a boil.

2. Add the chocolate in four additions; stir between additions to Procedure
create an emulsion. 1. Combine milk and heavy cream in a heavy-bottom saucepan
3. Emulsify ganache with an immersion blender. and bring to a boil.
4. Place plastic wrap directly on the surface of the ganache and 2. Pour mixture over chocolate and stir to combine.
refrigerate until needed. 3. Add butter and emulsify with immersion blender.
5. Store refrigerated for 24 hours.
6. Whip until ganache forms stiff peaks.

Crème Anglaise Chocolate Pot de Crème

Yield description: 48 portions at 0.5 oz (14 g) Yield description: 13 portions at 4 oz (113 g)

Milk 8 oz 227 g Milk 2 lb 907 g
Heavy Cream 8 oz 227 g Chocolate 64% 6.5 oz 184 g
Sugar 4 oz 113 g Egg Yolks 8 oz 227 g
Egg Yolks 4 oz 113 g Sugar 6.5 oz 184 g
Procedure
Procedure 1. Combine half the sugar with the milk, place in a heavy-bottom
1. Crème anglaise method on page 124. saucepan, and heat to a boil.
2. Add remaining sugar to egg yolks mixture.
3. Temper all of the boiling milk mixture into the egg yolks.
4. Slowly add the hot custard to the chocolate.
5. Emulsify with an immersion blender.
6. Strain through a chinois and fill ramekins.
8. Store in the refrigerator.
Recipes 143
Clafoutis Cheesecake

Portions: One 9-in. fluted tart pan Portions: One 10-in. cake, 12 portions
Yield description: One 9-in. fluted tart pan at 2 lb 0.5 oz (979 g) Yield description: One 10-in. cake at 3 lb 1 oz (1389 g)

Cream 8 oz 227 g Cream Cheese 2 lb 907 g
Milk 8 oz 227 g Sugar 8 oz 227 g
Sugar 6 oz 170 g Eggs 8 oz 227 g
Kirsch 4 oz 114 g Vanilla Paste 1 oz 28 g
Eggs 5 oz 142 g
Cake Flour 3 oz 85 g
Vanilla Paste 0.5 oz 14 g
Procedure
1. Cheesecake method on page 128.
Procedure
1. Combine sugar and cake flour.

2. Combine cream, milk, eggs, kirsch, and vanilla paste.
3. Mix wet ingredients with dry ingredients.
4. Bake at 350°F (175°C).

Key Terms
Coagulation Royale Ovalbumin
Carryover cooking Ganache Albumin
Syneresis Emulsion Pâte à bombe
Tempering Egg foams

1. Describe the process for making a Chiboust. 4. Explain the process of tempering gelatin by using the cold process.
2. Determine the proper cooking technique for a stirred custard that 5. Discuss the advantages and disadvantages of using a French
contains cornstarch. meringue in a mousse.
3. What is the role of gelatin in a mousse?

CHAPTER 6
Frozen Desserts
Nothing says comfort food like ice cream. In the United States, yearly consumption of frozen
dessert products is just less than six gallons per person. Ice cream is a comfort food, something
almost everyone can relate to. Building on this already-existing familiarity with frozen desserts
gives the pastry chef a way to introduce new products to the customer. It is not as simple as
mixing milk, cream, sugar, eggs, and vanilla anymore.
LEARNING OBJECTIVES

1. Explain the function of sugars in frozen desserts.
2. Calculate overrun percentages of ice cream and sorbet.
3. Calculate the AFP of ice creams.
4. Balance sorbet and ice cream recipes.
5. Make a variety of churned and still frozen desserts.
Ingredients
Frozen desserts are created from basic ingredients: air, water, sugar, eggs, dairy products, and
flavorings. In each group of ingredients, there are different types of products available, as well
as different procedures to execute the recipe. Changing the ingredients, ratio, or sequence
of the recipe will yield completely different results. All of these ingredients must be carefully
balanced and the procedures followed to create a final product that demonstrates the crafts-
manship of the pastry chef.
Air
Frozen desserts rely on air to create the light, creamy texture of a parfait, and the dense, soft tex-
ture of gelato. The amount of air incorporated in these items can create the correct mouthfeel.
Frozen desserts fall under two main categories. Churned frozen desserts, such as ice cream,
gelato, and sorbet, incorporate air during the freezing process. Still frozen desserts, such as
parfaits and soufflé glacé, are aerated and then frozen. A frozen dessert that does not have any
air incorporated will freeze into a solid block of ice that will be difficult to serve and eat.
In ice cream manufacturing, overrun is used to describe the amount of air incorporated into
the final product. Understanding the ingredient functions in the recipe and how batch freezers
work will help produce the correct amount of overrun. Sorbets typically have an overrun of 30%
147
to 40% while ice cream is 50% to 100%. The higher the percentage of overrun, the more airy the
product becomes; Ice cream can almost take on an undesirable frozen mousse consistency if
too much air is incorporated. High overrun is associated with economy ice creams. Calculating
the overrun can be performed using the following formula:
(Weight of 1L of mix before freezing − Weight of 1L of mix after freezing)

× 100 = % Overrun
Weight of 1L of mix before freezing
When calculating the overrun, the first step is to weigh the unchurned ice cream base mix-
ture in a container. It is best to use a volume measure container; quarts or pints are adequate.
Fill the container and weigh the ice cream base; for this example, we will use a 1 L measure.
For example:
Weight of 1L of ice cream base before freezing = 1200 g
Next, process the base in an ice cream machine according to the manufacturer’s instruc-
tions. Fill the machine to the recommended optimal level and process until the correct frozen
consistency is achieved. Fill the same container with the churned ice cream. Weigh this con-
tainer; the weight should be less than the original weight of the unchurned base.
Weight of 1L after freezing = 820 g
With this information, the overrun can be calculated using the formula above.
(1200 − 820) 380

× 100 = × 100 = 0.3166 × 100 = 31.7%
1200 1200
Be sure to use a container large enough to provide an accurately measurable sample.

A measuring cup would be too small—too large of a container and it will not be filled to the top.
All ice cream machines vary a great deal in the way they operate, how quickly they churn,
and how quickly they freeze. This will play a role in the final product; be sure to consult the
user manual and follow all instructions as directed in the manual. Overfilling or underfilling
an ice cream machine will change the amount of air the machine can incorporate into the mix-
ture, or take too long to freeze. Recipes containing cream that are left in the machine too long
can cause the cream to be overwhipped. Fat will separate from the base and create a coarse
texture with a grainy mouthfeel. Undermixed bases will be grainy as a result of the water not
being completely frozen while churning, as well as reduced final volume. After the ice cream is
extracted from the machine, it is still very soft and needs to harden in the freezer. A blast chiller
is the preferred method, with temperatures as low as –40°F (–40°C) preventing any air from
escaping as the ice cream or sorbet continues freezing.
Water
Water impacts everything in the pastry shop. Oftentimes, it is overlooked as an ingredient
because it is everywhere. Remember, a large percentage of a frozen dessert is water, yet wa-
ter does not add any flavor. Free water is water that is not bound to any other part of the
ingredients; this can lead to large ice crystals forming during the freezing process or in storage.
Incorporating dry solids, sugar, glucose powder, dextrose, stabilizers, and emulsifiers into ice
cream and sorbet helps to reduce the amount of free water. The water binds to the solids, cre-
ating a dense texture in the frozen dessert and assists in incorporating air during the churning
process. The amount of nonfat dry solids in an ice cream should be in 24% to 32% and in sorbet
31% to 36%.
The balance of the recipe and use of ingredients not only changes the flavor, but also cre-
ates the proper texture. Water freezes at 32°F (0°C), but by adding other ingredients to a rec-
ipe, the freezing temperature can be reduced. Sugars and alcohol can also be added to reduce
the temperature. When water is frozen in a solid block, large ice crystals form, and it would
148 C H A PT E R 6 Frozen Desserts

be difficult to eat. To prevent this, aerated eggs and cream are added to still frozen desserts,
allowing the air to separate the water and lighten the mixture. Churned products are placed in
an ice cream machine, where the intense agitation during the freezing process creates small ice
crystals and incorporates air.
Sugars
Sugars provide many functions to a recipe: They allow ice cream to develop the proper tex-
ture, prevent sorbet from freezing too hard, and add flavor. In order to understand the function
sugars perform, an evaluation of the recipe must be conducted. The most common association
with sugars is sweetness. While this is true, think about what else the sugar is doing in the recipe.
In Chapter 5, sugar was used to denature egg proteins when preparing custards. Many fro-
zen desserts are custard based and utilize the same cooking methods introduced in Chapter 5.
Sugars also play a function in the final product by controlling the freezing temperature, main-
taining the texture, preventing crystallization, and improving flavor. Not having enough sugars
in a recipe creates a product that freezes too hard or can become grainy. At the opposite end of
the spectrum, having excessive amounts of sugar in a recipe yields a product that is too soft, in
addition to being too sweet.
Many types of sugars are available to the pastry chef, each having different properties
and effects on the final product. Some common sugars found in the production of frozen des-
serts are granulated sugar (sucrose), lactose, honey, dextrose, glucose powder, glucose syrup,
inverted sugar, and dextrose. Each of these contributes a different sweetening power (SP),
with sugar always being 100%, antifreezing power (AFP), and percentage of solids.
The Power of Sugar chart below provides a list of sugars commonly used in the produc-
tion of frozen desserts. Sugars can be used interchangeably in a recipe. Understanding the
difference between sugars will help to select the amount and type correctly. When adjusting the
sugars in the recipe, do not change the total quantity. If the recipe calls for 100 grams of sugar,
adjustments can be made inside this total quantity. An example of this will follow in Guidelines
to Formulating a Neutral Ice Cream Base.
The SP can easily be noted by tasting the base; if it’s too sweet or not sweet enough, adjust-
ments can be easily made by decreasing or increasing the amount of sugar. Understanding that
the recipe is balanced based on the percentage of sugar, it would be better to adjust the type
of sugar in the recipe. A high AFP means that the final product requires a lower temperature to
freeze. Exchanging honey for granulated sugar not only impacts the sweetness, it affects the
AFP. If honey is added, the ice cream would be noticeably softer than ice cream made with gran-
ulated sugar served at the same temperature. Invert sugar and dextrose will impact the AFP
the same way. Balancing the FP and AFP will give the ice cream the correct flavor and texture.
Examples of Sugar Ratios in Ice Cream Base Using 1000 g of Total Sugar Served at 14°F (10°C)
Base #1 Base #2 Base #3

Sugar 1000 g 900 g 250 g
Glucose Powder 100 g
Honey 750 g
Traditionally, ice cream bases were made using granulated sugar, and a decent base can
be produced using granulated sugar. The first example uses only granulated sugar. The second
example incorporates glucose powder into the original quantity of 1000 grams. Base #2 will be
slightly less sweet than Base #1 and will have a slightly denser texture due to the incorporation
of the glucose powder. Base #3 uses honey. Honey is sweeter than sugar and the AFP is almost
double. This product will be softer, sweeter, and have a different texture, almost gummy.
Ingredients 149
Solids in the sugars also play an important role in the production of ice cream. The more
solids in the ice cream means there is less water. Solids absorb the water and interfere with the
formation of large ice crystals in the finished ice cream, assisting in producing a smooth texture.
The percentage of solids in ice cream should be no more than 32%. Exceeding this will cause the
ice cream to have a coarse mouthfeel. Incorporating solids into the recipe will produce an ice
cream that does not melt quickly when plated for service.
The amount of total solids in a recipe hinders the formation of ice crystals. A high AFP
means the final product requires a lower temperature to freeze, and holding these products
at a higher temperature will cause them to melt. Balancing the SP and AFP will give the frozen
dessert the correct flavor and texture.
Power of Sugar
Sweetening Anti-Freezing Total

Sugars Power (SP) Power (AFP) Solids %
Granulated Sugar (sucrose) 100 1 100
Honey 130 1.9 75
Lactose 16 1 100
Invert Sugar 130 1.9 78
Dextrose 75 1.9 92
Glucose Powder 40 DE 50 0.9 95
Glucose Syrup 28 DE 50 0.5 78
DE is an abbreviation for Dextrose Equivalent. A higher DE will mean an increase in

the SP and AFP. Glucose powder and syrup are available at different DE. The Power of Sugar
table represents the most commonly available DE for these products. Be sure to check the DE
with the distributor if it is not listed. All recipes in this book will utilize the products specified
in the Power of Sugar table.
The AFP can be used to determine the serving temperature of the ice cream. The ideal tem-
perature for ice cream and sorbet is 14°F (–10°C). An AFP between 241 and 260 will give the correct
consistency at this temperature. The sugars in the recipe can be adjusted to achieve the needed
AFP. For every 20 points the AFP increases, the temperature is reduced by 1.8°F (1°C). To calcu-
late the total AFP of an ingredient, multiply the weight of the ingredient by the AFP and add each
of the ingredients to get the total for the recipe. The AFP is based on 2.2 lb (1 kg) of ice cream base.
Ingredient weight × AFP = Total AFP
Calculating Antifreezing Point of French Vanilla Ice Cream
Sugars Quantity AFP Total AFP

Granulated Sugar 140 g 1 140
Glucose Powder 32 g 0.9 28.8
MSNF (51.3% lactose) 50 g × 0.513 = 25.65 g 1 25.65
Milk (4.8% lactose) 500 g × 0.048 = 24 g 1 24
Cream 35% (3.5% lactose) 175 g × 0.035 = 6.125 g 1 6.125
Total 224.575

Note: To calculate the AFP accurately, the lactose must be included. Refer to the Lactose
in Dairy Products table below. Multiply the total weight of the ingredient by the percentage to
determine the amount of lactose by ingredient.
The total AFP for the Vanilla Ice Cream is 225 (rounded up), which would equate to an
ideal serving temperature of 15.8°F (–9°C). Sugars can be adjusted to correct the difference.
Granulated sugar could be increased to 156 g (and thus, the total AFP for the sugar would
be 156), and the total AFP for all ingredients would be adjusted to 241. It is important to
remember when writing recipes that it is a process—there are many more variables to an
ice cream recipe. The formulas can help to get you close to an accurate result; the best way
to check a recipe is to compare the finished results with what was calculated on paper.
Types of Sweeteners
Granulated Sugar Granulated sugar is produced from either sugar cane or sugar beets.
It is one of the most readily available sugars, and can come in a variety of forms, granulated
and extra fine. Granulated sugar is used as the base for determining the SP and AFP of all
other sugars.
Honey Honey is one of the sweetest sugars available, and has one advantage over the other
sugars. Through the use of honey, the flavor of the sweetener can be changed. Orange blos-
som, lavender, buckwheat, clover, acacia, or chestnut nectar can all be used in the production
of honey. These nectars flavor the honey and can enhance the flavor of a recipe. Honey has a
high AFP, meaning it will not freeze as hard as the other sugars; care must be taken to not just
replace the same amount of honey for another sugar in the recipe.
Lactose Lactose is found in products made from milk. It is naturally occurring in milk and
cream, which are used in frozen desserts. Some recipes use additional milk powders to add fla-
vor as well as absorb water. In order to accurately calculate the serving temperature and adjust
recipes, lactose cannot be ignored. Lactose is not used as a sweetener in ice cream, however; it
is a part of milk products. It does add sweetness and contributes to the overall AFP calculations.
Lactose in Dairy Products
Product Lactose
Whole Milk 4.8%
Skim Milk 5.2%
Light Whipping Cream 30% 3.9%
Whipping Cream 35% 3.5%
Heavy Whipping Cream 40% 3.0%
Butter 0.9%
Milk Solids Nonfat (MSNF) 51.3%
Glucose Glucose, glucose powder, and dextrose are products closely related to each other,
and they all contain dextrose. Dextrose can be made from many types of starches, including
corn, potatoes, rice, barley, tapioca, and wheat. These starches are then converted into simple
sugars. These products are referred to by their dextrose equivalent (DE).
Pure dextrose has a DE of 100, which means that all of the starch has been fully convert-
ed to dextrose. The DE of glucose syrup and glucose powder indicates that only the specified
percentage, represented by the DE, of starch has been converted to dextrose. Glucose syrup
28 DE and glucose powder 40 DE are the most commonly used in the production of frozen des-
serts. Glucose powder is glucose that has had 95% of the water removed.
Ingredients 151
Glucose syrup can provide a desirable texture to frozen desserts, but its use is somewhat
limited due to the large percentage of water remaining. The advantage of using glucose pow-
der and dextrose is that they do not add water to the recipe and they prevent crystallization by
inverting the sugar. While these three products will be used in this chapter, it is important to
remember that careful attention must be paid when scaling the recipes and to use the correct
product—while they are similar, each has a different SP.
Invert Sugar Invert sugar, also known by the brand name Trimoline, provides many of the
same functions as glucose: It prevents crystallization, adds sweetness, and softens ice cream.
Glucose syrup is a clear, thick liquid and invert sugar is an opaque, thick gel. Invert sugar con-
tains an emulsifier, which helps to stabilize a recipe. It normally is not used in ice cream and
sorbet production, as it leads to a gummy texture if too much is used. It can be useful in recipes
that contain chocolate or praline paste to soften the texture and emulsify additional fats in
the recipe.
Sugar Density
Sugar plays a critical role in the development and production of frozen desserts. Brix is a mea-
sure of the amount of dissolved solids in solution; the strength of the solution is reported as
degrees Brix, or °Brix. Determining the Brix of a sugar solution using a refractometer provides
a more precise way to measure the concentration, and adjustments can be made. In some
instances, a thermometer can be used to determine the amount of sugar. However, this is not
as accurate a method. A sugar solution that is 20 grams sugar in 100 grams of water is written
as 20° Brix. Calculations can be made to determine the amount of sugar in a recipe with fairly
accurate results. However, during the heating process evaporation of water will take place,
causing a change to the balance of the recipe.
Degrees Brix Ranges for Frozen Desserts
Type °Brix
Ice Cream 16–23
Sorbet 28–31
Granités 16–19
Sugar concentration can be checked through the use of a refractometer. A refractometer

measures how light passes through a liquid—the more sugar in a solution, the more difficult it
is for the light to pass through. An optical refractometer passes light through the solution and
a prism. Figure 6.1 on the left is what would be seen with distilled water and Figure 6.2 shows
what a 23° Brix would look like.
20°C 20°C
30 30
30 30
25 25 25 25
20 20 20 20
15 15 15 15
10 10 10 10
5 5
5 5
0 0
0 0
Brix %
Brix %
FIGURE 6.1 Optical refractometer FIGURE 6.2 Optical refractometer

image showing 0° Brix image showing 23° Brix

Optical refractometers work best with natural light and sugar solutions; color found in
purées or milk solids can give an inaccurate reading. To get a more accurate reading, use a
digital refractometer; while they carry a higher cost, the accuracy is much better.
Sugar is one of the many factors needed to consider when evaluating a frozen dessert.
The ingredients in a recipe interact with each other and with the sugar, which explains
the ranges of °Brix. Not only is the final texture of the product important, flavor must
be considered. In a sorbet recipe the acidity of the fruit will change the amount of sugar
needed to provide sweetness; higher acidity fruits will require more sugar. In regards to
ice cream, the fat content will impact flavor. A higher percentage of fat will require a
greater quantity of sugar to create sweetness. The ranges throughout this chapter provide
a guideline to allow the formulation of new recipes and the ability to make adjustments to
existing recipes.
Eggs
The egg is an incredible and versatile ingredient used in many pastry recipes. They are used in
both churned and still frozen dessert preparations. As discussed in Chapter 5, eggs can be used
to create volume and lightness in a mousse or the thickened creamy texture of a crème anglaise.
Egg Yolk Components
Water Fat Protein Lecithin Total Solids

44% 30% 18% 8% 56%
Many churned frozen desserts rely on egg yolks in the custard to provide color, flavor, fat,
thickening power, and emulsification. The white of the egg is rarely used in ice cream produc-
tion due to the large amount of water contained in it. As a result, they provide no additional
emulsifying properties. Egg whites also contain bacteria. It is recommended to use pasteurized
egg whites if they are used in ice cream custard. Sanitation is critical when working with eggs
and ice cream. The custard bases used for ice cream production need to be cooked to 175°F
(80°C). At this point, the custard will be cooked to a nappe consistency and the custard is the
proper thickness and is pasteurized.
Pasteurization is the process of heating food to a specific temperature for a set amount of
time to reduce the number of pathogens. There are several different methods of pasteurization.
High temperature/Short time (HTST) is the process used in this book. In compliance with U.S.
Food and Drug Administration (FDA) Guidelines, HTST requires that ice cream bases be heated
to 175°F (80°C) for 25 seconds or 180°F (82°C) for 15 seconds. After pasteurization, these prod-
ucts must be cooled quickly; an ice bath is recommended.
Still frozen desserts can use the yolk, white, or whole egg. The usage of eggs in still frozen
desserts is very similar to the way they are used in making a mousse. In fact, the methods and
ingredients are identical. What differs is the ratio; an increase in quantity of sugar or alcohol
keeps the final texture soft when served from the freezer.
The fat contained in the egg yolk creates a rich, dense foam as well as adding color to the
final product. Additional fat also can reduce the strength of flavors, due to the fat coating
the mouth. Milder flavors, such as banana, would benefit from the use of a meringue. Meringues
add lightness to still frozen desserts and do not impart any color to the final product.
Can I use pasteurized egg products for this recipe? This question is asked all too often,
and the answer is yes. Unless a recipe specifies “fresh” next to the ingredient, pasteur-
ized products can be substituted. Not only do they save labor, they are excellent products
and at times can be better than their fresh counterparts. Still frozen desserts benefit from
the use of pasteurized eggs; potential pathogens are destroyed through the pasteurization
process.
Ingredients 153
Dairy Products
Vanilla is by far the most popular ice cream flavor. It is a common flavor but it is much
more than vanilla. It’s a combination of textures, sweetness, temperature, and flavor. While
vanilla is the “flavor,” there is a considerable amount of flavor that comes from the dairy
used in the recipe. A simple recipe for vanilla ice cream might contain milk and cream,
while others may have added milk solids. There are many good vanilla ice creams avail-
able, yet by understanding the important role dairy products play in the recipe, a great
version could be made.
Dairy products, just like sugars and eggs, are used together to develop the flavor and tex-
ture desired in the final product. Understanding what is in dairy products will help to provide
insight as to their function in the recipe.
Solids in Dairy Products
Product Total Solids Fat Solids Nonfat Solids Water

Whole Milk 12% 3.6% 8.4% 88%
Skim Milk 9.2% 0% 9.2% 91%
Light Whipping Cream 30% 36.5% 30% 6.5% 63.5%
Whipping Cream 35% 41% 35% 6% 59%
Heavy Whipping Cream 40% 45.5% 40% 5.5% 54.5%
Butter 84% 82% 2% 16%
Milk Solids Nonfat (MSNF) 97% 0% 97% 3%
Dairy products are composed of fat solids, nonfat solids, and water. The fat and nonfat
solids are what give milk its flavor and body. Skim milk and whole milk look somewhat simi-
lar. When comparing taste and texture, the skim milk is thinner and has less flavor. Whole milk
is the preferred milk used in the pastry kitchen; unless a recipe specifies skim milk, use whole
milk. MSNF are combined with milk to increase the flavor and amount of solids in the recipe
and absorb free water.
MSNF are used due to their low cost, shelf life, water-binding capability, and ability
to stabilize the emulsion of the custard. Whole milk powders are available—due to the
inclusion of fat, they have a shorter shelf life of 6 months compared to MSNF shelf life of
3 years. The emulsion is stabilized due to the high protein content of the MSNF and its ability
to distribute the fat in the recipe; egg yolks also assist the emulsion. A broken emulsion
in an ice cream cannot be visualized as with mayonnaise; it occurs on a minuscule level.
The results of broken emulsion may present in a grainy texture or ice cream that melts too
quickly. Stabilizing the emulsion and proper pasteurization contribute to the final texture of
the ice cream.
Including too much MSNF will cause the ice cream to take on a grainy texture. The final
product will take on a sandy texture due to the lactose crystalizing. Lactose crystals form a
triangular shape and feel sharp on the tongue.
Just as the sugar in the recipe needs to be balanced, so does the amount of fat.
Too high of a fat content will make the ice cream extremely heavy and mask the flavors.
In addition, it makes the ice cream prone to overmixing during the churning p rocess.
Overmixing causes the fat to separate out from the cream in the same way that it
happens to whipped cream. When brought to low temperatures, the fat is very firm and
coarse; if this occurs, the ice cream should be discarded. To prevent this from happen-
ing, it is recommended to use a 35% fat cream. If further reduction in fat is needed, milk
can be added.

Emulsifiers and Stabilizers
Creating and maintaining an emulsion in ice cream is an important factor in developing the
proper texture of the final product. Emulsifiers assist in creating and holding the emulsion.
There are two kinds of emulsifiers: diglycerides and monosterates. Although there is lecithin in
egg yolks, it is not sufficient to fully emulsify the mixture. During the maturation phase of the ice
cream making process. the emulsifiers “attach” to fat and water and permanently bond them.
There is no need to use emulsifiers in sorbets, since they do not contain any dairy. Sorbet ben-
efits from the use of stabilizers. These stabilizers are made from plant-based materials: guar gum,
xanthan gum, and iota carrageenan. The same benefits can be achieved in sorbets as in ice cream,
with the only difference being that there are no emulsifiers in sorbet base due to no added fats.
Using emulsifiers and stabilizers offers five advantages:
1. Emulsifies fat and water

2. Better overrun
3. Improved texture
4. Absorbs free water to prevent crystals from forming (100% solids)
5. Stabilizes finished product from melting quickly after serving
There are many excellent stabilizers and emulsifiers commercially available to the pastry
chef. Purchasing these products already done saves time, provides a consistent product, and
can include multiple stabilizers and emulsifiers to yield excellent results. Care must be taken
when scaling these products; they should not exceed 1% of the total recipe. During the pas-
teurization of the mix, the stabilizers hydrate and continue developing during the maturation
process. Adding too much stabilizer creates a gummy texture after churning. Egg yolks contain
lecithin, a natural emulsifier. Depending on the quantity of yolks in the recipe, the amount of
stabilizer can be reduced or omitted completely. Slight adjustments may be needed based on
the brand used—check with the supplier for recommended quantities.
Some chefs prefer to not add these products, while others add them to every recipe. There is
no right or wrong answer, although there has been a great deal of discussion about the use of stabi-
lizers and emulsifiers over the years. They are natural products extracted from plant-based materials
(seeds, seaweed, or plants)—they are not chemicals. One question constantly asked: Are emulsifiers
and stabilizers necessary to use in a recipe that includes them? The simple answer is no. Recipes can
be made without them and the recipe will work, but the results may be slightly different.
Churned Frozen Desserts

Churned frozen desserts go by many names, but they all have one thing in common. During the
freezing process, they are churned mechanically or, in some instances, by hand. Agitation prevents
large ice crystals from forming and incorporates air. Freezing these products without churning would
result in a solid block of ice that would be extremely difficult to eat. There are many different styles
of churned frozen desserts, which can be broken down into two main groups: dairy and nondairy.
Ice Cream Machines

Batch Freezer
Batch freezers are used to churn ice cream, sorbet, gelato, and sherbet. The machine contains a
compressor that freezes a metal cylinder. The base mixture is added to the machine in a liquid
form. Although the base is being frozen, the dasher spins quickly, incorporating air into the mix-
ture and forming small ice crystals.
Churned Frozen Desserts 155

When producing churned frozen desserts using a batch freezer, refer to the user’s manual
associated with the machine. The time needed to freeze an ice cream or sorbet base will vary.
This depends on the makeup of the recipe, the amount of mixture in the machine, and even
how often the machine is used. A machine filled to maximum capacity will take longer to freeze
than a machine that is only half full. The first batch of ice cream that is run will take longer than
the following batches. This is due to the ice cream cylinder being cooled from the previous
batch. Be sure to carefully observe the ice cream or sorbet during the churning process to
ensure the proper consistency of the final product.
FIGURE 6.3 Batch Freezer

(Photo courtesy of Advanced Gourmet
Equipment & Design)
Paco Jet
A Paco Jet uses a high-speed blade to transform frozen bases into ice cream, sorbet, gelato, and
sherbet. The main difference between a Paco Jet and batch freezer is that the base is frozen
before processing. A Paco Jet can also be used to produce nut pastes.
FIGURE 6.4 Sorbet: an unprocessed beaker (left); a processed beaker (right)

Dairy-Based Churned Frozen Desserts
Ice Cream
Ice cream is a term that can be used to describe several different styles of ice cream. The FDA
regulates what can be called ice cream. The regulations state that the product must contain a
minimum 10% milk fat and 10% milk solids. If the milk fat percentage is higher than 10%, the
total of the fat and solids must be a minimum 20%. Egg yolks can also be added to ice cream
at a maximum amount of 1.4%. An ice cream that has no egg yolk added is often referred to as
Philadelphia-style ice cream, or crème glacée.
French Style Ice Cream

Most ice creams produced in restaurants and pastry shops are custard based or French-style
ice cream. What sets it apart from ice cream is the addition of egg yolks. A minimum of 1.4%
egg yolk is required. Although there is additional cost associated with using egg yolks, the ice
cream benefits through additional richness, flavor, texture, and color, as well as increased sta-
bility during storage.
FIGURE 6.5 Front of ice cream machine FIGURE 6.6 Ice cream machine extruding
extruding properly churned ice cream overchurned ice cream
Gelato
Gelato is Italian for ice cream. In the United States, it is used in many establishments to refer to
anything, including ice cream. The FDA does not regulate the use of this term. However, gelato
has a different texture and flavor than ice creams or frozen custards. A gelato recipe is similar
to a custard-based ice cream. It contains egg yolk, lower milk fat percentage (3% to 10%), and
higher sugar percentage (up to 24%). Gelato has less overrun, 30% to 40%, and is served at a
slightly warmer temperature than ice cream. Less overrun and additional sugar help to keep
the gelato soft and creamy in light of the fact the fat content is lower.

Sherbet
Sherbet base is composed of sugar, water, flavoring, and dairy ingredients. Milk fat
percentage in sherbet is 1% to 2%. Chocolate, coffee, tea, alcohol, and fruit can all be used
to flavor sherbet. Since sherbet typically contains fruit purée, it is often confused with
sorbet. In addition, the name is often misspelled (or mispronounced) as sherbert, adding
further confusion.
Frozen Yogurt
Frozen yogurt is certainly not a new concept; it is most often associated with soft-serve
yogurt shops that continue to grow in popularity. In the pastry shop, frozen yogurt is a
unique product that does not fit into any of the other categories. It is made from yogurt,
sugars, flavorings, and sometimes additional milk. Increased access to Greek yogurt has
given this product an increased flavor profile in comparison to the traditional yogurts found
in the United States. Greek yogurt is thicker and more flavorful, and can provide an enjoy-
able tart flavor.
Method
The process of pasteurizing an ice cream recipe is just as important as the balance of the
recipe. Through this process, the ice cream mix is heated to a high temperature to kill any
pathogenic microorganisms, dissolve solids, and emulsify the mixture. Final texture, reduced
overrun, and length of service time can all be negatively affected by not carefully monitoring
this process.
There are many recipes with different pasteurization procedures; the following is the
process that will be used in many of the recipes included in this chapter.
Ice Cream Base Process

1. Combine the stabilizer with 10 times its weight in granulated sugar.
2. Combine the egg yolks with some of the sugar.
3. Combine the milk, cream, and MSNF; continue stirring to make sure the solids do not burn on
the bottom of the pan.
4. Temper the egg yolks into the mixture, followed by the stabilizer mixture and remaining sugars
(granulated sugar, glucose powder, dextrose, honey).
5. Continue cooking over low heat to 175°F (80°C) for 15 seconds.
6. Quickly cool the mixture to 40°F (4°C).
7. Allow the mixture to mature under refrigeration for 6 to 12 hours. This step allows the dry ingre-
dients to fully hydrate and fat globules to crystallize and collect around air cells, increasing the
ability to trap air during churning.
8. Using an immersion blender, homogenize the mixture.
9. Freeze in an ice cream machine following the manufacturer’s instructions.
10. Extract ice cream from the machine into prefrozen containers; cover and freeze to –22°F (–30°C)
to stabilize the ice cream. Store at this temperature until needed for service.
11. Temper to 10°F (–12°C) for service.

Guidelines for Formulating Basic Ice Cream Custard
Each ingredient has a function in the recipe: sweetening, providing solids, removing free water—
all these come together to create the perfect texture. The recipe is not based solely on one
ingredient and the function of that ingredient, but how all the ingredients interact with each
other. Understanding the function of the ingredients and the guidelines for formulating a basic
custard will provide a starting point for modifying existing recipes or creating a new customized
product. Some ingredients provide a range, while others have set percentages to follow.
Ingredient Percentage Ranges for a Neutral Ice Cream Base for 1000 g Yield
Ingredients % Range Grams

Fat 6–10% 80–100 g
Sugars (includes max 4% glucose powder) 17–22% 170–220 g
Egg Yolk 3–10% 30–100 g
Stabilizer 0.1–1%
MSNF 0–10% 0–100 g
To manufacture 1000 grams of base, identify the percentages of each ingredient needed.
For this recipe the following percentages were selected:
Fat 10%
Sugar 20%
Egg Yolk 5%
Stabilizer 0.5%
MSNF 5%
The first step in the process is calculating the stabilizer, egg yolks, and MSNF. (For this rec-
ipe, we will be using a premade stabilizer.) To do this, multiply each of these ingredients by
1000 grams.
Stabilizer 1000 g × 0.005 = 5 grams

Egg yolk 1000 g × 0.05 = 50 grams
MSNF 1000 g × 0.05 = 50 grams
Sugars are calculated in the same way. However, we have different sugars that can be
used and provide different sweetness, textures, and AFP. For this recipe, we will use the
maximum 4% glucose powder, with the remaining 16% being granulated sugar. It is recom-
mended that you calculate the AFP for this recipe, once all ingredients are finalized, prior to
testing in the kitchen.
Glucose 1000 g × 0.04 = 40 grams

Granulated Sugar 1000 g × 0.16 = 160 grams
One more step and the recipe will be ready for testing. The fat percentage for the recipe
was determined at the beginning of the process to be 10%. Now that all the other ingredients
are calculated, the remaining weight of the recipe would be composed from the milk and the
whipping cream. The total for the sweeteners, egg yolks, MSNF, and stabilizer is 305 grams. To
yield a total of 1000 grams, 695 grams of milk and whipping cream is needed. But how much of
each is needed?

Vanilla Ice Cream Recipe
Ingredient Weight Percentage

Milk
Whipping Cream
Granulated Sugar 160 g

20% Total
Glucose Powder DE 40 40 g
Egg Yolks 50 g 5%
MSNF 50 g 5%
Stabilizer 5g 0.5%
The following formula is used to calculate the weight of the whipping cream. Once this is
calculated, the amount of milk can be determined. This formula takes into account how many
grams of total fat are needed and how much total weight is needed to complete the formula.
Practice will be needed in using this formula. However, it will yield precise results to assist in
balancing ice cream formulas.
When calculating the whipping cream and milk, the fat percentages for the dairy products
must be converted to the decimal form.
Converting Fat Percentages to Decimals
Product Fat Solids Percent Fat Solids Decimal Form

Whole Milk 3.6% 0.036
Skim Milk 0% 0.0
Light Whipping Cream 30% 30% 0.30
Whipping Cream 35% 35% 0.35
Heavy Whipping Cream 40% 40% 0.40
Butter 82% 0.82
F – (M × D) = Total grams of cream(W – M)
Note: This formula is presented in two ways. The formula above can be entered into a
scientific calculator. The following formulas break the formula into smaller components, either
way will provide the same answer.
F = Total grams of fat needed in recipe = 100 g

M = Percentage of fat in milk in decimal form = 0.036
W = Percentage of fat in whipping cream in decimal form = 0.35
D = Total dairy weight = 695 g
The first line is calculated by multiplying the milk fat in decimal form by the total
dairy weight:
Line 1 = M × D
Line 1 = 0.036 × 695 g
Line 1 = 25.02 g

Next, subtract the total grams of fat needed in the recipe by the answer from Line 1:
Line 2 = F – Line 1
Line 2 = 100 g – 25.02 g
Line 2 = 74.98 g
For the next portion of the formula, subtract the milk fat from the whipping cream fat;
remember to use these in decimal form:
Line 3 = W – M
Line 3 = 0.35 – 0.036
Line 3 = 0.314
To complete the problem, divide the answer from line 2 by the answer from line 3:
Grams of whipping cream = Line 2/Line 3

Grams of whipping cream = 74.98 g/0.314
Grams of whipping cream = 238.789
This answer can be rounded to 239 g
The weight of milk is calculated by subtracting the whipping cream weight from the
remaining ingredient weight of 695 g:
695 g – 239 g = 456 g milk
The final calculated recipe is:
Vanilla Ice Cream Recipe

Milk 456 g
10% Fat
Whipping Cream 239 g
Granulated Sugar 160 g

20% Sugar
Glucose Powder DE 40 40 g
Egg Yolks 50 g 5%
MSNF 50 g 5%
Stabilizer 5g 0.5%
Total Weight 1000 g
The percentages used to calculate the recipe are not intended to equal 100% the way it is
written. The percentages represent the ingredients that are used to create the desired texture.
By adjusting these ingredients, the last ingredient, water, is controlled. Remember that the
ingredient that was of concern was the fat percentage. A large component of milk and whipping
cream is water. By balancing the recipe and following the percentage ranges, a balanced rec-
ipe can be created. The only ingredient that changes based on adjusting the percentages is the
water. In ice cream making, the goal is to control the water, creating the proper consistency,
flavor, and serving temperature.

Non–Dairy-Based Churned Frozen Desserts
Sorbet
Sorbet is created through a balanced recipe of fruit purée, water, sugars, and stabilizers.
Although the FDA does not regulate sorbet, it should not contain any dairy products. The
general perception of the public is that sorbet is dairy free, making it an option to vegan and
lactose-intolerant customers. In some recipes, however, MSNF may be used to trap free water
and create a creamy texture in the final product. Since there is no regulation as to what can be
called a sorbet, some chefs use their creativity to create buttermilk or sour cream sorbets.
Sorbet: 28–31° Brix, Granité: 16–19° Brix, are the recommend sugar percentages for sorbet
and granité syrups. They indicate a point of reference for calculating new recipes. Each fruit
has a unique sugar percentage. The sugar percentage present in the fruit will need be included
when calculating the total amount of sugar present in the recipe. Too high of a sugar content
and the sugar will separate from the recipe when stored in the freezer.
Granités
Sorbet and granités have a common use of ingredients with different ratios. The reduced
amount of sugar indicates the final product will freeze harder and create larger crystals.
Granités are not churned in a machine; instead, they are stirred by hand during the freezing
process. This creates more of a coarse, shaved-ice type consistency with large, flaky ice crystals.
Methods
When cooking ice cream bases, there is a focus on the temperature to prevent over coagulation
of the egg proteins. While sorbet does not contain eggs the same attention must be given dur-
ing the cooking process. If the syrup solution is cooked too high or for too long of a time, water
will begin to evaporate and change the recipe. Only the syrup is cooked for a sorbet. Almost all
fruits have a pH that is acidic enough that bacteria cannot survive. Additionally the fresh flavor
of the fruit and bright colors are lost when heating.
Sorbet Method
1. Combine all dry ingredients and mix thoroughly.
2. Place water in saucepan and begin heating.
3. When the temperature reaches 104°F (40°C), add the dry ingredients to the water.
4. Heat the syrup to 185°F (85°C), while covered.
6. Allow the mixture to mature under refrigeration for 6 to 12 hours.
7. Using an immersion blender combine the purée and syrup.
8. Freeze in an ice cream machine according to the manufacturer’s instructions.
9. Extract sorbet from the machine into prefrozen containers, cover and freeze to –22°F (–30°C) to
stabilize the sorbet. Store at this temperature until needed for service.
10. Temper to 10°F (–12°C) for service.
Guidelines for Formulating a Sorbet

Sorbet can be created with as few as three ingredients: fruit purée or other flavor, granulated
sugar, and water. Increases in technology and availability of products have changed the way

s orbets are made. While there are not many components, the ingredient of the fruit alone
contains water, solids, and sugar. Each fruit requires its own formulation to create a
balanced recipe. If using fresh fruit, adjustments may need to be made throughout the sea-
son to accommodate different sugar and solid levels. In order to maintain consistent results,
it is recommended to use fruit purées for sorbets. Understanding how the ingredients and
fruit work together make it possible to create a sorbet recipe.
Ingredient Percentages for Sorbet Base of 1000 g Yield
Ingredient Range Grams

Fruit Purée (sweet) 40–60% 400–600 g
Fruit Purée (acidic) 25–40% 250–400 g
Solids 31–36% 310–360 g
Sugar (includes maximum 6% glucose powder) 28–33% 280–330 g
Stabilizer 0–1% 0–10 g
Lemon Juice 0–5% 0–50 g
Water
Solids in the recipe can range from 31% to 36%; this is a total of the solids in the fruit
purées, additional sugars, and stabilizer. The following table provides a reference for sugar and
solids percentage of fruits commonly used for sorbets. If the fruit is not listed on the chart, a
refractometer can easily identify the percentage of solids in a purée.
Sugar and Solid Percentages in Fresh Fruit
Fruit Sugar Solids Fruit Sugar Solids

Apple 10% 14% Mango 14% 16%
Apricot 9% 12% Orange 10% 12%
Banana 15% 24% Papaya 8% 14%
Black Currant 7% 18% Passion Fruit 11% 16%
Blackberry 7% 14% Peach 9% 10%
Blueberry 11% 15% Pear 10% 16%
Cherry 12% 18% Pineapple 9% 12%
Guava 9% 19% Raspberry 5% 14%
Lemon 3% 9% Strawberry 6% 11%
Lime 1% 10% Watermelon 7% 8%
To manufacture 1000 grams of fresh blueberry sorbet base identify the percentages of
each ingredient needed. For this recipe the following percentages were selected, with a target
of 35% solids. The sum of the solids from the purée, glucose powder, and stabilizer are used
to determine how much sugar is needed to meet the solid percentages. The quantity of lemon
juice in this recipe is negligible and will not have an impact on the final percentages; it is used
to enhance the flavor of the fruit. Once this is calculated the only remaining ingredient is
the water.

Fresh Blueberry Purée 400 g 40%
Sugar
Glucose Powder DE 40 30 g 3%
Stabilizer 5g 0.5%
Lemon Juice 20 g 2%
Water
Calculating solids:
Blueberry Purée 400 g × 0.15 = 60 g
Glucose Powder 30 g × 0.95 = 28.5 g
Stabilizer 5 g × 1.00 = 5 g
Total solids = 93.5 g
*Note: The 0.95 reference in the glucose line is derived from the Power of Sugar table
on p. 150.
The total solids needed for the blueberry sorbet were determined to be 30% or 350 grams.
To determine how much granulated sugar to add, subtract the total solids from 350. In some
instances, when the solids are required and sweetness does not need to be increased up to 2%
dextrose can be added to the recipe.
Granulated sugar = 350 g – 93.5 g = 256.5 g

Sugar 256.5 g 25.65%
Stabilizer 5g 0.5%
Lemon Juice 20 g 2%
Water
Calculating the amount of water is done in a similar fashion. The total of all ingredients,
711 grams is subtracted from the original required total of 1000 g.
Water needed = 1000 g – 711g = 289 g water.
Final Blueberry Sorbet Recipe

Sugar 256.5 g 25.65%
Stabilizer 5g 0.5%
Lemon Juice 20 g 2%
Water 289 g 28.9%
Total 1000.5 g 100%

It is recommended to calculate the AFP of the sorbet before proceeding to the next step.
After testing in the kitchen and evaluating the final product adjustments can be made to the
ingredients to achieve the desired texture.
Granita Method
1. Combine sugar and water.
2. Heat to dissolve sugar, cool syrup over an ice bath.
3. Combine syrup with flavorings.
4. Place mixture in a shallow pan in freezer and begin freezing.
5. Scrape mixture every 30 minutes until frozen.
Serving Churned Desserts

The process of making churned desserts requires careful detail to attention and an under-
standing of the processes and ingredients involved. This can also be extended to include
serving these items. An ice cream served at too cold of a temperature will be difficult to
scoop and too cold to reveal the full flavor. A service temperature that is too warm will not
provide an attractive presentation. The ideal serving temperature for ice cream and sorbet
is 10°F (–12°C).
A properly balanced recipe will give the ice cream and sorbet a soft texture making them
easy to present as a round scoop or quenelle. A quenelle is an oval-shaped scoop created
using a spoon. When scooping ice cream and sorbet the scoop or spoon should be placed in
warm water between scoops. This will help the scoop to pass through the ice cream as well as
release from the scoop when finished.
Still Frozen Desserts

Still frozen desserts are known by many names: parfait, soufflé glacé, bombe glacé, semi-
freddo, or mousse glacé. Some of these names have the same meaning just in a d ifferent
language: French, Italian, and even English. They all contain an egg product, and it may
even come down to the procedure of assembling the ingredients to set them apart. In the
United States, there are no regulations specifying the differences in these products. Each
of these products has unique textural differences as well as flavor profiles. This provides
the pastry chef the opportunity to use different frozen items to maximize the flavor of
their desserts.
Parfait
In the United States, a parfait is often thought of as a layered item served in a glass. A parfait is
composed of pâte à bombe, whipped cream, and flavorings. It is very similar to a mousse rec-
ipe, but to maintain the semi-frozen texture there is additional granulated sugar, around 30%
more. The use of egg yolks in this recipe adds texture and richness; it is best paired with strong
flavors. The additional fat can make the mouthfeel slightly heavier than the mousse glacé. Sub-
tle flavors like banana or peach may be difficult to use, but strong flavors like chocolate or even
vanilla work well with a parfait.
Still Frozen Desserts 165

Mousse Glacé or Semifreddo
In French the name mousse glacé literally translates to “frozen mousse”; in Italian, it is
known as semifreddo or “semi frozen.” This product tends to be lighter in texture and flavor.
The lightness comes from the use of a meringue, whipped cream, and flavorings. It is recom-
mended to use an Italian meringue, due to the egg whites being fully cooked and removing
any possible pathogens. A traditional Italian meringue uses 2 parts sugar to 1 part egg whites.
This amount of sugar makes it difficult to freeze. Reducing the amount of sugar will create a
product that will freeze and be the correct texture. The same process for making an Italian
meringue is followed. Using ingredients with less fat gives a light texture and does not mask
lighter flavors.
Soufflé Glacé
Soufflé glacé means “frozen soufflé.” There are many variations for this product. One constant
throughout all versions is that they contain alcohol, most commonly Grand Marnier. The base
recipes can be as simple as a meringue, cream, and flavorings, just like the mousse glacé but
containing more whipped cream. Other versions are made using a sabayon base, whipped
cream, and flavorings. Following the literal translation, the soufflé glacé is served in a style to
mimic that of the hot soufflé, rising out of a ramekin.
Bombe
Ice cream cakes are a popular item served in upscale pastry shops in the United States and
Europe. The name bombe translates to “bomb” in English, and it refers to the traditional
domed shape of ice cream cakes, also called entremet glacé. Baked Alaska would be an
example of a bombe. More elaborate versions could contain several frozen components: ice
cream, sorbet, coulis, and parfait. It is as much of an art to combine these techniques and
balance the flavors of all the recipes inside the bombe, just as much as it is to have the correct
balance of sugar to ensure when tempered the consistency of the cake is the same from one
layer to the next.

Recipes
Vanilla Ice Cream Chocolate Ice Cream
(Philadelphia Style)
Yield: 2 lb 2.9 oz (990 g)
Portions: 34
Portion size: 1 oz (28.35 g)
Portions: 35
Yield description: 34 scoops at 1 oz (28.35 g)
Milk 1 lb 1.64 oz 500 g Ingredients U.S. Metric
Milk 1 lb 7.14 oz 656 g
Sugar 4.94 oz 140 g
Milk Solids Nonfat 0.99 oz 28 g
Glucose Powder DE 40 1.13 oz 32 g
Sugar 1.98 oz 56 g
Inverted Sugar 1.98 oz 56 g
Ice Cream Stabilizer 0.11 oz 3g
Egg Yolk 3.17 oz 90 g
Chocolate 64% 6.77 oz 193 g
Procedure
Procedure
1. Combine, nonfat milk powder, sugar, and ice cream stabilizer.
1. Ice cream base process on page 158.
2. In a heavy-bottom saucepan, combine milk and inverted sugar.
3. Whisk dry ingredients into milk.
4. Heat to 185°F (85°C), while whisking.
5. Add chocolate and heat again to 189°F (87°C).
6. Emulsify and strain through a chinois and place on an ice bath.
7. Allow to mature for a minimum 6 hours under refrigeration.
Recipes 167
Gianduja Gelato Pistachio Gelato

Portion size: 1 oz (28.35 g) Portion size: 1 oz (28.35 g)
Yield description: 35 scoops at 1 oz (28.35 g) Yield description: 35 scoops at 1 oz (28.35 g)

Milk 1 lb 5.8 oz 618 g Milk 1 lb 3.75 oz 560 g
Heavy Cream 2.05 oz 58 g Cream 3.17 oz 90 g
Egg Yolks 2.4 oz 68 g Glucose Powder DE 40 1.41 oz 40 g
Gianduja Chocolate 3.53 oz 100 g Egg Yolks 1.76 oz 50 g
Ice Cream Stabilizer 0.07 oz 2g Pistachio Paste, unsweetened 3.53 oz 100 g
Procedure
1. Ice cream base process on page 158. Procedure
2. After pasteurizing add chocolate. 1. Ice cream base process on page 158.
3. Strain through a chinois and place on an ice bath. 2. Add pistachio paste after pasteurizing.
4. Mature for a minimum 6 hours under refrigeration. 3. Strain through a chinois and mature for a minimum 6 hours
under refrigeration.

Roasted Corn Ice Cream Brown Butter Ice Cream


Ingredients U.S. Metric Unsalted Butter 6 oz 170 g
Sweet Corn, roasted and scraped 4 oz 113 g Milk 1 lb 1.64 oz 500 g
Milk 12 oz 340 g Heavy Cream 6.17 oz 175 g
Heavy Cream 8.4 oz 238 g Sugar 4.9 oz 140 g
Egg Yolks 5 oz 142 g Glucose Powder DE 40 1.13 oz 32 g
Sugar 6 oz 170 g Milk Solids Nonfat 1.76 oz 50 g
Ice Cream Stabilizer 0.09 oz 2.5 g Ice Cream Stabilizer 0.11 oz 3g
Note: The roasted corn can be puréed into the ice cream base to increase Salt 0.04 oz 1g
the flavor.
Note: The flavor of the brown butter is steeped into the milk and cream.
Procedure
Procedure
1. Remove the husk from corn and roast at 425°F (220°C) until the
corn begins to gain color. 1. Brown butter in a saucepan.
2. Allow the corn to cool and cut the kernels off the cob. Using the 2. Cool slightly; add milk and cream.
back of a knife scrape the cob to remove the milk. 3. Steep overnight under refrigeration.
3. Scale 13 g of the roasted kernels and milk from the cob for the 4. Strain off butter and return milk and cream mixture to the pan
recipe. Reserve the cob for the recipe. the butter was browned in.
4. Heat milk, cream, half the sugar, corn cobs, and roasted corn 5. To finish follow the ice cream base process.
kernels and corn milk to a simmer.
5. Cover with plastic wrap and allow to steep overnight in the
refrigerator.
6. Strain corn solids from milk and scrape cobs again to remove
the milk and cream mixture. Press milk from corn kernels.
7. To finish follow the ice cream base process.
Recipes 169
Mango Ice Cream Strawberry Ice Cream


Milk 11.53 oz 327 g Milk 1 lb 4.1 oz 570 g
Heavy Cream 6.07 oz 172 g Heavy Cream 2.82 oz 80 g
Glucose Powder DE 40 1.41 oz 40 g Egg Yolks 2.47 oz 70 g
Milk Solids Nonfat 1.38 oz 39 g Ice Cream Stabilizer 0.14 oz 4g
Ice Cream Stabilizer 0.14 oz 4g Strawberry Purée 3.53 oz 100 g
Passion Fruit Purée 3.1 oz 88 g
Procedure

Procedure 2. After cooling blend in purée.
1. Ice cream base process on page 158. 3. Mature for a minimum 6 hours under refrigeration.
2. After cooling, blend in purées.
3. Mature for a minimum 6 hours under refrigeration.

Pineapple Sherbet Frozen Yogurt
Yield: 2 lb 5 oz (1068 g) Yield: 2 lb 2.7 oz (995.7 g)

Yield description: 37 scoops at 1 oz (28.35 g) Yield description: 35 portions at 1 oz (28.35 g)

Water 4.13 oz 117 g Greek Yogurt 2% fat 1 lb 14 oz 860 g
Glucose Powder DE 40 1.9 oz 54 g Glucose Syrup 1.98 oz 56 g
Ice Cream Stabilizer 0.13 oz 3.6 g Inverted Sugar 0.92 oz 26 g
Milk 7.83 oz 222 g Ice Cream Stabilizer 0.06 oz 1.7 g
Pineapple Purée 1 lb 1.78 oz 504 g
Lemon juice 0.32 oz 9g Procedure
1. Combine sugar and ice cream stabilizer.

2. In a heavy-bottom saucepan, combine yogurt and sugar mix-
Procedure ture with a whisk.
1. Combine sugar, glucose powder, and stabilizer. 3. Add glucose and inverted to saucepan.
2. Whisk the dry ingredients into to water and heat to 185°F (85°C). 4. Heat to 150°F (65°C).
3. Cool syrup on an ice bath. 5. Mix with immersion blender.
4. Add syrup to milk, cream, pineapple and lemon purée, emulsify. 6. Allow mixture to mature for a minimum 6 hours under
refrigeration.
5. Allow mixture to mature a minimum 6 hours under refrigeration.
Recipes 171
Lemon Mosto Olive Oil Ice Cream Vanilla Parfait
Yield: 2 lb 3 oz (1017.5 g) Yield: 2 lb 6 oz (1090 g)

Portion size: 1 oz (28.35 g) Portion size: 3 oz (85 g)
Yield description: 35 scoops at 1 oz (28.35 g) Yield description: 13 portions at 3 oz (85 g)

Milk 1 lb 0.93 oz 480 g Water 2.5 oz 70 g
Cream 4.94 oz 140 g Sugar 8.8 oz 250 g
Sugar 4.94 oz 140 g Yolks 6.7 oz 190 g
Egg Yolks 5.64 oz 160 g Heavy Cream, whipped 1 lb 6.9 oz 650 g
to medium peaks
Lemon Mosto Olive Oil 3.35 oz 95 g
Ice Cream Stabilizer 0.09 oz 2.5 g
Note: Cook pâte à bombe syrup with vanilla beans; remove before
adding sugar to the whipping yolks.
Procedure
Procedure
2. After cooling the base incorporate the lemon mosto olive oil 1. Combine water, sugar, and vanilla beans in a saucepan.
using an immersion blender. Slowly stream the oil while mixing 2. Make a pâte à bombe with the egg yolks and sugar mixture.
to emulsify. 3. When pâte à bombe is completely cooled, fold in cream.
3. Allow mixture to mature for a minimum 6 hours under 4. Place in molds and freeze immediately.
refrigeration.
Chocolate Parfait
Portions: 13

Water 1.1 oz 30 g
Sugar 4.7 oz 132 g
Whole Eggs 4.7 oz 132 g
Heavy Cream, whipped 15.9 oz 450 g
to medium peaks
Chocolate 63%, melted 11 oz 312 g
Procedure
1. Pâte à bombe mousse method on page 130.

2. Fill molds and freeze immediately.

Banana Mousse Glacé Cappuccino Semifreddo


Heavy Cream, whipped 14.8 oz 420 g Semifreddo Pastry Cream
to soft peaks
Milk 7.9 oz 224 g
Egg White 6.8 oz 192 g
Sugar 2.2 oz 63 g
Sugar 6.8 oz 192 g
Water 2.8 oz 80 g
Eggs 0.74 oz 21 g
Banana Purée 14.1 oz 400 g
Regular Clear Gel 0.74 oz 21 g
Lime Zest 0.1 oz 3g
Cappuccino Semifreddo
Pastry Cream 12.3 oz 350 g
Procedure
1. Make an Italian meringue with sugar, water, and egg whites
Sugar 3.5 oz 100 g
(procedure on page 253).
Water 0.9 oz 25 g
2. Fold banana purée into meringue.
Coffee Extract 3.5 oz 100 g
3. Fold cream and lime zest into meringue mixture.
Coffee Liquor 1.8 oz 50 g
4. Fill mold and freeze immediately.
Heavy Cream, whipped to 1 lb 1.6 oz 500 g
medium peaks
Procedure
1. Prepare the Semifreddo Pastry Cream using the pastry cream

method on page 123.
2. Make an Italian meringue with sugar, water, and egg whites.
3. Mix pastry cream with a whisk to loosen consistency; add
coffee extract.
4. Fold whipped cream into pastry cream.
5. Fold meringue into pastry cream mixture.
6. Fill molds and freeze immediately.
Recipes 173
Soufflé Glacé Lemon Sorbet

Portion size: 3 oz (85 g) Portion size: 1 oz (28.35 g)
Yield description: 13 portions at 3 oz (85 g) Yield description: 34 scoops at 1 oz (28.35 g)

Whole Eggs 6.3 oz 180 g Lemon Purée 8.82 oz 250 g
Egg Yolks 5.1 oz 145 g Water 15.87 oz 450 g
Heavy Cream, whipped to 14.8 oz 420 g Glucose Powder DE 40 1.41 oz 40 g
medium stiff peaks
Trimoline 0.71 oz 20 g
Candied Orange Peel (p. 312), 2.5 oz 72 g
chopped fine
Sorbet Stabilizer 0.11 oz 3g
Grand Marnier 2.1 oz 60 g
Procedure
Procedure
1. Sorbet method on page 162.
1. Rinse candied peel in cold water and macerate in Grand M
arnier
overnight.
2. Combine eggs, egg yolks, and sugar; whisk over a bain marie.
3. Cook to 160°F (70°C).
4. Place in a mixer with a whisk and mix on high until cooled Raspberry Sorbet
completely.
5. Fold in cream, zest, and remaining Grand Marnier.
6. Mold and freeze immediately. Yield: 2 lb 6 oz (1078 g)
Portions: 38

Raspberry Purée 1 lb 5.16 oz 600 g
Sugar 5.08 oz 144 g
Sorbet Stabilizer 0.04 oz 1.2 g
Water 10.48 oz 297 g
Procedure

Strawberry Sorbet Passion Fruit Sorbet


Strawberry Purée 1 lb 6.93 oz 650 g Passion Fruit Purée 14.28 oz 405 g
Glucose Powder DE 40 1.16 oz 33 g Glucose Powder DE 40 1.86 oz 53 g
Sorbet Stabilizer 0.05 oz 1.3 g Sorbet Stabilizer 0.06 oz 1.6 g
Water 7.9 oz 224 g Water 11.99 oz 340 g
Procedure Procedure
1. Sorbet method on page 162. 1. Sorbet method on page 162.
Green Apple Sorbet Mango Sorbet

Portion size: 1 oz (28 g) Portion size: 1 oz (28.35 g)
Yield description: 36 scoops at 1 oz (28 g) Yield description: 35 scoops at 1 oz (28.35 g)

Green Apple Purée 1 lb 5.16 oz 600 g Mango Purée 1 lb 1.63 oz 500 g
Glucose Powder DE 40 1.09 oz 30 g Glucose Powder DE 40 1.76 oz 50 g
Sorbet Stabilizer 0.04 oz 1.2 g Sorbet Stabilizer 0.04 oz 1g
Procedure Procedure
1. Sorbet method on page 162. 1. Sorbet method on page 162.
Recipes 175
Coconut Sorbet Roasted Banana Sorbet
Yield: 2 lb 3.2 oz (999.6 g) Yield: 2 lb 6 oz (1096 g)


Coconut Purée 14.28 oz 405 g Roasted Banana Purée
Sugar 6.35 oz 180 g Bananas, ripe 2 lb 3.2 oz 1000 g
Glucose Powder DE 40 1.76 oz 50 g Cinnamon Sticks 2 each 2 each
Sorbet Stabilizer 0.06 oz 1.6 g Star Anise 2 each 2 each
Water 12.8 oz 363 g Vanilla Bean, used 4 each 4 each
Roasted Banana Sorbet
Roasted Banana Purée 1 lb 1.64 oz 500 g
Procedure
Sugar 6.35 oz 180 g
Sorbet Stabilizer 0.04 oz 1g
Water 13.05 oz 370 g
Apricot Sorbet
Procedure
Yield: 2 lb 3 oz (993 g) 1. Break spices into pieces and stud bananas through the skin.
Portions: 35 2. Roast on a paper-lined sheet pan at 375°F (190°C) until peels
Portion size: 1 oz (28.35 g) become dark brown, almost black.
Yield description: 35 scoops at 1 oz (28.35 g) 3. Cool and remove peels and spices, purée.
Apricot Purée 1 lb 4.6 oz 585 g
Sugar 4.13 oz 117 g
Sorbet Stabilize 0.04 oz 1.2 g
Water 9.21 oz 261 g
Procedure

Cherry Sorbet Cherry Granita

Portion size: 1 oz (28.35 g) Portion size: 2 oz (56 oz)
Yield description: 36 scoops at 1 oz (28.35 g) Yield description: 16 servings at 2 oz (56 oz)

Cherry Purée 1 lb 8.69 oz 700 g Sour Cherry Purée 1 lb 0.9 oz 480 g
Sugar 6.91 oz 196 g White Wine 8.5 oz 240 g
Glucose Powder DE 40 1.73 oz 49 g Honey 4.2 oz 120 g
Sorbet Stabilizer 0.02 oz 0.7 g Sugar 4.2 oz 120 g
Water 3.56 oz 101 g
Procedure Procedure
1. Sorbet method on page 162. 1. Warm 25% of the puree with the sugar to dissolve the sugar.
2. Follow the Granita method on page 165 to finish.
Tea Granita
Portions: 18
Portion size: 2 oz (56 oz)
Yield description: 18 servings at 2 oz (56 oz)

Water 1 lb 13.6 oz 840 g
Tea 0.3 oz 8.5 g
Sugar 6.3 oz 180 g
Procedure
1. Combine water, sugar, lemon, and tea.

2. Heat to a simmer and allow to steep for 15 minutes.
3. Strain and cool.
4. Place in freezer and stir every 30 minutes until frozen.
Recipes 177
Apple Cider Granita Lemon Granita

Yield description: 17 servings at 2 oz (56 g) Yield Description: 19 servings at 2 oz (56 g)

Water 6.3 oz 180 g Water 1 lb 10.5 oz 750 g
Apple Cider 1 lb 8.7 oz 700 g Lemon Juice 8.8 oz 250 g
Calvados 0.35 oz 10 g
Procedure
Procedure 1. Granita method on page 165.
1. Granita method on page 165.

Summary
Formulating frozen desserts is no easy task. However, offering custom- v ariety of frozen desserts from still frozen to churned will showcase the
ized products with great flavor and textures will set the establishment knowledge of the pastry chef. Frozen desserts give us a way to serve a
apart from the rest. Understanding the processes and balance of the little nostalgia while helping to create new experiences.
recipes is critical to producing an excellent product. Offering a wide
Troubleshooting for Frozen Desserts
Cooked ice cream base is lumpy and curdled. Thermometer is not correct; recalibrate thermometer and cook over
lower heat.
Ice cream has a coarse texture when extracted from machine. Product was overchurned, and fat has separated from the mix.
Ice cream has a mousse like airy texture. Too much fat is in the recipe.
Ice cream melts too quickly. 1. Base was not cooked properly.
2. Not enough stabilizer.
3. Not enough total solids.
4. Freezer temperature is not low enough.
Ice cream/sorbet is too hard. 1. Freezer temperature is too low.

2. Not enough sugar/solids in the recipe.
Ice cream/sorbet is icy. 1. Freezer temperature fluctuates.

2. Ice cream machine does not freeze fast enough or turn fast enough.
3. There is not enough sugar in the recipe.
Ice cream/sorbet has a gummy texture. Too much stabilizer.
Frozen sorbet has a syrupy liquid in the bottom of the container. Too much sugar; the water remains frozen and the sugar does not.
Key Terms
Churned Dextrose equivalent Parfait
Still frozen Invert sugar Mousse glacé
Overrun Brix Semifreddo
Free water Nappe Soufflé glacé
Sweetening power (SP) Pasteurization Bombe
Antifreezing power (AFP) High temperature/Short time (HTST)

1. Describe the process for cooking an ice cream base. 4. Why is it important to know the different sweetening powers
2. Explain the difference between dextrose and powdered glucose. of sugars?
3. What are the benefits of using stabilizers and emulsifiers in fro- 5. Why is air a critical ingredient in the production of frozen desserts?
zen desserts?

CHAPTER 7
Cake Mixing and Baking

The Primrose Path by Ogden Nash goes so far as to say, “. . . piece of cake.” This implies that
cake is easy to make and conjures pleasant thoughts, and part of this is true. All throughout
our lives, cake is served at celebrations. It is the centerpiece at weddings and birthdays. Often-
times, the focus of the cake is the look—flavor and texture must be created and designed to
enhance the exterior. Proficiency in cake mixing and baking will make certain the cake tastes
as good as it looks.
LEARNING OBJECTIVES

1. Understand the function of ingredients in cakes.
2. Produce a variety of high-fat and low-fat cakes.
3. Demonstrate the creaming and egg foam methods.
4. Identify cake defects and how to resolve them.
5. Determine the doneness of cakes.
Introduction to Cakes
There are many varieties of cakes; some are light while others can be dense and chewy. No
matter what the final texture is, common ingredients are used throughout the production of
cakes: eggs, flour, sugar, leaveners, and fats. Cakes are also used in many finished products
in the pastry kitchen. This chapter will help provide a thorough understanding of ingredient
functions, mixing methods, and proper baking skills that the pastry chef needs to develop the
proper texture when baking cakes.
Ingredients
Cakes can be made from as few as four ingredients: fat, sugar, flour, and eggs. While others may
contain 12 or more ingredients, this does not mean it will be a better cake—sometimes simple
is better. The key is to understand how the ingredients function in the recipe, and know what
the function of the cake is in the pastry. In some applications, the cake is a thin layer on the bot-
tom of a dessert so it can be easily transferred without sticking. Other instances may require a
tender layer inserted into an entremet that can be cut cleanly for service and provide texture.
Knowledge of cake ingredients will help to make the proper selection.
181
Fats
Cakes utilize many different fats, including butter, shortening, high-ratio shortening, liquid
shortenings, and oil. One of the main functions of the fats is to tenderize the cake by shorten-
ing the gluten and providing moisture. Fats are responsible for incorporating air, creating the
smooth fluffy texture desired in high-fat cakes. Flavor can also be impacted by the type of fat
used; for example, butter will provide excellent flavor (but carries a higher price).
When scaling a recipe, be sure to use the fat required. While butter and shortening can be
easily exchanged, the flavor and feel of the cake will be different. Shortenings melt at 120°F
(49°C), and since this is higher than body temperature, they can coat the mouth with fat. High-
ratio shortening is typically used in cakes that contain a higher quantity of sugar and liquids in
relation to the flour. The two-stage method commonly uses high-ratio shortening to assist in
the emulsification of the additional ingredients. Liquid shortenings (Fluid Flex, Jilk, etc.) are
specifically designed for cake production. These products contain additional emulsifiers and
produce a light, fluffy cake. The recipes were designed to use these fats, and mixing times and
speeds must be observed. Regardless of personal preferences, the fat specified in a recipe is the
fat that must be used.
Sugars
There are many different forms of sugars available, and each one has its own individual prop-
erties. Sugars add sweetness, color, and moisture to the cake and help with maintaining a ten-
der final product. The benefits of sugar begin during the mixing stage.
In the creaming method, the crystalline structure of the sugar helps to create air cells in
the fat. As the fat and granulated sugar are mixed together, the grains cut the fat and create air
cells. Up to 25% of the leavening in a cake can come from the properly formed air cells. During
the mixing of foamed cakes, sugars begin to denature the eggs, ensuring that a stable foam is
formed. Sugars also increase the temperature that egg proteins coagulate. This increase allows
the cake additional time to rise, adding to the light texture of the cake.
The most commonly used sugar in the production of cakes is granulated sugar. Corn syrup,
glucose syrup, Trimoline, and honey are used in some recipes along with or in place of gran-
ulated sugar. All sugars are hygroscopic; they have the ability to attract and hold water dur-
ing the baking process and continue to attract moisture after baking. Inverted sugars have
increased hydroscopicity, which prevents the cake from becoming dry. Moisture is lost during
the baking process—keeping more moisture in the cake will help to extend shelf life. Increased
shelf life is not the only advantage; absorbing water means that it is not available to the flour.
This reduces the flour’s ability to form gluten.
When substituting sugars, refer to the Power of Sugar table on page 150 in Chapter 6 to
determine the sweetening power of the different sugars. It is not recommended to substitute
liquid sweeteners for dry sweeteners, as this will change the balance of the recipe.
Flours (Driers)
Flours, or driers, are any ingredients added to a recipe that absorb water. A wide range of ingre-
dients are covered under this group: flours, cocoa powder, corn starch, potato starch, milk
powder, and nut flours. This is a wide range of ingredients; careful consideration must go into
substituting one ingredient for another. Each flour has a different protein content and particle
size. Smaller particles have increased surface area. Flours aid in the absorption of liquids and
creating the final crumb texture of the cake. Higher-protein flours are not typically used in the
production of cakes, as they tend to create a tough final product.
In most cases, flours are added toward the end of the mixing process to absorb liquids
and prevent developing gluten. It is the goal of cake making to control the amount of gluten
182 C H A PT E R 7 Cake Mixing and Baking

developed; while some gluten is needed it is the starch that will provide structure to the cake.
During the baking process, as temperatures approach 120 to 140°F (50 to 60°C), starches begin
to swell. Water absorption continues until the starches begin to set at 170°F (70°C). At this point,
the shape of the cake will not change as the starches coagulate.
In recent years, there has been an increase in people diagnosed with celiac disease, which
is an intolerance to gluten. In addition, others are choosing to live gluten free. The combination
of these has increased the need and desire for products that are gluten free. There are com-
mercially available flour replacers. However, they can easily be made with starches, nut flours,
and rice flours. Some adjustment to the fat and sugars in the recipe may be needed to achieve
the proper texture. Chapter 4 includes a recipe for a flour replacer that is flexible and works in
many recipes.
Eggs
The role of eggs in cakes is multifaceted—color, flavor, emulsifier, structure, or leavener can all
be achieved with an egg. The type of cake and recipe determine which part of the egg is used
and how the egg is prepared for the cake. Creamed cakes normally call for whole eggs, while
foamed cakes can use whole eggs, whites, yolks, or any combination of these.
A cake is an emulsion of fat and water. Creamed cakes start with fat and sugar. In the next
step, eggs are added to the fat mixture, creating an emulsion. Eggs are mostly water, and the
fat surrounds the water. When the eggs are added, air cells are formed in the emulsion that
expand during baking. If this water-in-fat emulsion is broken, the water surrounds the fat. A
broken emulsion will reduce the final volume and the cake will have a greasy feel to the touch.
Warming the eggs slightly will help prevent this from happening. When incorporating eggs into
a recipe, it is important to warm the eggs to 72°F (22°C).
Warmed eggs will also produce a more stable foam for low-fat cakes. In low-fat cakes, the
air cells incorporated during the mixing process perform all of the leavening. Developing the
proper structure in the egg foam is done slowly, creating small stable bubbles.
The process of making a genoise starts with whipping eggs and sugar. Start by whipping
the eggs on a lower speed to begin denaturing the proteins. Similar to mixing bread, the pro-
teins of an egg are tightly coiled and need to be relaxed and uncoil. Once the egg proteins
transition into long strands, they are capable of trapping more air, which results in a lighter
texture. Once the mixture has reached ribbon stage, mix at a lower speed to further stabilize
the mixture. This will also remove any large bubbles that may have formed. The stability of the
foam is critical in developing the final texture and volume in the cake.
Leaveners
In high-fat cakes, an extra boost of leavening is needed to produce a light cake. This is achieved
through the use of chemical leaveners. Baking soda and baking powder are the most common
leaveners for cakes. Both of these products release carbon dioxide into the cake mix, but how
they do it is different.
Baking soda reacts with acids in the recipe to release carbon dioxide—heat is not needed
to produce the reaction. Once the recipe is combined, the acid and baking soda start a chemical
reaction that cannot be stopped. The carbon dioxide is released, and because there is not an
endless supply, the product must be baked immediately. Proper mise en place is important
when working with baking soda leavened products to maximize the volume of these products.
The result of combining baking soda with a dry acid is baking powder. Baking powder
is available in several forms, with double acting being most common. Products made with
double-acting baking powder require heat to activate the leavening. A small amount of carbon
dioxide is produced when mixed; the remainder is released during the baking process. This
reduces the need to quickly pan and bake the cakes, while still providing the same leavening.
Ingredients 183
Substitution of baking soda and baking powder at the same quantities will not yield the
same results. When substituting baking powder for baking soda, increase the quantity by three.
If the recipe originally calls for 1 oz (28 g) baking soda, the correct amount of baking powder
would be 3 oz (84 g). When replacing baking powder with baking soda, combine 2 parts cream
of tartar with 1 part baking soda. At this point, scale the same quantity of the homemade baking
powder, as specified in the recipe.
Main Categories
Cakes can be broken down into two main categories: high fat and low fat. Cakes that are higher
in fat are the preferred cake for the American palate. The high percentage of fat and sugar in
these cakes creates a soft texture and sweet flavor. In some instances, high-fat cakes are too
tender for slicing into thin layers—this is where low-fat cakes come in. Low-fat cakes are a more
durable and resilient cake and can be sliced thin. Traditionally, low-fat cakes are brushed with
flavored syrups to sweeten and add moisture.
There are many decisions to make when selecting a cake for particular job. While a low-fat
cake can be sliced thin and layered, the same can be done with a high-fat cake such as devil’s
food cake. The high fat content of the devil’s food cake may not make it ideal for slicing into thin
layers, but it is possible. Deciding which cake is the correct selection should not be an issue of
what is easier to work with but rather, which tastes best with the flavor combinations. You also
must consider if the cake will hold up to its intended use.
Guidelines
Considering that there is a wide variety of cakes, with basic mixing methods, here are some key
points to remember when making cakes:
1. The batter should be a smooth, homogenous mixture. Proper emulsification and dry
ingredient distribution will help to ensure the proper final texture.
2. When mixing, all ingredients should be 72°F (22°C). At this temperature, eggs are more sta-
ble, develop more volume, and emulsify better with fats. One cold ingredient added to the
rest of the ingredients will cool the recipe down and may make it difficult to mix together
and achieve the correct volume.
3. Proper mise en place of ingredients, equipment and oven temperature must be done at
the start of the process. Refer to individual recipes for pan preparation and oven tempera-
ture. Some cakes need to go directly into the oven; waiting for an oven to come to temper-
ature will reduce the final volume of the cakes.
4. Moving cakes too soon in the baking process may cause the cake to collapse. There is no
need to move a baking cake unless it needs to be turned to develop even color. Moving a
cake too early in the baking process may disturb the proteins and starches that have not
baked and cause the cake to collapse.
5. Thin cakes need to be baked at higher temperatures. Baking these cakes at low temper-
atures increases the moisture loss, resulting in a dry cake. Larger cakes bake at lower
temperatures, allowing the cake to bake to the center while properly coloring the outside
of the cake.
6. When testing for doneness, high-fat cakes pull away from the sides of the pans. Sponge
cakes should feel soft and push back against the hand when gently pressed. Cake testers
that remove cleanly from the cake can be used, although sight and touch are the preferred

methods. Testing of thin cakes is done by carefully lifting the parchment paper with an off-
set pallet knife; browning on the bottom of the cake is an indication of doneness.
7. Properly baked cakes need to remain on cooling racks to completely cool. Wrapping warm
cakes traps too much moisture and causes a sticky cake.
High-Fat Cake
High-fat cakes provide a soft texture that many U.S. customers think of when they think of
cake. The texture of a high-fat cake may bring back memories of birthday celebrations or wed-
dings. These cakes are characterized as having a soft texture and being tender, sweet, moist,
and flavorful. Primarily, high-fat cakes are mixed using the creaming method, although some
procedures use the whip.
Creaming Method
1. Prepare pans: Grease pan bottoms and sides. Line the bottom of the pan with parchment
paper and lightly grease the paper.
2. Scale ingredients and allow them to warm to 72°F (22°C).
3. Mix fat and sugar with a paddle attachment until light and fluffy at medium high speed.
4. Add the eggs in three additions. Between each addition, scrape the bowl and paddle
thoroughly.
5. Add the sifted dry ingredients in four parts, alternating with the wet ingredients in three
parts. Be sure to end with the last addition of dry ingredients. Alternating between wet and
dry ingredients allows the flour to absorb the additional quantity of wet ingredients, while
not overdeveloping the gluten.
Two-Stage Method
paper and lightly grease the paper.
3. Sift flour, leaveners, and salt, and combine with emulsified shortening.
4. Mix with a paddle attachment 2 minutes on low speed, and scrape.
5. Mix for 2 more minutes on low speed.
6. Add the sugar and mix for 4 minutes on low speed.
7. Combine remaining liquid ingredients in three additions, scraping the bowl between addi-
tions. This stage mixes for a total of 5 minutes.
Liquid Shortenings
paper and lightly grease the paper. Preheat oven to 325°F (165°C).
3. Place wet ingredients in bowl with whip and add sifted dry ingredients.
4. Mix to combine and scrape bowl and attachments.
5. Whip on high for 4 minutes and scrape.
6. Continue mixing for 3 minutes on medium.
Main Categories 185

Low-Fat Cakes
Low-fat cakes (for example, cakes prepared using the sponge method, the separation
foam method, the jaconde method, the chiffon method, or the angel food method) uti-
lize egg foam to leaven the cake and create the final texture. The high percentage of eggs in
these cakes results in a final product that is drier and firmer than a high-fat cake. While this
may be viewed as a negative, since most people are used to the soft, moist high-fat cakes,
it is actually a benefit and allows the cake to be used in different ways. Egg-foam-based
cakes also have an eggy flavor associated with them when eaten alone. Since the cake is
drier, additional flavoring can be added in the form of flavored syrups. Alcohol, fruit, and
even aromatic herbs can be added to the simple syrup to infuse another layer of flavor
into the cake. The texture of the cake makes it ideal for slicing thin layers to use as a base
for a dessert, an internal layer and even a decorative sponge to wrap around the outside
of a cake.
When preparing low-fat cakes, all preparations must be done before mixing begins. Due to
the fact that these cakes do not contain chemical leaveners, they must be mixed, panned, and
baked immediately to obtain the correct volume. Any delays between the stages will result in
lost volume and dense cakes.
When preparing pans, take care to not grease the sides of the pans. Low-fat cakes are very
fragile during the baking and cooling stages. As the cake bakes and rises, it sticks to the sides
of the pan. Sticking to the side provides support to the delicate cake structure. Many low-fat
cakes are turned upside down during cooling to allow the cake to hang in the pan. Additional
moisture evaporates, and sugars and fats become solids as the cake cools and give the cake
structure. Greasing the sides of the pan would cause the cake to fall out of the pan and collapse
under its own weight.
Sponge Method
1. Prepare pans by lining with parchment paper; a small amount of fat may be used to pre-
vent the paper from moving in the bottom of the pan.
2. Sift dry ingredients and begin melting butter.
3. Combine eggs and sugar; warm over a bain marie to 110 to 120°F (43 to 50°C) while stirring
constantly.
4. Transfer warmed egg mixture to stand mixer and mix on high for 7 minutes.
5. Reduce speed to medium for 3 minutes.
6. Whip on speed one for 1 minute.
7. Remove from mixer and fold in dry ingredients in four additions.
8. Add a small amount of the batter to the hot melted butter; mix with a whisk to emulsify.
9. Fold the butter mixture into the cake batter.
10. Fill cake pans three-fourths of the way and bake immediately.
Note: When adding butter to the cake batter, it must be hot. The eggs cool during whipping,
and the remaining ingredients are room temperature; this is enough to cool the butter too
quickly. If the butter is not hot, it will not be evenly distributed inside the batter and may cause
the cake to have a greasy feel.
Note also: Combining the butter with some of the cake batter and emulsifying prevents
the butter from sinking to the bottom of the mixing bowl. Additional folding is necessary if the
butter is not added properly, resulting in lost volume.

FIGURE 7.1 Butter properly distributed in cake FIGURE 7.2 Butter not properly incorporated in
batter: Melting the butter completely will properly cake batter: Butter that is not heated enough will cool
distribute the butter evenly through the cake batter. quickly and become solid. This can lead to poor cake
structure and a greasy cake.
Separation Foam
1. Prepare pans by lining with parchment paper; a small amount of fat may be used to pre-
vent the paper from moving in the bottom of the pan.
2. Sift dry ingredients and begin melting butter.
3. Whip egg yolks and sugar on high speed to ribbon stage, approximately 10 minutes.
4. Make a common meringue with remaining sugar and egg whites.
5. Fold meringue into yolk mixture in three additions.
6. Fold in sifted dry ingredients in four additions.
9. Fill cake pans three-fourths of the way and bake immediately.
Note: Cakes made using the separation foaming method have increased volume and flex-
ibility over the sponge method. The egg whites are allowed to reach maximum volume due to
whipping without the yolk.
Jaconde Method
1. Prepare sheet pans by lining with silpat.
3. Combine eggs, powdered sugar, flour, and almond flour, and whip on high speed for
10 minutes.
4. Make a common meringue with sugar and egg whites.
5. Fold meringue into egg mixture.
8. Spread into prepared cake pans and bake immediately.
Main Categories 187

FIGURE 7.3 Properly whipped meringue (left) and overwhipped meringue (right)
Chiffon Method
1. Prepare pans by lining with parchment paper.
3. Sift flour, baking powder, salt, and half the sugar.
4. Combine oil, egg yolks, water, and flavorings; add the sifted dry ingredients and mix until
smooth.
5. Make a common merinque with egg whites and remaining sugar.
6. Fold meringue into flour mixture in three additions.
7. Pan and bake immediately.
Angel Food Method

2. Sift flour, salt, and first quantity of sugar.
3. Combine cream of tartar and a small amount of the second sugar with egg white; mix on
low for 3 minutes to break down egg whites.
4. Turn the mixer speed up; add the remaining sugar when the egg whites have increased four
times the original volume.
5. Continue whipping at medium high until whites become the consistency of shaving
cream.
6. Fold dry ingredients in four additions.
7. Pan and bake immediately.

Troubleshooting for Cakes
Butter curdles during 1. Ingredients are too cold. Ingredients warmed to room temperature will incorporate better.
mixing. 2. Liquids added too quickly. Add liquids more slowly.
Cake crust is too dark. 1. Oven temperature was too high. Reduce oven temperature.
2. Cake baked for too long of a time. Reduce baking time.
3. Too much sugar in the recipe. Check that all ingredients are scaled accurately.
Crust color is too light. 1. Oven temperature is too low. Increase oven temperature.
2. Cake did not bake long enough. Increase baking time.
Cake top cracks during baking. Oven temperature was too high. Reduce oven temperature.
Cake is heavy. 1. Oven temperature was not high enough. Increase oven temperature
2. There was not enough leavener. Check that all ingredients are scaled accurately.
3. Cake was improperly mixed. Review mixing procedure.
Irregular crumb, large holes Cake is overmixed. Reduce mixing time.

are apparent.
Cake collapses while baking 1. May have been moved before structure was set. Do not move the cake during the initial stages of baking.
or cooling. 2. There was too much chemical leavener. Check that all ingredients are scaled accurately.
Cake has poor flavor. 1. Check quality of ingredients. Make sure you are using good ingredients and they are scaled accurately.
2. Improper formula. Check formula if increasing the yield to make sure all ingredients are converted
accurately.
Cake has uneven shape. 1. The oven is not level. Check if oven or racks are level.
2. Batter was not spread evenly. Make sure batter is spread evenly before baking.
3. Improperly distributed leavener. Sift the leavener(s) with the dry ingredients to evenly disperse through
the final recipe.
Main Categories 189

Recipes
Yellow Cake (Liquid Shortening) Chocolate Cake (Liquid Shortening)

Portion size: One 10-in. cake Portion size: One 10-in. cake
Yield description: Two 10-in. cakes Yield description: Two 10-in. cakes

Sugar 1 lb 4.5 oz 580 g 117.1 Sugar 1 lb 2.75 oz 531 g 144.2
Cake Flour 1 lb 1.5 oz 495 g 100 Cake Flour 13 oz 369 g 100
Baking Powder 0.75 oz 21 g 4.3 Baking Powder 0.9 oz 25.5 g 6.9
Salt 0.5 oz 14 g 2.8 Salt 0.38 oz 10.7 g 2.9
Whole Eggs 1 lb 8 oz 680 g 137.3 Whole Eggs 1 lb 8 oz 680 g 184.6
Milk 7.5 oz 212 g 42.8 Milk 7.5 oz 213 g 57.7
Liquid Shortening 9 oz 255 g 51.5 Liquid Shortening 9.4 oz 266 g 72.3
Vanilla Paste 0.25 oz 7g 1.4 Cocoa Powder 2.8 oz 79 g 21.5
Baking Soda 0.2 oz 5.6 g 1.5
Procedure
1. Combine all ingredients in a mixer with whip attachment, and Procedure

scrape bowl. 1. Combine all ingredients in a mixer with whip attachment, and
2. Whip on high for 4 minutes; scrape bowl. scrape bowl.
3. Whip on medium for 3 minutes; scrape bowl. 2. Whip on high for 4 minutes; scrape bowl.
4. Place the batter into two prepared 10-in. cake pans. 3. Whip on medium for 3 minutes; scrape bowl.
5. Bake at 325°F (160°C) for 25 to 30 minutes. 4. Place the batter into two prepared 10-in. cake pans.

High Ratio Cake Devil’s Food Cake


Sugar 1 lb 3.9 oz 565 g 100 Cocoa Powder 2.9 oz 82 g 23.4
Salt 0.5 oz 15 g 2.7 Boiling Water 12.5 oz 354 g 101.1
High-Ratio 9.5 oz 270 g 47.8 Whole Eggs 7.1 oz 200 g 57.1
Shortening
Vanilla Paste 0.4 oz 12 g 3.4
Baking Powder 1.1 oz 30 g 5.3
Cake Flour 12.3 oz 350 g 100
Cake Flour 1 lb 3.9 oz 565 g 100
Sugar 15.8 oz 450 g 128.6
Milk 8.1 oz 230 g 40.7
Baking Soda 0.2 oz 5g 1.4
Egg Yolks 1.9 oz 55 g 9.7
Salt 0.2 oz 7g 2
Eggs 7.9 oz 225 g 39.8
Butter, softened 12 oz 340 g 97.1
Bittersweet Chocolate 64% 2.3 oz 65 g 18.8
Procedure
1. Combine and sift dry ingredients. Procedure

2. Combine whole eggs, egg whites, and milk.
1. Bring water to a boil.
3. With the paddle attachment, combine the shortening, dry
2. Whisk water into cocoa powder and allow to cool.
ingredients, and one-third of milk and egg mixture for 4 min-
utes on medium speed. At the end of the mixing time, scrape 3. Combine eggs and 3 oz (85 g) of cocoa powder mixture.
the bowl and paddle. 4. In a mixing bowl fitted with a paddle attachment, combine re-
4. Add another third of the milk and egg mixture; mix for two min- maining dry ingredients and remaining cocoa powder mixture;
utes on medium speed. Scrape well. mix until combined.
5. Add the remaining milk and egg mixture; continue mixing for 2 5. Add butter.
more minutes. 6. Mix on medium speed for 90 seconds.
6. Place the batter into two prepared 10-in. cake pans. 7. Gradually add egg and cocoa powder mixture, scraping be
7. Bake at 350°F (180°C) 25 to 30 minutes. tween additions.
8. Add melted chocolate.
9. Mix on medium for 1 minute.
10. Place the batter into two prepared 10-in. cake pans.
11. Bake at 350°F (180°C) for 35 minutes.
Recipes 191
Carrot Cake Genoise


Carrots, peeled, 1 lb 15 oz 880 g 295.3 Eggs 1 lb 4 oz 567 g 208.3
finely grated
Sugar 11 oz 312 g 114.5
Salt 0.5 oz 14 g 4.7
Honey 1.5 oz 42.5 g 15.6
Brown Sugar 1 lb 5 oz 595 g 2
Pastry Flour 9.6 oz 272 g 100
Cinnamon 0.16 oz 4.5 g 1.5
Potato Starch 2.6 oz 74 g 27.1
Butter, melted 1 oz 28 g 10.4
Baking Powder 0.3 oz 8.5 g 2.9
Vegetable Oil 1 lb 3.5 oz 553 g 185.6
Walnuts, toasted 10.5 oz 298 g 100 Procedure
and chopped
1. Sponge method.
Baking Soda 0.65 oz 18.4 g 6.2
All-Purpose Flour 8 oz 227 g 76.2
Cake Flour 10.5 oz 298 g 100
Raisins 5 oz 142 g 47.7
Chocolate Genoise
Procedure
1. Combine all ingredients. Yield: 2 lb 14 oz (1310 g)

2. Mix for 10 minutes on high with the whip attachment. Portions: 2
3. Place the batter into two prepared 10-in. cake pans. Portion size: One 10-in. cake
4. Bake at 350°F (180°C) for 35 to 40 minutes. Yield description: Two 10-in. cakes

Eggs 1 lb 4 oz 567 g 232.6
Sugar 11 oz 312 g 127.9
Honey 1.5 oz 42.5 g 17.4
Pastry Flour 8.6 oz 244 g 100
Potato Starch 2.6 oz 74 g 30.2
Cocoa Powder 1.5 oz 43 g 17.4
Butter, melted 1 oz 28 g 11.6
Procedure
1. Sponge method

Lady Finger Biscuit Roulade

Portion size: 1 lady finger Portion size: half sheet pan
Yield description: 50 lady fingers Yield description: 3 half sheet pans

Egg Yolks 3.2 oz 90 g 90 Egg Yolk 8.8 oz 250 g 166.7
Whole Eggs 0.9 oz 25 g 25 Sugar #1 1.2 oz 35 g 23.3
Sugar #1 3.5 oz 100 g 100 Honey 2.2 oz 62 g 41.3
Egg Whites 4.8 oz 135 g 135 Water 0.4 oz 11 g 7.3
Sugar #2 1.4 oz 40 g 40 Egg Whites 11.9 oz 338 g 225.3
All-Purpose Flour 3.5 oz 100 g 100 Sugar #2 4.4 oz 125 g 83.3
Butter 1.1 oz 31 g 20.7
Milk 2.6 oz 75 g 50
Procedure All-Purpose Flour 5.3 oz 150 g 100
1. Separation foam method, page 187.

2. Pipe with a 0.5-in. (13-mm) plain tip, 3 in. (7.5 mm) long,
onto a silpat. Procedure
3. Dredge with granulated sugar; let stand for 5 minutes. 1. Separation foam method; note sugar #1, water, and honey are
4. Dust with powdered sugar. boiled together and added to the egg yolk mixture.
5. Bake at 375°F (190°C) 7 to 9 minutes. 2. Combine milk and butter; bring to a boil.
3. Fold butter/milk mixture into egg mixture.
4. Fold in sifted flour.
5. Scale 11.1 oz (315 g) per half sheet pan.
Recipes 193
Angel Food Cake Pain de Genes

Portion size: One 10-in. angel food cake pan Portion size: 1 sheet pan
Yield description: Two 10-in. angel food cake pans Yield description: 1 sheet pan

Egg Whites 1 lb 8 oz 680 g 244.9 Almond Paste 1 lb 0.9 oz 480 g 436.4
Sugar 10.6 oz 300 g 108.2 Whole Eggs 1 lb 454 g 412.7
Cream of Tartar 0.2 oz 5.7 g 2 Pastry Flour 3.9 oz 110 g 100
Salt 0.2 oz 5.7 g 2 Baking Powder 0.2 oz 6g 5.5
Cake Flour 9.8 oz 278 g 100 Butter, melted 5.5 oz 155 g 140.9
Sugar 10.6 oz 300 g 108.2
Procedure
Procedure
1. Angel food method.
1. Soften the almond paste with some of the eggs using a paddle
attachment.
2. Add remaining eggs in several additions, cleaning the paddle
and bowl often.
3. Sift together dry ingredients and fold into almond egg mixture.
Japonaise 4. Melt butter and incorporate into batter.
5. Spread in a 0.25-in. (6-mm) thick layer on a silpat-lined
sheet pan.
Yield: 1 lb 7 oz (666 g) 6. Bake at 350°F (175°C) for 12 to 15 minutes.

Portions: 4
Portion size: 8-in. (20-cm) rounds
Yield description: 4

Egg White Powder 0.2 oz 6.8 g
Sugar 6.9 oz 195 g
Almond Flour 2.6 oz 75 g
Powdered Sugar 6.9 oz 195 g
Note: Almond flour can be replaced with any nut flour, desiccated
coconut, or seeds.
Procedure
1. Make a common meringue with first sugar and egg whites.

2. Combine second sugar and almond flour.
3. Fold dry ingredients into meringue.
4. Pipe with a 0.5-in. (13-mm) plain tip.

Chocolate Pain de Genes Sacher Biscuit
Yield: 2 lb 14 oz (1313 g) Yield: 5 lb (2305 g)

Portion size: 1 sheet pan Portion size: 1 sheet pan
Yield description: 1 sheet pan Yield description: 3 sheet pans
Ingredients U.S. Metric % Ingredients U.S. Metric

Almond Paste 1 lb 2.3 oz 520 g 495.2 Almond Paste 1 lb 3 oz 540 g
Powdered Sugar 3.7 oz 105 g 100 Powdered Sugar 7.1 oz 200 g
Whole Eggs 11.4 oz 325 g 309.5 Egg Yolks 12.3 oz 350 g
All-Purpose Flour 3.7 oz 105 g 100 Eggs 6.5 oz 185 g
Baking Powder 0.28 oz 8g 7.6 Cocoa Powder 5.8 oz 165 g
Butter 5.5 oz 155 g 147.6 Egg Whites 1 lb 1.6 oz 500 g
Semisweet 3.4 oz 95 g 90.5 Sugar 7.1 oz 200 g
Chocolate 58%
Butter, melted 5.8 oz 165 g
Procedure
Procedure
1. Using the paddle attachment, combine almond paste and pow-
1. Cream almond paste, powdered sugar, and cocoa powder in
dered sugar.
a mixer with the paddle attachment; mix until combined on
2. Melt chocolate and butter. low speed.
3. Slowly add eggs to almond paste mixture, scraping often. 2. Slowly add eggs and egg yolks, scraping often.
4. Add chocolate and butter mixture to mixer. 3. Once all eggs are incorporated, mix on medium speed for
5. Sift dry ingredients and add; mix until combined. 5 minutes.
6. Spread in a 0.25-in. (6-mm) thick layer on a silpat-lined sheet 4. Make a common meringue with sugar and egg whites.
pan. 5. Fold meringue into creamed almond paste mixture in three
7. Bake at 350°F (175°C) for 12 to 15 minutes. additions.
6. Incorporate a small amount of the cake batter with the
melted butter.
7. Return the butter mixture back to the cake batter and fold
to combine.
8. Spread 1 lb 8.5 oz (700 g) on one sheet pan, prepared with
sprayed parchment paper.
10. Allow cakes to cool to 105°F (230°C) and wrap with plastic
wrap; store in the freezer.
Recipes 195
Orange Chiffon Jaconde

Portion size: One 10-in. angel food cake pan Portion size: 1 full sheet pan
Yield description: Two 10-in. angel food cake pans Yield description: 1 sheet pan

Cake Flour 12.7 oz 360 g 100 Eggs 6.2 oz 175 g 516.7
Baking Powder 0.7 oz 20.6 g 5.7 All-Purpose Flour 1.2 oz 34 g 100
Salt 0.4 oz 9.4 g 2.6 Almond Flour 4.5 oz 128 g 375
Sugar 1 lb 3.6 oz 555 g 154 Powdered Sugar 4.5 oz 128 g 375
Vegetable Oil 7.4 oz 210 g 58 Butter, melted 1 oz 28 g 83.3
Egg Yolks 7.4 oz 210 g 58 Egg Whites 8.2 oz 232 g 683.3
Water 8.5 oz 240 g 66 Sugar 2 oz 57 g 166.7
Orange Juice 1.7 oz 48 g 13
Orange Zest 1.5 each 1.5 each
Egg Whites 14.8 oz 420 g 117 Procedure
Sugar 4.2 oz 120 g 33 1. Jaconde method.
Cream of Tartar 0.13 oz 3.75 g 1 2. Prepare Jaconde and spread onto silpat or décor paste stencil.
3. Bake at 400°F (205°C) for 5 to 7 minutes. The cake should not
develop any color.
Procedure
1. Chiffon method.

Décor Paste for Jaconde
Ribbon Sponge
Yield: 1 lb 12.75 oz (820 g) Procedure

Portions: 1 1. Creaming method.
2. Add color as needed.
Yield description: 1 lb 12.75 oz (820 g)
3. Spread colored décor paste through a stencil onto a silpat.
4. Remove the stencil and freeze for 30 minutes.
Ingredients U.S. Metric % 5. Prepare the jaconde and spread immediately onto the frozen
Butter 7 oz 200 g 516.7 décor paste.
Powder Sugar 7 oz 200 g 100 6. Bake according to the jaconde method.
Egg Whites 7 oz 200 g 375 7. After cake has cooled, wrap and freeze.
Cake Flour 7.75 oz 220 g 375 8. Carefully unmold cake from silpat after freezing.
Food Coloring As needed As needed
FIGURE 7.4a–d Ribbon sponge method:
Spreading the color through the stencil (step 3) Removing the stencil (step 4)
Spreading the jaconde on the stenciled décor Finished product

paste (step 5)
Recipes 197
Almond Dacquoise

Portions: 3
1. Sift almond flour, powdered sugar, and all-purpose flour.
Portion size: 1 full sheet pan
2. Make a common meringue with egg whites and sugar.
Yield description: 3 full sheet pans
3. Fold almond flour mixture into meringue.
4. Spread 2 lb 10 oz (1200 g) on one sheet pan prepared with
Ingredients U.S. Metric % sprayed parchment paper.
Almond Flour 2 lb 7.7 oz 1125 g 1250 5. Bake at 400°F (200°C) for 12 to 13 minutes. To check for done-
ness, carefully lift the parchment paper to look under the cake.
Powdered Sugar 1 lb 15.7 oz 900 g 1000
The bottom of the cake should be golden brown.
All-Purpose Flour 3.2 oz 90 g 100
6. Allow cakes to cool completely and wrap with plastic wrap;
Egg Whites 2 lb 15.6 oz 1350 g 1500 store in the freezer.
Sugar 7.9 oz 225 g 250
FIGURE 7.5a–d Dacquoise procedure:
1. Sifting the dry ingredients 2. Preparing the meringue
3. Folding in the dry ingredients 4. Spreading the cake

Coconut Dacquoise Buttercream

Portion size: 1 full sheet pan Portion size: 3 lb 9 oz (1640 g)
Yield Description: 1 full sheet pan Yield description: 1 portion at 3 lb 9 oz (1640 g)
Almond Flour 4.1 oz 115 g 54.8 Egg White 4.4 oz 125 g

Sugar #1 0.5 oz 15 g
Sugar #2 8.8 oz 250 g
Desiccated 4.6 oz 130 g 61.9
Coconut, toasted Water 2.6 oz 75 g
Sugar 14.1 oz 400 g 190.4 Milk 6.3 oz 180 g
Egg White 1 lb 3.8 oz 560 g 266.7 Egg Yolk 4.9 oz 140 g
Egg White Powder 0.7 oz 20 g 9.5 Sugar #3 6.3 oz 180 g
Sugar 7.1 oz 200 g 95.2 Vanilla Bean 1 each 1 each

Butter, softened 1 lb 10.4 oz 750 g
Procedure
Procedure
1. Combine sugar #1 0.5 oz (15 g) with the egg whites.
1. Combine almond flour, all-purpose flour, desiccated coconut, 2. Sugar #2 8.8 oz (250 g) and water are combined; prepare an
and sugar. Italian meringue, page 153.
2. Add egg white powder to egg whites and make a common 3. Make a crème anglaise with the milk, sugar #3 6.3 oz (180 g), egg
meringue with the sugar. yolks, and vanilla bean.
3. Fold dry ingredients into meringue. 4. Whip the creme anglaise on high speed until cooled.
4. Spread 3 lb 6 oz (1200 g) on one sheet pan prepared with 5. Cream the butter and add the crème anglaise; fold in the
sprayed parchment paper. meringue.
5. Bake at 400°F (200°C) for 12 to 13 minutes. To check for done-
ness, carefully lift the parchment paper to look under the cake.
The bottom of the cake should be golden brown.
6. Allow cakes to cool completely and wrap with plastic wrap; Cream Cheese Frosting
store in the freezer.
Portions: 1
Yield description: 1 portion at 2 lb 8 oz (1130 g)

Buttercream 1 lb 454 g
Cream Cheese 1 lb 8 oz 680 g
Procedure
1. Using the paddle attachment, soften the cream cheese.

2. Add the buttercream; mix until combined.
Recipes 199
Chocolate Buttercream Tres Leches Syrup

Yield description: 1 portion at 4 lb 1.2 oz (2401 g) Yield description: 1 portion at 4 lb 8 oz (2141 g)

Whole Eggs 8 oz 227 g Sweetened 1 lb 12 oz 894 g
Condensed Milk
Egg Whites 2 oz 57 g
Evaporated Milk 1 lb 8 oz 680 g
Salt 0.2 oz 5.7 g
Milk 1 lb 454 g
Vanilla Paste 0.5 14 g
Brandy 4 oz 113 g
Sugar 14 oz 397 g
Water 3.5 oz 100 g
Butter, softened 2 lb 907 g Procedure
Chocolate 64%, 1 lb 8 oz 680 g
1. Combine all ingredients in a heavy-bottom saucepan.
melted
2. Warm syrup but do not boil.
3. For better absorption, the syrup should be warm when applied
to the cake.
Procedure
1. Whip whole eggs, egg whites, salt, and vanilla paste on

high speed.
2. Combine water, sugar, and corn syrup; cook on high heat to
248°F (120°C).
3. Add cooked syrup whipping egg mixture; continue mixing until
completely cooled.
4. Add butter to egg mixture.
5. Add chocolate to the mixer; scrape and mix until combined.

Key Terms
Two-stage method Ribbon stage Sponge method
Liquid shortenings Leaveners Separation foam method
Creaming method Homogenous Jaconde method
Hygroscopic Emulsification Chiffon method
Inverted sugars High-fat cakes Angel food method
Celiac disease Low-fat cakes

1. Describe the difference between high-fat and low-fat cakes. 4. Discuss the methods for testing cake doneness.
2. Why is it important to have all ingredients at room temperature? 5. Identify the five main ingredients in cakes and describe the
3. What is the advantage of using the separation foam method function they perform in the recipe.
instead of the sponge method?

CHAPTER 8
Assembling Cakes
This is the first of four chapters that will build on the foundation of recipes and procedures from
custards, frozen desserts, and cake mixing. These basic recipes are combined into delicious and
creative works of art, to be shared with others for special occasions.
LEARNING OBJECTIVES

1. Split, fill, and decorate a classic cake.
2. Assemble contemporary cakes.
3. Prepare a variety of glazes.
4. Demonstrate entremets assembly.
5. Design and assemble a glacé.
Classic Cakes
Traditionally used for celebrations like birthdays and weddings, cakes are a pastry that is eas-
ily identifiable to most customers. When thinking about cakes, it is important to consider the
different varieties, including classic, wedding, contemporary, and glacé. The variety doesn’t
end there: Shapes, sizes, and flavors can be changed to create new varieties and an interesting
assortment for a display case.
This section covers classic cakes; other cakes are discussed in the following sections.
Classic cakes, also referred to as layer cakes, are composed of cake, filling, icing, and gar-
nish. These cakes can be as simple as yellow cake with butter cream frosting or as elaborate
as a Black Forest Torte, containing chocolate cake, cherry filling, kirsch, whipped cream, bran-
died cherries, and chocolate shavings. Whether using a simple or more complex combination
of components, the resulting cake must taste good.
Cake
The primary focus of most decorated cakes is the cake itself. The cake should be moist and
flavorful. In the United States, the preferred style of cake is a high fat. These cakes have a ten-
der texture and retain moisture well. Low-fat cakes may also be used and they are an excellent
option to provide variety to the mix of flavors and textures offered. When using low-fat cakes, it
is important to generously brush all layers with a flavored syrup composed of equal parts sugar
and water.
203
Filling
A classic cake is split and reassembled with layers of cream between the cake layers. In some
instances the filling for the cake may be the same as the icing on the outside of the cake. A wide
variety of mousses and creams from Chapter 5 can also be used as fillings for cakes. While the
filling is often thought of as strictly providing flavor, it also provides much-needed moisture to
the cake. The amount of filling used between the layers can vary. A cake with even layers of cake
and cream can have a very attractive appearance. If the flavor of the filling is strong or high in
fat, a thinner layer may be used.
Icing
The icing on a cake is used to convey the flavor of the cake and enrobe the cake to protect it
from drying out. As previously mentioned, although the filling and icing may be the same prod-
uct, most icings are whipped cream or buttercream. When using an icing that is different from
the filling, the flavors should complement each other. A smooth layer of the icing on the cake
can help to convey the skill of the pastry chef that assembled the cake. When the cake is sliced,
the thickness of the icing should be the same on the sides and the top of the cake, perfectly
enrobing the cake inside.
Garnishes
The last of the four components is the garnish. It is often the smallest component of the cake, but
it has a large impact. Garnishes can convey the flavor inside the cake. Similar to the approach of
garnishing a dessert, the flavor displayed in the garnish should be a flavor in the cake. It would
not make sense to garnish a carrot cake with a mint leaf, as this cake does not contain mint.
A better garnish would be marzipan carrots or piped buttercream carrots.
Assembling
Splitting
The first step in assembling a classic cake is to split the cake layers. After baking the cake, it
must be cooled thoroughly to facilitate slicing. Slicing cake layers can be done using a turntable
or on a wood table with a cardboard round and a serrated knife.
If the cake is not level, trim the top of the cake to square up the edges. Holding the knife
level, place it on the side of the cake at the desired thickness and proceed to score the side of
the cake. Without moving the knife, turn the cake one full revolution. The knife should be at
the same place it started and slightly cut into the cake. It is important to not use the knife to
cut through the cake as you would a loaf of bread. At this point, use the turntable and knife
together to cut through the cake. Turn the cake ¼ turn and pull the knife back toward you,
leaving it still in the cake. Turn another ¼ turn and pull the knife back again. Continue to follow
this procedure until the knife passes through the middle of the cake. This will take some prac-
tice, but it is the best way to quickly cut an even layer. Carefully place the sliced layers on cake
boards and reserve for assembly.
Filling
The filling needs to be prepared and ready for application after the layers are split. If the split
layers are not filled quickly, the exposure to the air will cause them to dry. If the layers are not
going to be filled immediately, cover them with plastic wrap.
204 C H A PT E R 8 Assembling Cakes

FIGURE 8.1a-c Cake splitting:
1. Marking the cake once around 2. Slicing through the cake about halfway
3. Removing the sliced layer
Place the cake layer on a cake board slightly larger than the cake. If decorating a 10-in.
cake, use a 12-in. board to allow room for the border. Before applying the filling to the first layer,
brush the cake with simple syrup. Place the filling in the center of the cake. Using an offset pal-
let knife, spread the icing. Work the icing from the center out while turning the turntable at the
same time. Learning to use the turntable and pallet knife together will speed up the process.
Work the filling to the edges of the cake. Creating a flat surface with the filling will pre-
pare the cake for the next level. At this point, a small dome in the surface of the filling will
continue to dome with the following layers, producing a cake that does not have a flat top.
Continue stacking, applying syrup and filling the cake.
Icing and Garnishing

Icing and garnishing are the final steps of decorating a classic cake. The final icing of the cake
should be smooth and free of crumbs. At this point, be sure to clean all work areas to remove
any crumbs that may have resulted from filling the layers.
To prevent incorporating crumbs into the outer icing, a crumb coat can be used. This is a
thin layer of icing applied to the cake that helps to trap crumbs. After the cake is coated, it is
placed in the freezer for 10 minutes to freeze the icing. The crumb coat provides the foundation
for the final icing. Pay close attention to this layer and make sure it is smooth.
Classic Cakes 205

FIGURE 8.2a–c
1. Cake layer with icing in the center 2. Using the turntable and pallet knife 3. The finished smooth, flat filling
together to spread the icing
FIGURE 8.3a–d Icing a cake:
1. Spreading the icing on the top 2. Icing the sides
3. Smoothing the sides 4. Cleaning the top of the cake

FIGURE 8.4a–c Decorating a cake:
1. Using a serrated knife to comb the top 2. Piping the bottom border 3. Piping the top border
of the cake
After removing the cake from the freezer, begin spreading icing on the top of the cake in
the same manner as the filling. Spread this top layer so it extends past the sides of the cake.
Next, ice the sides of the cake, which will push the overhanging icing from the top back up.
After coating the sides of the cake, use a bench scraper to smooth the sides of the cake while
spinning the turntable. The last step is to remove the icing that has built up on the top corners
of the cake.
Dip the pallet knife in warm water and wipe dry with a clean towel. Holding the knife even
with the top of the cake, pull the pallet knife straight toward you. As the pallet knife passes the
center of the cake, lift it up to the back edge of the knife and lift off the cake. This will prevent
the icing from sticking to the knife. Pulling the pallet knife straight across the top of the cake
will ensure that clean square edges are present on the cake.
The iced blank cake is ready for decorating. A shell boarder piped along the bottom of
the cake will help to clean the bottom edge where the cake meets the cake board. Some cakes
require a boarder on the top as well. After piping the border, mark the top of the cake into the
desired number of pieces. A 10-in. cake can be divided into 12 to 16 portions. Once the cake is
marked, place a rosette of icing on each slice and apply the garnish.
Wedding Cakes
When most people think of cakes, two types come to mind: birthday and wedding cakes.
Wedding cakes can be simplistic or extremely elaborate; either way, they are often the center-
piece of many wedding celebrations. There is a considerable amount of planning that goes into
selling and producing wedding cakes.
Wedding Cakes 207

Meeting the Client
A wedding cake is different from other custom orders. The order might be placed as much as a
year before the wedding. The first step in the process is to meet with the couple. At this meeting,
a tasting may be arranged, presenting the client with a sampling of cakes, fillings, icings, and
decorations. Many times, the customers know what flavor and design of cake they would like.
A photo portfolio can also be used to showcase previous cakes that have been made.
Communication with the client must be open and honest. They must notify the pastry
shop if there are any changes, and the pastry shop must do the same. During this meeting,
flavor, design, date, location, number of servings, and price will be discussed. If the customer
knows the flavor and design of the cake, confirm that the tasting you have presented is what
they want and the design is possible, based on the size of the cake.
Historically, weddings were held in early spring or summer, although trends have changed
over the years and weddings are held year round. Summer and spring still tend to be the busier
time of year for weddings, and, as a result, scheduling of orders must be considered. The pas-
try shop has a limited amount of space and delivery options for wedding cakes, and the design
of the cakes ordered for a particular day will impact how many orders can be taken and filled
successfully.
Guiding the customer through the process is critical. There are many variables to consider
when selling a cake, and sometimes the bride and groom may not be aware of what can and
cannot be done. Location not only refers to where the cake will ultimately be delivered, but
where the cake will be presented. A cake made using buttercream icing will not hold up well for
an extended period of time at an outdoor summer wedding. The buttercream will melt as the
cake begins to warm. Working together with the wedding planner or caterer will ensure that the
cake is stored and presented properly.
Just like the flavors and design, the customer has an idea of what they would like to pay
for the cake. It is important to remember that a wedding cake is a custom item prepared for
a specific order. When pricing the cake, consider the ingredients that are used and the time
spent on assembling and decorating the cake. Wedding cake prices are based on the number of
servings. The diagrams below demonstrate portioning of different size cake layers to provide a
guide for how many slices each round can yield.
Slices per Tier, 4 in. Tall Layers
Size Round Square

6 in. (15 cm) 12 18
8 in. (20 cm) 24 32
10 in. (25 cm) 38 50
12 in. (30 cm) 56 72
14 in. (35 cm) 78 98
16 in. (40 cm) 100 128
Cake Design
Wedding cakes can come in many shapes and designs. One constant between all of them is
that they are stacked. Cakes placed on cakeboards can be stacked one tier directly on another
or using columns to create spaces between the layers. Cakes and the fillings are fragile and
need to be supported to prevent the tiers from compressing or sliding. Dowels or columns can
provide the support needed to carry the weight of the upper tiers. The dowels are placed in the

finished cake layer equal to the height of the icing on the cake. The next cake is placed on top
and the procedure is repeated. Using this system, the weight of the cake is supported by the
dowels and not by the cake layers.
Decorating Materials
Traditionally, the color of wedding cakes has been white. This is easily achieved through the
use of buttercreams. Italian buttercream provides the best flavor and mouthfeel. However, the
use of butter requires this cake to be served in an air-conditioned area. The use of butter also
gives a yellow tint to the icing. When a white icing is needed, use a simple buttercream that is
made with shortening. This will give the cake a pure white color and is more resistant to warmer
temperatures than the Italian buttercream. These icings offer the flexibility of not only enrobing
the cake but also creating borders, flowers, vines, and leaves. Royal icing, made from powdered
sugar and egg whites, is used for string work and attaching pastillage. Royal icing can be piped,
assembled, and dried in advance.
Rolled fondant has increased in popularity due to its ability to enrobe a cake in a com-
pletely smooth layer. After filling the cake layer, it is coated in a smooth layer of buttercream,
then the fondant is applied. Fondant can be used to create a smooth covered cake, ruffles,
swags, and flowers. Cakes enrobed in rolled fondant require more work and skill and carry a
higher price than those coated in buttercream.
Decorations on wedding cakes can range from fresh flowers to blown sugar swans. Fresh
flowers are an excellent option for decorating the cake, but be sure to use pesticide-free flowers.
Gum paste can be used to create flowers that look real but are made of edible material. Gum
paste is made of sugar, glucose and gums. This paste can rolled very thin, shaped, and dried.
A realistic appearance can be achieved through the use of edible colors to give the flower a life-
like appearance. Dried gum paste flowers also store well and can be made in advance.
Modeling chocolate, marzipan, pastillage, pulled and blown sugar can also be used as dec-
orations for wedding cakes. Modeling chocolate, marzipan and pastillage all hold up well under
refrigeration and can be used to create flowers and other decorations. Pulled and blown sugar
can add a truly elegant touch to any cake. They are both extremely fragile and do not tolerate
humidity well. Many of the decorating techniques found in Chapters 13 and 14 can be used to
create decorations for wedding cakes.
Contemporary Cakes
Contemporary cakes, often referred to as entremets, are cakes that contain layers of
mousse, creams, and cake that are coated in a glaze. Entremets have many elements that
are found in classic cakes, with higher percentage of creams to cake. They utilize a variety
of flavors, textures, and garnishes. Shape can vary, based on the creativity of the chef—
almost any shape can be made from stainless steel or silicone. The flavors and textures can
be combined to create different portion sizes from whole cakes and individual pastries to
petits fours.
Components
Entremets can have as few as five components: base, cake, cream, coating, and garnish. The
base of the cake can be used to introduce texture into the entremets. There are many different
variations of quantity of components and types of components. The goal is to create a cake that
has an excellent flavor and attractive look. In some cases, too many layers can be placed inside
the cake, making it difficult to cut a clean slice.

Base
Bases can be made from rolled-out streusel or tart dough. Some bases use a process that
involves taking the baked dough and cutting or breaking the dough into small pieces and
combining it with chocolate, nut pastes and butter to bind the base. Reconstructed bases
add a different texture to the cake. If a soft texture for the cake is desired, the base can be
a layer of cake. The base layer not only provides flavor and texture, it helps to make the
cake servable.
Insert
Mise en place is very important when assembling entremets. Equipment and recipes must be
gathered and ready to assemble. In some instances, the entremets contain an insert. The insert
is a combination of cake layers and creams assembled together and placed into the center of
the entremets. The insert may have cake on the bottom with a layer of cream on top or cream
sandwiched between two layers of cake. Precision in layering the insert will add to the visual
appeal of the sliced entremet.
Cake
The other baked layer found in an entremet is the cake. Even if cake is used as the base, another
layer or two will be used inside the cake. Sponge, pain de genes, and even a thin layer of
brownies can be used as the cake. The cake layer needs to contribute flavor to the cake as well
as lighten the cake. The higher percentage of cream in the cake means a high percentage of fat.
This can make the cake feel too rich and heavy.
Creams
The next components are the creams. Many times, two or more will be used. To lighten the tex-
ture of the cake, an aerated cream, such as chocolate mousse, fruit mousse, or Bavarian will
be used. These can be combined with a heavier cream, like a creméux, panna cotta or gelée to
introduce another texture or color. Much of the flavor will come from the creams.
Changing the ratios of the components or changing the recipes can adjust the flavor
of the cake. It is easier to change the amount of creméux in the cake rather than reformu-
late the recipe. When building the entremets, it is best to scale the amount of each layer by
weight to ensure each cake looks the same when cut and the flavors will be consistent bet-
ween batches.
Coating
In the same way the classic cakes are covered with icing to protect the cake from drying out,
entremets are sprayed with a coating of chocolate, giving the cake a velvet appearance, or the
cake can be glazed. Glazing the cake will provide more protection from drying out and it also
gives a mirror-like finish.
Garnish
After the glaze has set, the cake can be garnished. Garnishes used on the outside of the cake
should clearly reflect the flavors inside the cake. A cake containing strawberry and pistachios
can be garnished with pink macarons sprinkled with pistachios and fresh strawberries. Gar-
nishes need to be edible and able to withstand the humidity encountered in a refrigerator.
A light and wispy sugar twist may look beautiful, but it will quickly become dull and melt in the
refrigerator.

FIGURE 8.5 Garnished pistachio strawberry entremets
Assembly
Entremets can be assembled in two ways: top to bottom or bottom to top. Most cakes can be
built either way, and much of the decision comes down to personal preference. The bottom-
to-top method allows for a more tender base layer. The base is in place at the start of assem-
bling and the rest of the cake is built on top. During the freezing of a bottom-to-top cake,
the cream recesses slightly. This leaves the cake with a top that is not flat. When using the
top-to-bottom method, the cake is built upside down, and the top of the cake will remain
completely flat, making glazing easier. This method is used when assembling individual por-
tions in flexipans.
Bottom-to-Top Method
In the bottom-to-top method the cake is assembled right side up. Place the baked base layer
on a silpat-lined sheet pan, followed by the metal cake ring. Proceed to make the chocolate
mousse. The mousse needs to be made à la minute and the insert should be stacked in the
freezer ready for assembly. Pour some of the mousse into the prepared cake ring. Using a plas-
tic bowl scraper, bring the mousse up the sides of the ring. Smoothing the mousse up the sides
of the ring will prevent large air bubbles from being trapped in the mousse. Large pockets of
air can become trapped when additional mousse is piped in the mold. These are difficult to
fix once the cake is unmolded. The additional step of smoothing the mousse will guarantee
a smooth surface ready for glazing. Firmly press the insert into the mousse, making sure it is
centered in the ring. Add enough mousse to fill the ring and smooth the top with a pallet knife;
immediately place in the freezer.

FIGURE 8.6a–e Bottom-to-top method:
1. Placing the ring over the base on the silpat 2. Placing mousse into the ring 3. Placing the insert
4. Filling the remainder of the mousse 5. Cleaning the top of the cake
Top-to-Bottom Method
The top-to-bottom method assembles the cake upside down, and is essentially the same
procedure. The base is baked and cooled, insert is assembled and in the freezer, and mousse
is scaled. Place a metal cake ring onto a piece of plastic wrap and place onto a flat sheet pan.
Once the mousse is mixed, deposit enough to fill the ring slightly more than one-third. Using a
plastic bowl scraper, bring the mousse up the sides of the ring. Press the insert into the mousse,
being careful to not press the mousse all the way to the bottom of the ring. Add more of the
mousse to almost fill the mold completely; smooth if necessary. Place the base onto the cake
and press down with a cake cardboard. Clean any extra mousse from the base side of the mold
with an offset pallet knife, and immediately freeze the cake.

FIGURE 8.7a–e Upside down cake assembly:
1. Filling with the mousse 2. Placing the insert 3. Adding more mousse and smoothing
4. Placing the base on top 5. Cleaning the cake before freezing
Unmolding
After the cake has had sufficient time to freeze through to the center, 1 hour in a blast chiller
or 4 hours in a standard freezer, the cake can be unmolded. To unmold the cake, place it on a
ring that is 1 in. (2.5 cm) smaller than the mold used for the cake. In this example, the cake is
assembled in an 8-in. (20-cm) mold, so a 7-in. (18-cm) cake ring will be used. Place the smaller
ring on a turntable and place the frozen cake on top of the ring. While slowly turning the table,
use a blowtorch or heat gun to warm the metal ring. After turning and warming the cake ring for
two turns, check to see if the ring will slide down. If not, apply more heat, being careful to not
completely melt the chocolate mousse. Slide the ring down and place the unmolded entremets
in the freezer. The cake can now be stored or glazed, thawed, and served.

FIGURE 8.8a–c Proper glazing technique:
1. Cake on rack, glaze in sauce gun 2. Glazing sides 3. Glazing top
Glazing
When applying glaze to the cake, the cake must be frozen. A frozen cake will maintain a clean
edge and allow a pallet knife to be passed over the top of the cake to remove extra glaze. The
temperature is critical to properly applying a thin coating to the entremets. Glaze that is to cool
will not flow evenly across the top and down the side of the cake, due to the gelatin setting.
A temperature that is too hot will melt the mousse layer and release fat into the glaze, creating
fat streaks. A glaze that is too thin will expose the corners of the cream underneath and run
down the sides of the cake. This will not sufficiently cover the sides, and any irregularities in the
layer underneath will show through the glaze. Each glaze recipe will specify the optimal tem-
perature for applying the glaze.
To apply the glaze to the cake, make sure it is at the correct temperature. Glaze can be
poured directly from a measure with a pouring spout or using a sauce gun. Using a sauce gun
will reduce the amount of air bubbles in the glaze. When the glaze is placed in the gun, any air in
the glaze will rise to the top; the sauce gun releases the glaze from the bottom of the container.
Place the frozen cake on a metal glazing rack and apply the glaze to the edges of the
cake. Be sure to completely cover the side of the cake—there is only one chance to do this.
Going back and applying another layer of glaze will create a rough surface and a thick layer
of glaze. After coating the sides, immediately glaze the top of the cake. With an offset pallet
knife as wide as the cake, quickly pass over the top of the cake to remove any excess glaze.
Place the glazed cake in the refrigerator for 10 minutes to set the glaze before moving off of
the glazing rack.
Glacé
Another style of contemporary cake is glacé, a cake made using churned or still frozen compo-
nents. Glacé also contain a coulis, base layer, glaze, and garnish. There are many similarities
between entremets and glacé; the base serves the functions of flavor, ability to transfer the
cake, and texture. Enrobing the cake in a glaze will protect the cake in the freezer, add flavor,
and give the cake a glossy shine.

Base
The base of the glacé can be made from the same components used in entremets production,
baked tart dough, sponge cakes, or reconstructed base. Recipes will vary slightly from those
used in entremets production to account for being served frozen. The colder temperature of
the base or cake may not be suitable for cutting or eating. The base provides flavor and texture
to the cake and needs to taste good as well as be edible when frozen. Increasing the sugar or
adding vegetable oils to cakes and doughs will help create a tender frozen base. While increas-
ing the sugar will make the base sweeter, the sweetness will not be easily detected due to the
low temperature of the cake. The cold temperature of the cake will reduce the intensity of
the flavors.
Coulis
The coulis is a thin fruit-flavored layer inside the cake that has a large percentage of sugar to
prevent the layer from freezing. Because the coulis is a thin layer, it needs to be flavorful and a
contrasting color to the layers of the glacé. The higher percentage of sugar and the addition of
alcohol prevents coulis from freezing. A frozen coulis layer that does not contain enough sugar
or alcohol will not cut clean and will have an unpleasant icy mouthfeel.
Frozen Components
Glacé can be made using any of the components from Chapter 6. Ice creams, sorbets, gelato,
parfaits, and semifreddos are used together to create different textures inside the cake. It is not
necessary to use more than one frozen component. Baked Alaska is a simple form of a glacé. It
is composed of cake and ice cream, coated in meringue. The use of multiple frozen components
allows the introduction of different flavors and contrasting colors.
Coating
The coating on the cake protects the glacé from drying out in the freezer, and adds flavor and
color to the cake. Meringue and glaze provide the best protection to the interior components.
Airbrushed designs can also be placed on the cake before glazing. The glacé can also be sprayed
with cocoa butter spray giving the cake a velvet-like appearance.
Garnish
Frozen cakes have a longer shelf life than the other cakes discussed in this chapter. The gar-
nish will need to withstand being frozen, and it is important to think about what will happen
to the garnish as the cake is thawing. The garnishes are small and delicate. They will thaw
quickly when the cake is removed from the freezer and served. Chocolate decorations, dried
meringues, or cookies are recommended for garnishing glacé.
Assembly
Glacé are built in metal or silicone molds. A bombe mold is often used for glacé. It is a stainless
steel metal mold shaped like a half dome. Different size domes can be used in a system to cre-
ate the layers inside the cake. The number of components, flavors, and colors will dictate the
order the cake is assembled.
Glacé 215
Working with the flavors of pistachio, yogurt, and strawberry, we can design how the glacé
will be assembled. The components for this glacé will be strawberry sorbet, pistachio parfait,
frozen yogurt, and strawberry coulis. The colors will work well together in any combination.
Even though the coulis is red and the sorbet is red, the coulis will have a different shade and will
contrast nicely against the sorbet.
Glacés are typically built using the top-to-bottom assembly method. Mise en place for glacé
assembly includes freezing all molds, spatulas, and bowls. Due to the high sugar percentage in
still frozen desserts, it is recommended to use the parfait as the inner layer of the cake. Using
the smallest of the three molds, fill it with the parfait mixture and freeze. A blast chiller is best
to thoroughly freeze the layers. This will also allow additional handling time for assembly due
to the hardness of the layers.
After the parfait is completely frozen, it must be unmolded. To unmold the parfait, use 100°F
(38°C) water—the temperature of the water is important to prevent melting the parfait too much.
After unmolding, place the layer back in the freezer for 10 minutes. Frozen yogurt will be the next
layer. Once the parfait is back in the freezer, process the yogurt in an ice cream machine. Remove
the next size mold and spread the churned yogurt into the mold. Press the parfait into the yogurt,
finish this layer with thin coating of the yogurt, and return to the blast chiller or freezer.
Unmold the bombe using the same process used for the parfait and place it back in the
freezer. The next layer will be the strawberry coulis. This layer is applied the same as a glaze.
After 10 minutes in the freezer, place the glacé on a glazing rack and pour a layer of strawberry
coulis over the top. Transfer the glacé back to the freezer to set the coulis.
While the coulis is freezing, process the strawberry sorbet. Repeat the process used for
placing the frozen yogurt layer. Before placing the mold back in the freezer, press the base into
the bottom of the cake. Return the cake to the blast chiller and allow it to freeze completely.
The final step is to prepare the glacé for glazing. Remove the cake from the mold. Place the
cake on a glazing rack and return it to the freezer for 10 minutes. When using a glaze, refer to the
glaze recipe to determine the proper temperature for use. Pour the glaze over the cake and be
sure to cover the entire cake in one pass. The half sphere shape of the cake makes glazing easy,
and there is no need to use an offset pallet knife to remove extra glaze. Allow the glaze to set in
the refrigerator for 5 minutes and then transfer the finished cake to a gold cardboard.
Troubleshooting for Cake Assembly
Entremets glaze is too thick. 1. The glaze was too cold. Check temperature of glaze.
2. The recipe was not scaled correctly or the glaze was cooked for too long. Make sure recipe
was scaled correctly and the procedure was followed.
Entremets layers separate when cut. The insert layers were too cold when assembled. Make sure the layers are firm and set in the
refrigerator before stacking. If the layers are frozen, allow them to temper so they will adhere
to each other before inserting into the cake.
Top of entremets is concave. 1. The mousse or bavarian slightly deflated before freezing, this is a normal occurrence. Use
the top-to-bottom method.
2. The bavarian or mousse deflated due to an extended time at room temperature. Transfer
the cake to the freezer quickly after assembling.
There are crumbs in final coat of icing. 1. The work station was not cleaned prior to starting the final coat. Clean work area before
applying final coat.
2. A crumb coat was not used. Use a crumb coat.
Buttercream is difficult to spread on cake. The buttercream is not properly aerated before use. Mix on low speed with a paddle to soften
the buttercream.
Air pockets form in the outside of glacé and 1. Line molds carefully with a thin layer before filling.
entremets. 2. Reserve some of the mixture used to fill the mold and fill in the air pockets.

Recipes
Chocolate Peanut Glacé
Portions: 1 Procedure
Portion size: 7.9-in. (20-cm) hemisphere 1. Churn the caramel peanut ice cream and fill a 6.3-in. (16-cm)
Yield description: One 7.9-in. (20-cm) hemisphere hemisphere mold.
2. Freeze and unmold, place back into freezer.
Ingredients U.S. Metric 3. Prepare the chocolate parfait and spread a layer inside of a
7.9-in. (20-cm) hemisphere mold.
Caramel Peanut Ice Cream, page 218 2 lb 3 oz 981 g
4. Insert the caramel peanut ice cream into the chocolate parfait.
Chocolate Parfait, page 172 2 lb 7 oz 1116 g
5. Spread a layer of the parfait on top of the ice cream insert.
Chocolate Glaze (glacé), page 219 2 lb 6 oz 1082 g
6. Place the base in the bottom of the mold, freeze.
Chocolate Brioche Base, page 219 11.5 oz 325 g
7. Unmold the finished cake and apply the glaze.
Chocolate Decor
8. Apply chocolate decorations.
FIGURE 8.9 Chocolate Peanut Glacé
Recipes 217
Caramel Peanut Ice Cream Chocolate Brioche Base

Portion size: 6.3-in. (16-cm) hemisphere Portion size: 7.1-in. (18-cm) layer
Yield description: One 6.3-in. (16-cm) hemisphere Yield description: One 7.1-in. (18-cm) layer

Sugar 1.8 oz 50 g Brioche, page 75 5.3 oz 150 g
Water #1 0.5 oz 15 g Dark Chocolate 1.8 oz 50 g
Milk 8.47 oz 240 g Peanut Butter 3.5 oz 100 g
Water #2 12.35 oz 350 g Butter 0.9 oz 25 g
Nonfat Milk Solids 2.82 oz 80 g
Inverted Sugar 4.59 oz 130 g Procedure
Egg Yolks 0.88 oz 25 g 1. Cube the brioche into ¼-in. (6-mm) pieces. Toast until golden
Peanuts, toasted 3.53 oz 100 g brown.
2. Melt the dark chocolate, peanut butter and butter.
3. Gently fold the cooled brioche into the melted chocolate
Procedure mixture.
4. Press into a 7.1-in. (18-cm) disc and freeze.
1. Caramelize the sugar with water #1; once a deep caramel is
reached pour onto a silpat. 5. Reserve for assembly.
2. After the caramel cools, grind in a food processor.

3. Use the ice cream base process (page 158). Use the caramel
made in the previous step in place of the granulated sugar in
the process.
4. Place the peanuts in Vitamix; pour enough of the hot ice cream
base to cover the nuts.
5. Blend until smooth.
8. Mature for 6 to 12 hours before churning.

Chocolate Glaze (glacé)
Portions: 1

Water 6 oz 170 g
Sugar 10 oz 284 g
Glucose 10 oz 284 g
Cocoa Powder 3.4 oz 96 g
Vodka 2 oz 57 g
Gelatin Sheets, bloomed 5.5 each 5.5 each
Sweetened Condensed Milk 6.75 oz 191 g
Procedure
1. Combine water, glucose, vodka, and sugar in a saucepan, heat

to a boil.
2. Add gelatin and sweetened condensed milk.
3. Add cocoa powder and strain through a chinois, do not push
through the chinois.
4. Cool to 82°F (27°C) for glazing.
Recipes 219
Strawberry Pistachio Glacé
Portion size: 7 in. (17.8 cm) × 2 in. (5.5 cm) high square 1. Prepare macarons. Add red food color to make the mac-
Yield description: One 7 in. (17.8 cm) × 2 in. (5.5 cm) high square arons pink.
2. Prepare the strawberry sorbet. Mold in a 6.25 in. (16.8 cm)
square frame × 0.5 in (12 mm) thick square frame and freeze.
3. Prepare the pistachio parfait and freeze in a 6.25 in. (16.8 cm)
Strawberry Sorbet, page 175 2 lb 4 oz 1038 g square frame × 0.75 in (1.9 cm) thick square frame.
Frozen Yogurt, page 171 2 lb 2.7 oz 995.7 g 4. Prepare the Strawberry glaze using the tropical glaze rec-
Pistachio Gelato, page 168 2 lb 3 oz 1002 g ipe; replace all purée with strawberry purée. Reserve for
cake assembly.
Pistachio Parfait, page 221 2 lb 7.6 oz 1135 g
5. Cut the pistachio dacquoise 6.25 in. (16.8 cm) square and place
Cocoa Butter Spray, White
Chocolate, page 397 on the pistachio parfait.
6. Prepare the frozen yogurt and line a 7 in. (17.8 cm) × 2 in.
Strawberry Glaze, page 224, 1 lb 8 oz 695 g
Tropical Glaze Variation (5.5 cm) high square mold.
French Macaron, page 314 2 lb 10 oz 1122 g 7. Insert the pistachio parfait and pistachio dacquoise (assem-
bling using the upside down method). Place in the freezer to set.
8. Unmold the strawberry sorbet and apply the strawberry glaze.
9. Spray the frozen yogurt with a white cocoa butter spray.
10. Place the strawberry sorbet on top of the frozen yogurt.
11. Place the pink macarons around the side of the cake.
FIGURE 8.10 Strawberry Pistachio Glacé

Pistachio Parfait Pistachio Dacquoise

Portion size: 2 lb 7.6 oz (1135 g) Portion size: Half sheet pan
Yield description: 1 portion at 2 lb 7.6 oz (1135 g) Yield description: 1 half sheet pan

Sugar 8.8 oz 250 g Egg Whites 10.1 oz 285 g
Egg Yolks 6.3 oz 190 g Powdered Sugar 7.4 oz 210 g
Heavy Cream, whipped 1 lb 6.9 oz 650 g Almond Flour 4.9 oz 140 g
Pistachio Paste 1.6 oz 45 g Pistachio Flour 4.9 oz 140 g
Procedure Procedure
1. Combine water and sugar in a saucepan. 1. Sift almond flour, pistachio flour, and powdered sugar.
2. Make a pâte à bombe with the egg yolks and sugar mixture. 2. Make a common meringue with egg whites and sugar.
3. When pâte à bombe is completely cooled, add the pistachio paste. 3. Fold sifted flour mixture into meringue.
4. Fold the cream into the pâte à bombe. 4. Spread batter onto a silpat-lined half sheet pan.
5. Mold and freeze. 5. Bake at 400°F (200°C) for 12 to 13 minutes.
6. Allow cake to cool completely and wrap with plastic wrap; store
in the freezer.
Recipes 221
Bird of Paradise
Portions: 1
Portion size: 7-in. (17.8-cm) ring
Yield description: One 7-in. (17.8-cm) ring

Mango Ice Cream, page 170 2 lb 3.3 oz 1002 g
Banana Mousse Glacé, page 173 2 lb 10 oz 1207 g
Coconut Sorbet, page 176 2 lb 3.2 oz 999.6 g
Cherry Coulis, page 224 9.9 oz 282 g
Tropical Glaze, page 224 1 lb 8 oz 695 g
Coconut Dacquoise, page 199 3 lb 6 oz 1635 g
Procedure
1. Prepare the coconut dacquoise and pipe an 8-in. (20-cm) diam-

eter circle with a 0.4-in. (1-cm) plain tip.
2. Prepare cherry coulis.
3. Fill a 6.5-in. (16.5-cm) ring mold halfway with the banana
mousse glacé and freeze.
4. Fill the remaining space in the mold with the coconut sorbet
and freeze.
5. Unmold and pour the cherry coulis over the insert and return
to the freezer.
6. Line a 7-in. (17.8-cm) mold with the mango ice cream; press the
insert into the mold and freeze.
7. Unmold and apply the tropical glaze.
8. Place the glazed ice cream cake on the coconut dacquoise.

FIGURE 8.11 Bird of Paradise
Recipes 223
Tropical Glaze Cherry Coulis

Yield description: 1 portion at 1 lb 8 oz (695 g) Yield description: 1 portion at 9.9 oz (282 g)

Sugar 3 oz 85 g Cherry Purée 8.6 oz 245 g
Glucose 7.4 oz 210 g Trimoline 1.1 oz 30 g
Gelatin Sheets 5 each 5 each Pectin NH 0.04 oz 1g
Water, ice cold 1.4 oz 40 g Sugar 0.2 oz 6g
Passion Fruit Purée 1.8 oz 50 g
Neutral Glaze 2.1 oz 60 g
Procedure
1. Combine purée with Trimoline in a saucepan and warm.

2. Mix pectin with sugar and add to purée.
Procedure 3. Bring the mixture to a boil, whisking constantly.
1. Bloom gelatin in 1.4 oz (40 g) water. 4. Cool completely before using.
2. Combine water, sugar, and glucose in a saucepan; melt
over low heat.
3. Add purées to warmed sugar solution.
4. Add gelatin to saucepan and dissolve.
5. Using an immersion blender, incorporate neutral glaze.
6. Strain and cool to room temperature.
Variation
The purées in this recipe can be changed to any flavor.

Carrot Cake
Portion size: 8-in. (20-cm) round 1. Split the carrot cake into two equal layers.
Yield description: One 8-in. (20-cm) round
2. Spread a layer of the cream cheese icing and place the second
layer on top.
3. Continue icing the cake using the method on page 206.
Carrot Cake, one 8-in. round 7 lb 2 oz 3257 g
4. Apply the toasted walnuts on the side of the cake.
Cream Cheese Frosting 2 lb 8 oz 1130 g
5. Roll the marzipan to 1⁄8 in. (3 mm) thick; cut and apply to the top
Walnuts, toasted of the cake.
Marzipan 4 lb 12 oz 2180 g 6. Pipe a border around the bottom and the top of the cake.
FIGURE 8.12 Carrot cake
Recipes 225
Strawberry Lemon
Portion size: 8-in. (20-cm) round 1. Slice two layers of the honey genoise ¼ in. (6 mm) thick; brush
Yield description: One 8-in. (20-cm) round with lemon simple syrup and spread a thin layer of strawberry
marmalade on each layer.
Ingredients U.S. Metric 2. Trim the décor sponge 1.25 in. (3.2 cm) tall and line the 8-in.
Décor Sponge, page 197 (20-cm) cake ring.
Honey Genoise, page 192 2 lb 13 oz 1295 g 3. Place a layer of the honey genoise in the bottom.
Clear Glaze, page 106 1 lb 11.7 oz 787 g 4. Pipe two rings of lemon mousse; alternate with strawberry
Strawberry Marmalade mousse.
Lemon Mousse, page 136 3 lb 2 oz 1418 g 5. Place the second layer of genoise in the cake ring and repeat
piping the lemon and strawberry mousse.
Strawberry Mousse, page 136 3 lb 2 oz 1418 g
6. Fill the mold to the top with the strawberry mousse and freeze.
Lemon Simple Syrup, page 292 14 oz 410 g
7. Glaze the top of the cake with a clear glaze.
FIGURE 8.13 Strawberry Lemon

Peach Melba Charlotte
Portion size: 7-in. (18-cm) square mold 1. Peel the peaches and remove the pit; cut into ½-in. (12-mm)
Yield description: One 7-in. (18-cm) square mold cubes.
2. Prepare the poaching liquid (page 267); add two sprigs of mint.
3. Poach the peaches until tender; chill on an ice bath.
Pain de Genes 2 lb 10 oz 1205 g
4. Spread a very thin layer of raspberry marmalade on the pain de
Raspberry Marmalade genes and stack to create four layers and freeze.
Poached Peaches, page 267 5. Slice ¼-in. (6-mm) thick layers of the pain de genes and arrange
Fresh Raspberries in 7-in. (18-cm) mold.
Vanilla Bavaria, page 139 3 lb 1360 g 6. Prepare the vanilla Bavarian, fill the mold halfway.
Clear Glaze, page 106 1 lb 11.7 oz 787 g 7. Place the poached peaches into the mold and cover with re-
maining Bavarian.
8. Lastly, place another layer of pain de genes on the mold and
freeze.
9. Unmold the cake and brush the top with clear glaze.
10. Apply white chocolate plaquettes with raspberry powder to the
sides of the cake.
FIGURE 8.14 Peach Melba Charlotte
Recipes 227
Mango Chocolate Entremets
Yield: 0.0 lb (00 g) Procedure

Portions: 1 1. Assemble the insert by filling a 7.5-in. (19-cm) round mold with
Portion size: 8-in. (20-cm) hexagon 8 oz (230 g) chocolate mango creméux and 4 oz (115 g) mango
Yield description: One 8-in. (20-cm) hexagon curd, freeze.
2. Slice the devil’s food cake into ¼-in. (6-mm) thick layers and
Ingredients U.S. Metric place one layer on top of the frozen creméux and curd mixture.
Reconstructed Hazelnut Base, page 229 8.5 oz 240 g 3. Prepare the 8-in. (20-cm) hexagon mold and mousse; assemble
Devil’s Food, page 191 4 lb 1 oz 1865 g using the upside-down method.
Chocolate Mango Creméux, page 230 8 oz 230 g 4. Freeze.
Mango Curd, page 230 4 oz 115 g 5. After unmolding, glaze the cake while frozen.
Anglaise-Based Chocolate Mousse,

page 135, replace the rum with
mango purée
Chocolate Mirror Glaze, page 231 2 lb 920 g
FIGURE 8.15 Mango Chocolate Entremets

Hazelnut Dough Reconstructed Hazelnut Dough

Portion size: 1 lb 8 oz (698.7 g) Portion size: 1 lb 1 oz (480 g)
Yield description: 1 portion at 1 lb 8 oz (698.7 g) Yield description: 1 portion at 1 lb 1 oz (480 g)

Butter 6 oz 170 g Hazelnut Dough 8.5 oz 240 g
Sugar 4.6 oz 130 g Cassonade 1.8 oz 50 g
Hazelnut Flour 3.2 oz 90 g Butter 2.5 oz 70 g
Cake Crumbs 1.1 oz 30 g Semisweet Chocolate 64% 4.2 oz 120 g
Note: Pâte Sablée, Chocolate Pâte Sablée, Short Dough, Chocolate
All-Purpose Flour 7.6 oz 215 g Short Dough or Graham Cracker Dough can be used in place of the
Baking Powder 0.13 oz 3.7 g Hazelnut Dough.
Procedure
Procedure 1. Combine cassonade and hazelnut dough in a bowl.
1. Creaming method. 2. Melt chocolate and butter.
2. Refrigerate dough for 2 to 3 hours. 3. Fold melted chocolate mixture into hazelnut dough.
3. Roll 8 oz (240 g) to ⁄8 in. (3 mm) and bake.
1 4. Press gently into cake ring.
4. While the dough is still warm, cut into 1/4-in. (6-mm) squares
and cool.
5. Reserve for reconstructed hazelnut dough.
Recipes 229
Chocolate Mango Creméux Mango Curd

Yield description: 1 portion at 1 lb 7 oz (670 g) Yield description: 1 portion at 12.2 oz (350 g)

Heavy Cream 6.7 oz 190 g Passion Fruit Purée 2.6 oz 75 g
Passion Fruit Purée 1.6 oz 45 g Mango Purée 2.6 oz 75 g
Mango Purée 5.1 oz 145 g Egg Yolks 1.6 oz 45 g
Cassonade 1.2 oz 35 g Eggs 1.9 oz 55 g
Egg Yolks 2.6 oz 75 g Sugar 1.6 oz 45 g
Semisweet Chocolate 64% 6.3 oz 180 g Butter 1.9 oz 55 g
Procedure
1. Crème anglaise method using the heavy cream, passion fruit Procedure
purée, mango purée, cassonade, and egg yolks. 1. Curd method, page 124.
2. Emulsify creméux with chocolate. 2. Mold and freeze for entremets assembly.
3. Pour into mold and freeze.

Chocolate Mirror Glaze
Yield: 2 lb (920 g)
Portions: 1
Portion size: 2 lb (920 g)
Yield description: 1 portion at 2 lb (920 g)

Water 3.5 oz 100 g
Sugar 9.2 oz 260 g
Procedure
1. Combine water, heavy cream, sugar, and glucose in a saucepan.

2. Cook to 215°F (102°C).
3. Whisk in cocoa powder and gelatin.
4. Strain through a chinois; do not press glaze through the chinois.
This will cause the glaze to be too thick and have a coarse
texture from the cocoa powder.
5. Cool and use glaze at 95°F (35°C).
Recipes 231
Milk Chocolate Blood
Orange Entremets
Portions: 1
Portion size: 7-in. (18-cm) ring
Yield description: One 7-in. (18-cm) ring

Crispy Hazelnut Base, page 234 13 oz 380 g
Flourless Chocolate Cake, page 234 5.3 oz 150 g
Caramel Creméux, page 235 4 oz 120 g
Blood Orange Pectin Gel, Page XXX,
using blood orange purée
Milk Chocolate Mousse, page 235
Caramel Glaze, page 236
Procedure
1. Assemble the insert by pouring 3.5 oz (100 g) of blood orange

pectin gel into a 6.5-in. (16.5-cm) ring mold and refrigerate
until set.
2. Next fill the mold with 4 oz (120 g) of caramel creméux.
3. Place the flourless chocolate cake cut to fit the bottom of the
ring mold on the creméux and freeze.
4. Once the insert is completely frozen, prepare the milk
chocolate mousse.
5. Fill the 7-in. (18-cm) ring mold and press the insert into
the mousse.
6. Assemble the crispy hazelnut base and cut to fit the 7-in. (18-
cm) ring mold.
7. Place the crispy hazelnut base even with the top of the mold.
8. Freeze until completely set.
9. Unmold and finish with the caramel glaze.

FIGURE 8.16 Milk ChocolateRecipes 233
Blood Orange
Flourless Chocolate Cake Crispy Hazelnut Base
Yield: 1 lb 1 oz (495 g) Yield: 13 oz (380 g)

Portion size: half sheet pan Portion size: 13 oz (380 g)
Yield description: 1 half sheet pan Yield description: 1 portion at 13 oz (380 g)
Egg Whites 5.3 oz 150 g Butter 1.9 oz 55 g
Egg Yolks 3.9 oz 110 g Powder Sugar 4.6 oz 130 g
Cocoa Powder 1.9 oz 55 g Hazelnut Flour 5.3 oz 150 g
Procedure
Procedure
1. Combine butter and glucose in a saucepan and bring to a boil.
1. Make a French meringue with the sugar and egg whites.
2. Add powdered sugar and hazelnut flour to saucepan; stir to
2. Once the egg whites are whipped to stiff peaks, add the yolks. combine.
3. Fold the cocoa powder into the whipped egg mixture. 3. Roll between two silpats to a thickness of 1⁄8 in. (3 mm).
4. Spread onto silpat-lined half sheet pan. 4. Bake at 350°F (176°C) until golden brown.
5. Bake at 350°F (176°C) for 10 to 15 minutes. 5. Cut into desired shape while warm; reserve for assembly.

Caramel Creméux Milk Chocolate Mousse

Yield description: 1 portion at 1 lb 2 oz (526 g) Yield description: 1 portion at 1 lb 7 oz (655 g)

Sugar #1 2.1 oz 60 g Milk 2.6 oz 75 g
Glucose 1.4 oz 40 g Heavy Cream 2.6 oz 75 g
Water 0.5 oz 15 g Egg Yolks 1.1 oz 30 g
Milk 5.5 oz 155 g Gelatin Sheets, bloomed 1 each 1 each
Heavy Cream 5.6 oz 160 g Milk Chocolate 5.3 oz 150 g
Vanilla Bean, split and scraped 1 each 1 each Semisweet Chocolate 62% 1.8 oz 50 g
Sugar #2 0.7 oz 20 g Heavy Cream, whipped to soft peaks 9.7 oz 275 g
Salt 0.05 oz 1.5 g Procedure
1. Prepare a crème anglaise (page 143) with the milk, heavy

cream, and egg yolks.
Procedure 2. Add the gelatin and strain.
1. Make a caramel with sugar #1, water, and glucose. 3. Emulsify the crème anglaise with the milk and dark chocolate.
2. Deglaze the pan with the heavy cream and milk; add the 4. Cool to 86°F (30°C).
vanilla bean. 5. Fold in the whipped cream.
3. Over a low heat, warm the mixture until all the caramel has

dissolved.
4. Combine the egg yolks with sugar #2
5. Finish cooking using the crème anglaise method (page 124).
6. Add the gelatin and salt, strain through a chinois.
Recipes 235
Caramel Glaze Apricot Milk Chocolate Entremets
Yield: 1 lb 12 oz (796.5 g) Portions: 1

Portions: 1 Portion size: 7 in. (18 cm)
Portion size: 1 lb 15 oz (796.5 g) Yield description: 1 portion at 7 in. (18 cm)
Yield description: 1 portion at 1 lb 15 oz (796.5 g)

Ingredients U.S. Metric Chocolate Streusel, page 238 14 oz 400 g
Sugar 11.1 oz 315 g Yogurt Panna Cotta, page 239 10 oz 306 g
Water #1 3 oz 85 g Pectin Gel, page 105, using black
Heavy Cream 9.3 oz 265 g currant purée
Water #2 4.6 oz 130 g Milk Chocolate Mousse, page 235
Tapioca Starch 0.6 oz 16.5 g Roasted Apricots, page 238 14 apricot

halves
Pistachio Dacquoise, page 221
Sweetened Condensed Milk 2.5 oz 70 g
Milk Chocolate Spray, page 397
Procedure
Procedure
1. Combine the first water—3 oz (85 g)—and sugar in a saucepan
1. Prepare the black currant gel; pour a thin layer into 5.75-in.
and caramelize.
(14-cm) round silicone mold and freeze.
2. Deglaze the caramel with the heavy cream.
2. Arrange the roasted apricots on black currant gel.
3. Cook over low heat to dissolve any solid caramel.
3. Fill the mold with 7 oz (200 g) of yogurt panna cotta and freeze.
4. Make a slurry with the second water—4.6 oz (130 g)—and tap-
4. Cut the pistachio dacquoise to 5.75 in. (14 cm) round.
ioca starch.
5. Unmold the panna cotta insert and place onto the pistachio
5. Whisk the slurry into the saucepan and bring to a boil.
dacquoise; reserve in freezer for assembly.
6. Add the gelatin and sweetened condensed milk.
6. Prepare the milk chocolate mousse.
7. Blend with an immersion blender and strain through a chinois.
7. Assemble the entremets using the upside-down method.
8. Reserve for assembly; glaze at 86°F (30°C).
8. Fill the mold halfway with the chocolate mousse; place the
insert so it is even with the bottom of the mold.
9. Place the assembled cake in the freezer.
10. Unmold and spray with milk chocolate spray.
11. Place the sprayed cake on the Chocolate Streusel base.

FIGURE 8.17 Apricot Milk Chocolate
Chocolate Streusel Roasted Apricots
Yield: 14 oz (400 g) Portions: 1

Portions: 1 Portion size: 14 apricot halves
Portion size: 14 oz (400 g) Yield description: 1 portion at 14 apricot halves
Yield description: 1 portion at 14 oz (400 g)

Ingredients U.S. Metric Apricots, cut in half, pit removed 7 each 7 each
Butter, soft 3.5 oz 100 g Butter 1 oz 28 g
Sugar 3.5 oz 100 g Vanilla Sugar 1 oz 28 g
All-Purpose Flour 2.5 oz 70 g
Almond Flour 3.5 oz 100 g Procedure
1. Melt the butter and pour over the apricot halves.

2. Add the sugar and mix to combine.
Procedure 3. Place on a silpat-lined sheet pan.
1. Combine all ingredients with a paddle attachment mix 4. Bake at 450°F (230°C) for 5 to 7 minutes.
until combined. 5. Cool and slice the apricots; reserve for assembly.
2. Roll into tubes and freeze.
3. Process the frozen tubes through a meat grinder; return to
the freezer.
4. Place the frozen dough into a 7-in. (18-cm) metal ring and bake
at 300°F (150°C) for 12 to 15 minutes.

Yogurt Panna Cotta
Yield: 10 oz (306 g)
Portions: 1

Sugar 1.6 oz 45 g
Vanilla Bean, split and scraped ½ each ½ each
Gelatin Powder 0.13 oz 3.8 g
Water 0.5 oz 15 g
Greek Yogurt 2% 4.1 oz 115 g
Yogurt Powder 0.25 oz 7.5 g
Procedure

2. Combine heavy cream, sugar, and vanilla bean in a saucepan.
3. Heat to dissolve sugar.
4. Add bloomed gelatin to warm cream mixture; cool to 95°F (35°C).
5. Add yogurt powder and Greek yogurt; remove vanilla bean.
6. Mix with an immersion blender.
8. Reserve for assembly.
Recipes 239
Banana Lime Entremets
Portions: 1
Portion size: 9.8 in x 3.5 in (25 cm x 9 cm)
Yield description: 1 portion at 9.8 in x 3.5 in (25 cm x 9 cm)

Reconstructed Lime Streusel 9 oz 255 g
Base, page 242
Coconut Biscuit, page 242 1 lb 3 oz 555 g
Banana Creméux, page 243 8 oz 225 g
Lime Curd, page 243 8 oz 225 g
White Chocolate Coconut
Mousse, page 136
Banana Glaze, page 244
Procedure
1. Assemble the insert by pouring lime curd in a 3.5 × 10 in. (8.9 ×

25 cm) rectangular mold, place in the refrigerator to set.
2. Top the lime curd with banana creméux and freeze.
3. Cut the coconut biscuit to the same size as the curd mold;
reserve for assembly.
4. Assemble the reconstructed lime struessel base; reserve in the
freezer for assembly.
5. Prepare the coconut white chocolate mousse.
6. Spread a thin layer of mousse on the coconut biscuit and attach
the curd to the cake.
7. Assemble the cake using the upside-down method; fill the mold
with coconut white chocolate mousse.
8. Press the insert into the mold.
9. Spread a thin layer of the mousse.
10. Insert the reconstructed lime streusel base and freeze.
11. Unmold the entremets and apply banana glaze.

FIGURE 8.18 Recipes 241
Banana Lime
Lime Streusel Coconut Biscuit

Portion size: 12 oz (362 g) Portion size: half sheet pan
Yield description: 1 portion at 12 oz (362 g) Yield Description: 1 half sheet pan

Butter, cold, cubed 2.8 oz 80 g Eggs 4.4 oz 125 g
Brown Sugar 2.8 oz 80 g Coconut Flour 0.7 oz 20 g
Lime Zest 2 each 2 each Powder Sugar 1.8 oz 50 g
Dessicated Coconut 2.8 oz 80 g Coconut Purée 3.2 oz 90 g
All-Purpose Flour 4.2 oz 120 g Sugar 1.7 oz 48 g
Salt 0.07 oz 2g Cake Flour 2.1 oz 60 g
Salt 0.06 oz 2g
Desiccated Coconut 0.9 oz 25 g
Procedure
1. Combine all ingredients with a paddle attachment.
2. Spread onto a silpat-lined sheet pan and bake at 350°F (180°C).
Procedure
1. Combine eggs, coconut flour, powder sugar, and coconut purée

with a rubber spatula.
Reconstructed Lime Streusel Base 2. Make a French meringue with the egg whites and sugar.
3. Fold the meringue into the first mixture.
4. Fold in the cake flour.
5. Spread onto a silpat-lined half sheet pan.
Yield: 9 oz (255 g)
Portions: 1

Lime Streusel, above 5.1 oz 145 g
White Chocolate 2.1 oz 60 g
Butter 1.1 oz 30 g
Rice Krispies 0.7 oz 20 g
Procedure
1. Combine lime streusel and rice krispies.

2. Melt white chocolate and butter over a water bath.
3. Fold melted white chocolate mixture into streusel mixture.
4. Press into a 3.5 × 10 x 0.25 in. (8.9 × 25 × 0.6 cm) mold and
refrigerate until set.

Banana Creméux Lime Curd

Yield description: 1 portion at 9.9 oz (280 g) Yield description: 1 portion at 12 oz (350 g)

Banana Purée 4.1 oz 115 g Lime Purée 5.3 oz 150 g
Heavy Cream 2.8 oz 80 g Egg Yolks 1.6 oz 45 g
Egg Yolks 1.2 oz 35 g Whole Eggs 1.9 oz 55 g
Gelatin Sheets, bloomed 1.5 each 1.5 each Butter 1.9 oz 55 g
Green Food Coloring As needed As needed
Procedure
1. Prepare a crème anglaise (page 143) with the banana purée,

heavy cream, egg yolks, and sugar. Procedure
2. Add the gelatin and strain through a chinois. 1. Curd method, page 124.
Recipes 243
Banana Glaze
Portions: 1

Powder Gelatin 0.2 oz 5.5 g
Water #1 1 oz 30 g
Cornstarch 1 oz 28 g
Water #2 3.2 oz 90 g
Sugar 4.9 oz 140 g
Passion Purée 0.7 oz 20 g
Glucose 1.8 oz 50 g
Yellow Food Coloring As needed As needed
Neutral Glaze 5.8 oz 165 g
Note: This glaze can be used to create a wide variety of fruit glazes,
replace the purée with the desired flavor and the food color with a
complimentary color.
Procedure
1. Bloom gelatin in first water 1 oz (30 g).

2. Make a slurry with the cornstarch and second water 3.2 oz (90 g).
3. Warm sugar, purées, and glucose to 104°F (40°C); whisk in
the slurry.
4. Continue whisking and bring mixture to boil; add neutral glaze
and yellow food coloring as needed.
5. Mix with an immersion blender and strain through chinois.
6. Glaze at 85°F (30°C).

Key Terms
Crumb coats Insert Top-to-bottom method
Entremets Bottom-to-top method Glacé

1. Describe the similarities and differences between classic and 4. Identify the two methods of assembling a contemporary cake and
contemporary cakes. describe the benefits of each.
2. What are the functions of the base in a contemporary cake?
3. Why is it important to freeze the molds and equipment necessary
for producing a glacé?

CHAPTER 9
Tarts and Pies

It’s hard to imagine life without pie. Long before the centuries-old phrase, “Necessity is the
mother of invention,” pie dough answered the call, allowing sweet and savory fillings to be
wrapped in dough, making transportation easier. Today, these delicate crusts still help to trans-
port and deliver flavorful fillings while providing a crisp texture.
LEARNING OBJECTIVES

1. Prepare a variety of pie and tart doughs.
2. Fill and assemble single- and double-crusted pies and tarts.
3. Assemble pies and tarts using various doughs and fillings.
Pies and Tarts

Whether it is a casual restaurant, bakery, or fine-dining restaurant, you can be sure there will
be a pie or tart on the menu. So, what is the difference between a pie and a tart? The answer to
this question is: not much. Both can be made sweet or savory, they can be made in large pans
and cut for serving or in an individual size—either way, they are delicious. The main difference
between a pie and tart is shape. Pies are made in pans that have sloping sides. Tarts are made
in fluted tart pans or straight-sided flan rings. There is no rule that says you must use pie dough
in a pie tin—doughs can be used interchangeably to create a wide variety of products (including
the galette, an open-faced version of a pie, usually baked on a flat sheet pan). One other area
remains true, making a great pie or tart starts with selecting the correct ingredients, recipes,
and flavors.
Ingredients
Ingredients can be broken down into the crust and the fillings. Classic pies, like apple, pumpkin
and cherry, are easily recognizable. All three have a crust and filling, and when we look toward
creating newer versions of the classics, additional recipes can be added. This chapter takes
a brief look at the classics and then gives them an updated twist. The new interpretations of
these items need to use the flavors from the classics as well as an understanding of the ingredi-
ents and techniques used to create the doughs and fillings.
247
Doughs
The crust is the carrier for the filling, but it is much more than this, adding flavor and texture to
the tart or pie. It should be delicate enough that it can be cut through easily—even if using a plas-
tic fork—yet sturdy enough to hold up. Using the proper ingredients and understanding their
function in the recipe will help to determine which ingredients will provide the desired results.
Types of Doughs
Dough Ingredients
Pie Flour, Fat, Water
Short Dough Butter, Sugar, Egg, Flour
Chocolate Short Dough Butter, Sugar, Egg, Flour, Cocoa Powder
P te Brisée Flour, Butter, Egg, Water
Almond Sugar Dough Butter, Sugar, Almond Flour, Flour, Egg
Flour
The key to creating a great pie or tart is in the crust. It is easy to make a crust that looks good
and holds up—at the same time, it might be difficult to break and have poor flavor. Creating
a tender crust is achieved through the use of low-protein-content flours. Using cake or pastry
flour will yield a tender product.
Fat
Different doughs will call for different fats. For example, pie dough may use hydrogenated short-
ening, lard, or a mixture of butter and shortening while short doughs and p te brisée benefit
from butter. Regardless of which fat is used in a recipe, they all perform the same function in
the dough and shorten the gluten. The fat coats the gluten and prevents it from forming long
chains. For more on gluten development, see Chapter 2. Fat is also responsible for creating
flakiness in the dough.
Hydrogenated shortening is primarily used in pie dough and has an excellent consistency
for mixing. It is also inexpensive. Drawbacks are the high melting point, 120°F (49°C), which coats
the mouth with a greasy feeling. Recent trends and legislation (trans fats have been banned in
California and New York City and the FDA has given food manufacturers until June of 2018 to
phase out use) have led to the development of trans fat–free, fully hydrogenated fats. During
this process the consumer became aware of the negative health impacts of hydrogenated fats.
Rendering fat from pork produces lard. It is then deodorized to remove any flavor that
may remain. Lard melts at 115°F (45°C); while this is close to the melting point of hydrogenated
shortening, lard does not coat the mouth in the same way. Lard is softer at room temperature,
which can make it somewhat more difficult to work with. It is also an animal-based product that
is not suitable for vegetarian applications. An excellent, flaky pie dough can be made using lard.
Liquid
Pie dough needs a liquid to pull the dough together. Water works very well, and it is inexpensive
and contributes to the texture of the crust. Milk can also be used, although it contains lactose
(sugar) and fat. The lactose will cause the dough to take on more color and brown more easily,
and the fat will keep the dough softer. These are not necessarily negatives, but keep in mind
that changing the ingredients will impact the final product. Regardless of whether milk or water
is used, great care must be taken to not overmix the dough once the liquid is added.
248 C H A PT E R 9 Tarts and Pies

Sugar
Sugar contributes to the dough’s sweetness and crust color. It also plays a role in controlling
gluten development. The hygroscopic properties of sugar pull moisture away from flour, pre-
venting the flour from properly hydrating. While powdered sugar and granulated sugar both
provide the same sweetening power, they react differently in the dough. Doughs made with
powdered sugar will not spread as much as those made with granulated sugar. Grinding the
sugar into a very fine powder will increase the ability of the sugar to absorb liquid due to the
larger surface area of the granules. Reducing the amount of liquid that is free in the dough will
also prevent spread.
Eggs
Eggs can change the color, flavor, and texture of a tart shell. The majority of an egg white is
water. All the water creates a dough that is firm, almost tough. The yolk of the egg is mostly fat.
The rich yellow yolk adds flavor, color, and tenderizes the dough. But if using egg yolk creates
a wonderful dough, why aren’t all doughs just made with egg yolk? Because the intended use
of the dough must be considered before just changing the ingredients. Although most recipes
will function as expected when changing yolks for whole eggs and vice versa, dough is differ-
ent. For example, a shell that needs to maintain its strength to support the filling when cut and
served on a buffet would benefit from the use of whole eggs. The water in the egg white will give
it strength. In contrast, desserts served à la carte can easily use the more tender dough made
with only egg yolks.
Fruits
Incorporating fruit into pies and tarts adds texture and freshness to the final product. Fruits
come in a variety of forms; fresh, frozen, dried, canned, and puréed. Fresh fruit provides the
best flavor and texture, plus the benefit of using produce during the peak of freshness. But
weather and insects can destroy crops and increase prices. At other times, the fruit may grow
but not produce the ideal crop. Frozen, canned, dried, and puréed fruits can offer an option
when fresh produce is not at its peak.
This is not to say that processed fruits are substandard either. In some cases they can be
superior to fresh because the pastry chef is not limited to the seasonal availability of produce.
Processed fruits are harvested when the fruits are in season and handled in a way to preserve
the integrity of the fruit. Larger production batches of pies can be made with frozen or canned
apples, while smaller quantities for restaurant service can use fresh apples.
Mixing Dough
When making dough for a pie or tart, minimal mixing will ensure the gluten is not overdevel-
oped, creating a tough crust. There are two mixing methods used for doughs, creaming and
cutting in fat. The creaming method adds the flour at the end of the mixing procedure, while the
cutting in fat method reserves the liquid until the last step. Both effectively minimize the gluten
development of the dough. There are many variations for each of these methods; however, the
procedures below are the most commonly used methods.
Creaming
1. Scale all ingredients and warm to 70°F (21°C).
2. Combine butter and sugar with a paddle on low speed.
3. Slowly add eggs in three additions and scrape the bowl and paddle often.
Mixing Dough 249

4. Lastly, add the flour in one addition, mix until combined.
5. Scrape the bowl and paddle again, mix briefly.
6. Flatten dough out to 1 in. (2.5 cm) thick using bread flour if necessary. Wrap in plastic wrap
and refrigerate for at least 4 hours.
When using the creaming method, be sure to mix on low speed. Higher mixing speeds or
prolonged mixing time will result in incorporating air into the dough. The extra air in the dough
will expand during the baking process, thus causing changes to the shape of the dough. Room
temperature ingredients will assist in reducing mixing time and creating the proper emulsion
between the ingredients.
Cutting in Fat—Mealy Method

1. Scale ingredients.
2. Cube fat into ½ in. (15 mm) cubes, place in refrigerator to keep fat cold.
3. Combine fat and dry ingredients in mixer with paddle attachment.
4. Mix on low speed until mixture resembles cornmeal.
5. Add cold liquid in one addition mix until combined.
6. Flatten dough out to 1 in. (2.5 cm) thick, using bread flour if necessary. Wrap in plastic wrap
Cutting in Fat—Flaky Method

1. Scale ingredients.
2. Cube fat into ½ in. (15 mm) cubes, place in refrigerator to keep fat cold.
3. Combine fat and dry ingredients in mixer with paddle attachment.
4. Mix on low speed until fat reaches “pea-sized particles.”
5. Add cold liquid in one addition mix until combined.
6. Flatten dough out to 1 in. (2.5 cm) thick, using bread flour if necessary. Wrap in plastic wrap
It is possible to make flaky and mealy dough from the same exact recipe. The use of the
dough determines which method must be used when making the dough. Mealy pie dough
is used for lining the bottoms of pies. Pie fillings, such as fruit fillings and custards, are not
as easily absorbed into the mealy dough. Flaky pie dough is reserved for tops of double-
crusted pies.
Traditionally, graham cracker crumbs are also used to line pie shells. The crumbs are
combined with melted butter and pressed into the pan and baked briefly to toast the crumbs
and set the crust. This same process can be done with almost any cookie or short dough. Bis-
cotti, almond short dough, and even linzer dough can be used in place of the graham crackers
to create a crumb crust; the flavor of the dough used for the crust can add additional flavor and
show the creativity of the pastry chef.
Rolling and Lining Shell

Rolling
After the dough has been mixed, it must be allowed to cool; this is a critical step that is often
overlooked. The resting period allows the flour to fully hydrate. Additionally, cooling allows the

fats to solidify and create a dough that is firm enough to roll without having it become too soft
and sticky.
Whether rolling the dough with a mechanical sheeter or by hand with a rolling pin, the
process is the same. Always use bread flour when dusting the work surface; weaker flours, such
as cake or pastry, can be easily absorbed by the dough.
Lightly dust the work surface with bread flour. Place 8 oz (230 g) chilled dough onto
the table and dust the top of the dough. When using a rolling pin, gently roll the dough
down and out. As the dough begins to expand, turn and move the dough to ensure it is not
sticking to the table. Waiting until the end of rolling to check this typically results in dough
that needs be rolled again. During the rolling process the dough should appear to float on
top of the table as it is rolled. Roll the dough to 1⁄8 in. (3 mm) thick. At this point any addi-
tional dusting flour can be brushed off the dough. Place on a parchment paper-lined sheet
pan and refrigerate for 10 to 20 minutes to allow the dough to become firm before lining
the shells.
Lining a Shell
When lining a shell, the goal is to place the dough in the pan without stretching the dough. If
at any point during the lining process the dough is stretched, it will shrink during the baking,
leading to cracks or shells that do not fill the pan properly.
To limit the amount of stretching when transferring the dough, place a rolling pin
on the dough and roll the dough around the pin. Lift the rolling pin and unroll the
dough onto the shell. The second method involves folding the dough. Carefully fold
the dough in half, work your hands underneath the dough, and lift it into the pan and
unfold the dough.
Once the dough is transferred, begin to work the dough down into the pan. Gently lift the
dough using your fingers and tuck it down into the corners of the pan while turning the pan.
This is a gradual process, it may take two or three times around the pan work the dough down
into the corners. Trying to do this step too quickly will cause the dough to be stretched in some
areas and bunched up and overlapped in others.
A word of caution: Dough that has been stretched is thinner than originally rolled and
dough that is overlapped will be thicker. Due to the differences in thickness the shell will not
bake evenly, some spots will burn and others will be underbaked.
FIGURE 9.1A–C Process of rolling dough:
1. Dusting dough and table 2. Rolling the dough out 3. Turning the dough
Rolling and Lining Shell 251

Classic Pies and Tarts
Baked
Baked pies and tarts can be either single crusted or double crusted. A single-crusted pie may
be referred to as open-faced. In the case of double-crusted pie, the filling is enclosed in the
dough. Regardless of this, there is one constant for both varieties—they are baked. The filling
and shell go into the oven assembled and bake together.
A single-crusted shell is placed in the pan following the lining procedure described in the
previous section. When using the double-crusted method there some additional steps that
must be followed. The filling used in the pie must be cool before placing in the shell. A warm
filling will begin to melt the fat in the dough and create a soggy bottom. Be careful to not drip
any of the filling on the edge of the crust that is to be sealed. This will prevent the doughs from
adhering properly.
Brush the edges of the bottom shell with cold water, just enough to moisten the dough. Too
much water at this point will cause the top dough to slide, rather than stick. Roll out another
8 oz (230 g) of dough following the rolling procedure. Carefully transfer the dough to the pie
using a rolling pin, and unroll the dough onto the pie. There may be dough overhanging
the sides of the pie: this dough can be rerolled and used in a future pie so it is not wasted.
Trim the dough against the pie tin and crimp the edges. Then brush the top with egg wash, and
vent if needed. Vents are small slits placed in the top of the dough that allow steam to escape
from inside the pie. Be sure to brush the egg wash on the top before venting to prevent the egg
wash from dripping inside the pie.
Baking
Baking a double-crusted pie requires some knowledge of the product and the oven. Different
ovens bake at different rates. Since the pie is filled when it is placed in the oven, the pastry
chef must make sure the filling is cooked at the same time the crust is baked. The temper-
atures provided in the recipes are a guide; adjustments may need to be made to the time
and/or oven temperature to properly bake the pie. Pie dough may contain small amounts of
sugar; therefore, it can withstand higher baking temperatures. Indications of doneness in a
double-crusted pie can be observed through crust coloration. If at any point during baking
the filling comes through the seam between the top and bottom crust, remove it from the
oven immediately. If this occurs, the pie is overbaked, the filling is boiling, and fruits will lose
their texture.
Whether the pie or tart is double crusted or a single crusted, it is important to use a hot
oven—375°F (190°C) or in some cases higher. Higher baking temperatures set the crust of the
pie quickly, preventing the bottom from becoming soggy. In some instances, the pie may be
baked at 425°F (220°C) for the first 10 to 15 minutes of baking. Then the temperature is reduced
to continue baking the filling.
Unbaked
Unbaked pies and tarts have a shell that is baked first and then filled. Banana cream pie, fresh
fruit tarts, and lemon tarts are examples of unbaked pies. The fillings for these pies tend to be
lighter than baked pies.
Baking
The dough for unbaked pies and tarts are blind baked, which means that the shells are com-
pletely baked and cooled before adding the filling. There are two methods for this: Shells may

be blind baked using parchment paper and weights or using a second tin. The same results are
obtained from each method, so it’s a matter of personal preference as to which is selected. In
both methods, the dough is docked after lining the pans. Rest the lined pans in the cooler to
allow the dough to firm after lining.
After approximately 20 minutes in the cooler, the dough is lined with cut parchment paper
rounds. The paper needs to be pressed firmly into the corners of the dough and against the
sides, and then filled with weights. Weights can be rice, beans, or purchased pie weights. The
shell is then placed in the oven and baked until golden brown. After the dough and weights
have cooled, remove them from the shell and deposit the filling.
The second tin method works best with products baked in pie tins as they easily fit together
when lined. The dough is lined, trimmed, and docked, and then a second tin is placed inside the
dough. At this point, the pie shells can be stacked and placed in the freezer for later use. Invert
the shell onto a sheet pan and place another sheet pan on top of the tins. This prevents the
aluminum pie tin from moving. The dough is held firmly in place and baked until golden brown.
Once cooled turn the shells over and remove the second pie tin.
Modern Tarts and Pies

Pies and tarts have been around for a long time. Many successful pastry items rely on familiar
flavors presented in a new way. Consider using the flavors of a classical torte like Black Forest in
a tart. Start with the flavors: chocolate, whipped cream, dark cherries, and kirsch. Transitioning
these flavors to a tart can be done by using chocolate short dough, chocolate creméux, a thin
layer of chocolate sponge cake soaked with the kirsch syrup, and dark cherry mousse, and then
topped with vanilla whipped cream. Adding the layer of cake lightens the tart and allows the
introduction of different flavors.
Changing the shape and size of the tart can also impact the visual perception. Pies and
tarts are typically round, but that is basic. To create an interesting buffet or display case item,
use different shapes, like ovals, squares, and rectangles. Different-sized products can also cre-
ate an attractive display. For example, petits-fours, individual and whole tarts of different fla-
vors, will break up the display.
Troubleshooting for Tarts and Pies
Issue Cause
Dough shrinks. 1. Dough was mixed too long and gluten was developed. Mix for
less time.
2. The flour used had too much protein. Use weaker flour.
3. The dough did not have enough fat. Increase fat.
Crust is soggy. 1. The dough did not bake during the initial stages of baking. Use a
higher oven temperature for first 10 to 15 minutes.
2. The heat on the bottom of the shell was not intense enough. Place on
lowest rack in the oven.
3. The dough is under baked. Bake dough longer.
Pie dough is too soft The fat was mixed too long before adding the wet ingredients. When
before baking. cutting the fat, reduce the mixing time.
Creamed doughs The emulsion of the butter and eggs was done too quickly. When mixing,
are greasy. gradually add eggs to maintain emulsion.
Dough is tough. 1. The dough is overmixed. Reduce mixing time.

2. The flour used contained too much protein. Use a weaker flour.
Modern Tarts and Pies 253

Recipes
Pie Dough Pâte Sablée

Yield description: Three 9-in. (23-cm) pie shells Yield description: Three 9-in. (23-cm) tart shells

Pastry Flour 12.5 oz 354 g 100 Butter 7 oz 198 g 60.2
Shortening, 8 oz 227 g 64.1 Almond Flour 1.4 oz 40 g 12.2
cold, cut
Powder Sugar 4.4 oz 125 g 38
into 1⁄2-in.
(15-mm) cubes Eggs 2.8 oz 79 g 24
Water, ice cold 4 oz 113 g 31.9 Salt 0.04 oz 1.1 g 0.3
Sugar 0.8 oz 23 g 6.5 All-Purpose Flour 11.6 oz 329 g 100
Salt 0.15 oz 4.3 g 1.2
Procedure
Procedure 1. Creaming method, pages 249–250.
1. Cutting in fat method, page 250.
Variation
Chocolate Pâte Sablée


Short Dough Graham Cracker Dough

Yield description: Three 9-in. (23-cm) tart shells Yield description: Three 9-in. (23-cm) tart shells

Butter 6 oz 170 g 50 Butter 3.5 oz 100 g 11.1
Powdered Sugar 6 oz 170 g 50 Powdered Sugar 3.1 oz 88 g 9.7
Egg Yolks 4 oz 113 g 33.3 Brown Sugar 3.1 oz 88 g 9.7
Cake Flour, sifted 12 oz 340 g 100 Salt 0.1 oz 4g 0.4
All-Purpose Flour 15 oz 425 g 47
Honey 1.8 oz 50 g 5.5
Procedure
1. Cream butter and powder sugar on low speed.
2. Slowly add egg yolks in four additions, scraping between
each addition.
3. Add cake flour; mix until combined. Procedure
4. Scrape and mix again briefly. 1. Cream butter, brown sugar, and salt.
5. Refrigerate for 4 hours before use. 2. Sift dry ingredients.
3. Slowly add liquids, scraping often.
4. Add dry ingredients and mix until combined.
Variation
5. Chill dough for 4 hours.
Chocolate Short Dough
6. Roll to 1⁄8 in. (3 mm) thick.
Ingredients U.S. Metric % 7. Bake at 350°F (175°C).
Cake Flour 1 lb 4 oz 600 g 36.9

Cocoa Powder 2 oz 60 g 3.8
Recipes 255
Cream Cheese Dough Sablé Breton

Yield description: Three 9-in. (23-cm) tart shells Yield description: Three 9-in. (23-cm) rings

Pastry Flour 12 oz 340 g 100 Butter 7.8 oz 220 g 78.6
Salt 0.06 oz 1.7 g 0.5 Sugar 7.1 oz 200 g 71.4
Butter, cold, cubed 7.2 oz 204 g 60 Egg Yolks 3.5 oz 100 g 35.7
¼ in. (6 mm)
Cream Cheese, cold, 5.4 oz 153 g 45
Baking Powder 0.35 oz 10 g 3.6
cubed ¼ in. (6 mm)
Water, ice cold 1.2 oz 34 g 10
Cider Vinegar 0.6 oz 17 g 5
Procedure
1. Cream butter and sugar.

Procedure 2. Add yolks in four additions, scraping between each addition.
3. Sift dry ingredients.
1. Sift pastry flour and salt.
4. Add dry ingredients to creamed mixture to form a dough.
2. Cut in cream cheese and butter.
5. Scrape and mix again briefly.
3. Add water and cider vinegar; mix until dough is formed.
7. Roll dough to desired thickness cut and place inside of ring
molds.
8. Bake at 330°F (165°C).

Pâte Brisée Old-Fashioned Apple Pie

Portion size: 8 oz (227 g) Portion size: 9-in. (23-cm) pie
Yield description: Three 9-in. (23-cm) tart rings Yield description: One 9-in. (23-cm) pie

Pastry Flour 14.4 oz 408 g 100 Granny Smith Apples, whole 2 lb 8 oz 1134 g
Butter, cold, cut into 7.2 oz 204 g 50 Brown Sugar 1.8 oz 51 g
½ in. (15 mm) cubes
Sugar 1.8 oz 51 g
Egg Yolk 1.2 oz 34 g 83.3
Water, cold 3.6 oz 102 g 25
Cinnamon 0.2 oz 5.7 g
Salt 0.06 oz 1.7 g 0.4
Nutmeg 0.02 oz 0.6 g
Salt 0.07 oz 2g
Butter 1 oz 28 g
Procedure Cornstarch 0.5 oz 14 g
1. Cut butter into flour, using the paddle attachment until mixture
resembles coarse cornmeal.
2. Add salt, water, and yolks; mix to combine.
Procedure
3. Refrigerate.
1. Peel and core apples, slice into 1⁄8 in. (3 mm) thick slices.
2. Combine apples, brown sugar, sugar, lemon juice, cinnamon,
nutmeg, and salt.
3. Toss together; cover and refrigerate for 45 minutes.
4. Drain apples to remove any liquid.
5. Add the butter to the drained liquid and reduce to a thick syrup.
6. Toss apples with cornstarch.
7. Pour reduction over apples and toss.
Recipes 257
Cherry Pie Peanut Butter Tart

Portion size: 9-in. (23-cm) pie Portion size: 9-in. (23-cm) tart
Yield description: One 9-in. (23-cm) pie Yield description: One 9-in. (23-cm) tart

IQF Cherries, thawed and drained 1 lb 8 oz 680 g Peanut Butter 8 oz 227 g
Water, cold 2 oz 57 g Cream Cheese 8 oz 227 g
Cornstarch 1 oz 28 g Powdered Sugar 4 oz 113 g
Drained Juice from Cherries 6 oz 170 g Butter 1 oz 28 g
Sugar #1 2 oz 57 g Salt 0.1 oz 2.8 g
Vanilla Bean, split and scraped 1 each 1 each Heavy Cream 4 oz 113 g
Sugar #2 3.5 oz 99 g Powdered Sugar 0.5 oz 14 g
Salt 0.25 oz 5.7 g Chocolate Short Dough, page 255
Lime Juice 0.25 oz 5.7 g
Procedure
Procedure 1. Cream peanut butter, cream cheese, powdered sugar, butter,
1. Drain juice from cherries; reserve juice. and salt on medium high speed until lightened.
2. Combine cold water and cornstarch to make a slurry. 2. Whip cream and second powdered sugar to soft peaks.
3. Add first amount of sugar, vanilla bean, and cherry juice and 3. Fold whipped cream into cream cheese mixture.
bring to boil. 4. Fill baked and cooled chocolate short dough shell and refriger-
4. Whisk in slurry and bring to a boil. ate for 2 hours.
5. Add second sugar, salt, and lime juice.

6. Fold in cherries.
7. Cool completely before use.

Chantilly (Stabilized) Whiskey Pecan Pie

Portion size: 2 lb 6.8 oz (1102 g) Portion size: 9-in. (23-cm) pie
Yield description: 1 portion at 2 lb 6.8 oz (1102 g) Yield description: One 9-in. (23-cm) pie

Heavy Cream 2 lb 907 g Whiskey 1.2 oz 34 g
Sugar 4.75 oz 135 g Vanilla Paste 0.5 oz 14 g
Vanilla Bean, split and 2 each 2 each Eggs 6 oz 170 g
scraped, seeds only
Sugar 4.8 oz 136 g
Gelatin Powder 0.125 oz 3.5 g
Light Corn Syrup 6.4 oz 181 g
Water, cold 2 oz 57 g
Pecans 6.7 oz 190 g
Dark Chocolate Chips 3.3 oz 94 g
Chocolate Pâte Sablée, page 254
Procedure
1. Bloom gelatin in cold water.

2. Whip heavy cream, vanilla bean seeds, and sugar to medium Procedure
peaks.
1. Combine whiskey, vanilla paste, eggs, corn syrup, and sugar
3. Dissolve gelatin over a water bath to 110°F (43°C).
with a whisk to form a custard mixture.
4. Add 10% of the whipped cream to the gelatin and warm to
2. Strain mixture through a chinois.
105°F (40°C).
3. Line a pie shell with chocolate pâte sablée.
5. Stream warm gelatin mixture into whipping cream.
4. Place pecans and chocolate chips.
6. Quickly fold to evenly distribute gelatin mixture.
5. Pour custard mixture over chips.
6. Bake at 350°F (175°C).
Recipes 259
Fresh Fruit Tart, Classic
Portions: 1
Portion size: 9-in. (23-cm) tart
Yield description: One 9-in. (23-cm) tart
Components U.S. Metric

Pâte Sablée, page 254
Raspberry Marmalade
Almond Cream, page 78 12 oz 360 g
Pastry Cream, page 140 6 oz 180 g
Fresh Seasonal Fruit
Apricot Glaze, page 106
Procedure
1. Roll pâte sablée to 1⁄8 in. (3 mm) and line a 9-in. (23-cm) tart pan.
2. Spread a thin layer of raspberry marmalade in the bottom of
the tart shell.
3. Pipe a layer of almond cream into the tart shell.
4. Bake at 350°F (175°C) for 25 minutes or until shell is golden
brown.
5. After shell has cooled completely, fill with pastry cream.
6. Arrange fruit on top of pastry cream. Be sure to cover all of the
pastry cream with the fruit.
7. Brush the fruit with apricot glaze.

FIGURE 9.2 Fresh Fruit Tart
Fresh Fruit Tart, Contemporary
Portions: 1

Raspberry Marmalade
Almond Cream, page 78 12 oz 360 g
Pastry Cream, page 140 6 oz 180 g
Vanilla Creaméux, page 140
Poached Pear
Fresh Fruit
Macarons, page 314
Apricot Glaze, page 106
Chocolate Decor
Procedure
1. Follow steps 1–5 in the fresh fruit tart procedure.

2. Prepare the vanilla creméux and freeze in 7-in. (180-mm)
round mold.
3. Unmold the vanilla creméux and place on top of the pastry
cream.
4. Place the macarons on the tart so they are leaning on the
creméux.
5. Arrange the fresh fruit and poached pear and glaze with apricot
glaze.

FIGURE 9.3 Contemporary Fruit Tart
Lemon Tart
Portions: 1
Components
Short Dough, page 255
Lemon Curd, page 139
Italian Meringue, page 266
Powdered Sugar
Procedure
1. Roll short dough to 1⁄8 in. (3 mm) and blind bake in a 9-in. (23-cm)
tart shell.
2. Cool shell completely and fill with prepared curd.
3. Pipe Italian meringue on top of curd.
4. Dust meringue with powdered sugar.
5. Brown meringue in 425°F (220°C) oven for 3 to 5 minutes.

FIGURE 9.4 Lemon Tart
Recipes 265
Italian Meringue
Portions: 1

Egg Whites 6 oz 170 g
Sugar 12 oz 340 g
Water 3 oz 85 g
Procedure
1. Italian meringue procedure (page XXX).

Raspberry Pistachio Tart
Portion size: 8.5-in. (22-cm) square tart shell 1. Roll pâte sablée to 1⁄8 in. (3 mm) and blind bake in an 8.5-in.
Yield description: One 8.5-in. (22-cm) square tart shell (22-cm) square tart shell.
2. While shell is still warm, brush with melted chocolate.
3. Prepare a half batch of diplomat from raspberry pastry cream.
4. Spread a layer of the diplomat in the tart shell.
5. Cut the pistachio dacquoise to 7.5 in. (19 cm) and place on top
Raspberry Diplomat, of the raspberry diplomat.
page 138
6. Spread a layer of the raspberry diplomat on top of the pistachio
Raspberry Pastry dacquoise to level the tart shell.
Cream, page 268
7. Unmold the pistachio creméux and glaze with clear glaze.
Pistachio Creaméux,
page 268 8. Place the pistachio creméux on top of the tart.
Pistachio Dacquoise, 9. Cover the exposed raspberry cream with the raspberry pista-
page 269 chio crumble.
White Chocolate, melted 3.3 oz 100 g 10. Dust the crumble with powdered sugar.
Clear Glazing Gel, page 106 11. Place the raspberries on the edge of the creméux.
Raspberry Pistachio
Crumble, page 269
Fresh Raspberries
Powdered Sugar
FIGURE 9.5 Raspberry Pistachio Tart
Recipes 267
Pistachio Creméux Raspberry Pastry Cream
Yield: 10 oz (297 g) Yield: 14 oz (415 g)

Yield description: 1 portion at 10 oz (297 g) Yield description: 1 portion at 14 oz (415 g)

Heavy Cream 3.6 oz 102 g Raspberry Purée 8.8 oz 250 g
Milk 3.4 oz 96 g Sugar #1 1.1 oz 31 g
Vanilla Bean, split and scraped 1 each 2 each Egg Yolk 0.88 oz 25 g
Egg Yolks 1.7 oz 48 g Whole Egg 0.88 oz 25 g
Sugar 1.1 oz 31 g Sugar #2 1.1 oz 31 g
Gelatin Sheets, bloomed for 15 minutes 1.25 each 1.25 each Cornstarch 0.8 oz 22.5 g
Pistachio Paste 0.7 oz 20 g Butter 1.1 oz 30 g
Procedure Procedure
1. Crème anglaise method (page 124). 1. Combine raspberry purée and first sugar in a saucepan and
2. Add gelatin sheets and pistachio paste to crème anglaise before bring to a boil.
straining. 2. Combine second sugar and cornstarch in a stainless steel bowl.
3. Pour into 7-in. (180-mm) mold and freeze. 3. Add eggs and egg yolks to cornstarch mixture.
4. Whisk half of the raspberry purée into the egg mixture.
5. Return this mixture back to the saucepan.
6. Bring the cream to a boil for 2 minutes.
7. Remove from the heat and incorporate the butter.
8. Press the cream through a tamis.
9. Place the finished cream into a shallow pan and cover directly
with plastic wrap.
10. Place on an ice bath and refrigerate.

Raspberry Pistachio Crumble Pistachio Dacquoise
Yield: 4 oz (126.5 g) Yield: 1 lb 11 oz (840 g)

Portion size: 4 oz (126.5 g) Portion size: half sheet pan
Yield description: 1 portion at 4 oz (126.5 g) Yield description: 1 half sheet pan

Pistachios, lightly toasted 1.1 oz 30 g Pistachio Flour 4.9 oz 140 g
Corn Flakes 1.1 oz 30 g Almond Flour 4.9 oz 140 g
White Chocolate 1.1 oz 30 g Powdered Sugar 7.4 oz 210 g
Cocoa Butter 1.1 oz 30 g Egg Whites 9.9 oz 280 g
Freeze Dried Raspberries 0.2 oz 6g Sugar 2.5 oz 70 g
Salt 0.02 oz 0.5 g
Procedure
Procedure 1. Sift pistachio flour, almond flour, and powdered sugar.
1. Melt cocoa butter and white chocolate. 2. Make a common meringue with egg whites and sugar.
2. Combine corn flakes, raspberries, salt, and pistachios in a food 3. Fold dry ingredients into meringue.
processor; pulse to grind mixture. 4. Spread onto silpat-lined half sheet pan.
3. Fold melted chocolate mixture into the corn flake mixture. 5. Bake at 400°F (200°C) for 12 to 13 minutes.
4. Roll out between two sheets of parchment paper and allow to
crystallize.
5. Break the hardened mixture into pieces and pulse again in a
food processor to a coarse consistency.
Recipes 269
Peach Galette
Portions: 1
Portion size: 8-in. (20-cm) gallete
Yield description: One 8-in. (20-cm) gallete
Components
Cream Cheese Dough, page 256
Peach Galette Filling, page 271
Egg Wash
Oatmeal Streusel, page 79
Coarse White Sugar
Egg Wash
Powdered Sugar
Procedure
1. Roll cream cheese dough to 1⁄8 in. (3 mm) thick to a diameter of

11.5 in. (30 cm).
2. Place prepared peach galette filling in the center of the dough.
3. Fold the sides of the dough over the peaches, leaving the center
uncovered.
4. Egg wash the sides of the dough and sprinkle with coarse sugar.
5. Top the galette with the oatmeal streusel.
7. After the galette has cooled, dust with powdered sugar.
FIGURE 9.6 Peach Galette

Peach Galette Filling
Portions: 1

Peaches, sliced, ¼ in. (6 mm) thick 1 lb 8 oz 680 g
Sugar 3.3 oz 94 g
Salt 0.1 oz 2.8 g
Cinnamon 0.03 oz 0.9 g
Cornstarch 0.3 oz 8.5 g
Sliced Almonds, lightly toasted 2 oz 57 g
Procedure
1. Combine peaches, sugar, salt, and cinnamon. Let sit for

30 minutes.
2. Strain the juice from the peaches and reduce to a thick syrup.
3. Combine peaches, cornstarch, and sliced almonds.
4. Pour reduced syrup over peaches.
Recipes 271
Tiramisu Tart
Portions: 1
Portion size: 13.75 × 4.5 in. (35 × 11.5 cm) tart
Yield description: One 13.75 × 4.5 in. (35 × 11.5 cm) tart
Components
Chocolate Short Dough, page 255
Mascarpone Cream, page 274
Dark Chocolate Ganache, page 351
Chocolate Genoise, page 192
Coffee Marsala Syrup, page 275
Cocoa Powder (as needed)
Procedure
1. Roll chocolate short dough to 1⁄8 in. (3 mm) thick and line 13.75
× 4.5 in. (35 × 11.5 cm) tart shell and blind bake.
2. Spread a layer of ganache in the bottom of the tart.
3. Place a ¼ in. (6 mm) thick layer of the chocolate genoise on top
of the ganache.
4. Soak the genoise with the coffee marsala syrup.
5. Spread a layer of mascarpone cream to the top of the tart shell.
6. Pipe the remaining mascarpone cream with a St Honoré tip.
7. Lightly dust the top of the mascarpone cream with cocoa
powder.

FIGURE 9.7 Tiramisu Tart
English Cream Mascarpone Cream


Heavy Cream 1 lb 1.6 oz 500 g English Cream, from previous recipe 1 lb 8.7 oz 700 g
Egg Yolk 3.5 oz 100 g Mascarpone Cheese 1 lb 0.2 oz 460 g
Sugar 4.4 oz 125 g
Note: If overwhipped, mascarpone cheese will break.
Vanilla Bean, split 3 each 3 each
and scraped Procedure
1. Mix English Cream in a mixer with a whip on high speed for

10 minutes.
Procedure 2. Add mascarpone cheese and mix until the mixture resem-
bles a mousse.
1. Make a crème anglaise (page 143).
3. Fill molds or pipe immediately.
2. Add gelatin after cooking and strain through a chinois.
4. Refrigerate for 2 hours to set the cream.

Coffee Marsala Syrup Hazelnut Cream
Yield: 7 oz (210 g) Yield: 1 lb 11.75 oz (787 g)

Portion size: 7 oz (210 g) Portion size: 1 lb 11.75 oz (787 g)
Yield description: 1 portion at 7 oz (210 g) Yield description: 1 portion at 1 lb 11.75 oz (787 g)

Water 1.8 oz 50 g Heavy Cream 8 oz 227 g
Sugar 1.8 oz 50 g Milk 7.5 oz 213 g
Coffee Extract 3.5 oz 100 g Sugar 3 oz 85 g
Marsala Wine 0.4 oz 10 g Gelatin Powder 0.25 oz 7g
Water 1 oz 28 g
Hazelnut Paste 8 oz 227 g
Procedure
1. Combine water and sugar; heat to dissolve.

2. Cool syrup on an ice bath. Procedure
3. Add coffee extract and marsala wine. 1. Bloom gelatin in water.

2. Heat heavy cream, milk, and sugar to a simmer.
3. Add gelatin to dissolve.
4. Add hazelnut paste, emulsify, and strain through chinois.
5. Pour into molds and freeze.
Recipes 275
Banana Tart
Portion size: 9-in. (23-cm) tart 1. Prepare the banana mousse and freeze in an 8-in. (20-cm) ring
Yield description: One 9-in. (23-cm) tart mold; freeze additional mousse in assorted half sphere molds.
2. Roll pâte sablée to 1⁄8 in. (3 mm) thick and blind bake in a 9-in.
(23-cm) tart shell.
3. While the shell is slightly warm, brush with melted milk
Pâte Sablée, page 254 chocolate.
Milk Chocolate, melted 3.3 oz 100 g 4. After the chocolate has crystallized, place the banana slices in
Banana Mousse, page 173 the shell.
Bananas in Lime Juice, page 277 5. Pour the milk chocolate banana ganache over the bananas;
Milk Chocolate Banana Ganache, page 277 refrigerate.
Stabilized Whipped Cream, page 259 6. Unmold the ring mold of banana mousse and glaze with the
chocolate mirror glaze, place onto the ganache.
Chocolate Mirror Glaze, page 231
7. Spray the half spheres of banana mousse with white cocoa
White Chocolate Spray, page 397
butter spray tinted yellow; use these to garnish the tart.
8. Pipe Stabilized Whipped Cream around the tart.
FIGURE 9.8 Banana Tart

Milk Chocolate Banana Ganache Bananas in Lime Juice


Heavy Cream 6.3 oz 180 g Bananas 7 oz 200 g
Milk Chocolate 7.2 oz 205 g Lime Juice 1.1 oz 30 g
Procedure
Procedure 1. Slice bananas into 1⁄8 in. (3 mm) thick slices.
1. Heat heavy cream to a boil. 2. Toss bananas in lime juice.
2. Pour cream over chocolate and emulsify with an immersion 3. Drain to remove excess lime juice.
blender.
3. Add banana purée and emulsify.
4. Pour into tart shell while warm.
Recipes 277
Chocolate Mousse Tart
Portions: 1
Portion size: 8.5-in. (22-cm) square tart
Yield description: One 8.5-in. (22-cm) square tart
Components
Chocolate Short Dough, page 255
Dark Chocolate Mousse, page 135
Caramel Glaze, page 236
Hazelnut Cream, page 275
Dark Chocolate Spray, page 397
Procedure
1. Roll chocolate short dough to 1⁄8 in. (3 mm) and blind bake in an
8.5-in. (22-cm) square tart shell.
2. Place two rings of the hazelnut cream in the bottom of the shell.
3. Fill to the top of the tart shell with dark chocolate mousse.
4. Pipe a border around the edge of the shell.
5. Freeze the tart and spray with dark chocolate spray for a velvet
texture.
6. Glaze the center of the tart with caramel glaze.

FIGURE 9.9 Chocolate Mousse Tart
Cranberry Orange Tart
Portion size: 9-in. (23-cm) tart 1. Roll short dough to 1⁄8 in. (3 mm) thick and blind bake halfway in
Yield description: One 9-in. (23-cm) tart a 9-in. (23-cm) tart shell.
2. Cool shell and fill with poached cranberries and clafoutis
custard bake at 350°F (175°C).
Components
3. Unmold frozen brûlée, sprinkle with sugar and brûlée with a
Short Dough, page 255 blowtorch while still frozen.
Crème Brûlée, page 140 4. Transfer caramelized custard to cooled clafoutis tart shell.
Poached Cranberries, page 281 5. Place orange supremes around the edge of the brûlée and
Clafoutis, page 144, half batch apply clear glaze.
Orange Supremes
Clear Glaze, page 106
FIGURE 9.10 Cranberry Orange Tart

Poached Cranberries Cranberry Orange Tart Brûlée

Portion size: 6 oz (185 g) Portion size: 1 lb 9 oz (718 g)
Yield description: 1 portion at 6 oz (185 g) Yield description: 1 portion at 1 lb 9 oz (718 g)

Water 1 lb 10 oz 800 g Milk 4.8 oz 135 g
Sugar 6.7 oz 200 g Cream 11.8 oz 335 g
Cranberry 6.2 oz 185 g Sugar 2.8 oz 80 g
Agar 0.06 oz 1.6 g
Procedure Vanilla Bean, split and scraped ½ each ½ each
1. Combine water and sugar; bring to a boil. Gelatin Powder 0.02 oz 0.5 g
2. Reduce to a simmer and add cranberries. Water 0.07 oz 2g
3. Cook until cranberries are tender.

4. Strain and cool.
Procedure
1. Combine agar with half the sugar.

3. Add remaining sugar to egg yolks and whisk to combine.
4. Bring milk, cream, vanilla bean, and agar/sugar mixture to a
boil; simmer for 5 minutes.
5. Temper milk and cream mixture into egg yolks; continue
cooking like a crème anglaise.
6. Add gelatin mixture stir to dissolve.
8. Pour custard into a 7-in. (180-mm) mold and freeze.
Recipes 281
Tea Tart
Portion size: 9-in. (23-cm) tart 1. Roll pâte sablée to 1⁄8 in. (3 mm) thick and blind bake halfway in
Yield description: One 9-in. (23-cm) tart a 9-in. (23-cm) tart shell.
2. Pipe stabilized Chantilly on top of crystallized ganache with a
¼-in. (6-mm) plain pastry tip.
Components
3. Place chocolate decoration on top of stabilized Chantilly.
Tea Tart Ganache, page 283
Stabilized Chantilly, page 259
Chocolate Decoration
FIGURE 9.11 Tea Tart

Tea Tart Ganache
Portions: 1

Earl Grey Tea 0.4 oz 10 g
Honey 2.6 oz 75 g
64% Dark Chocolate 6.3 oz 180 g
Milk Chocolate 1.8 oz 50 g
Butter, softened 2.1 oz 60 g
Procedure
1. Combine heavy cream and Earl Grey tea; heat, cover, and steep
for 15 minutes. While steeping, add the honey.
2. Strain heavy cream to remove tea.
3. Return heavy cream to simmer and emulsify with dark and milk
chocolate to create ganache.
4. Combine Trimoline and butter with ganache and emulsify.
5. Pour ganache into prebaked tart shell and allow ganache to
crystallize for 4 hours before serving. Do not refrigerate tart.
Recipes 283
Apple Tart
Portion size: 8-in. (20-cm) tart 1. Roll sablée breton to ¼ in. (6 mm); cut and bake in a 8-in. (20-cm)
Yield description: One 8-in. (20-cm) tart metal ring.
2. Whip caramel creméux for 5 minutes and pipe onto cooled
sablée breton.
Components
3. Place apple pectin gel on top of caramel creméux.
Sablé Breton, page 256
Caramel Creméux, page 285
Apple Pectin Gel, page 285
FIGURE 9.12 Apple Tart

Apple Pectin Gel Caramel Creméux


Granny Smith Apples, peeled 14.1 oz 400 g Sugar 7.1 oz 200 g
and sliced
Water 1.8 oz 50 g
Sugar 5.3 oz 150 g
Heavy Cream 1 lb 0.9 oz 480 g
Glucose 2.3 oz 65 g
Water 1.4 oz 40 g
Pectin NH 0.2 oz 7g
Cocoa Butter 2.8 oz 80 g
Caramelia Chocolate 2.1 oz 60 g
Procedure
1. Combine water, sugar, and glucose.

2. Heat to an amber caramel; pour onto a silpat to cool. Procedure
3. Grind caramel with pectin in a food processor.
1. Combine water and sugar; caramelize.
4. Layer apples and caramel mixture in an 8-in. (20-cm) metal
2. Deglaze with heavy cream and add vanilla beans.
cake ring; place a weight on top of the apples to compress dur-
ing baking. 3. Cook on low to dissolve any remaining caramel.
5. Bake at 180°F (82°C) for 1 hour 45 minutes. 4. Bring cream mixture to simmer and temper into egg yolks; cook
like a crème anglaise.
6. Place in the freezer to unmold apples.
5. Pour caramel anglaise mixture over caramelia and cocoa
butter; emulsify.
6. Add gelatin and strain through a chinois.
7. Place on an ice bath and reserve in the cooler.
Recipes 285
Pear Almond Cream Tart Poached Pears
Portion size: 9-in. (23-cm) tart Portion size: 6 poached pears
Yield description: One 9-in. (23-cm) tart Yield description: 1 portion at 6 poached pears
Components Ingredients U.S. Metric

Short Dough, page 255 Bosc Pears 6 each 6 each
Poached Pears, page 286 Water 2 lb 3 oz 1000 g
Almond Cream, page 78 Sugar 8.8 oz 250 g
Apricot Glaze, page 106 Cinnamon Stick 1 each 1 each
Star Anise 1 each 1 each
Procedure
1. Roll short dough to 1⁄8 in. (3 mm) thick and blind bake halfway
in a 9-in. (23-cm) tart shell. Procedure
2. Pipe the almond cream into the tart shell. 1. Combine water, sugar, cinnamon stick, star anise, and vanilla
3. Drain pears from poaching liquid; cut in half and slice. bean and bring to a boil.
4. Fan pears on top of almond cream. 2. Peel pears and use a parisienne scoop to remove the seeds.
5. Bake at 350°F (175°C) until short dough is a golden brown color. 3. Add the pears to the liquid and reduce to a low simmer; cover
6. After cooling brush the top of the tart with apricot glaze. the pears with a cartouche.
4. The size and ripeness of the pear will determine the cooking
time. The more ripe the pear, the shorter the cooking time. Test
the pears with a knife. When the knife is inserted without any
resistance, the pears are cooked through.
5. Cover the pan with plastic wrap and cool over an ice bath.
6. To intensify the flavor, store the pears in the poaching liquid
overnight before using.

Pumpkin Tart
Portion size: 3.25 in. (9 cm) 1. Roll graham cracker dough to 1⁄8 in. (3 mm) and blind bake in
Yield description: 8 tarts at 3.25 in. (9 cm) 3.25-in. (9-cm) tart shells.
2. Prepare white chocolate mousse and freeze in 2.75-in. (7-cm)
round molds.
Components
3. After cooling tart shells, prepare pumpkin Bavarian and
Graham Cracker Dough, page 255 fill shells.
Pumpkin Bavarian, page 288 4. Unmold white chocolate mousse onto a parchment-lined
White Chocolate Mousse, page 135 sheet pan.
White Chocolate Spray, page 397 5. Spray white chocolate spray onto unmolded mousse to achieve
a velvet texture (page 397).
6. Place the white chocolate mousse onto the pumpkin Bavarian.
FIGURE 9.13 Individual Pumpkin Tart
Recipes 287
Pumpkin Bavarian
Yield: 1 lb 8 oz (668.5 g)
Portions: 1
Portion size: 1 lb 8 oz (668.5 g)
Yield description: 1 portion at 1 lb 8 oz (668.5 g)

Pumpkin Purée 4.6 oz 130 g
Vanilla Bean 1 each 1 each
Brown Sugar 3.7 oz 105 g
Gelatin Sheets 3 each 3 each
Pumpkin Pie Spice 0.04 oz 1g
Procedure
1. Bavarian procedure (page 133).

Key Terms
Galette Crumb crust Blind baked
Mealy pie dough Single crusted Docked
Flaky pie dough Double crusted

1. Describe the difference between a pie and tart. 3. Why is it important to not stretch dough when lining a shell?
2. Identify two fats used in pie and tart doughs and discuss the 4. There are two methods used to blind bake dough: Select one and
advantages and disadvantages of each. describe the process.

CHAPTER 10
Plated Desserts
The old saying goes, “You never get a second chance to make a first impression.” When it comes
to plated desserts, you never get a second chance to make a last impression. Throughout
the years, the role of the pastry chef has become more important to restaurants, hotels, and
country clubs. The last course that goes to the diner is the dessert; a great dessert can make a
memorable experience even better.
LEARNING OBJECTIVES

1. Design desserts utilizing familiar flavor combinations in a refined way.
2. Create plated desserts for a variety of restaurant styles.
3. Explain the importance of flavor, texture, temperature, and presentation.
4. Identify the components needed for a balanced dessert.
5. Describe the process for designing a plated dessert.
Presentation Approach
Plated desserts provide the pastry chef a way to create something both artistic and delicious for
their guests. Originally, sugar showpieces were placed in the front windows of pastry shops to
show the skill and mastery of the chef, as well as to market the shop’s products. Restaurants have
used different approaches—from dessert carts to printed menus, to social media—to promote
its pastry chef and his or her creations. While these marketing approaches continue to transform
and adapt, desserts continue to evolve, allowing the pastry chef to develop a signature “style.”
Over the years, trends and techniques have changed—whether it is the combination of fla-
vors used or the style in which the dessert is presented. Recent years have seen an increase in
the use of savory items, such as bacon or beets in desserts. Along with introducing new flavors,
plating styles change as well. The 1990s brought a wave of desserts that were over engineered
and made the desserts difficult to eat. Ten years later, almost anything that could be “decon-
structed,” was. This trend brought classical items that were broken down into the different com-
ponents and assembled in a way that did not resemble the original in any way except flavors.
Current plating style is a “scattered” appearance that at first looks like several items
tossed on the plate. However, it is exactly the opposite. This style takes a considerable amount
of effort to prepare and execute. No matter which style fits you best, new combinations can
always be created; a major part of the job of the chef is to create a memorable experience for
the guest. One thing that remains constant, though, is that flavor is the single most important
element on the plate.
291
FIGURE 10.1a–c Three ways to plate a pineapple upside-down cake:
classical fine dining scattered dessert plating
Design
Plated desserts not only need to taste good, they also need to be appealing to the eye. As
desserts are designed, a great deal of thought needs to be used to incorporate flavors that
complement and contrast each other while producing an attractive design. A beautiful dessert
that lacks in flavor will be easily forgotten. At the same time, a delicious dessert that is not
presented in an attractive way will be difficult to sell. Unlike most art forms, which only focus
on one of the senses, the pastry chef must construct desserts with a harmony between the ele-
ments of flavor and visual design.
The pastry chef has many tools to use to create a memorable experience. From a simple
rustic tart to an elaborate à la minute dessert served in a high-end restaurant, there is a place
for all styles. It is important to have a thorough understanding of what creates a balanced plate,
in regards to both visual and flavor components. There are five key components to achieve this:
1. Flavor 4. Color
2. Texture 5. Shape
3. Temperature
Flavor
Flavor needs to be addressed first. You can create the most elaborate dessert, but without
flavor the design will be forgotten. The dessert menu should harmonize with the previous
courses and reflect continuity through the progression of the meal. In a restaurant that serves
a classical French menu, a tropical dessert would not be a good fit for the end of the meal.
A better selection to consider would be a more traditional French pastry such as a vanilla
crème brûlée.
It is important to consider not only which flavors will be utilized but how many. A hard
lesson to learn, but one of the greatest techniques that can be taught in the kitchen is
editing—less can sometimes be more. While many different flavors can work on the plate, it can
become confusing. When selecting flavor, decide what the “main” flavor of the plate will be and
provide additional complementing and contrasting flavors. All too often, when a new compo-
nent is added to a plate, a new flavor is introduced. Using the same flavor can build complexity
on the plate, while keeping the “main” flavor. The plate should be composed of no more than
three flavors.
292 C H A PT E R 1 0 Plated Desserts

There are some flavors that can be used on the plate that are not that different and can be
treated as the same flavor; these flavors are in the same flavor families.
Flavor Families
Main Flavor Similar Flavors

Chocolate Dark Milk White
Berry Strawberry Blueberry Raspberry
Citrus Lemon Lime Orange
Nut Pistachio Hazelnut Peanut
The term rich is often used to describe desserts. The overall flavor profile tends to be on
the sweet side for many desserts. This can be overcome by using a combination of the basic
tastes: sweet, sour, salty, bitter, and umami. The term umami literally translates to “pleasant
savory taste.” Sometimes confused with the flavor of salt, it is different and refers to an earthy
flavor. Mushrooms, meat, seafood, vegetables, cheese, and fermented products are some of
the more common foods that have the umami flavor. However, many items ranging from classic
to modern desserts use this flavor to add complexity. Sweet potato, green tea, cheeses, green
peas, carrots, bacon, and even foie gras can be found on desserts in a wide variety of restau-
rants. These elements can be successfully added into a dessert menu. Many desserts focus on
sweet, sour, salty, and bitter.
Successful flavor combinations can be developed easily from existing flavor combina-
tions. Flavor is something experienced by more than just the palate. Familiar flavors like apple
pie, chocolate chip cookies, or even peanut butter and jelly remind us of past events. Looking
toward these combinations for inspiration will provide flavors that are proven to work together,
and a familiarity for the guest.
Texture
Texture can make the difference between good and great. Utilizing contrasting components in a
dessert creates an interesting experience. An experienced pastry chef works soft, crunchy, fatty,
dry, and smooth textures into many desserts. These components can be obvious in the dessert’s
composition or hidden inside a component of the dessert. There are benefits to using both of
these techniques. Having the different textures visible shows the complexity of the dessert.
Providing a hidden crunchy layer inside a cake gives a surprise when eaten. When consider-
ing the dessert menu as a whole, implementing both of these techniques will provide a visual
appeal to the desserts and ensure that there is something appealing to a variety of diners.
This helps to draw the guest in; something smooth and shiny provides a sleek look, leaving
the imagination to guess what is inside. When the dessert is cut into, a surprise of colors, fla-
vors, and textures elevates the already mysterious item. Placing textured items such as granola,
nougatine, or finely chopped nuts directly on the plate provides eye appeal and helps identify
the flavors that are on the plate. Additionally, they provide the crunchy element that is often
missing from desserts. Smooth components add concentrated flavor to the dessert—they can
be light and airy or dense. Cakes can provide a variety of textural elements, covering a wide
range: dense, light, moist, dry, crispy, or chewy.
Temperature
Temperature differences not only change the eating experience but also the way the flavors
come through. Consider a warm slice of apple pie à la mode. It consists of such simple com-
binations, yet there are many things happening on the plate. The warm pie creates a cool

sauce out of the melted ice cream both on the plate and inside your mouth. Incorporating any
combination of items ranging from frozen to hot allows the pastry chef the opportunity to intro-
duce another element to the diner. Something unexpected will continue to build on the expe-
rience of the meal.
Color
This is one of the most difficult areas for a plate. The main challenge is understanding when
there is enough color on a plate, and not adding color just for the sake of adding color. A vibrant,
colorful plate can look very attractive to some diners, while others may not be concerned with
this and will base their selection on other factors. This leaves the chef many options when
creating plates; utilizing a range of color schemes and variety across the menu will produce a
variety of options for the guest to choose from.
Just like the guest, some chefs may want a wide range of colors while others are not
as concerned. The chef has many elements to work with when creating a plate, and color
is only one of these. Color may be the first hint at what is on the plate, and start guiding
the diner through the flavors they may experience. There are the four other plate design
elements—flavor, temperature, texture, and shape—that chefs can use in their creations.
Not all desserts need a variety of colors: monochromatic plates can be just as attractive
and taste equally as good. The plate can be composed of one color and use the shades
of that color to create interest. A dessert that is brown also can have yellow, orange,
and burgundy.
Considering the seasonality of items will also influence the colors used in a dessert. Cur-
rently, restaurants are utilizing local ingredients and advertising this on the menu. The avail-
ability of seasonal and local ingredients will help to determine the flavors offered on the menu,
and encourage menu changes throughout the year. Of course, many fruits such as strawberries,
raspberries, and apples are available year round. However, berries tend to be a summer fruit
and apples a fall fruit. There is no written rule against using berries in the fall, but having
knowledge of seasonality will help your desserts taste and look the best they can be. It is impor-
tant to remember that fruit in season not only looks better and tastes better, it tends to be less
FIGURE 10.2 Shades of brown FIGURE 10.3 Plated dessert showing shades of brown

expensive. Researching new options for a red fruit that can replace a strawberry on a winter
menu will show creativity and continue to help you expand your knowledge of the products
available and new uses for them.
Back to the apple pie example: What are the colors on that plate? The pie and filling are
both brown, with an off-white ice cream, creating an attractive yet monochromatic presen-
tation. Adding color to the plate means revising the flavor component. Adding a strawberry
garnish to the apple pie would add a pop of red to the plate (color) and strawberry could go
with apple (flavor component). However, a sliced or fanned strawberry really does not do much
more than add color. Thinking of the seasonality of these two items, apples are fall and straw-
berries are summer. There needs to be some logic behind the selection of all components to a
plate. Sure the strawberry looks good and it doesn’t taste bad with the apple pie, but why is it
there? When thinking of apples, a fall crop, cranberry also comes to mind. It provides a deep
red color that is in the same season that apples typically are harvested and eaten. Additions to
the plate for any component should be well thought out and not just done to ensure all com-
ponents are met.
While colorful desserts can be interesting and help convey the flavors, it is important to
remember that too much color can be confusing. There is no rule limiting the amount of colors
on the plate. The color wheel introduced to us in art class can provide some assistance in decid-
ing on color usage. The color wheel provides an example of complementary and contrasting
colors. Color is something that should be experimented with when creating a dessert. Remem-
ber to use colors that are available and occur in nature. In most cases, adding food color should
not be necessary. Respecting the ingredients and handling them properly will help to provide
the color desired.
Shape
The visual component of shape works together with color and textures present in a dessert.
Shapes are to the eye what flavors are to the palate. A variety of shapes will present an
attractive selection to the guest. This is not only on each individual plate, but also the
dessert menu as a whole. The plate can have complementary and contrasting shapes to
create interest and flow on the plate. These shapes can be used to move the diner’s eye
around the plate and ultimately visually lead them to the main component of the dish.
A swoosh of sauce or an elegantly twisted tuile will catch the eye and bring it to the center
of the plate. There are different combinations that can be used to achieve an attractive
presentation.
Combining shapes breaks up the plate and helps to enhance presentation. To help this
process, roughly sketching the plates on the menu will verify that all the desserts will not look
the same. After sketching the desserts, analyze the shapes of the components and see if variety
can be added. The available equipment can limit shapes of desserts; variety of shape can be
added in the form of a round scoop of ice cream or a dot of sauce. Consider combining rounded
smooth shapes with sharp rectangles or triangles.
Attractive plating using the same size and shape, called “sameness,” can be very interest-
ing. This style works best if all sizes are exactly the same, similar to what can be found in some
modern art. The exactness of these items adds to the appeal.
When thinking about using shapes, several questions need to be answered.
What Shape Am I Trying to Achieve? As previously discussed, shape needs to be decided.

This can be a simple rectangle or square cut out of a sheet, a round tart, or if a more intricate
shape is desired, molds are available to the chef. Keep in mind that a complex shape being
cut out of a larger sheet will incur product loss. When cutting out of sheets try to stick with
squares, rectangles, parallelograms, or trapezoids. Also consider the size of the dessert—this
will vary depending on the restaurant. A good starting point is 4 oz (120 g) for all components
on the plate.

Rectangle Cube Elongated Cylinder
Dome Sphere Triangle
Trapezoid Cylinder Round Ring
FIGURE 10.4 Examples of shapes
What Style of Food Does the Restaurant Serve? The style of food refers to the service
level of the restaurant and the design of the food. This is inclusive of ingredients, technique,
and service style.
Harmonizing the dessert with previous courses is important. Planning the dessert menu
along with the main menu will provide continuity throughout the meal. It ensures that
the courses continue to follow a progression and make sense. Knowing the style that the
restaurant serves and, more importantly, serving shapes that are familiar to the diner are
important. A traditional style restaurant may have a pie on the menu; this could be a slice or
even an individual tart or pie. The diner would expect the shape to be a triangular wedge of pie
or a round tart. Serving a square tart may be an option and provide a different look, but would
be more fitting for a more contemporary restaurant.
Current trends present a more scattered plating style. This is visually attractive plating.
Modern techniques can be easily utilized—ingredients can be changed based on availability,
and the dessert is interactive for the guest. Pastry chefs can create different flavor combina-
tions, as they experiment with the various components. While this style appears to have a hap-
hazard approach, it requires knowledge of the ingredients and how to assemble in a timely
manner. Desserts are plated à la minute, in a minute, meaning the order is placed and the
dessert is plated. The complexity of the dessert means a longer time to plate up, which in
turn means a longer wait for the guest. Consider the time plate-up will take when designing
all desserts.
What Do the Other Desserts Look Like? The food a chef serves is art. Art is an expres-
sion of creativity, and as chefs we create with our minds and our hearts. We strive to present
our creations to the guest to provide them an emotional experience, and please them. As with
any form of art, it is subjective—trying to decide what is good art or bad art is entirely up to the
guest. This brings about the next question.
What Is Your Personal Style as a Pastry Chef? All chefs have a style, and most evolve
over the course of their career. Starting out, many young chefs imitate what they have encoun-
tered in their career, books, magazines, Internet, and television. As your career continues, you
will begin to formulate your own style from the many experiences in your career.

Developing your own style helps to create your own brand. This is something that will
develop over your career. Variety is important. Using the five components of dessert design
will help you to diversify the menu. The best way to evaluate this is to lay out all the des-
serts on your menu together and look at what is on the table. The early step of sketching
the plates helps to prevent too much repetition on the menu. Some items can still be over-
looked, so once the menu is written and developed, assemble all the plates and evaluate what
you have in front of you. If you notice repetition in these items, now is the time to make any
necessary changes.
What Plate Am I Going to Use? A wide variety of plates is available. Plate selection is
dependent on the size, shape, and layout of the dessert. It is much easier to create a dessert to
fit on a plate, rather than having a plate and forcing a dessert to fit. The plate does not make
the dessert, but it can impact the final design and at the same time, take away from the dessert.
Many restaurants are limited by what plates they have. Investing in new plates can be expen-
sive. Restaurants have been serving desserts in mason jars and martini glasses, creating new
ways to use items found in restaurants and kitchens.
Finding a unique plate creates a challenge for the chef. A plate that does not fit the normal
round, square, or rectangle is interesting and different. This can be a challenge met with mixed
results. While the plate may be different, it may make the dessert too small or crowded on the
plate. Keep in mind portion size and the ease of eating the dessert on the plate when select-
ing a plate.
Flat, rimless plates create a challenge to the diner: there is no place to push the food
against to help scoop up the dessert. Additionally, items could fall off the plate on the way to
the table or frozen components could melt and run off on the table. Alternately, deep bowls
with large rims may make the portion size appear smaller, or make the dessert challeng-
ing to access. Glass bowls and plates provide an enticing view of the dessert from different
angles. Ultimately, the plate should enhance the dessert presentation, not distract from or
overwhelm it.
Getting Started
With so many choices to make, it can be overwhelming identifying what to do first. Here are
some steps to getting started in developing a plated dessert:
1. Create an inventory of components.

2. Choose the main component for the dessert.
3. Select flavors.
4. Select garnish(es) and sauce.
5. Assemble dessert.
6. Evaluate final product.
Creating an Inventory
An inventory list will help to keep you organized as you move toward finalizing your creation.
Using the techniques you have gained through the use of this text, categorize the items
under main categories to create a visual reference. The inventory helps to reduce overusing
items multiple times on the same menu. The items can be broken into main categories such
as Sauces, Creams, Baked items, Fruit, and Frozen. These categories can be broken down
into further sub categories. As an example, fruit can be broken down into color, preparation
method, and shapes.
Getting Started 297

Component Inventory
Creams
Chocolate Mousse—White, Curd Chiboust
Milk, and Dark
Bavarian Rice Pudding Rice Pudding
Fruit Mousse Flan Cheesecake
Creaméux Crème Brûlée Blanc mange
Baked Items
Cakes Pain de Genes Filo
Dacquoise Doughs Fried
Japonaise Short Dough Brioche
Jaconde Struesel Based Fritters
P te a Choux Pie Dough Churros
Macarons Puff Pastry
Frozen Items
Parfait Ice Cream Granita
Semifreddo Gelato Ice Pops
Soufflé Glace Sherbet
Sauces
Chocolate—Milk, White, Dark Foams Coulis
Sabayon Infusion Caramel
Anglaise Reduction Fluid Gel
Fruit
Preparation
Colors Method Shapes
Red Sauté Sliced Zest
Yellow Poach Julienne Supremes
White Dehydrate Batonette
Green Stew Tubes
Purple/Blue Roast Ribbons
Orange Leather Spheres
Compressed
Choose Main Component

The main component is the focal point of the dessert. The number of desserts on a menu can
range from as few as three up to seven. There is no set standard for the number of desserts
offered; the basic goal should be to offer a little something for everyone. Once the number of

dessert menu items has been determined, choose the main component. This could be a simple
list at first; it will be developed as the process continues.
Determining this list can be as easy as evaluating what is currently on the menu or visiting
other similar restaurants in the area and looking at the menu. If the menu has four items, choose
basic ideas to start. Crème brûlée, cheesecake, tart or pie, and cake are a good start. These
items are easily identifiable to most people and they provide a flexible foundation to build on.
Select Flavors
The flavor of the main component should be the dominant flavor on the plate. That does not
mean that it has to be the strongest flavor. Orange could be a dominant flavor for the cheese-
cake. If a chocolate flavor is added to the plate, it should complement the orange, not over-
power it. Once the main flavor is selected, choose two other flavors that will compliment it. In
the example of the cheesecake, selecting milk chocolate and coriander would be good choices.
Select Garnishes
Garnishes on the plate need to have flavor and purpose. They can provide additional textures,
temperatures, or visual appeal in the case of a tuile. Garnishes can include frozen compo-
nents, tuiles, sauces, fried items, or fruit. This is the point when the dessert can develop into
something more complex.
The main component has been selected as well as the three flavors, orange, coriander and
milk chocolate. Next the flavors need to be incorporated into the remaining components of
the dessert. The first thing to consider is the base of the cheesecake, traditionally this would
be a graham cracker crust. The base of the dessert not only serves as crispy component on the
plate, it also facilitates moving the cheesecake. Not having a base under the dessert makes
it difficult to transfer from a sheet pan to the plate. The base can be the traditional graham
cracker or another cookie crumble, thinly rolled and cut short dough, or even cake. Looking at
the other components of the dish will help in deciding what the base should be. For this appli-
cation chocolate short dough will be used. It will create an appealing color separation between
the cheesecake and the plate; the dark color will help to convey the chocolate in the dessert.
The next step is to continue building on the flavors of orange and milk chocolate and incor-
porate the coriander. When using spices, use caution—these flavors can become very strong
and overpowering. The goal is incorporating these flavors in a pleasant way and using them
subtlety. As the ingredients are mixed and tasted, the flavors have not had a chance to mature.
During the maturation, spices and herbs continue to infuse flavor. In the effort to provide a
burst of coriander flavor, a good place to incorporate it would be a coriander crisp. Not only will
it provide flavor, but also additional needed crunch.
In most restaurants, cheesecake is served with whipped cream. Using milk chocolate
mousse is a playful way to incorporate an aerated component to the dish, mimicking the
whipped cream. Since both cheesecake and mousse are creams, there may be a need to add
lighter, less fatty components to the dessert. The high-fat percentage in the dessert creates a
very rich and sometimes heavy dessert. In an effort to reduce this, a thin layer of cake can be
placed on top of the cheesecake. Then it can be topped with the mousse and the coriander
crisp on top. This style of component is often referred to as a stack, and precision in layering,
cutting, and piping will all add to look of the final product.
The main component is now complete. The plate now has all the flavors and different tex-
tures but only one temperature—cold. In restaurant service, it can be difficult to include smaller
warm components. Using a milk chocolate ice cream for this dessert will reinforce the milk
chocolate flavor and add a different temperature item to the plate.
The ice cream can also build on the visual design of the plate. The chocolate color of the
ice cream and smooth texture create additional eye appeal. While frozen components are often
shaped using a scoop or quenelle, they can also be molded. Current plating trends utilize large
Getting Started 299

curls of ice cream or sorbet. When innovating new shapes, be sure that the component will
arrive to the guest in the manner it was intended. When applicable, flavor combinations of
contrasting colors can be swirled together after freezing and scooped to add complexity to
the plate.
Frozen components placed directly on a plate begin to melt and slide around like a hockey
puck on ice. An easy solution would be to place the ice cream on top of the stack; this presen-
tation works well with a round-shaped dessert. The stack on this dessert will be an elongated
rectangle; it would be best to place the ice cream somewhere else on the plate. Bases for ice
creams can be streusel, cake crumbs, granola, chocolate, fruit, or even a shaped tuile cookie.
The ice cream does not need to be completely contained. There just needs to be something
small placed under it to hold its position. To incorporate fresh fruit on this plate, a simple fruit
salad of orange suprêmes (using the leftover orange from zesting), simple syrup, and tapioca
pearls will provide a base for the ice cream.
The last component needed to pull the dessert together is a sauce. Sauces are used on the
plate to add flavor, texture, color, design, and moisture to the plate. When selecting a sauce,
choose one that will add to the flavors in the dessert. Saucing a plate can be done simply using
a squeeze bottle, spoon, or paper cornet. Using other pastry tools such as brushes, round cut-
ters, and piped chocolate can add a more complex design to the plate. Infusing a crème an-
glaise with coriander will provide another way to incorporate the coriander on the plate with-
out overpowering the other components and will provide a thick sauce that will hold its shape.
At this point the dessert could be written on the menu as:
Orange cheesecake, milk chocolate mousse, coriander crisp, milk chocolate ice cream and
orange tapioca “salad”
Garnishes can always be added or taken away—too much and the plate will become
c onfusing; too little and the plate looks unfinished. Ultimately, the flavor of the dessert and the
garnishes need to work together.
Now that flavor has been addressed, presentation must be considered. The color of the
cheesecake is neutral. The chocolate and the orange go well together and the orange “salad”
provides a brighter color as well as textural addition. The next step is to sketch the dessert and
decide on shapes.
Assembly
Assembly is one of the final steps in the process of creating a dessert. As the dessert’s
components are prepared individually and then assembled together as a finished product
tasting needs to be done. In addition to tasting, detailed notes must be taken for processing
after the final dessert is presented for the menu. These notes will be used for developing a
training manual for the restaurant.
Orange, Chocolate & Coriander
Coriander crisp
Milk chocolate mousse Milk chocolate

Pain de Gênes ice cream
Orange cheesecake Orange and
Chocolate short dough tapioca salad
FIGURE 10.5 Sketch for orange cheesecake

FIGURE 10.6 Picture of orange cheesecake, final
The final product should be a representation of the sketch produced earlier. Some changes
may need to be made along the way. Creating a dessert is a process, and sometimes that
process may be neverending. Documenting all the steps will help make sure all information is
available for consistency with each order, as well as future plated desserts designs.
Evaluation
Even when the dessert is on the plate, the work continues. Everything needs to be evaluated:
cost, time to produce components, plate-up time, flavor, time to train front of the house,
and ultimately, a consideration of guest satisfaction. If any of these factors show a problem,
changes must be made to the dessert. It may be noticed immediately or weeks later. Continue
the process because, while the dessert may taste great to the pastry chef and executive chef, if
guests are not ordering it, changes need to be made.
Creating a great dessert is not an easy task. Careful consideration and planning must be
done first before entering the kitchen. Mastering four of the five elements of dessert design
can make a good dessert, yet always remember that if flavor isn’t there, the dessert will be
unsuccessful.
Getting Started 301

Recipes
This chapter does not include yield and portion sizes for plated desserts. This was done intentionally as
mold and portion sizes will vary.
Raspberry and Chocolate
Procedure
Components
1. Prepare reconstructed base recipe using pâte sablée, place a
Reconstructed Hazelnut Base, page 228 thin layer in a quarter sheet pan lined with parchment paper;
Chocolate Pain de Genes, page 195 allow to set.
Chocolate Raspberry Creméux, page 283 2. Add 14 oz (400 g) of the chocolate raspberry creméux;
Chocolate Raspberry Mousse, page 283 refrigerate to set.
Chocolate Mirror Glaze, page 226 3. Place a piece of the chocolate pain de genes on the creméux
and refrigerate.
Raspberry Sauce, page 115
4. Fill the remainder of the quarter sheet pan with 11.5 oz (325 g)
Sanded Almonds, page 298
of chocolate raspberry mousse and freeze.
Amaretto Ice Cream, page 283
5. Prepare the sanded hazelnut recipe (page 298) using slivered
Crispy Raspberry Foam, page 103 almonds in place of the hazelnuts.
6. Remove the chocolate raspberry mousse cake from the quarter
sheet pan.
7. Apply the chocolate mirror glaze and refrigerate for 5 minutes
to set the glaze.
8. Cut the cake into the desired shape.
9. Apply the raspberry sauce using a teaspoon.
10. Place a small pile of the sanded almonds and top with a que-
nelle of Amaretto ice cream.
11. Place a piece of the crispy raspberry foam onto the mousse cake.
FIGURE 10.7 Raspberry and Chocolate

Amaretto Ice Cream Chocolate Raspberry Mousse

Yield description: 36 scoops at 1 oz (28 g) Yield description: 1 portion at 1 lb 14 oz (875 g)

Milk 1 lb 2.3 oz 520 g Half and Half 6 oz 170 g
NFMS 1 oz 28 g Egg Yolks 1.2 oz 35 g
Casein 0.7 oz 20 g Semisweet Chocolate 58% 8.3 oz 235 g
Glucose Powder 1.8 oz 52 g Raspberry Purée 0.7 oz 20 g
Granulated Sugar 5.3 oz 150 g Heavy Cream, whipped 13.9 oz 395 g
Amaretto (28% alcohol) 1.4 oz 40 g
Procedure
Procedure 1. Prepare using the chocolate mousse anglaise-based method
1. Ice cream base process (page 159). (page 133).
Chocolate Raspberry Cremeux
Yield: 1 lb (465 g)
Portions: 1
Portion size: 1 lb (465 g)
Yield description: 1 portion at 1 lb (465 g)

Milk 3.5 oz 100 g
Sugar 0.9 oz 25 g
Raspberry Purée 0.9 oz 25 g
Semisweet 4.9 oz 140 g
Chocolate 58%
Procedure
1. Prepare a crème anglaise (page 124) with heavy cream, milk,

sugar, and yolks.
2. Emulsify chocolate and anglaise.
3. Add purée and strain through a chinois.
Recipes 303
Apple Consomme
Procedure
Components
1. Prepare the apple cider using the gelatin clarification procedure
Clarified Apple Cider, page 88 on page 88.
Almond Financier, page 313 2. Bake the almond financier in a 2.5-in. (65-mm) metal ring.
Compressed Granny Smith Apples, page 284 3. Place the compressed apples in the center of a bowl.
Brown Butter Ice Cream, page 169 4. Stack the financier on the compressed apples.
Apple Chip, page 286 5. Toss the three raviolis in the clarified apple cider and place
Pasta Dough, page 285 in the bowl.
Ravioli Filling, page 285 6. Add the clarified apple cider to the bowl.
Brown Butter Nuggets, page 113 7. Place a quenelle of brown butter ice cream on the financier.
8. Sprinkle with the brown butter nuggets and garnish with apple
chip.
FIGURE 10.8 Apple Consomme

Compressed Apples Pasta Dough

Portion size: 2.5 in. (65 mm) Portion size: 7 oz (212 g)
Yield description: 12 portions at 2.5 in. (65 mm) Yield description: 1 portion at 7 oz (212 g)

Granny Smith Apples 11.6 oz 330 g Bread Flour 3.5 oz 100 g
Brown Sugar 1.2 oz 33 g Water 1.4 oz 40 g
Salt 0.04 oz 1g
Egg Yolk 2.3 oz 65 g
Procedure Olive Oil 0.2 oz 5g
1. Peel the apples and slice on a vegetable lathe.
2. Layer the apple slices sprinkle a small amount of the brown
sugar between each layer.
3. Repeat this to create five layers. Procedure
4. Place the apples in a vacuum bag and seal at 100% vacuum. 1. Combine bread flour and salt in a bowl.
5. Refrigerate overnight. 2. Make a well in the center of the flour and add the wet
6. Before serving remove the apple from the bag and dry off with ingredients.
a paper towel; cut into 2.5-in. (65-mm) rounds. 3. Stir the wet ingredients with a fork; gradually begin working in
the dry ingredients from the side of the bowl.
4. Once the dough begins to form, continue kneading by hand.
5. Wrap in plastic wrap and rest for 30 minutes.
6. Using a pasta roller, roll the dough to #2 and fold.
7. Turn the dough 90° and repeat two more times for a total of
three folds.
8. Roll the dough to #6 on the pasta roller.
9. Cover in plastic wrap and refrigerate.
Recipes 305
Ravioli Filling Apple Chip

Portion size: 0.08 oz (2.5 g) Portion size: 7 oz (200 g)
Yield description: 62 portions at 0.08 oz (2.5 g) Yield description: 1 portion at 7 oz (200 g)

Ricotta Cheese 3.5 oz 100 g Granny Smith Apples 2 each 2 each
Powdered Sugar 1.1 oz 30 g Water 1 lb 480 g
Vanilla Paste 0.2 oz 5g Sugar 12 oz 360 g
Dried Cranberries, 0.7 oz 20 g
rehydrated and diced
Salt 0.01 oz 0.5 g
Procedure
1. Using a French knife, cut the apple in half down the center.
2. Slice the apples 1⁄16 in. (1.5 mm) thick on a meat slicer.
Procedure
3. Combine water and sugar; bring to a boil.
1. Combine ricotta cheese, powdered sugar, vanilla paste, and
4. Pour the boiling syrup over the apples.
salt in a food processor.
5. Cover with plastic wrap and refrigerate overnight.
2. Fold in cranberries.
6. The following day remove the apples from the syrup.
3. Place 0.8 oz (2.5 g) of filling on the pasta dough.
7. Dry the apples on paper towels and place on a silpat.
4. Brush a thin layer of egg wash on the pasta dough around
the filing. 8. Place the apples in a 150°F (65°C) oven for 3 to 4 hours or
until dry.
5. Place a second piece of dough on top.
9. To test for doneness, remove one of the apple slices from the
6. Remove any air bubbles and press to seal.
silpat and allow to cool. The apple chip should snap cleanly. If
7. Cut with a 1.5-in. (40-mm) round fluted cutter. it is flexible and bends, continue drying.
8. Cook the ravioli in simmering salted water for 3 to 4 minutes or 10. Store in an airtight container at room temperature.
until al dente.
9. Cool in ice water, reserve for service.

Linzer Bombe
Procedure
Components
1. Roll hazelnut dough to 1⁄8 in. (3 mm).
Hazelnut Dough, page 225
2. Cut with oval cutter and bake; reserve for assembly.
Raspberry Sorbet, page 174
3. Prepare raspberry sorbet and freeze; portion into 0.6-oz
Cinnamon Parfait, page 287 (18-g) molds.
Hazelnut Microsponge, page 288 4. Assemble the cinnamon parfait.
Cinnamon Crème Anglaise, page 287 5. Pipe mold half full with the parfait and insert the frozen
Raspberry Sauce, page 115 raspberry sorbet.
Fresh Raspberries 6. Fill the remainder of the mold with the parfait and freeze
White Chocolate Spray, page 397 for 4 hours.
7. Unmold the parfait and spray with white chocolate spray.
8. Prepare the hazelnut microsponge.
9. Place the parfait on the hazelnut dough.
10. Pipe various size dots of the raspberry sauce and cinnamon
crème anglaise.
11. Cut raspberries in half to garnish the plate.
FIGURE 10.9 Linzer Bombe
Recipes 307
Cinnamon Parfait Hazelnut Microsponge

Portions: 24 portions Portions: 1
Yield description: 24 portions at 0.8 oz (24 g) Yield description: 1 portion at 13 oz (390 g)

Water 1.2 oz 35 g Whole Eggs 5.6 oz 160 g
Sugar 4.4 oz 125 g Cake Flour 2.4 oz 70 g
Cinnamon Stick 1 each 1 each Sugar 2.8 oz 80 g
Ground Cinnamon 0.01 oz 0.42 g Hazelnut Paste 2.8 oz 80 g
and scraped
Heavy Cream, whipped 11.4 oz 325 g Procedure
1. Combine eggs, sugar, and hazelnut paste with an immersion

Procedure blender.
1. Combine water, sugar, cinnamon stick, cinnamon, and vanilla 2. Using the immersion blender incorporate the flour.
bean in a saucepan. 3. Fill an ISI siphon halfway and fill with three nitrous oxide
2. Make a pâte à bombe mixture with the egg yolks and sugar charges, shaking thoroughly between each cartridge.
mixture (page 132). When sugar mixture reaches 220°F (105°C); 4. Using a pairing knife, poke four holes in the bottom of the cup
carefully remove the cinnamon stick and vanilla bean. to release steam. The cake will not leak from the holes.
3. When pâte a bombe is completely cooled, fold in cream. 5. Fill the cup ¼ full with the cake batter.
6. Microwave for 40 seconds.
7. Turn the cup upside down on a cooling rack.
Cinnamon Crème Anglaise 8. When completely cooled, remove the cake from the cup.
Portions: 24
Yield description: 24 portions at 0.5 oz (14 g)

Milk 4 oz 113 g
Sugar 2 oz 57 g
Egg Yolks 2 oz 57 g
Cinnamon Stick 1 each 1 each
Vanilla Bean, split 0.5 each 0.5 each
and scraped
Procedure
1. Crème anglaise procedure; add cinnamon stick and vanilla

bean while cooking.

Banana and Chocolate
Procedure
Components
1. Prepare pliable ganache using milk chocolate in place of the
Caramelized Bananas, page 290 white chocolate and omit the orange blossom water.
Banana Mousse, page 173
2. Roll some of the pâte sablée to 1⁄8 in. (3 mm) and cut 1-in.
Chocolate Pâte Sablée, page 246 (25-mm) discs and bake.
Roasted Banana Sorbet, page 176 3. Grate additional pâte sablée on a box grater onto a silpat,
Caramel Sauce, page 290 freeze, for 30 minutes then bake.
Pliable Milk Chocolate Ganache, page 92 4. Prepare banana mousse using the fruit mousse recipe mold in
Banana Cake, page 289 sphere molds and freeze.
Banana Chip, page 289 5. After freezing spray the sphere in yellow white chocolate spray.
White Chocolate Spray Place onto the pâte sablée disc.
Colored Yellow, page 397 6. Place the sphere on the plate.
7. Cut the pliable milk chocolate ganache into a wedge shape and
place it around the sphere.
8. Place the grated pâte sablée in the front curve of the pliable
ganache to hold the ice cream.
9. Add the remaining items—caramel sauce, banana cake, car-
amelized bananas, banana chips, and quenelle of roasted
banana sorbet.
FIGURE 10.10 Banana and Chocolate
Recipes 309
Banana Cake Banana Chip
Yield: 1 lb 1 oz (488 g) Yield: 12 banana chips

Portion size: quarter sheet pan Portion size: 1 banana chip
Yield description: 1 quarter sheet pan Yield description: 12 banana chips

Banana Purée 4 oz 113 g Bananas 4 each 4 each
Sugar 4 oz 113 g Lime Juice As Needed As Needed
All-Purpose Flour 4 oz 113 g
Note: After slicing, reserve the extra banana for the banana cake.
Whole Eggs 2 oz 57 g
Vegetable Oil 1.6 oz 45 g
Sour Cream 1.5 oz 43 g Procedure
Baking Soda 0.15 oz 4.3 g 1. Peel banana and slice on a meat slicer 1⁄16 in. (1.5 mm) thick.
2. Place onto a silpat and brush with lime juice, to prevent
oxidation.
3. Carefully lay another silpat on top of the bananas.
Procedure
4. Place the bananas in a 150°F (65°C) oven for 3 to 4 hours or
1. Sift dry ingredients. until dry.
2. Combine wet ingredients. 5. Remove the top silpat after 2 hours.
3. Add wet ingredients to dry and mix until combined. 6. To test for doneness, remove one of the banana slices from the
4. Spread into paper lined quarter sheet pan and bake at 350°F silpat and allow to cool. The banana chip should snap cleanly.
(175°C) for 20 to 25 minutes. If it is flexible and bends, continue drying.
5. Reserve for plating. 7. Store in an airtight container at room temperature.

Caramelized Banana Caramel Sauce
Portions: 24
Bananas 2 each 2 each Portion size: ½ oz (14 g)
Sugar As needed As needed Yield description: 24 portions at ½ oz (14 g)
Note: This must be done à la minute; the caramel will dissolve quickly
due to the water in the banana.
Sugar 4.8 oz 136 g
Water 1.3 oz 37 g
Procedure
1. Slice the banana ¼ in. (6 mm) thick. Vanilla Bean, split and scraped ½ each ½ each
2. Coat one side of the banana in the sugar. Butter, soft 2 oz 57 g
3. Caramelize the sugar with a blowtorch.
Procedure
1. Combine water and sugar in saucepan, bring to a boil.

2. Continue cooking the sugar until a dark caramel is reached; the
darker the caramel, the more flavor the sauce will have.
3. Remove the pan from the heat; add the cream and vanilla bean.
4. Return the pan to a low heat to dissolve the caramel. Be careful
to not boil the sauce.
5. Once the caramel is completely dissolved; add the butter,
do not stir.
6. Let the sauce cool in the pan; once cooled, stir in the butter.
Recipes 311
Warm Coffee Tart
Procedure
Components
1. Roll chocolate short to 1⁄8 in. (3 mm) thick and line 3.75-in.
Chocolate Short Dough, page 247 (9.5-cm) tart pans.
Coffee Filling, page 291 2. Blind bake shells halfway and cool.
Caramelized Pecans, page 366 3. Prepare Coffee Tart Filling; fill tart shells and refrigerate.
Vanilla Ice Cream, page 167 4. Caramelize the pecans using the caramelized hazelnut
Chocolate Pastry Cream, page 319 procedure (page 366), cool completely, and fold into the frozen
Chocolate Sauce, page 291 vanilla ice cream.
Crepe, page 292 5. Spread the chocolate pastry cream through a template
onto a silpat.
Lemon Syrup, page 292
6. Bake the pastry cream at 350°F (175°C) until the mixture looks dry.
7. Shape as desired while still warm; store in an airtight container.
8. For plating, bake the coffee tarts at 350°F (175°C) for 10 to
12 minutes.
9. While tarts are baking, warm the lemon syrup and toss the
crepe strips in the syrup.
10. Place the tart just off center on the plate.
11. Add the chocolate sauce around the tart.
12. Next put the crepe strips to the right of the tart.
13. Put a quenelle of the candied pecan ice cream on the crepe and
add the tuile.
FIGURE 10.11 Warm Coffee Tart

Coffee Tart Filling Chocolate Sauce

Yield description: 18 at 1.8 oz (50 g) Yield description: 22 portions at 0.5 oz (14 g)

Heavy Cream 2.3 oz 65 g Water 2 oz 57 g
Ground Coffee 0.4 oz 10 g Sugar 2.5 oz 71 g
Butter 2.6 oz 75 g Corn Syrup 1.5 oz 43 g
Semisweet Chocolate 58% 11.1 oz 315 g Cocoa Powder 1 oz 28 g
Egg Yolks 5.3 oz 150 g Semisweet Chocolate 58% 4 oz 113 g
Sugar 2.3 oz 65 g
Procedure
1. Combine water, sugar, and corn syrup in a saucepan.

Procedure 2. Bring liquids to a boil; add chocolate and cocoa powder.
1. Combine heavy cream and ground coffee; heat and cover. 3. Strain through a chinois and cool.
2. Steep for 10 minutes, strain coffee.
3. Melt chocolate halfway over a double boiler.
4. Bring cream and butter to a boil; emulsify with chocolate.
5. Fold egg yolks into ganache.
6. Make a French meringue with the egg whites and sugar.
7. Fold meringue into ganache in three additions.
Recipes 313
Crepes Lemon Syrup
Yield: 1 lb 6.8 oz (647 g) Yield: 14 oz (410 g)

Yield description: 1 portion at 1 lb 6.8 oz (647 g) Yield description: 1 portion at 14 oz (410 g)

Cake Flour 2 oz 57 g Water 7 oz 198 g
Bread Flour 2 oz 57 g Sugar 7 oz 198 g
Sugar 0.75 oz 21 g Lemon Zest 0.5 oz 14 g
Salt 0.07 oz 2g
Whole Eggs 4 oz 113 g
Procedure
Butter, Melted 2 oz 57 g
1. Combine water, sugar, and zest in a saucepan.
Milk, Warmed 8 oz 227 g
2. Bring to a boil; cover and cool.
3. Store in refrigerator for service.
Procedure
1. Combine all ingredients in blender; mix until smooth. Strain

through a chinois.
3. Heat an 8-in. (20-cm) nonstick pan over medium heat; spray
lightly with pan spray.
4. When pan is heated, add approximately 2 oz (60 g) of crepe
batter.
5. Tilt the pan in all directions to evenly coat the pan.
6. When crepe can be easily shaken in the pan, flip to continue
cooking the other side.
7. Place on parchment-lined sheet pan.
8. Once cooled, roll the crepe.
9. Using a French knife, cut the crepe into ¼-in. (6-mm) strips.
10. Wrap and store in the refrigerator.

Tropical Stack
Procedure
Components
1. Prepare the passion fruit curd using the lemon curd recipe.
Coconut Financier, page 293
2. Assemble the coconut financier and bake in a 3.25 in. (8.3 cm)
Passion Fruit Curd, page 139 savarin mold.
Chocolate Plaquette 3. Cut chocolate plaquettes using a 3.25 in. (8.3 cm) round cutter.
Whipped White Chocolate Ganache, page 294 4. Fill coconut financier with the passion fruit curd and place it in
Mango Tuile, page 294 the center of the plate.
Mango Sauce, page 115 5. Place a round cutter slightly larger than the savarin on the plate.
Coconut Sorbet, page 176 6. Using a squeeze bottle, pipe dots of the sauce along the cutter.
7. Twist the cutter clockwise and lift straight up.
8. Pipe the whipped white chocolate ganache on the chocolate
plaquette; place this on the coconut financier.
9. Place the mango tuile on the panna cotta and top with a scoop
of coconut ice cream.
FIGURE 10.12 Tropical Stack
Recipes 315
Coconut Financier Whipped White Chocolate Ganache

Yield description: 18 portions at 1.8 oz (50 g) Yield description: 1 portion at 1 lb 4 oz (589 g)

Desiccated Coconut 6.2 oz 175 g Heavy Cream #1 6.2 oz 175 g
Powdered Sugar 5.6 oz 160 g Inverted Sugar 0.6 oz 18 g
Sugar 2.5 oz 70 g Glucose Syrup 0.6 oz 18 g
Egg Whites 7.9 oz 225 g White Chocolate 4.2 oz 118 g
Beurre Noisette, melted 3.2 oz 90 g Heavy Cream #2 9.2 oz 260 g
All-Purpose Flour 4.4 oz 125 g Procedure
1. Combine heavy cream #1, inverted sugar, and glucose syrup.

Procedure Bring to a boil.
1. Combine desiccated coconut, powdered sugar, sugar, and all- 2. Emulsify with white chocolate.
purpose flour in a mixing bowl. 3. Add heavy cream #2 and emulsify.
2. Add egg whites, beurre noisette, and butter to dry ingredients. 4. Refrigerate for 2 to 3 hours.
3. Mix until combined. 5. Whip in a mixer before use.
4. Fill savarin-shaped molds and bake at 350°F (175°C).
5. Cool and wrap; store at room temperature.
Mango Tuile
Yield: 12 oz (385.5 g)
Portions: 1
Yield description: 1 portion at 12 oz (385.5 g)

Cake Flour 1.7 oz 50 g
Yellow Pectin 0.02 oz 0.5 g
Procedure
1. Combine all ingredients in a food processor.

2. Spread the batter through a template onto a silpat through
a template.
3. Bake the mango tuile at 350°F (175°C) until golden brown,
shape as desired while still warm.

Strawberry Cheesecake
Procedure
Components
1. Prepare the cheesecake base; add the zest of 1 orange to the
Cheesecake, page 144 base and bake in a half sheet pan.
Graham Cracker Crust, page 295 2. Prepare the vanilla bean vodka foam.
Black Pepper Meringue, page 295 3. Cut a 4-in. (10-cm) round from the cheesecake.
Fresh Strawberries 4. Cut strawberries into quarters and brush with clear glaze.
Clear Glaze, page 106 5. Place dots of the foam and sauce on top of the cheesecake.
Vodka Foam, page 89 6. Arrange the fruit and glaze.
Strawberry Sauce, page 115 7. Place the meringues.
FIGURE 10.13 Strawberry Cheesecake
Recipes 317
Graham Cracker Crust Black Pepper Meringue


Graham Cracker Crumbs 8.8 oz 250 g Egg White 3.5 oz 100 g
Butter, melted 6 oz 170 g Sugar 7.1 oz 200 g
Black Pepper As needed As needed
Procedure
1. Combine graham cracker crumbs and butter. Procedure
2. Spread a thin layer of graham cracker crust in a half sheet pan. 1. Prepare a Swiss meringue with the egg whites and sugar.
3. Bake for 5 minutes at 350°F (175°C). 2. Once cooled, pipe into long tubes with a ¼-in. (6-mm) plain
4. Once cooled, top with cheesecake batter and bake. pastry tip onto parchment paper.
3. Grind black pepper onto meringue.
4. Dry in a 200°F (95°C) oven until completely dry.
5. Cut into pieces and store in an airtight container.

Pear and Hazelnut
Procedure
Components
1. Place the frozen ring of gianduja Bavarian on the plate; allow
Gianduja Bavarian, page 296 5 to 10 minutes to thaw.
Hazelnut Pain de Genes, page 297 2. Place the hazelnut pain de genes in the ring.
Pear Williams Liquor Bonbon, page 378 3. Using a spoon, add some of the hazelnut streusel and pine
Hazelnut Streusel, page 298 apple confit.
Sous Vide Pineapple, page 349 4. Add the sliced poached pears and Pear Williams liquor bonbon.
Hazelnut Croquant, page 298 5. Place four candied hazelnuts.
Pineapple Sherbet, page 171 6. Pipe the orange fluid gel.
Candied Hazelnuts, page 366 7. Quenelle the pineapple sherbet and add the hazelnut croquant.
Poached Pears, page 267
Orange Fluid Gel, page 298
FIGURE 10.14 Pear and Hazelnut
Recipes 319
Gianduja Bavarian Hazelnut Marzipan


Milk 6.2 oz 175 g Hazelnuts, lightly toasted 6.2 oz 175 g
Egg Yolks 2.5 oz 70 g Glucose 1.6 oz 45 g
Sugar 1.3 oz 36 g Water 1.6 oz 45 g
Gianduja 6 oz 170 g Pear Williams Liqueur 0.5 oz 15 g
Heavy Cream, whipped 14.1 oz 400 g
Procedure
1. Rough-chop hazelnuts in a food processor; place on a silpat-

Procedure lined sheet pan.
1. Prepare using the Bavarian procedure (page 133). 2. Combine water, sugar, and glucose in saucepan and bring to
a boil.
2. Add the cooked Bavarian base to the gianduja and emulsify.
3. Cook sugar syrup to 239°F (115°C) and pour over hazelnuts.
3. Using a pastry bag, pipe into 5.75-in. (14-cm) ring molds and
freeze. 4. Cool mixture completely.
5. Return mixture to food processor and add Pear Williams
Liqueur (Poire William).
6. Grind to a fine paste.
7. Reserve for Hazelnut Pain de Genes.

Hazelnut Pain de Genes Hazelnut Croquant
Yield: 1 lb 11 oz (777.5 g) Yield: 6 oz (175 g)

Yield description: 1 half sheet pan Yield description: 1 portion 6 oz (175 g)

Hazelnut Marzipan, page 297 11.4 oz 325 g Fondant 3.2 oz 90 g
Eggs 8.8 oz 250 g Glucose 2.1 oz 60 g
Inverted Sugar 1.2 oz 35 g Hazelnuts, toasted and chopped 0.9 oz 25 g
Salt 0.08 oz 2.5 g
All-Purpose Flour 2.1 oz 60 g Procedure
Beurre Noisette 3.2 oz 90 g
1. Combine fondant and glucose in a saucepan and cook to a
Water 0.5 oz 15 g caramel.
2. Pour onto silpat and cool.
3. Grind to a fine powder in a food processor.
Procedure 4. Sift powder onto a silpat and top with chopped hazelnuts.
5. Bake 350°F (175°C) until melted.
1. Place hazelnut marzipan in a mixer with paddle attachment.
2. Slowly add eggs one at a time, scraping between additions.
3. Add inverted sugar and scrape.
4. Add flour, salt, and beurre noisette.
5. Spread in half sheet pan lined with a silpat. Hazelnut Streusel
7. Cool and wrap, reserve for plating.
Yield: 4 oz (121 g)
Portions: 1

Butter 1.1 oz 30 g
Orange Zest ½ each ½ each
Hazelnuts, ground 1.1 oz 30 g
Flour 1.1 oz 30 g
Salt 0.04 oz 1g
Procedure
1. Cream butter, brown sugar, and zest with a paddle.

2. Add sifted dry ingredients.
3. Spread mixture onto a parchment lined half sheet pan.
4. Bake 350°F (175°C) until golden brown.
Recipes 321
Orange Fluid Gel Apricot Tart
Components
Portions: 20
Portion size: 0.5 oz (14 g) Pâte Sablée, page 246
Yield description: 20 portions at 0.5 oz (14 g) Apricot Pectin Fruit Gelée, page 105
Pistachio Cream, page 300
Ingredients U.S. Metric Milk Chocolate Creméux, page 229
Orange Juice 5.3 oz 150 g Caramelized White Chocolate Mousse, page 132
Pineapple Purée 1.8 oz 50 g (pâte bombe mousse)
Agar 0.04 oz 1g Caramelized White Chocolate Spray, page 300
Xanthan Gum 0.006 oz 0.18 g Apricot Sorbet, page 176
Blood Orange Purée 3.5 oz 100 g Apricot Sauce, page 115

Caramel Popcorn, page 301
Procedure
Procedure
1. Combine orange juice and pineapple purée.
2. Combine agar and xanthan gum; add to orange juice mixture 1. Roll the pâte sablée to 1⁄8 in. (3 mm) thick.
with an immersion blender. 2. Line a 3.5-in. (9-cm) tart shell and refrigerate.
3. Bring this mixture to a boil. 3. Prepare the roasted white chocolate mousse mold into savarin
4. Cool on an ice bath. molds and freeze.
5. The sauce will gel to a solid. Use an immersion blender to break 4. Cut a disc of the apricot gel; place it in the bottom of the un-
up the gel. baked tart shell.
6. Adjust the consistency using the remaining blood orange purée. 5. Pipe a thin layer of the pistachio cream on top of the apricot
gelée and bake the shell.
6. After the shell has cooled, prepare the milk chocolate creméux
and fill the shell to the top.
7. Unmold the caramelized white chocolate mousse and spray
with the caramelized white chocolate spray; return to the
freezer for 5 minutes.
8. Place the caramelized white chocolate mousse on the tart.
9. Pipe a layer of apricot sauce in the center of the savarin.
10. Place the tart on the plate and sauce.
11. Top the tart with a scoop of apricot sorbet.
12. Garnish with caramel popcorn.

FIGURE 10.15 Apricot Tart
Caramelized White Chocolate Pistachio Cream
Yield: 1 lb (480 g) Yield: 12 oz (360 g)

Portion size: 1 lb (480 g) Portion size: 12 oz (360 g)
Yield description: 1 portion at 1 lb (480 g) Yield description: 1 portion at 12 oz (360 g)

White Chocolate 1 lb 480 g Butter 3.2 oz 90 g
Sugar 3.2 oz 90 g
Pistachio Flour 2.1 oz 60 g
Procedure 1
Eggs 3.2 oz 90 g
1. Put white chocolate in a quarter sheet pan.
2. Place the pan in a 250°F (120°C) oven.
3. Stir every 10 minutes, cook for approximately 30 to 60 minutes
or until the white chocolate becomes a deep caramel color. Procedure
4. After removing the chocolate from the oven, process with an 1. Combine butter, sugar, almond flour, and pistachio flour with a
immersion blender to remove any lumps. paddle on low speed.
2. Slowly add eggs one at a time, scraping between additions.
3. Refrigerate.
Procedure 2
1. Place white chocolate in a vacuum bag and seal at 100%.

2. Fill a pressure cooker halfway full of water with the lid off; begin
to heat the water.
3. Place the bag in the pressure cooker and seal; continue to heat
according to the manufacturer’s instructions.
4. Cook the white chocolate for 20 minutes.
5. Cool the pressure cooker and carefully remove the lid.
6. Dry the bag of chocolate and allow to cool.
7. Melt the caramelized white chocolate and process with an
immersions blender to remove any lumps.

Caramel Popcorn
Portions: 1

Popcorn Kernels 1.9 oz 55 g
Vegetable Oil As needed As needed
Salt 0.2 oz 7g
Butter 4.2 oz 120 g
Honey 1.8 oz 50 g
Baking Soda 0.08 oz 2.3 g
Procedure
1. Coat the bottom of a saucepan with vegetable oil and heat.

2. Add popcorn kernels and cover; continue shaking the pan until
popping stops.
3. Toss the salt on the popcorn and cool on a sheetpan.
4. Melt butter and add brown sugar, honey, and corn syrup.
5. Cook to 300°F (150°C).
6. Add baking soda and quickly toss with popcorn.
7. Dry in a 200°F (93°C) for 10 to 15 minutes.
8. Press into metal cake ring, cool completely.
9. Slice on a meat slicer and store in an airtight container.
Recipes 325
S’more Saint Honoré
Procedure
Components
1. Prepare marshmallow and pipe with a 0.4-in. (10-mm) plain tip;
Puff Pastry, page 80 cut and tie marshmallow into knots.
Pate au Choux, page 319 2. Prepare pâte au choux with graham cracker croustillant.
Graham Cracker Croustillant, page 302 3. Roll puff pastry to 1⁄16 in. (2 mm) thick and dock. Bake between
Chocolate Ice Cream, page 167 two silicone mats until golden brown.
Dark Chocolate Mousse 4. Cut puff pastry into a strip 1.25 in. x 6 in. (3 cm x 15 cm)
Dark Chocolate Creméux, page 302 5. Fill pâte au choux with chocolate creméux.
Marshmallow, page 374 6. Attach the pâte au choux using caramel.
Graham Cracker Crème 7. Using a star tip pipe the chocolate mousse between the pâte
Anglaise, page 302 au choux; leave room at the end of the puff pastry for the
chocolate ice cream.
8. Place the strip on the plate; use a small amount of mousse to
secure the puff pastry to the plate.
9. Place the marshmallow knots on the top of the mousse.
10. Sauce the plate.
11. Place the quenelle of chocolate ice cream on the end of the strip.
FIGURE 10.16 S’more St Honore

Graham Cracker Croustillant Dark Chocolate Creméux
Yield: 12 oz (352 g) Yield: 2 lb (830 g)

Portion size: 12 oz (352 g) Portion size: 2 lb (830 g)
Yield description: 1 portion at 12 oz (352 g) Yield description: 1 portion at 2 lb (830 g)

Butter 3.5 oz 100 g Heavy Cream 8.8 oz 250 g
Brown Sugar 4.4 oz 125 g Milk 8.8 oz 250 g
Graham Cracker Crumbs 4.4 oz 125 g Sugar 1.8 oz 50 g
Salt 0.07 oz 2g Egg Yolks 3.5 oz 100 g
Semisweet Chocolate 58% 9.5 oz 270 g
Procedure
1. Combine all ingredients with a paddle. Procedure
2. Roll to 1⁄16 in. (2 mm) thick between two sheets of parchment 1. Prepare a crème anglaise (page 142) with the heavy cream,
paper and freeze. milk, sugar, and egg yolks.
3. Cut with a round cutter to fit on piped pâte au choux. 2. Emulsify the crème anglaise with dark chocolate.
4. Bake pâte au choux according to recipe. 3. Strain through a chinois and store in the refrigerator for service.
Recipes 327
Graham Cracker Anglaise
Portions: 26
Yield description: 26 portions at 0.5 oz (14 g)

Milk 4.2 oz 120 g
Graham Crackers 1 oz 27.5 g
Honey 0.5 oz 14 g
Egg Yolks 2 oz 57 g
Vanilla Bean, split and scraped ½ each ½ each
Procedure
1. Combine milk and heavy cream in a saucepan and scald.

2. Remove from heat and add vanilla bean and graham crackers
(do not stir); cover with plastic wrap and steep for 5 minutes.
3. Strain the mixture through a chinois. Do not press the liquid out
of the graham crackers; this will make the crème anglaise gritty.
4. Some of the milk and cream will be lost in the process of steep-
ing in the cookies. Make up the difference with 50% cream
and 50% milk to return the total weight of milk and cream to
8 oz (240 g).
5. Make a crème anglaise (page 142) with infused milk and cream
mixture, brown sugar, honey, and egg yolks.
6. Strain through a chinois, chill on an ice bath.

Key Terms
Scattered Sameness Stack
Flavor families à la minute Quenelle
Umami Garnishes
Monochromatic Tuile

1. Discuss the five key components of plated desserts. Which of 4. When creating a new plated dessert, there are six steps involved.
these is the most important, and why? Explain why the last step is important to the process.
2. What are the five basic tastes? How can they be used to help bring 5. Design a new dessert based on pumpkin pie, carrot cake, or
balance to a rich dessert? banana split using the six steps of developing a new dessert.
3. Why is it important to use different textures and temperatures on
the plate?

CHAPTER 11
Petits-Fours
The wood-burning ovens of the 1800s didn’t have the modern conveniences of today’s ovens.
It took a considerable amount of time to heat the oven. Once heated it was referred to as the
grand-four, or large oven. After cooking all the larger items in the oven the heat source was
extinguished but it took a long time for the oven to cool completely. Not wanting to waste
resources, this gave the bakers the petits-fours, or small oven. The lower temperature was
ideal for producing smaller cakes and pastries.
LEARNING OBJECTIVES

1. Define the three categories of petits-fours.
2. Design a petits-fours buffet.
3. Make a selection of petits-fours sec, glacé, and contemporary.
4. Produce fondant and glaze petits-fours.
Introduction to Petits-fours
Petits-fours are smaller in size compared to other pastries and are intensely flavored. Literally
named after the oven they are baked in and translating from the French to mean “small oven,”
these one- to two-bite pastries are broken down into three categories: sec, glacé, and contem-
porary. Oftentimes, chocolates and confections (Chapter 12) are served along with petits-fours.
The three categories—sec, glacé, and contemporary—encompass pastries from a simple butter
cookie dipped in chocolate to a fresh fruit tart. The combination of flavors, textures, and color
of the petits-fours is only limited by the creativity of the chef.
Petits-fours are served as part of a dessert buffet, tea service, pre-dessert, room service
amenity, or as a complimentary item along with the check. Pre-dessert is a plated presen-
tation of one petit-four. This is a complimentary item served between the main course and
dessert at fine dining restaurants. In a restaurant, a selection of petits-fours can also be served
after the meal along with the check.
In some way, petits-fours can be compared to hors d’oeuvres. Originally hors d’oeuvres,
translated to “outside the work,” were prepared by the wait staff with leftover products
given to them by the chef. The front of the house is no longer responsible for preparing food
in this manner. However, part of the origin of the hors d’oeuvres tradition is still alive today.
331
Chefs create amuse bouche and hors d’oeuvres using the same approach of cross utilization of
ingredients and recipes from menu items to assemble these small bites of food. The pastry chef
employees the same approach, using base recipes such as lemon curd, pastry cream, cakes,
tart dough, and fresh fruit.
Petits-fours are small complex pastries and some may take a considerable amount of time
to assemble but this is what sets them apart from other pastries. Many times the flavors and
components found in petits-fours may just be a smaller version of a plated dessert, cake, or tart.
When building a production schedule for cakes or tarts, prepare additional fillings or doughs
that can be reserved for petits-fours production. To save time, extra mousse from assembling
cakes can be molded in flexipans and frozen for future use.
Sec
The category of petits-fours sec includes all dry products. It is the simplest form of petits-fours,
including butter cookies, small cakes, and tuiles. The benefit of petits-fours sec is that they can
be prepared in advance. Cookies can be made in advance, shaped and refrigerated or frozen
and baked the day of the event. Cakes can also be mixed and pans filled to await baking at the
last possible minute to ensure a fresh, moist product.
Sec items provide a petits-fours presentation
with color, texture, and shapes that cannot be
achieved with other petits-fours. Due to the simplic-
ity of these items, the execution of the procedure
must be perfect. Adding additional elements to these
items can increase their complexity. Cookies can be
filled; dried or macerated fruit can be added to cakes;
a chocolate garnish can be added; or a piped rosette
of ganache can be used to add flavor, texture, and
design to the finished petits-fours.
Cookies and cakes included in this chapter can
be used in many other items produced in the pastry
shop. They can be utilized in plated desserts, tarts,
cakes, and even as a garnish for other petits-fours.
Macarons can be used unfilled to garnish the side
of an entremets, or piped small and used as garnish
for a contemporary petits-fours. Cookies such as
speculaas can be baked and infused into a custard or
cream, giving it the flavor of the cookie. It is impor-
tant to consider cross utilization of flavors and prod-
ucts to be able to prepare the wide variety of items
that come out of the pastry shop.
FIGURE 11.1 Presentation of petits-fours sec (clockwise

from top): speculaas, sablé Breton, romias
332 C H A PT E R 1 1 Petits-Fours
Recipes
Romias Romias Nougatine

Portions: 50 cookies Portions: 50
Portion size: 0.43 oz (13 g) Portion size: 0.28 oz (7.9 g)
Yield description: 50 cookies at 0.43 oz (13 g) Yield description: 50 portions at 0.28 oz (7.9 g)

Butter 8.8 oz 250 g Glucose 3.5 oz 100 g
Powdered Sugar 3.5 oz 100 g Brown Sugar 3.5 oz 100 g
Vanilla Bean Powder 0.07 oz 2g Chopped Almonds 3.5 oz 100 g
Salt 0.07 oz 2g Butter, cubed 3.5 oz 100 g
Procedure
1. Combine glucose and brown sugar.

Procedure 2. Warm to dissolve sugar.
1. Cream butter and powdered sugar. 3. Add butter and chopped almonds.
2. Add vanilla powder and salt. 4. Cool to room temperature and reserve for cookie assembly.
3. Add egg whites in three additions; scrape between each addition.
4. Add flour and mix until ingredients are combined.
5. Pipe using a sultan tip onto a silpat-lined sheet pan.
6. Fill with nougatine mixture (see following recipe).
7. Refrigerate for 1 hour before baking.
8. Bake at 350°F (175°C) until light golden brown.
Recipes 333
Speculaas Speculaas Spice Blend
Yield: 1 lb (471 g) Yield: 4 oz (132 g)

Portions: 45 cookies Portions: 1
Yield description: 45 cookies at 0.35 oz (10 g) Yield description: 1 portion at 4 oz (132 g)

Butter 3.5 oz 100 g Cinnamon 2.4 oz 67 g
Brown Sugar 3.5 oz 100 g Nutmeg 0.7 oz 19 g
Sugar 1.1 oz 30 g Clove 0.7 oz 19 g
Speculaas Spice Blend, page 334 0.17 oz 5g Ginger 0.5 oz 15 g
Salt 0.04 oz 1g Cardamom 0.25 oz 7g
Eggs 0.9 oz 25 g White Pepper 0.18 oz 5g
Milk 0.3 oz 7.5 g
Baking Powder 0.1 oz 3g Procedure
1. Combine all ingredients.

2. Reserve for speculaas cookie recipe.
Procedure
1. Sift flour and baking powder.

2. Cream butter, brown sugar, and sugar.
3. Add spice mixture and salt.
4. Combine eggs and milk; add in three additions scraping be
tween additions.
5. Add flour and mix until combined.
6. Refrigerate for a minimum 2 hours.
7. Roll to dough to a thickness of 1/8 in. (3 mm).
8. Cut with a star cutter and place onto silpat-lined sheet pan.
9. Lightly brush dough with water and sprinkle with granulated
sugar.
Sablé Breton Lemon Viennese
Yield: 3 lb 5.9 oz (1620 g) Yield: 12 oz (346 g)

Portions: 200 cookies Portions: 57 cookies
Yield description: 200 cookies at 0.25 oz (8 g) Yield description: 57 cookies at 0.2 oz (6 g)
Components Ingredients U.S. Metric

Sablé Breton, page 248 Butter 4.4 oz 125 g
Powdered Sugar (as needed) Powdered Sugar 1.8 oz 50 g
Salt 0.04 oz 1g
Lemon, zested with 2 each 1 each
Procedure microplane
1. Roll sablé Breton dough to 4 mm. Egg whites 0.7 oz 20 g
2. Cut with a plain 1.6-in. (4-cm) round cutter. All-Purpose Flour 5.3 oz 150 g
3. Place dough into a buttered 1.6-in. (4-cm) metal ring. Powdered Sugar, for dusting As needed As needed
4. Bake at 350°F (175°C) 8–10 minutes.

Procedure
1. Cream butter and powdered sugar.

2. Add salt and lemon zest.
3. Add the egg whites in 3 additions; scrape between each addition.
4. Add flour mix until combined.
5. Pipe using a star tip in a “W” shape onto parchment-lined
sheet pans.
6. After piping refrigerate for 1 hour.
FIGURE 11.2 Pistachio Diamond, Biscotti, Lemon Viennese, Orange Tuile
Recipes 335
Pistachio Diamonds Orange Tuile

Portions: 60 cookies Portions: 43 tuile
Yield description: 60 cookies at 0.5 oz (14 g) Yield description: 43 tuile at 0.2 oz (6 g)

Butter 8.1 oz 230 g Powdered Sugar 3.5 oz 100 g
Powdered Sugar 5.6 oz 160 g All-Purpose Flour 1 oz 28 g
All-Purpose Flour 14.1 oz 400 g Pectin Yellow 0.03 oz 0.8 g
Pistachio Paste 1.1 oz 32 g Orange Juice 1.1 oz 30 g
Pistachios, chopped 1.4 oz 40 g Butter 1.4 oz 40 g
Sugar As needed As needed Almonds, chopped 1.8 oz 50 g
Candied Orange Peel, page 337 0.4 oz 10 g
Procedure
1. Cream butter and sugar. Procedure
2. Add flour, pistachio paste and chopped pistachios; mix until 1. Combine flour, pectin, powdered sugar, chopped almond, and
combined. chopped orange peel.
3. Roll dough into logs 1.5 in. (40 mm) in diameter and freeze. 2. Add melted butter and orange juice, mix until combined.
4. Remove dough from the freezer and moisten with water; roll in 3. Refrigerate for 4 hours.
granulated sugar. 4. Scoop tuile batter into balls 0.5 in. (12 mm) in diameter and
5. Allow dough to temper for a few minutes. place a silpat-lined sheet pan.
6. Cut into ¼ in. (7 mm) and place on a silpat-lined sheet pan. 5. Bake at 350°F (175°C) until the center of the tuile is a light
7. Bake at 350°F (175°C) until light golden brown. golden brown.
6. Remove the sheet pan from the oven and allow to cool slightly.
7. Using an offset pallet knife, remove the warm tuile from the pan
and place it over a rolling pin to shape.
8. After tuile has completely cooled store in an airtight container.
Candied Citrus Peel Biscotti
Portions: 147 cookies
Oranges 12 each 12 each
Yield description: 147 cookies at 0.3 oz (10 g)
Salt 0.6 oz 20 g
Water #1 2 lb 4.5 oz 1000 g
Sugar 3 lb 10 oz 1750 g Ingredients U.S. Metric
Water #2 1 lb 7 oz 750 g Butter 5.7 oz 163 g

Glucose 8.3 oz 250 g Sugar 12 oz 340 g
Salt 0.09 oz 2.5 g
Note: Any citrus fruit can be used in place of the orange. The candied
orange peel will store for several months in a sealed container in the Vanilla Extract 0.9 oz 25 g
refrigerator. Eggs 5.8 oz 165 g
All-Purpose Flour 1 lb 1.9 oz 508 g
Baking Soda 0.2 oz 5g
Procedure
Baking Powder 0.2 oz 5g
1. Wash the fruit thoroughly.
Sliced Almonds 8.8 oz 250 g
2. Using a French knife; remove the peel from the fruit.
Orange Zest 0.4 oz 10 g
3. Cut the peel into ¼-in. (7-mm) wide strips.
4. Bring water #1 and the salt to boil; blanch the peel for 5 minutes.
5. Strain and rinse the peels.
Procedure
6. Combine the 2 lb 12 oz (1250 g) of sugar with water #2 and bring
to a boil. 1. Cream butter and sugar.
7. Pour over peel, place plastic wrap directly on top of syrup (the 2. Add salt and vanilla extract.
peel must be covered) and allow to cool overnight. 3. Add eggs in three additions scraping between each addition.
8. The next day, strain the syrup from the peel; reserve the syrup. 4. Sift flour, baking soda, and baking powder.
9. Add 4 oz (125 g) of sugar the strained syrup and heat just 5. Add sifted flour mixture, sliced almonds, and orange zest.
to a boil. 6. Mix until combined.
10. Pour over the peel, place plastic wrap directly on top of the 7. Scale dough into 9-oz (250-g) pieces.
syrup, and allow to cool overnight.
8. Roll into logs 12 in. (30 cm) long.
11. Repeat steps 8 to 10 for 3 more days.
9. Bake at 350°F (175°C) on parchment paper lined sheet pans
12. On the fifth day strain the syrup from the peel and scale 2 lb until golden brown.
12 oz (1250 g).
10. Remove from oven and let bars cool.
13. Add the glucose to the syrup and bring to a boil.
11. While still warm, slice with a serrated knife to desired thickness.
14. Pour over the peel and cover directly with plastic wrap.
12. Lay sliced biscotti on a parchment-lined sheet pan and con-
15. The peel can be dried overnight on glazing racks and stored in tinue baking until dried.
the syrup under refrigeration or in the freezer.
Chocolate Pistachio Biscotti
Chocolate Chips 4.4 oz 125 g
Pistachios 5.3 oz 150 g
Variation
Replace almonds and orange zest with chocolate chips and

pistachios.
Recipes 337
Hazelnut Financier
Portions: 25 cakes
Yield description: 25 cakes at 0.7 oz (20 g)

Hazelnut Flour 1.8 oz 50 g
Butter 4.4 oz 125 g
Honey 1.4 oz 40 g
Griottine Cherries 25 each 25 each
Note: Hazelnut flour can be replaced with almond or pistachio flour.
Procedure
1. Brown butter in a heavy-bottom saucepan to make beurre

noisette.
2. Combine dry ingredients.
3. Add egg whites to dry ingredients followed by beurre noisette.
5. Pipe into 1.5-in. (3.8-cm) molds; place one griottine cherry in
the center of each.
6. Bake at 350°F (175°C).
FIGURE 11.3 Macaron, financier, madeleine (clockwise from top)
French Macaron Madeleine

Portions: 186 cookies (93 sandwiched cookies) Portions: 115 portions
Portion size: 0.2 oz (6 g) Portion size: 0.2 oz (6.5 g)
Yield description: 186 cookies (93 sandwiched cookies) Yield description: 115 portions at 0.2 oz (6.5 g)

Almond Flour 10.6 oz 300 g Butter 6.3 oz 180 g
Powdered Sugar 10.6 oz 300 g Sugar 5.1 oz 145 g
Egg Whites #1 3.9 oz 110 g Brown Sugar 0.7 oz 20 g
Sugar 8.8 oz 250 g Salt 0.07 oz 2g
Corn Syrup 1.8 oz 50 g Honey 1.1 oz 30 g
Water 2.6 oz 75 g Eggs 7.1 oz 200 g
Egg Whites #2 3.9 oz 110 g All-Purpose Flour 6.3 oz 180 g
Egg White Powder 0.07 oz 2g Baking Powder 0.2 oz 5g
Note: Liquid or powder color can be added to the meringue during mixing.
Procedure Procedure
1. Combine almond flour and powdered sugar in a food proces- 1. Cream butter, sugar, brown sugar, and salt.
sor; grind for 1 minute.
2. Sift flour and baking powder.
2. Add water, corn syrup, and sugar to heavy-bottom saucepan.
3. Add honey to creamed mixture.
3. Combine egg whites #2 and egg white powder in a stand mixer.
4. Add eggs in three additions, scraping between each addition.
4. Cook sugar mixture to 240°F (114°C).
5. Add flour and mix until combined.
5. Turn egg whites on high speed, continue cooking sugar mixture
to 245°F (118°C). 6. Brush madeleine molds with soft butter and dust with flour.
6. Add cooked sugar mixture to egg whites; cool to 110°F (44°C). 7. Pipe batter into mold, fill 3 ⁄4 of the way.
7. Fold egg whites #1 into almond flour and powdered sugar mix- 8. Refrigerate for 1 hour.
ture; this paste will become stiff if left too long. 9. Bake at 400°F (205°C) for 5 to 7 minutes.
8. Fold meringue into mixture in three additions. 10. Immediately remove madeleines from pans.
9. The finished batter should run slightly. If it is stiff, use a rubber
spatula to remove some of the air from the batter.
10. Place into pastry bag fitted with a 3 ⁄ 8-in. (10-mm) plain tip.
11. Pipe onto a silpat-lined sheet pan 1 in. (25 mm) in diameter.
12. Allow the macaron to dry at room temperature for 30 minutes.
13. Bake at 330°F (165°C) for 13 to 15 minutes; the cookie should
not have any browning
14. Fill with flavored ganache or buttercream.
Chocolate Macaron
Cocoa Paste 2.8 oz 80 g
Variation
1. Heat cocoa paste to 100°F (38°C).

2. Incorporate cocoa paste during step 7 above.
Glacé
The next category, petits-fours glacé, includes items that are glazed. The glaze can come in
the form of poured fondant, chocolate glaze, fruit glaze, or caramel. The glaze on these pastries
gives them a bright shine, adds flavor, and protects the product underneath from drying out
while on the buffet. To further prevent glazed items from looking dry, coat cakes in a thin layer
of marmalade or thinly rolled sheet of marzipan. The marzipan will provide a smooth surface
for the glaze as well as prevent the cake to absorb water from the glaze.
Oftentimes, when customers refer to petits-fours, they do not understand the wide variety
of pastries that this includes. They immediately think of the small square or round cakes that
are enrobed in pouring fondant. Pouring fondant is very sweet, so it’s important to consider this
when using it as part of a petits-fours. Pairing fondant with a pastry that has an acidic filling or
one that is not overly sweet works best.
Pouring fondant is a product that can be made in the pastry kitchen or purchased from
a supplier. It is a mixture of water, sugar, glucose, and acid that is cooked and cooled on a
marble table. As the fondant begins to cool it is agitated, similar to fudge. During this stage, the
sugar begins to crystalize. The temperature the fondant syrup is cooked to and the ingredients,
glucose and acid, control the crystallization. Agitation creates small crystals in the syrup, mak-
ing the mixture opaque.
When working with pouring fondant, the ideal working temperature is 110°F (43°C). If the
fondant is too thick when heated, water or sugar syrup can be added to adjust the consistency.
Exceeding this temperature will begin to melt the crystals out of the fondant. As the fondant
cools and dries, it will not shine, due to the reduced amount of crystals. Dull fondant can occur
if the fondant is overheated or placed in the refrigerator. The shine of the fondant indicates a
freshly made product; dull fondant is associated with an older product.
FIGURE 11.4 Improperly glazed petits-fours (left), properly glazed petits-fours (right)
Glacé 341
Recipes
Traditional Petits-Fours Glacé
Yield: 54 cakes at 1.25 × 1.25 in. (3.1 × 3.1 cm)

Portions: 54 cakes
Portion size: 1.25 × 1.25 in. (3.1 × 3.1 cm)
Yield description: 54 cakes at 1.25 × 1.25 in. (3.1 × 3.1 cm)
Components
Petits-Fours Cake, page 345
Marzipan, page 344
Pouring Fondant, page 344
Raspberry Marmalade
Procedure
1. Spread a thin layer of raspberry marmalade on the top of cake.

2. Cut the cake in half and stack the layers.
3. Roll a piece of marzipan to thinly cover the top of the cake.
4. Freeze the cake.
5. Turn the cake upside down and cut into 1.25-in. (3.1-cm)
squares or using round cutter.
6. Glaze with pouring fondant.
FIGURE 11.5 Top to bottom: White chocolate pineapple,
opera, citron, traditional petits-fours glacé
Marzipan Pouring Fondant


Almond Paste 2 lb 3 oz 1000 g Water #1 1 lb 9 oz 720 g
Glucose 6 oz 180 g Sugar 2 lb 10 oz 1200 g
Powdered Sugar, sifted 2 lb 3 oz 1000 g Glucose 7.8 oz 220 g
Cream of Tartar 0.04 oz 1g
Water #2 1 lb 5 oz 600 g
Procedure
1. Using a paddle attachment mix almond paste with glucose on

low speed. Procedure
2. Begin adding powdered sugar, not all of the powdered sugar 1. Lightly oil a marble table and metal bars, prepare a frame to
will be needed; add enough to form a soft dough. hold the cooked syrup.
3. Wrap tightly in plastic wrap and store in the refrigerator. 2. Combine water #1 and sugar; bring to a boil.
3. Cook the mixture to 225°F (107°C).
4. Warm the glucose and add to the cooking sugar; continue
cooking to 240°F (116°C).
5. Pour onto oiled marble and sprinkle with water #2.
6. Cool the mixture to 110°F (43°C) and table as with tempering
chocolate (page 347).
7. Once the syrup has crystallized, store it in a plastic container;
cover the top of the fondant with a thin layer of water. Allow
fondant to rest for 24 hours before use.
Reheating Fondant
1. Pour off the syrup from the top of the fondant.

2. Warm the fondant over a double boiler to 110°F (43°C). If the
fondant is too thick once warmed, add a small amount of the
syrup that was on top of the fondant.
Petits-Fours Cake Chocolate Filled Pâte au Choux
Yield: 2 lb 6 oz (1080 g) Portions: 50

Portions: 1 Portion size: 1.5 inch (3.8 cm)
Portion size: half sheet pan Yield description: 50 portions at 1.5 inch (3.8 cm)
Yield description: 1 half sheet pan
Components
Ingredients U.S. Metric Pâte au Choux, page 346
Almond Paste 1 lb 1 oz 480 g Chocolate Pastry Cream, page 346
Butter 8.5 oz 240 g Fondant, page 344
Sugar 2.1 oz 60 g
Eggs 8.5 oz 240 g
Cake Flour 2.1 oz 60 g Procedure
1. Prepare pâte au choux; pipe into 0.75-in. (1.9-cm) rounds and

bake.
Procedure 2. Fill pâte au choux with chocolate pastry cream.
1. Cream almond paste, butter and sugar with a paddle on 3. Prepare fondant; add unsweetened chocolate as desired to
medium speed. make chocolate fondant.
2. Slowly add eggs, scraping between additions. 4. Glaze the top of the pâte au choux.
3. Add flour on low speed; mix until combined.
4. Spread onto a greased half sheet pan lined with parchment
paper.
5. Bake at 350°F (175 °C) 15 to 20 minutes.
Recipes 345
Pâte au Choux Chocolate Pastry Cream


Milk 7.9 oz 225 g Pastry Cream, page 140 1 lb 8 oz 700 g
Heavy Cream 0.9 oz 25 g Chocolate 60% 3.2 oz 90 g
Butter, cubed 4.4 oz 125 g
Sugar 0.2 oz 5g
Salt 0.05 oz 1.5 g Procedure
All-Purpose Flour 2.3 oz 65 g 1. Prepare pastry cream (page 140).
Bread Flour 2.3 oz 65 g 2. Place warm pastry cream and chocolate in a mixing bowl fitted
Eggs 8.8 oz 250 g with a paddle attachment.
3. Mix on low to combine and cool the pastry cream.
4. Cover with plastic wrap and store in the refrigerator.
Procedure
1. Combine milk, heavy cream, butter, sugar, and salt in saucepan.

2. Heat to a boil.
3. Add all-purpose flour and bread flour; stir and cook for
2 minutes.
4. Transfer the mixture to a mixer with the paddle attachment,
mix until temperature is 140°F (60°C).
5. Add eggs and mix until combined.
6. Pipe into desired shape on a siplat.
7. Bake at 300°F (150°C) until golden brown.
Citron Opera
Yield: Forty-five 1.5 inch tarts Portions: 100 cakes

Portions: 45 Portion size: 1.25 × 1.5 in. (2.5 × 3.8 cm)
Portion size: One 1.5-in. tart Yield description: 100 cakes at 1.25 × 1.5 in. (2.5 × 3.8 cm)
Yield description: Forty-five 1.5-in. tarts
Components
Components
Dark Chocolate, melted
Sablé Breton, page 248
Jaconde, page 196
Coffee Syrup, page 348
Lemon Mousseline, below
Coffee Buttercream, page 348
Fondant, page 344
Dark Chocolate Ganache, page 351
Candied Lemon Zest, page 337
Chocolate Mirror Glaze, page 226
Procedure
1. Roll sablé Breton dough to 0.2 in. (5 mm) thick.

Procedure
2. Cut the sablé Breton using a 1.5-in. (40-mm) round cutter and
bake. 1. Cut jaconde into half sheet pan pieces.
3. Using a sultan tip, pipe Italian meringue and brown with a torch. 2. Spread the melted chocolate on one of the layers of jaconde.
Allow this to crystallize; then place chocolate side down.
4. Prepare fondant and color yellow.
3. Generously soak cake with coffee syrup.
5. Place a toothpick into the frozen lemon mousseline and dip in
the warmed fondant. 4. Spread a layer of the coffee buttercream on the jaconde.
6. Place on the meringue. 5. Place a sheet of jaconde on top of the buttercream and soak
with coffee syrup.
7. Remove the toothpick and cover the hole with a thin slice of
candied lemon zest. 6. Spread a layer of ganache on the jaconde.
7. Place a sheet of jaconde on top of the buttercream and soak
with coffee syrup.
8. Spread a layer of coffee butter cream on the jaconde.
Lemon Mousseline 9. Refrigerate the assembled cake for 2 hours to set the butter-
cream and ganache.
10. Glaze the top of the cake with the chocolate mirror glaze and
refrigerate for 5 minutes to set the glaze.
11. Cut into 1.25 × 1.5 in. (2.5 × 3.8 cm) rectangles.
Portions: 45
Yield description: Forty-five 1-in. (2.5-cm) spheres

Lemon Curd, page 139 8.1 oz 230 g
Butter 7.8 oz 220 g
Procedure
1. Cream butter on medium speed using a paddle attachment.

2. Slowly incorporate lemon curd.
3. Continue mixing until light and fluffy.
4. Pipe into 1-in. (2.5-cm) sphere mold and freeze.
Recipes 347
Coffee Syrup White Chocolate Pineapple
Yield: 1 lb 5 oz (600 g) Yield: Fifty portions at 1.75 in. (4.4 cm) dome
Portion size: 1 lb 5 oz (600 g) Portion size: 1.75-in. (4.4-cm) dome
Yield description: 1 portion at 1 lb 5 oz (600 g) Yield description: Fifty 1.75-in. (4.4-cm) domes
Ingredients U.S. Metric Components

Water 5.3 oz 150 g Hazelnut Dough, page 225
Sugar 5.3 oz 150 g Sous Vide Pineapple, page 349
Coffee Extract 10.6 oz 300 g White Chocolate Mousse, page 135
Colored White Chocolate Glaze, page 349
Jaconde, page 196
Procedure
1. Combine water and sugar.

2. Heat to dissolve, then cool. Procedure
3. Add coffee extract. 1. Roll hazelnut dough 1 ⁄8 in. (3 mm) thick, cut with a fluted cutter
4. Reserve for assembly. 1.75 in. (4.4 cm) and bake.
2. Drain sous vide pineapple.
3. Cut jaconde with a 1-in. (25-mm) round cutter.
4. Fill a 1.75-in. (4.4-cm) silicone dome mold 3 ⁄4 full with white
chocolate mousse, place a small amount of pineapple inside
Coffee Buttercream followed by a piece of the jaconde and freeze.
5. Unmold and glaze with colored white chocolate glaze, tinted
yellow.
Portions: 1

Swiss Buttercream 1 lb 5 oz 600 g
Coffee Extract 1.1 oz 30 g
Procedure
1. Combine buttercream and extract with a paddle on low speed.

Sous Vide Pineapple Colored White Chocolate Glaze


Pineapple, brunoise 7.1 oz 200 g Water 6.9 oz 195 g
Vanilla Bean, split and scraped 1 each 1 each Sweetened Condensed Milk 7.6 oz 215 g
Procedure Food Coloring As needed As needed
1. Combine water, sugar, and vanilla bean.

2. Cool completely; pour over pineapple in vacuum bag.
3. Seal bag at full vacuum and cook at 190°F (88°C) for 1 hour. Procedure
4. Cool and reserve in bag for assembly. 1. Combine water, sugar, and glucose; bring to a boil.
2. Add the sweetened condensed milk and gelatin.
3. Pour over white chocolate and emulsify.
4. Add coloring as needed.
5. Glaze at 86°F (30°C).
Recipes 349
Contemporary
Contemporary petits-fours contain more components than sec or glacé. They are assem-
bled with a minimum of three components: base, cream, and garnish. Cakes, cookie dough,
macaron, or chocolate are suitable bases for a contemporary petits-fours. The base of the
petits-fours is in place to facilitate transferring during production, providing both a textural
element and the design of the petits-fours. The most important role of the base is to provide a
way for the guest to pick up the pastry. In addition to a cookie base, baked items such as cake
or meringue may also be used.
The flavor of the petits four is introduced through the creams. Custards and creams can
be used much in the same way they are incorporated in an entremets in Chapter 8. Combing
stirred custard with a mousse will give the petits-fours different textures and flavors. To main-
tain the quality and moisture of the cream, a glaze or chocolate spray can be applied.
The last component is the garnish. The garnish needs to represent the flavors contained
inside the petits-fours. Products that contain nuts can be garnished with the nut contained in
the pastry. This conveys the flavor and also alerts the guest that have nut sensitivities that there
are nuts in the pastry. A light sugar twist or delicate chocolate garnishes provide a nice finish to
contemporary petits-fours.
Pastry chefs continue to develop new and innovative ways to present their petits-fours.
Verrines, petits-fours assembled in glasses, continue to be a popular item. The petits-fours is
assembled in a glass using creams, mousses, streusels, cakes, coulis, and even edible flowers.
The use of verrines allows for different textures, creams can have a reduced amount of g elatin
making the texture very soft and loose. The use of a clear container allows for creative layering
of the dessert, showing all the colors, textures and flavors of the desserts. While glass c ontainers
provide excellent carriers for verrines, there are many plastic glasses and plates available in dif-
ferent sizes, shapes, and colors to create new designs.
Recipes
Lime and White Chocolate Verrine
Yield: Thirty 2-oz (57-g) glasses Procedure

Portions: 30 1. Fill the glass with 10 g of lime gelée and refrigerate until set.
Portion size: 2-oz (57-g) glasses
2. Top the gelée with 10 g of white chocolate creamy and refrig-
Yield description: Thirty 2-oz (57-g) glasses erate until set.
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 to create 4 layers in the glass.
Components 4. Using a spoon apply the raspberry cloud.
5. Sprinkle with candied sunflower seeds.
Lime Gelée, page 352
White Chocolate Creamy, page 352
Raspberry Cloud, page 89
Candied Sunflower Seeds, page 353
FIGURE 11.6 Lime and White Chocolate Verrine
Recipes 351
Lime Gelée White Chocolate Creamy

Yield description: 1 portion 1 lb 7 oz (656 g) Yield description: 1 portion at 1 lb 8 oz (690 g)

Lime Juice 5.8 oz 165 g Milk 6.5 oz 185 g
Sugar 4.6 oz 130 g Heavy Cream 6.5 oz 185 g
Water 12.7 oz 360 g Egg Yolks 2.6 oz 75 g
Vanilla Bean Powder 0.04 oz 1g White Chocolate, chopped fine 8.6 oz 245 g
Gelatin Sheets, bloomed 5 each 5 each Gelatin Sheets, bloomed 2.25 each 2.25 each
Procedure Procedure
1. Combine water, sugar, and vanilla bean powder in saucepan. 1. Prepare a crème anglaise (page 143) with the milk, heavy
2. Heat to dissolve sugar. cream, and egg yolks.
3. Remove from heat; add gelatin and lime juice, and strain 2. Add the crème anglaise to the white chocolate; emulsify.
through a chinois. 3. Next add the bloomed gelatin and strain through a chinois.
4. Reserve for assembly. 4. Reserve for assembly.
Candied Sunflower Seeds
Yield: 9 oz (238.5 g)
Portions: 1
Yield description: 1 portion at 9 oz (238.5 g)

Sugar 2.5 oz 70 g
Water 1.2 oz 35 g
Sunflower Seeds 5.8 oz 165 g
Cocoa Butter 0.1 oz 3.5 g
Procedure
1. Combine water and sugar in a saucepan and cook to

240°F (115°C).
2. Remove from the heat; add the sunflower seeds and stir with a
heat-resistant rubber spatula.
3. The sugar will crystallize, creating a thin coating of sugar on
the seeds.
4. Return the pan to a medium-high heat; continue stirring the
seeds until the sugar caramelizes.
5. Stir in the cocoa butter.
6. Pour the sunflower seeds onto a silpat-lined sheet pan.
7. Allow seeds to cool completely; store in airtight container.
Recipes 353
Cherry Chocolate Verrine
Yield: Forty 2.5-oz (70-g) glasses

Portions: 40
Portion size: 2.5-oz (70-g) glasses
Yield description: Forty 2.5-oz (70-g) glasses
Components
Pectin Cherry Gelée, page 105
Buttermilk Panna Cotta, page 139
Chocolate Flourless Cake, page 356
Chocolate Streusel Base, page 232
Chantilly (Stabilized), page 251
Chocolate Meringue, page 356
Procedure
1. Prepare the pectin cherry gelée; place half of the mixture into
1
⁄4-in. (6-mm) sphere molds.
2. Cut the chocolate flourless cake with a 1.6-in. (4.2-cm) round
cutter.
3. Angle the glass; place five spheres of the pectin cherry gelée
and then fill with 0.9 oz (25 g) panna cotta; refrigerate.
4. Place the glass flat and fill the open area with the chocolate
streusel.
5. Top with the Chantilly and add some chocolate meringue.
FIGURE 11.7 Cherry Chocolate Verrine
Chocolate Flourless Cake Chocolate Meringue

Yield description: 1 half sheet pan Yield description: 1 portion at 10 oz (310 g)

Heavy Cream 2.1 oz 60 g Egg Whites 3.5 oz 100 g
Butter 8.5 oz 240 g Sugar #1 3.5 oz 100 g
Sugar 4.2 oz 120 g Cocoa Powder 0.7 oz 20 g
Chocolate 50% 4.2 oz 120 g Sugar #2 3.2 oz 90 g
Eggs 5.3 oz 150 g
Procedure
1. Sift second sugar and cocoa powder.

Procedure 2. Make a common meringue with the egg whites and first sugar.
1. Whip eggs and half the sugar on high speed for 10 minutes. 3. Fold the cocoa powder mixture into the meringue.
2. Combine heavy cream, butter, chocolate, remaining sugar, and 4. Pipe onto a parchment-lined sheet pan.
cocoa powder. 5. Bake at 212°F (100°C) until dry.
3. Melt over a double boiler.
4. Fold the whipped eggs into the melted chocolate mixture.
5. Spread onto a silpat-lined half sheet pan.
6. Bake at 350°F (177 °C) for 10 to 15 minutes.
Macaron Surprise
Yield: Forty 1.5-in. (3.8-cm) macaron surprise Procedure

Portions: 40 1. Prepare chocolate macaron and pipe to 1.75-in. (4.4-cm)
Portion size: 1.5-in. (3.8-cm) macaron surprise diameter.
Yield description: Forty 1.5-in. (3.8-cm) macaron surprise 2. Unmold the speculaas cream and spray with milk chocolate
spray to achieve a velvet texture.
3. Return the speculaas cream to the freezer for 10 minutes.
Components
4. Place the speculaas cream on the chocolate macaron.
Chocolate Macaron, page 314
5. Using a toothpick, dip the apple in the clear glaze.
Speculaas Cream, page 358
6. Place the apple on the speculaas cream.
Poached Apples Spheres, page 358
7. Top with the chocolate décor.
Milk Chocolate Spray, page 397
Chocolate Décor
FIGURE 11.8 Clockwise starting at top: White Chocolate and Raspberry Purse, Apricot Creme Fraiche, Fruit Tart, Macaron S
urprise,
Pistachio Crunch
Recipes 357
Speculaas Cream Sous Vide Poached Apples
Yield: 1 lb (475 g) Yield: 40 apple spheres

Portion size: 0.4 oz (11 g) Portion size: 0.8-in. (2.2-cm) spheres
Yield description: Forty 1.75-in. (4.4-cm) savarin molds Yield description: Forty 0.8-in. (2.2-cm) spheres

Heavy Cream 5.8 oz 165 g Granny Smith Apples, peeled 4 each 4 each
Milk 5.8 oz 165 g Water 15 oz 450 g
Baked Speculaas Cookies 2.6 oz 75 g Rum 1.7 oz 50 g
Brown Sugar 1.2 oz 35 g Sugar 4.2 oz 125 g
Egg Yolks 1.3 oz 38 g Vanilla Bean, split and scraped 1 each 1 each
Gelatin Sheets, bloomed 1.5 each 1.5 each Cinnamon Stick 1 each 1 each
Procedure
Procedure
1. Combine milk and heavy cream in a saucepan and scald.
1. Combine water, rum, sugar, vanilla bean, and cinnamon stick in
2. Remove from heat; add baked speculaas cookies (do not stir),
a saucepan, bring to a boil.
cover with plastic wrap, and steep for 15 minutes.
2. Cover and cool completely on an ice bath.
3. Strain the mixture through a chinois. Do not press the liquid out
of the cookies; this will make the cream gritty. 3. Use a 0.8-in. (2.2-cm) parisienne scoop to portion the Granny
Smith apples.
4. Some of the milk and cream will be lost in the process of steep-
ing in the cookies. Make up the difference with 50% cream and 4. Combine the apples and syrup in a vacuum bag and seal at a
50% milk to return the total weight of milk and cream to 10.8 oz full vacuum.
(330 g). 5. Cook in a thermal circulator at 185°F (85°C) for 90 minutes.
5. Make a crème anglaise (page 124) with infused milk and cream Test the doneness of the apples by gently squeezing them
mixture, brown sugar, and egg yolks. through the bag.
6. Add the bloomed gelatin and strain through a chinois. 6. Place the vacuum bag on an ice bath to cool.
7. Deposit the cream into 1.75-in. (4.4-cm) savarin molds and 7. Reserve for assembly.
freeze.
Fruit Tart Pistachio Crunch
Yield: Forty 1.9-in. (4.8-cm) tarts Yield: Thirty 1.5 in. (3.8 cm) pistachio crunch
Portion size: 1.9-in. (4.8-cm) tart Portion size: 1.5 in. (3.8 cm) pistachio crunch
Yield description: Forty 1.9-in. (4.8-cm) tarts Yield description: Thirty 1.5 in. (3.8 cm) pistachio crunch
Components Components
Pâte Sablée, page 246 Pistachio Crunch Base, page 360
Almond Cream, page 78 Pistachio Buttercream, page 360
Pastry Cream, page 140 Pistachio Crunch Florentine, page 361
Fresh Seasonal Fruit
Procedure
1. Using a star tip, pipe pistachio buttercream on the pistachio

Procedure crunch base.
1. Roll pâte sablée to 1 ⁄8 in. (3 mm) thick. 2. Place the pistachio crunch Florentine on top of the buttercream.
2. Line 1.9-in. (4.8-cm) tart shells and refrigerate.

3. Pipe a thin layer of almond cream in the shell.
5. After shells have cooled spread a thin layer of pastry cream on
top of the almond cream.
6. Arrange the fresh fruit.
7. Apply a thin layer of clear glaze to the fruit.
Recipes 359
Pistachio Crunch Base Pistachio Crunch Buttercream

Portion size: 1.25-in. (3.1-cm) cakes Portion size: 15 oz (450 g)
Yield description: Thirty 1.25-in. (3.1-cm) cakes Yield description: 1 portion at 15 oz (450 g)

Butter 3.5 oz 100 g Italian Buttercream 14.1 oz 400 g
Sugar 3.5 oz 120 g Pistachio Paste 1.8 oz 50 g
Eggs 2.5 oz 70 g
Procedure
Baking Powder 0.07 oz 2g
1. Soften buttercream in a mixer with a paddle.
Rum 0.2 oz 5g
2. Incorporate pistachio paste into buttercream.
Procedure
1. With the paddle attachment, cream butter, sugar, and

almond flour.
2. Add eggs in two additions, scraping between each addition.
3. Sift baking powder and all-purpose flour.
4. Add rum to mixer.
5. Add sifted ingredients, mix to combine.
6. Pipe into 1.25-in. (3.1-cm) round silicone molds.
7. Bake at 350°F (177 °C) for 8 to 10 minutes.
Pistachio Crunch Florentine White Chocolate and Raspberry
Mousse Purse
Yield: 8 oz (240 g)
Portions: 30
Yield: Fifty 1.4-in. (35-mm) cakes
Portion size: 1.25-in. (30-mm) rounds
Portions: 50
Yield description: Thirty 1.25-in. (30-mm) rounds
Portion size: 1.4-in. (35-mm) cake
Yield description: Fifty 1.4-in. (35-mm) cakes

Glucose 2.1 oz 60 g Components
Sacher Biscuit, page 195
Pistachios, chopped 2.1 oz 60 g
White Chocolate Mousse
Butter 2.1 oz 60 g (Pâte à Bombe), page 135
Fresh Raspberries
Raspberry Marmalade
Dark Chocolate Wrap, page 362
Procedure
Cocoa Powder
1. Warm glucose in a saucepan over a medium heat, do not cook.
2. Add brown sugar, pistachios, and butter; heat until sugar
dissolves.
3. Pour Florentine onto a sheet of parchment paper. Procedure
4. Roll between two pieces of parchment paper. 1. Cut the sheet of sacher biscuit in half; place one piece into a
5. Refrigerate on a sheet pan, this will facilitate removing the top half sheet pan.
parchment. 2. Spread a thin layer of raspberry marmalade on the cake.
6. Bake on double sheet pans at 350°F (177°C) until Florentine is 3. Place the raspberries on the cake.
golden brown.
4. Prepare the white chocolate mousse; spread to fill the pan.
7. Cut 1.25-in. (30-mm) circles from the Florentine.
5. Place the remaining piece of sacher biscuit on top of the
8. Reserve for assembly. mousse and freeze.
6. Cut the frozen cake into 1.4-in. (35-mm) rounds.
7. Wrap in Dark Chocolate Wrap.
8. Lightly dust with cocoa powder.
Recipes 361
Dark Chocolate Wrap Apricot Crème Fraiche
Yield: 9.1 oz (275 g) Yield: Forty 1.3-in. (35-mm) apricot crème fraiche
Portion size: sheet pan Portion size: 1.3 in. (35 mm)
Yield description: 2 sheet pans Yield description: 40 portions at 1.3 in. (35 mm)
Ingredients U.S. Metric Components

Dark Chocolate 58% 1 lb 1 oz 500 g Apricot Caramel, page 363
Vegetable Oil 1.8 oz 50 g Pâte Sablée, page 246
Pain de Genes, page 194
Apricot Halves
Procedure
Green Cocoa Butter
1. Combine chocolate and vegetable oil. Color
2. Melt over a double boiler to 110°F (43°C). White Chocolate
3. Warm a sheet pan to 110°F (43°C). Italian Meringue, page 253
4. Spread the chocolate mixture onto the back of the sheet pan,
refrigerate until set.
5. Remove the sheet pan from the refrigerator and allow to warm.
Procedure
6. Once the sheet pan warms to room temperature, use a scraper
to test that the chocolate will roll up off the pan. 1. Prepare apricot caramel and freeze.
7. After the test strip is successful, scrape a strip of chocolate and 2. Roll pâte sablée to 1 ⁄ 8 in. (3 mm), cut into 1.3-in. (35-mm)
wrap the cake. rounds, and bake.
8. Using your finger, pinch the top of the chocolate. 3. Place apricot caramel on layer of pain de genes.
9. Once the cakes are wrapped, return to the refrigerator. 4. Cut apricot with a 1.1-in. (3-cm) round cutter.
5. Brush a piece of acetate with green cocoa butter.
6. After the cocoa butter has set, spread a thin layer of tempered
white chocolate on the acetate.
7. Wrap the bottom of the assembled apricot stack.
8. Allow chocolate to crystallize; remove the acetate band.
9. Place the wrapped apricot stack on the pâte sablée.
10. Pipe Italian meringue and torch.
11. Top the creméux with a slice of the apricot.
Apricot Caramel
Yield: 1 lb 13 oz (1235 g)
Portions: 1
Portion size: Half hotel pan
Yield description: 1 half hotel pan

Apricots, IQF 1 lb 8 oz 700 g
Pectin NH 0.8 oz 23 g
Water 1.2 oz 35 g
Sugar 3.7 oz 105 g
Note: Apples, pear, pineapple, or peaches can be used in place of

the apricots.
Procedure
1. Mix the pectin and sugar.

2. Place the apricots in a half hotel pan.
3. Sprinkle the pectin mixture over the fruit and toss lightly.
4. Pour the water over the fruit.
5. Cover the top with a silpat.
7. Once cooled, freeze.
Recipes 363
Petits-Fours Presentations
Petits-fours presentations can be very attractive, whether they are a small amenity or a large
buffet table. The presentation can vary from a pre-dessert, room service amenity, passed, or
buffet presentation. There are seven guidelines to help develop a petits-fours buffet.
In most cases the guests specify that they would like a buffet table without specifying the
items. Be sure to incorporate a wide variety of flavors—the buffet should have something for every-
one. Chocolate items are always popular, but not everyone likes chocolate—and the same holds
true for fruit. Consider all options when developing a selection for petits-fours presentations.
Petits-Fours Guidelines
1. Size: The proper size of the petits-fours should be 1 to 2 bites. The assortment presented
on the buffet should all be in the same range.
2. Shape: Using contrasting and complimentary shapes will help to create a visually appeal-
ing buffet. Molds limit the shapes that can be made, based on what is available in the pastry
shop. Full sheet pan assembled cakes can be cut into squares, rectangles, triangles, paral-
lelograms, or trapezoids. Avoid cutting these sheets with round cutters to minimize waste.
3. Flavor: Due to the small size of the petits-fours, intense flavor is needed. Incorporating
too many flavors will muddle the flavors, making them difficult to distinguish. Try to avoid
duplicating flavors on the buffet.
4. Color: Naturally occurring colors can make the buffet very attractive. Purées, marmalades,
glazes, and chocolate can produce attractive colors. If possible, avoid adding large quan-
tities of food coloring.
5. Garnish: The garnish helps to set petits-fours apart from simple pastries. Garnishes made
from chocolate, fresh fruit, chopped nuts, or candied fruit can add interest to the pastries.
6. Precision: When presented to the guest, the petits-fours are lined up. When assembling the
individual pastries, focus on precision to ensure they are the same. Accuracy during every
step of the process—assembling, garnish placement, and positioning on the platters—is
extremely important to the final presentation.
7. Quantity: Calculating how many pieces to make can be challenging. Overproduce and
money is lost, underproduce and a customer will be unhappy. For a standard pastry buffet
served after a full meal, three to four pieces per person is adequate. A reception setting
that serves hors d’oeurves will require more pieces per person. The lighter meal eaten at
a reception requires five to six pieces per person. This may not seem like enough food, but
this is based on the average number of pieces eaten.
Pre-Dessert
Pre-desserts continue to gain popularity in fine dining restaurants and beyond. Just as the chef
sends out a complimentary amuse bouche, the pastry chef sends out a complimentary pastry
before dessert arrives. This sampling begins the transition from savory to sweet courses and
allows the pastry chef to show their creativity. The pre-dessert can be a way to experiment with
new flavors and techniques. It gives the pastry chef the opportunity to research what appeals
to the customer and insight into what may be successful on future menus. Pre-desserts can be
more complex and include frozen components due to being served à la minute.
Room Service Amenity

Room service amenities are provided to very important guests, repeat guests, or groups attend-
ing a conference at a resort or hotel. In some cases, the petits-fours amenity will be served with
FIGURE 11.9 Room service amenity platter with sugar showpiece
a chocolate or sugar showpiece themed to the event. The amenity is placed in the room prior
to the guest arriving. When selecting petits-fours for room service, amenities choose those that
will not require refrigeration and will not decrease in quality rapidly. Petits-fours sec, choco-
lates, and confections are excellent options.
Passed Presentation
Smaller receptions may request that the food is passed, or presented butler style. In this for-
mat, servers carry trays with petits-fours and present them to the guest. Passing food offers
a personal touch to the service, as the server stops with the petits-fours they provide a brief
description of the item. It is best to arrange items for passed presentation with one or two dif-
ferent petits-fours per tray. This simplifies the refilling process and allows the server to move
throughout the room. More than two items results in slowing down the server’s ability to move
through the room.
Buffet Presentation
The most common presentation method of petits-fours is a buffet. Buffet presentations can be
elaborate, including different elevations, props, fresh flowers, or large showpieces. Regardless
of all the decorations on the table the petits-fours are the true star of the show. The petits-
fours can be presented on trays, plates, tiles, mirrors, or large silver platters. Large platters
and mirrors give the petits-fours a dramatic presentation. The pastries are carefully lined up
in straight rows or curves. Although this is a very attractive layout for the petits-fours, it is dif-
ficult to refill. Large serving platters can hold as many as 100 pieces, and it looks great at the
beginning of the reception. Toward the end of the event, the platter will start to look picked
over and somewhat messy. It is not possible to refill the platter, and is difficult to remove it dur-
ing the event because of the large size.
Smaller plates give the buffet the look of a pastry shop. Items are presented with one type
of pastry on a plate. The plates are worked on and around the elevations and props. The small
plates make it easy to refill the buffet and keep it clean, avoiding the picked-over look of the
larger platters.
FIGURE 11.10 Petits-fours platter
Key Terms
Petits-fours Petits-fours glacé Verrines
Pre-dessert Pouring fondant Passed presentation
Petits-fours sec Contemporary petits-fours

1. Identify the three categories of petits-fours and give an example 3. What are the three components of a contemporary petits-fours?
of each. 4. What will happen if pouring fondant is heated too high?
2. Design a menu for a buffet reception for 250 people. Create two 5. What is the benefit of creating a verrine?
petits-fours from each category and determine the correct num-
ber of pieces to produce.

CHAPTER 12
Chocolate
and Confections
The history of chocolate being used in beverages can be traced back more than 4,000 years.
It played an important part in religious ceremonies, and was even used as currency. As cocoa
beans traveled around the world, new production methods and techniques were created to
produce chocolate. World War II saw chocolate used by the United States as a way to boost
the energy of soldiers. Today, chocolate is an affordable luxury enjoyed by many. From mass-
produced chocolates to small artisan chocolatiers, there is a chocolate for everyone.
LEARNING OBJECTIVES

1. Prepare a variety of chocolates and confections.
2. Demonstrate how to temper milk, white, and dark chocolate using the tabling
and seeding methods.
3. Describe the process of manufacturing chocolate.
4. Explain what cocoa percentage represents.
5. Describe the differences between crystalline, noncrystalline, aerated, and jelly
confections.
Introduction to Chocolates and Confections

Chocolates and confections have increased in popularity in recent years. Oftentimes
they are served along with a petits fours buffet, offered as dessert after a meal, or sold in
chocolate shops.
Equipment
Chocolate Warmer
A chocolate warmer uses heat to melt chocolate slowly and evenly. A melter cannot temper
chocolate, but it can hold chocolate that has been melted to keep it fluid.
369
FIGURE 12.1 Chocolate melter (Credit: Photo courtesy of
Tomric Systems, Inc.)
Chocolate Tempering Machine

A chocolate tempering machine melts the chocolate and tempers the chocolate. There are two
types of tempering machines—one version batch tempers the chocolate and the other con-
tinually tempers. A batch-tempering machine tempers all the chocolate at once. Running this
machine for a long period of time will cause the chocolate to overcrystallize and become thick. A
continuous tempering machine remelts the chocolate as it enters the storage tank and then tem-
pers as needed. This reduces the possibility of overcrystallization and provides a fluid chocolate.
FIGURE 12.2 Chocolate tempering machine

(Credit: Photo courtesy of Tomric Systems, Inc.)
370 C H A PT E R 1 2 Chocolate and Confections

FIGURE 12.3 Chocolate enrober (Credit: Photo courtesy
of Tomric Systems, Inc.)
Chocolate Enrober
A chocolate enrober is used to coat bonbons in chocolate. The enrober is used along with a
tempering machine. Many tempering machine companies also distribute enrober systems that
connect to the tempering machine. A series of belts are used to coat the bottom and top of the
chocolate in a thin coating of chocolate.
Manufacturing Chocolate
Chocolate is an upscale product that travels a long distance before it is delivered to pastry
shop. The journey begins in the tropical regions, encompassing the areas 20 degrees to the
north and south of the equator. The warm climate, high humidity, and frequent rainfall pro-
duce the ideal growing environment for the cocoa tree. Because the cocoa trees are sensitive
to excessive sunlight and high winds, they are planted among larger trees to protect them. The
majority of cocoa beans originate in West Africa, South America, and Southeast Asia.
Several factors contribute to the flavor of the cocoa beans produced. The first factor is the
type of bean: Criollo, Forastero, and Trinitario. Just as we see with wine, the terroir, geography,
geology, and climate all affect the flavor. Just as important as where the cocoa beans are grown
and which type is grown, the manufacturing process will be used to develop the flavor of the
beans. Chocolate is made from a blend of cocoa beans, which helps to create a balanced flavor.
Beans are blended based on variety and the location of their place of origin.
Cocoa Bean Varieties
Percentage
Bean Flavor Origin of World Crop Characteristics
Criollo Caramel, nuts, South America 1% Rarest of cocoa
vanilla, and tobacco beans; very flavorful
Forastero Strong cocoa, bitter Africa, Ecuador, and Brazil 80% Good base bean
Trinitario Spicy, earthy, fruity Mexico and 15% Hybrid of Criollo and
South America Forastero; it is more
resistant to disease.
Manufacturing Chocolate 371

It can take as long as two to three years for the cocoa tree to produce blossoms. Once the
blossoms are pollinated, they will grow into cocoa pods—it can take as long as six months for
the pods to mature. The tropical climate allows the cocoa tree to produce pods year round.
Cocoa trees have the ability to produce cocoa pods for up to 30 years. Each pod contains
35–40 cocoa beans. This may seem like a lot, but it takes 200 cocoa beans to yield 1 pound of
chocolate. The process of transforming cocoa beans into chocolate takes seven steps.
Harvesting
When the cocoa pods are fully ripened they are harvested. The workers cut the pod from the
tree using a machete. They are then split, revealing the contents of cocoa beans and white pulp.
The beans and pulp are collected and transferred to the fermentation house.
Fermentation
The collected beans and pulp are placed in covered wood boxes for fermentation. Fermenta-
tion can last from 5 to 7 days depending on the bean. During this time, the beans are transferred
between the boxes every 24 to 36 hours. This prevents mold from forming on the beans and
ensures that the beans are fermented equally. Yeast and bacteria break down the white pulp
to the point it is almost completely dissolved. The dark brown color and flavor of the bean
is developed during the fermentation process. Too long of fermentation and the beans are
destroyed; too short and the flavor is not developed.
The fermentation process also prevents the beans from being able to germinate, essen-
tially killing the bean. Once fermentation is completed, the beans are dried, ceasing fermenta-
tion and preparing the beans for transportation to the manufacturer. About 75 percent of the
world’s cocoa production is processed in Europe and the United States, requiring the chocolate
to be shipped long distances. Drying the cocoa beans makes certain they will arrive to the man-
ufacturing facility in good condition.
Roasting
When the beans arrive at the factory, they are cleaned to remove any rocks or other debris.
Roasting the cocoa beans continues to develop the flavor—as many as 400 flavors can be
released at this time. The beans are roasted for 20 to 30 minutes at temperatures ranging from
212 to 284°F (100 to 140°C), depending on the type of bean.
Shelling and Winnowing

In the next step, the beans are shelled, removing the outer husk of the bean. The beans are
extremely fragile after roasting and are easily broken during the shelling process. To separate
the bean from the husk, air is blown into the mixture forcing the lighter husk material to sepa-
rate from the bean. This is known as winnowing. The broken bean pieces are now called cocoa
nibs. The nibs are further processed through a series of perforated screens to remove any addi-
tional husk.
Grinding, Blending, and Mixing

The nibs are then blended, combining different varieties of beans from different locations to
achieve the desired flavor profile of the final chocolate. The beans are then ground, and the
friction of grinding melts the cocoa butter. This unsweetened mass is known as chocolate liquor.

The liquor can now be processed in two different ways. In the production of dark chocolate,
sugar is added, or to produce milk chocolate, sugar, and milk solids are added. The chocolate is
then further refined to reduce the particle size.
In the second part of the process, the chocolate liquor is pressed under high pressure.
This removes the cocoa butter from the cocoa solids. The pressed solids can then be ground
into cocoa powder. In some manufacturing processes, all chocolate liquor is pressed to
remove the cocoa butter. The cocoa butter and cocoa solids are recombined during the man-
ufacturing process.
Conching
The chocolate is now ready for further refining in a conche. While in the conche, the chocolate
is ground into smaller particles by large stone rollers or mixing blades that stir the chocolate.
Conching changes the flavor and viscosity of the chocolate. At the beginning of the process the
chocolate has a doughlike consistency but by the end, the chocolate resembles a thick fluid.
The size of the solid particles is reduced with every pass through the conche, which helps to
coat the solid particle in cocoa butter, while at the same time improving the mouthfeel of the
final product by reducing the size. The conche continually agitates the chocolate as a result of
the friction from mixing temperatures can range from 120°F (49°C) for milk chocolate to 180°F
(82°C) for dark chocolate.
During this process the chocolate undergoes three phases. In the first phase, the mix
is dry and the agitation of the conche coats the dry particles in fat. Through the mixing
process, air is incorporated, removing unwanted acids developed during the fermentation
process and any remaining water that may have been present in the cocoa beans after roast-
ing. The second phase increases the speed of the conche, and coating of the solid parti-
cles in fat continues. In the third phase, additional cocoa butter and lecithin are added to
adjust the viscosity of the chocolate. The speed of the machine is reduced and the chocolate
begins to cool.
Tempering
Once conching is complete, the chocolate is tempered. Tempering is the process of heating
and cooling chocolate to develop the proper cocoa butter crystallization. Tempering gives
the chocolate its characteristic snap and sheen. Pages 345–349 will provide more detailed
information about tempering. After the chocolate is tempered and cooled completely, it is
packaged and ready for shipping.
Chocolate Percentages
In the United States, the FDA regulates the classifications of chocolate. The following table pro-
vides the minimum percentages of chocolate liquor and milk solids required to label a product
as chocolate. If a manufacturer uses the minimum percentages, the remaining quantity would
be sugar. Using the dark chocolate with 35% chocolate liquor as an example, the remaining
65% would be sugar. This would result in a very sweet product.
While chocolates can range from inexpensive to costly for a good quality, there is a higher
quality product called couverture. Couverture comes from the French word couvrir meaning
“to cover.” Couvertures are made with the highest-quality beans and are conched for longer
periods of time, decreasing the particle size even further. They also contain more cocoa
butter, 36% to 39%, creating a more fluid product that is ideal for producing a thin coating on
chocolates.
Chocolate Percentages 373

FDA Minimum Requirements for Chocolate
Type Minimum Chocolate Liquor Minimum Milk Solids

Dark, Semisweet 35% N/A
Milk 10% 12%
White 20% (cocoa butter only) 14%
Manufacturers identify their products with a name and a percentage on the label. There is
much confusion as to what this percentage actually represents. For this example we will look
at a 58% semisweet couverture. This percentage represents the amount of cocoa in the couver-
ture. Additional information on the label may include the amount of cocoa butter, which in this
case is 38% cocoa butter.
Chocolate liquor is made of cocoa butter and cocoa solids, so to determine the amount of
cocoa solids, perform the following:
Cocoa% – Cocoa butter% = Cocoa solids%

58% – 38% = 20%
The amount of sugar in the recipe is calculated by subtracting the 58% from 100%:
100% – Cocoa% = Sugar%

100% – 58% = 42%
We can determine that there is 42% sugar, and a minimal percentage of lecithin and vanilla
flavoring. Once all the numbers are calculated, it will give a better idea of the sweetness of the
chocolate. As the percentage of chocolate liquor increases, the percentage of sugar decreases.
The chocolate liquor percentage contains both cocoa solids and cocoa butter. These
ingredients are blended and adjusted based on the different chocolates. A chocolate that is
formulated for coating will have more cocoa butter to produce a chocolate with a lower viscos-
ity. Increasing the amount of cocoa solids will intensify the flavor of the chocolate, as well as
increase the viscosity.
The example in Figure 12.4 demonstrates cocoa percentages. All the cylinders contain
42% sugar. The first cylinder has chocolate that is made from only ground cocoa beans with
sugar added. A cocoa bean is 55% cocoa butter and 45% cocoa solids. The second cylinder is
made from adding cocoa butter to the chocolate liquor, resulting in a couverture that is ideal
100%
23.2%
90% 31.9% 40.6%
80%
70% Cocoa Butter
34.8%
60% 26.1% 17.4%
Cocoa Solids
50%
Sugar
40%
30% 42% 42% 42%
20%
10%
0%
1 2 3
FIGURE 12.4 Chocolate liquor percentage comparison of 58% chocolate

for coating. Moving on to the third cylinder, there are more cocoa solids; consequently, this
chocolate will have a strong flavor and be thicker than the first two. As you can see, these are
completely different products that can all be labeled as a 58% chocolate.
There is another variable at work as well. The percentage and manufacturer’s label pro-
vide insight into what the chocolate is suited for. The other variable that needs to be exam-
ined is the origin of the bean and type of bean. A 58% chocolate with the same percentage of
cocoa butter and cocoa solids made by different manufacturers will taste completely different.
One may have a fruity flavor while the other may have a strong chocolate flavor. The blend of
beans and manufacturing process will change the flavor of the final chocolate. It is important
to remember which chocolate is used when developing recipes and note this on the recipe. This
will ensure the consistency of the final products. There are all-purpose chocolates that can be
used to flavor mousses or enrobe candies. It is not necessary to have 15 different chocolates in
the pastry shop.
Tempering Chocolate
Cocoa butter is what gives chocolate its shine and characteristic snap when eaten. It is a
polymorphic fat, meaning that the fat can form many different crystals. There are six differ-
ent crystals the cocoa butter can form: four are unstable and two are stable. Unstable crystals
produce chocolate that blooms, has a crumbly texture, and melts easily when handled.
Fat bloom occurs when improperly tempered cocoa butter begins to crystallize, producing
white streaks in the chocolate. Stable crystals produce a chocolate with sheen, snap, and
strong contraction when molding.
Cocoa Butter Crystal Characteristics
Crystal Melting Point Characteristic

Unstable I 63°F (17°C) Soft, crumbly, melts too easily
II 70°F (21°C) Soft, crumbly, melts too easily
III 79°F (26°C) Firm, poor snap, melts too easily
IV 82°F (28°C) Firm, good snap, melts too easily
Stable V 93°F (34°C) Glossy, firm, best snap, melts near body temperature
98.6°F (37°C)
VI 97°F (36°C) Hard, takes weeks to form
Through the process of tempering, the pastry chef cools and stirs the chocolate, encour-
aging the growth of stable cocoa butter crystals. Tempering consists of the three components:
time, temperature, and agitation. When properly tempered, cocoa butter crystallization occurs
quickly. In its stable forms the tempered cocoa butter attracts the remaining crystals to quickly
form solid tempered chocolate. Chocolate that is not tempered properly takes too long to crys-
tallize. This causes the chocolate to become streaky and develop a white haze as the cocoa
butter forms the unstable crystals.
Temperature is critical. Stable crystals form when the chocolate is cooled to below 82°F
(27.7°C). This can be achieved through tabling or seeding—both will be discussed in detail in
the following section. If the chocolate were left alone on a table and allowed to cool, stable
crystals would have formed. But still there would not be enough: This is when agitation comes
into play. The stirring of the chocolate causes the highly attractive stable crystals to attract
more crystals. This creates a reaction of more stabile crystals forming quickly, which causes
the chocolate to set faster. Too much agitation can cause the chocolate to over crystallize.

FIGURE 12.5 Properly tempered dark chocolate (left); improperly tempered bloomed chocolate (right)
When working with chocolate for a long period of time, it may thicken even when held at the
proper temperature. Adding additional melted chocolate to the tempered chocolate, or melting
and tempering again can correct this.
Improperly stored chocolate can also develop sugar bloom, which occurs when mois-
ture is absorbed by the chocolate. High humidity forms condensation on the exterior of the
chocolate and pulls the sugar to the surface. As the water evaporates, the sugar crystallizes
leaving a white haze on the surface. Storing chocolate in the refrigerator or freezer will cause
sugar bloom. It is best to store chocolate tightly wrapped at 70°F (21°C) to reduce the chances
of sugar bloom.
Soft, dull, untempered chocolate Hard, shiny, tempered chocolate
FIGURE 12.6 Improper cocoa butter crystallization (left); properly aligned cocoa butter crystals (right)
Tempering Methods
There are two methods of tempering: tabling and seeding. The chocolate in the tabling method
is spread on a marble surface and cooled to the desired temperature. The seeding method
adds chopped chocolate into the melted chocolate to decrease the temperature. Both achieve
the same results so the decision of which method to use is based on personal preference.

Melting
Regardless of which method is used, the work area and all equipment must be clean and dry.
The smallest amount of water can cause the chocolate to seize. Seizing occurs when water is
absorbed by sugar in the chocolate. This creates a syrup that then traps the cocoa solids. Once
there is water in the chocolate, it cannot be removed.
There are three ways to melt chocolate: in a chocolate melter, over a double boiler, or in
a microwave. It is best to melt the chocolate slowly, overnight in a chocolate melter. To fully
melt all the cocoa butter crystals, a temperature of 115°F (45°C) for 12 hours is necessary and
will ensure a better temper. When using a double boiler, the heat source should be on a low
setting to prevent burning and steam from getting into the chocolate. A double boiler is an
excellent conductor of heat and can easily burn the chocolate. The steam produced from exces-
sive heat will travel up and over the sides of the bowl and then get trapped in the chocolate.
A microwave is an excellent way to melt smaller quantities of chocolate. Reduce the power to
50% and melt for no longer than 15 to 20 seconds. The microwave heats from the inside out,
so the chocolate must be removed and stirred. Not stirring the chocolate may cause the
center to overheat and burn.
Once the chocolate is fully melted, the tempering process can be started. In order for the
chocolate to properly crystalize, it must be cooled using the tabling or seeding methods. A por-
tion of the chocolate is then cooled to 80 to 82°F (27 to 28°C), and rewarmed to the proper
working temperature depending on the chocolate being used. The following table shows tem-
perature ranges for dark, milk, and white chocolate.
Tabling Method
Equipment needed: Offset pallet knife, 5-in. metal scraper, thermometer, heat gun, marble, and
rubber spatula:
1. Pour two-thirds of the melted chocolate on the marble.

2. Using the offset pallet knife spread the chocolate.
3. Push the chocolate back toward the center, make sure to work the chocolate back into one
mound and clean off tools by scraping against each other when working. Chocolate left on
the marble or tools can harden and create lumps in the tempered chocolate.
Melt 45°C (113°F)

Final temperature 31–32°C (88–90°F)
Cool 28–29°C (82–84°F)

Dark Chocolate
Melt 45°C (113°F)

Cool 27–28°C (81–82°F)

Milk Chocolate
Melt 45°C (113°F)

Cool 26–27°C (79–81°F)

White Chocolate
FIGURE 12.7 Tempering curve

4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 until the chocolate appears thickened.
5. Scrape the chocolate from the marble back into the bowl.
6. Quickly stir the chocolate and check the temperature.
7. If the temperature is too high, return some of the chocolate to the marble and repeat steps
2 through 6, until the correct temperature is reached.
8. If the temperature is below the chocolate’s working temperature, use a heat gun on low
and warm the chocolate.
9. Use a small piece of parchment paper to test the temper of the chocolate. The test strip
should set within two minutes. The chocolate should set without showing any signs of
streaking.
10. If this does not produce a clean test, check the temperature again. If the temperature is
correct, vigorously stir the chocolate for 30 seconds and test again.
FIGURE 12.8a–d
1. Pouring chocolate on marble 2. Spreading chocolate with pallet knife
3. Using scraper to work chocolate into center 4. Checking temperature

Seeding Method
Equipment needed: Rubber spatula, thermometer, and immersion blender:
1. Prepare seeding chocolate by chopping in a food processor. It will take about 25% of the
weight of the chocolate to be tempered in seed. If you are tempering 4 lb, you will need
1 lb of seed. Note: Seeding chocolate must be tempered.
2. Add seed to the melted chocolate until the temperature reaches 95°F (35°C). There should
still be seed that has not melted. This indicates that stable cocoa butter crystals are
present that will seed the melted chocolate.
3. Use an immersion blender to remove any small pieces of unmelted seed. Be sure to keep
the immersion blender completely submerged in the chocolate to avoid incorporating any
air. If the chocolate is too cool when using the immersion blender the chocolate will over
crystallize quickly and become very thick. This will make it difficult to work with.
4. Using a small piece of parchment paper or metal scraper, test the temper of the chocolate.
The test strip should set within two minutes. The chocolate should set without showing
any signs of streaking.
5. If this does not produce a clean test, check the temperature again. If the temperature is
correct, vigorously stir the chocolate for 30 seconds and test again.
Chocolates
The term chocolates is often used to refer to various chocolate products such as bonbons and
truffles. Bonbon, translated from French to English, means “good good” and can refer to any
candy that is coated in chocolate. Bonbons can be filled with a wide assortment of fillings,
including ganache, marshmallow, buttercream, fruit creams, caramels, and nougat. They can
be flavored with fruits, nuts, or liqueurs. Truffles are often hand-rolled and are filled with cream
ganache or butter ganache.
When making chocolates, the formula can have as few as three ingredients: whipping
cream, chocolate, and flavoring. The ingredients are the “stars” of these items. High-quality
ingredients combined with proper technique will ensure the smoothness and flavor of the
chocolates come through.
Ingredients
Chocolate
Chocolate is the main ingredient in ganache. It is not only used to flavor—it provides the texture
and the firmness of the ganache. The use of couverture for ganache is recommended, due to
the flavor and higher content of cocoa butter. Chocolates used in the production of ganache are
selected based on the flavor profile and cocoa percentage. The flavor of the couverture should
complement the other flavors used in assembling the ganache. Formulas are balanced based
on these two factors. If a change in chocolate is necessary, adjustments may need to made to
the liquids in the recipe.
Cream
The cream used for ganache should be 35% Whipping Cream. Cream is the primary source of
water in the ganache. The water functions as a buffer in the ganache, dispersing the fat. This
prevents the ganache from breaking. Fat found in the cream helps to soften the texture of the
ganache. Higher-fat creams will not only produce a softer ganache—the increased fat can make
the ganache unstable and more susceptible to breaking.
Chocolates 379
Sweeteners
Sweeteners give the ganache more than sweetness. They can prevent crystallization, soften
ganache, and caramelize. The smooth texture of the ganache is also improved with the use of
sweeteners.
Sweeteners
Type of Sweetener Origin Function

Granulated Sugar Sugar beets or sugar cane Most common sweetener used
Flavor and color when caramelized
Glucose Corn, potato, or wheat Retains moisture

Prevents crystallization
Invert Sugar Sugar heated with an acid Prevents crystallization

Smoother ganache
Sorbitol (Sugar Alcohol) Apples, pears, and berries Emulsifier

Sugar replacer
Butter
Butter is used in ganache to stabilize the emulsion. Incorporating butter into the ganache will
soften the fat of the cocoa butter and reduce the melting temperature. Recipes that include
purée, liquor, or other water-based flavorings employ butter to replace the fat for these ingre-
dients. When adding a water-based flavoring to a ganache, incorporate half the weight of the
flavoring in butter.
Butter as a product is an emulsion. Butter becomes soft at room temperature and when
heated it separates. When using butter in a ganache, it is critical that the butter does not
become overheated. To avoid overheating, the butter is added after the other ingredients have
been combined and cooled.
Ganache
Ganache was discussed briefly in Chapter 6 to be used for a base in chocolate mousse. The
production of ganache for chocolates is more involved, with different ratios and numbers of
ingredients. There are two types of ganache used as fillings: cream and butter. Either of these
can be used in molded, enrobed, slabbed, and piped productions.
Cream Ganache
Cream ganache is a fat-in-water emulsion that contains whipping cream, chocolate, and fla-
vorings, with a shelf life of 3 weeks. This is the ganache most often used to fill bonbons in the
United States.
Cream Ganache Method

1. Place chocolate in a food processor and grind to small pieces. Be careful to not process too
long to avoid melting the chocolate.

2. Place whipping cream in a heavy-bottom saucepan and heat to just below a boil. Boiling
the cream will reduce the water in the cream.
3. Pour the hot cream over the chopped chocolate and allow it to sit for 1 to 2 minutes. This
melts the chocolate while the cream cools. The ideal temperature for mixing is 90 to 110°F
(32 to 44°C).
4. Begin stirring the mixture in the center to create the emulsion. Once the center has come
together, start to widen the stirring motion to the edges of the bowl. Stirring the mixture
too quickly will incorporate air into the ganache; stir slowly to avoid this. Air bubbles facil-
itate the growth of bacteria.
5. Allow the ganache to cool to 92°F (33°C); add the softened butter and mix slowly to
incorporate.
6. Use an immersion blender to finish the ganache. Place the blade of the immersion
blender at the bottom of the container to avoid incorporating any air. Move the blender
in the ganache to mix easily. This can also be done in a measuring pitcher to reduce
incorporating air.
FIGURE 12.9a–b
1. The beginning of the emulsion 2. The properly emulsified ganache
Ganache 381
Butter Ganache
Butter ganache is a water-in-fat emulsion that contains butter and chocolate and is typically
flavored with liquor. Compared to cream ganache, the butter ganache will crystallize and firm
faster, allowing dipping within 30 minutes of being prepared. The final texture will be firmer
and have a longer shelf life of 6 to 8 weeks.
Butter Ganache Method

1. Temper chocolate and rewarm to make sure it is at the maximum working temperature.
Dark chocolate 90°F (32°C), white, and milk 88°F (31°C).
2. In another bowl, use a rubber spatula to mix the softened butter at 86°F (30°C).
3. Fold in the tempered chocolate; the temperature of the ingredients makes it easy to fold
them together before the chocolate sets.
4. Add the liquor and stir to combine.
5. Mix ganache with an immersion blender.
Molded Ganache
Molds allow the pastry chef to create bonbons with unique shapes, colors, and fillings. Color can
be added in the form of sprayed colored cocoa butters, edible luster dusts or a brush of white
chocolate on a dark-shelled bonbon. The process for applying color is described in Chapter 13,
page 385. Molded bonbons are easily produced in large quantities as long as molds are avail-
able. The shell provides a way to retain softer fillings such as Pistachio Crunch Buttercream
(page 332) or softer-setting ganache.
Polycarbonate chocolate molds are available from a wide variety of suppliers. While molded
chocolates are easy to mass produce, there is a high cost associated with the molds. Taking
care of these molds is important to their longevity. Washing should not be needed if the molds
are used properly. If washing is necessary, use hot soapy water and a clean soft cloth. Never
use abrasive scrubbing pads or paper towel—this will cause scratches in the mold, reducing the
shine of the final chocolates. Molds that have been used retain a small amount of cocoa butter in
them and they are seasoned much like a cast iron skillet is with fat; washing removes this coat-
ing. After washing and between uses, the molds should be buffed with cotton or cheesecloth.
FIGURE 12.10 Assorted molded bonbons

Molding Method
Equipment needed: Offset pallet knife, 8-in. metal scraper, parchment paper, ladle, plastic
acetate sheet, rolling pin:
1. Fill the mold with tempered chocolate. Use an offset pallet knife to spread the chocolate,
be sure to fill all the molds.
2. Use the metal scraper to remove excess chocolate.
3. Tap the side of the mold with the plastic handle of the scraper; this will remove any bub-
bles from the mold.
4. Turn the mold; pour out the extra chocolate. Tap the mold with the plastic handle of
the scraper.
5. With the scraper, remove any excess chocolate.
FIGURE 12.11a–e Bonbon filling procedure:
Filling bonbon mold with chocolate (step 1) Emptying the chocolate from the Scraping the bottom of the mold (step 6)
mold (step 4)
Filling the mold (step 8) Sealing the mold and rolling with rolling pin
(step 11)
Ganache 383
6. Place a piece of parchment paper on a flat work surface and place the mold upside down,
allowing the excess chocolate in the mold to drain out. Before the chocolate sets, remove
the mold from the paper. Scrape again if necessary.
7. While the chocolate is crystallizing in the mold, prepare the filling.
8. When the ganache has cooled to 86°F (30°C), fill the molds using a disposable pastry bag.
Do not fill the mold to the top; leave a gap of 1⁄8 in. (3 mm) for capping.
9. Allow the ganache to crystallize at room temperature. This may take up to 24 hours.
10. Spread a thin layer of tempered chocolate over the molds, making sure all remaining space
is filled. Scrape off excess chocolate.
11. Place a sheet of parchment paper or acetate sheet on the mold and smooth with rolling
pin or bench scraper.
12. Allow the chocolate to crystallize completely. If necessary, place the molds in the refriger-
ator for 15 minutes to release the chocolate from the mold.
Enrobed Ganache
Coating a bonbon filling in couverture is known as enrobing. The fillings for enrobed bonbons
need to be firmer to stand up to the dipping process. In this process, the ganache (or other
filling) is made prior to dipping—in some cases, as much as 24 hours earlier. This gives the
ganache sufficient time to crystallize. Crystallization of the ganache is necessary before d
ipping.
Ganache may be shaped by using the slabbed, piped, or hand-rolled techniques.
Slab Ganache
Slab ganache is poured out into a metal frame and spread to ensure an even thickness. The
ganache is then allowed to crystallize. The length of time it takes the ganache to crystallize
is dependent on the temperature of the room. In a warmer room it will take longer; a cooler
room will speed up crystallization. Placing the ganache in the cooler or freezer is not recom-
mended. While this may make the ganache firm faster, it will quickly soften when returned to
room temperature.
On the second day, spread a thin base coat of tempered chocolate on the ganache. The
purpose of the base coat is to allow the ganache to easily be moved and dipped. When hand
dipping, the thin layer of chocolate prevents the dipping fork from becoming stuck in the
soft ganache. After the base layer has crystallized, the ganache is ready to be portioned.
Smaller production facilities will use a ruler and knife to cut the ganache to the correct size.
The final dipped weight of a bonbon should be 0.5 oz (14 g). Larger production facilities will
use a guitar. A guitar is a machine that quickly portions slabs of ganache into equal sizes
using metal wire. After cutting, space the ganache apart letting the cut edges dry slightly to
ease handling.
Piped Ganache
Piping ganache enables the pastry chef to create different shapes without the need of costly
molds. When making the slabbed ganache, a base was added to prevent the dipping fork
from becoming stuck in the ganache. Piped ganache has the same requirement. Tempered
chocolate is spread in a thin layer on acetate and cut with a round cutter or knife into the shape
the ganache will be piped. Once the chocolate base has crystallized fully, the prepared ganache
is piped into the desired shape and allowed to dry slightly before dipping.

FIGURE 12.12 Piping butter ganache on the disk center
Dipping Method for Enrobing Slabbed and Piped Fillings

The cut or piped ganache is ready to dip after it has had some time to crystallize. Crystallizing
allows the ganache to maintain its shape while being handled. Couverture should always be
used for enrobing. This will ensure a thin shell:
1. Set up a dipping station. Working left to right, place the undipped center to the left. Place
the bowl of tempered couverture in the center, and on the right, place a silpat-lined sheet
pan for the finished bonbon. If left-handed, place the undipped centers on the right and
the finished product on the left.
Ganache 385
FIGURE 12.13a–e Hand-dipping procedure:
Placing ganache in tempered chocolate Coating the ganache in chocolate (step 3) Tapping to remove excess chocolate (step 4)
(step 2)
Cleaning the bottom of the chocolate on the Placing onto a silpat (step 6)
bowl (step 5)
2. Place ganache in the tempered couverture.

3. Place the dipping fork under the ganache. Leave ¼ of the ganache off the fork; coat the
ganache completely in couverture. This will make it easier to slide the dipped piece off the
fork and prevent it from falling off.
4. Using an up-and-down motion, lift the ganache out of the couverture. This up-and-down
tapping motion helps to remove excess chocolate. With each tap, the dipped center should
be removed slightly higher. This should be done 3 to 4 times per piece.

5. Slide the fork along the rim of the bowl to remove excess couverture. This excess couver-
ture will begin to coat the edge of the bowl, and it makes it difficult to keep lumps out of the
couverture. To prevent this, attach a thin wire at the top of the bowl to clean the bottom
of the chocolates. The small surface area of the wire will prevent excess chocolate from
building up.
6. Transfer the dipped bonbon to the silpat-lined tray. Touch the front of the bonbon on the
tray and carefully slide the fork out.
7. Continue this process until all the pieces are dipped, being careful to monitor the temper-
ature of the couverture while dipping.
Hand-Rolled Ganache
Hand-rolled ganache can be done in one of two ways. In the first method, the ganache is placed
in a hotel pan overnight. When the ganache has crystallized, use a scoop to portion the ganache
and roll it by hand into spheres. In the second method, the ganache is piped and then rolled.
Both of these methods require the ganache to be crystallized before portioning. Hand-rolled
ganache does not require a base before enrobing.
Enrobing Hand-Rolled Filling Method

Hand-rolling is a fast and easy way to enrobe ganache. Often, hand-rolled ganache is referred to
as a truffle. The look of the chocolate truffle is similar to that of the black truffles used in savory
applications:
1. Set up a dipping station. Working left to right, place the undipped center to the left. Place
the bowl of tempered couverture in the center, and on the right, place a silpat-lined sheet
pan for the finished bonbon. If left handed, place the undipped centers on the right and the
finished product on the left.
2. Wear gloves. Using two fingers on your right hand spread a small amount of chocolate in
the center of your left hand.
3. Take one of the rolled centers and place it in your left hand. Carefully roll the ganache in
the chocolate. Maintain the shape and be sure to coat the entire piece. This will serve as a
base coat.
4. After the base coat has crystallized, apply another layer of chocolate. This layer can be
slightly thicker than the first.
5. Once the pieces are coated, the truffle can be rolled in cocoa powder, powdered sugar,
toasted chopped nuts or chocolate shavings. This must be done immediately after rolling in
chocolate to make sure the coating sticks.
Ganache 387
Chocolate Recipes
Pistachio Cinnamon Ganache Passion Fruit Bonbon

Portions: 90 pieces Portions: 50 pieces
Yield description: 90 pieces at 0.3 oz (8.5 g) Yield description: 50 pieces at 0.5 oz (14 g)

Heavy Cream 11.3 oz 320 g Passion Fruit Purée 6 oz 170 g
Trimoline 1.3 oz 36 g Glucose 0.9 oz 25 g
Pistachio Paste 3.2 oz 90 g Butter 2.5 oz 70 g
Ground Cinnamon 0.14 oz 4g White Chocolate 14.6 oz 415 g
White Chocolate 1 lb 7.6 oz 670 g Cointreau 1.1 oz 30 g
Butter, room 5.3 oz 150 g
temperature
Procedure
1. Line bonbon mold with tempered white chocolate.

Procedure
2. Combine purée, glucose and butter, bring to a boil.
1. Combine ground cinnamon and pistachio paste.
3. Pour over white chocolate to form a ganache.
2. Place white chocolate in a bowl over a double boiler and
4. Cool mixture to 95°F (35 C).
melt halfway.
5. Add Cointreau and emulsify with immersion blender.
3. Bring heavy cream and Trimoline to a boil.
6. When mixture has cooled to 82°F (28 C), pipe into molds.
4. Pour cream mixture over white chocolate; emulsify.
7. Allow passion fruit ganache to crystallize for 12 hours.
5. Add pistachio mixture to ganache.
8. Seal the molds with tempered white chocolate.
6. Cool to 86°F (30°C).
7. Add butter and emulsify with immersion blender.
8. Fill bonbon mold premolded in tempered white chocolate.
9. Allow ganache to crystallize for 12 hours.
10. Seal the molds with tempered white chocolate.

Orange Coriander Bonbon Orange Caramel Ganache

Portions: 65 pieces Portions: 65 portions
Yield description: 65 pieces at 0.5 oz (14 g) Yield description: 65 portions 0.3 oz (10 g)

Coriander Praline 8.8 oz 250 g Sugar 3.5 oz 100 g
Coriander Praline 12 oz 350 g Glucose 0.9 oz 25 g
Crunch
Orange Juice 6.3 oz 180 g
Orange Caramel 1 lb 7 oz 666 g
Orange Zest 0.04 oz 1g
Ganache
Milk Chocolate, 6.3 oz 180 g
finely chopped
Cocoa Butter, 1.8 oz 50 g
Procedure finely chopped
1. Line bonbon mold with tempered milk chocolate. Butter 1.8 oz 50 g
2. Prepare coriander praline. Grand Marnier 1.8 oz 50 g
3. Prepare coriander praline crunch. Sorbitol Liquid 1.1 oz 30 g
4. Prepare orange caramel ganache, fill mold two-thirds full

with ganache.
5. Top with coriander praline crunch. Procedure
6. Allow coriander praline crunch to crystallize for 12 hours. 1. Combine sugar and glucose, cook to a light caramel.
7. Seal the molds with tempered milk chocolate. 2. Deglaze with orange juice; add purée and sorbitol.
3. Pour over milk chocolate and cocoa butter, emulsify with
immersion blender.
4. Add butter and Grand Marnier.
5. Reserve for assembly at 77°F (25°C).
Chocolate Recipes 389

Coriander Praline Coriander Praline Crunch

Portions: 2.4 portions Portions: 85 portions
Yield description: 2.4 portions at 8.8 oz (250 g) Yield description: 85 portions at 0.14 oz (4 g)

Water 1.2 oz 35 g Coriander Praline, 8.8 oz 250 g
page 360
Sugar 6 oz 170 g
Milk Chocolate 1.1 oz 30 g
Glucose 2.3 oz 70 g
Salt 0.04 oz 1g
Feuilletine 0.9 oz 25 g
Whole Coriander 0.3 oz 9g
Hazelnuts, toasted 11.8 oz 335 g
Procedure
Procedure 1. Melt milk chocolate and cocoa butter; combine with coriander
praline base.
1. Combine water, sugar, and glucose in a pan and caramelize.
2. Fold in feuilletine.
2. Remove from heat and add coriander.
3. Place hazelnuts on a silpat-lined pan and pour caramel
over nuts.
4. After cooling completely, mix in food processor to a smooth
paste.
5. Reserve for coriander praline crunch; store any additional
product in the refrigerator.

Peanut Butter Banana Bonbon Peanut Butter Ganache

Portions: 90 pieces Portions: 95 portions
Yield description: 90 pieces at 0.5 oz (14 g) Yield description: 95 portions at 0.25 oz (7 g)

Peanut 1 lb 6 oz 640 g Sugar 8.8 oz 250 g
Butter Ganache
Glucose 1.8 oz 50 g
Banana Ganache 1 lb 6 oz 640 g
Water 1.4 oz 40 g
Procedure Peanut Butter 2.8 oz 80 g
1. Line bonbon mold with tempered dark chocolate.
2. Fill halfway with peanut butter ganache.
3. Fill the shell with banana ganache. Procedure
4. Allow banana ganache to crystallize for 12 hours.
1. Combine water, sugar, and glucose in a pan and bring to a
5. Seal the molds with tempered dark chocolate. light caramel.
2. Pour caramel onto a silpat. Cool completely and grind in a food
processor.
3. Add finely ground caramel mixture to cream and warm
to dissolve.
4. Cool caramel to 95°F (35°C).
5. Add peanut butter and softened butter; emulsify with
immersion blender.

Banana Ganache Yogurt Berry Bonbon

Portions: 90 portions Portions: 70 pieces
Yield description: 90 portions at 0.25 oz (7 g) Yield description: 70 pieces at 0.5 oz (14 g)

Heavy Cream 5.3 oz 150 g Berry Compote 10.4 oz 295 g
Trimoline 1.1 oz 30 g Yogurt Ganache 1 lb 9 oz 735 g
Dark Rum 0.4 oz 10 g Procedure
Banana Purée 2.6 oz 75 g 1. Line bonbon mold with tempered milk chocolate.
2. Pipe berry compote.
3. Fill mold with yogurt ganache.
Procedure 4. Allow yogurt ganache to crystallize for 12 hours.
1. Place white chocolate on a double boiler and melt 25%. 5. Seal the molds with tempered milk chocolate.
2. Bring cream to a boil.
3. Pour over chocolate and form a ganache.
4. Cool ganache to 95°F (35°C).
5. Add butter, Trimoline, banana purée, and rum.

Berry Compote Yogurt Ganache

Portions: 140 portions Portions: 73 portions
Yield description: 140 portions at 0.14 oz (4 g) Yield description: 73 portions at 0.35 oz (10 g)

Raspberry Purée 6.9 oz 195 g Heavy Cream 5.6 oz 160 g
Black Currant Purée 3.5 oz 100 g Butter 1.4 oz 40 g
Dried Blueberries 1.8 oz 50 g Sorbitol 1.4 oz 40 g
Sugar 4.6 oz 130 g Lecithin 0.03 oz 0.75 g
Pectin NH 0.2 oz 6g White Chocolate (41%) 12.3 oz 350 g
Water 2.8 oz 80 g Cocoa Butter 1.1 oz 30 g
Greek Yogurt 2% fat 3.5 oz 100 g
Yogurt Powder 0.5 oz 15 g
Procedure Citric Acid Solution 10 drops 10 drops
1. Combine pectin NH with 30 grams of sugar. Note: Citric Acid Solution can be made using the formula for Tartaric Acid
2. Combine remaining sugar, water, purées, and dried blueberries, Solution on page 373, replace tartaric acid with citric acid.
and warm.
3. When purée mixture reaches 125°F (50°C), add pectin/sugar
mixture. Procedure
4. Boil this mixture for 2 minutes, stir constantly. 1. Combine cream, sorbitol, butter, and lecithin, and warm.
5. Pour onto a silpat on a marble table to cool completely. 2. Combine white chocolate and cocoa butter, melt over a dou-
6. Purée mixture using an immersion blender. ble boiler.
7. Reserve for assembly. 3. Emulsify white chocolate and cream mixture.

4. Add Greek yogurt, yogurt powder, and citric acid solution;
emulsify.
5. Pipe into shells at 84°F (29°C).

Palet d’Or (piped)
Portions: 50 pieces
Yield description: 50 pieces at 0.5 oz (14 g)

Dark Chocolate 68% 12.7 oz 360 g
Procedure
1. Combine cream and Trimoline in a saucepan, bring to a boil.

2. Pour over chocolate; combine to form a ganache.
3. Cool ganache to 95°F (35°C), add butter.
4. Mix with an immersion blender to emulsify.
5. Place plastic wrap directly on top of ganache and crystallize
for 12 hours.
6. Pipe ganache onto a sheet of acetate with a 0.5-in. (1.3-cm)
plain tip the size of a quarter.
7. Place another sheet of acetate on top of piped ganache and
flatten to 0.3 in. (8 mm) thick.
9. Remove acetate sheet and spray ganache with a cocoa butter
spray (recipe page 397).
10. Dip in tempered dark couverture.

FIGURE 12.14 Hand-dipped bonbons (left to right): Rocher, coffee and lemon, Cognac kiss, Palet d’or.
Cognac Kiss (piped) Feuilletine Base

Portion size: 0.5 oz (14 g) Portion size: ¾-in. (20-mm) round
Yield description: 52 portions at 0.5 oz (14 g) Yield description: 50 pieces at ¾-in. (20-mm) round

Feuilletine Base, page 364 50 each 50 each Cocoa Butter 1.4 oz 40 g
Cognac Butter 1 lb 10 oz 740 g Milk Chocolate 2.6 oz 75 g
Ganache, page 365
Praline Paste, page 365 4.4 oz 125 g
Feuilletine 8.8 oz 250 g
Procedure
1. Attach feuilletine base to a piece of parchment paper with a dot Procedure

of chocolate.
1. Combine cocoa butter and milk chocolate; melt over a
2. Prepare cognac butter ganache
bain marie.
3. Pipe cognac butter ganache using a 0.5-in. (1.3-cm) plain tip.
2. Add melted chocolate mixture to praline paste.
3. Fold in feuilletine.
5. Dip in tempered milk chocolate.
4. Spread mixture onto parchment paper and roll to 1⁄8 in.
(3 mm) thick.
5. Allow the feuilletine mixture to set; cut with a 3⁄4-in. (20-mm)
round cutter.

Cognac Butter Ganache Praline Paste

Portions: 50 portions Portions: 1 portion

Butter 5.6 oz 160 g Hazelnuts 8.8 oz 250 g
Cognac 3.3 oz 80 g Sugar 8.8 oz 250 g
Milk Chocolate 1 lb 1.6 oz 500 g Water 2.2 oz 63 g
Procedure
Note: Purchased praline paste can be used in place of this recipe.
1. Soften butter in a mixer with a paddle attachment.
2. Melt and temper milk chocolate, add to butter.
3. Fold in cognac. Procedure
4. Reserve for assembly. 1. Combine water and sugar; caramelize to a dark brown.
2. Pour over hazelnuts; cool completely.
3. Grind hazelnuts and caramel to a paste in a food processor.
4. Add melted cocoa butter.
Rocher (hand rolled) 5. Reserve for assembly.
Portions: 140 pieces
Portion size: 1 Rocher
Yield description: 140 Rochers

Praline Paste 1 lb 4 oz 575 g
Caramelized Hazelnut 4.5 oz 129 g
Craquelin 14 oz 400 g
Procedure
1. Pipe praline paste onto acetate sheets approximately 0.7 in.

(18 mm).
2. Place caramelized hazelnut in the praline paste.
3. Allow praline paste to set.
4. Roll the praline paste in your hand to cover the hazelnut.
5. Hand roll once in melted milk chocolate and immediately roll
in craquelin.
6. Allow the milk chocolate to fully crystallize overnight.
7. Dip the Rocher in tempered milk chocolate.

Caramelized Hazelnut Craquelin

Portions: 140 (approximate) Portions: 1
Portion size: 1 hazelnut Portion size: 14 oz (400 g)
Yield description: 140 hazelnuts (approximate) Yield description: 1 portion at 14 oz (400 g)

Hazelnuts, peeled, 3.5 oz 100 g Almonds, chopped, 7.1 oz 200 g
whole, toasted lightly toasted
Cocoa Butter 0.14 oz 4g
Procedure
1. Warm nuts to 200°F (93°C).

Procedure
2. Combine sugar and water; cook to thread stage, 230°F (110°C).
1. Warm nuts to 200°F (93°C).
3. Take pan off the stove and stir in nuts. Continue stirring to
2. Combine sugar and water; cook to thread stage, 230°F (110°C). crystallizes the sugar.
3. Take pan off the stove and stir in nuts; continue stirring to 4. Pour the crystallized nuts onto a silpat-lined sheet pan and
crystallize the sugar. allow to cool.
4. Pour the crystallized nuts onto a silpat-lined sheet pan and 5. Sift off excess sugar.
allow to cool.
6. Reserve in an airtight container for assembly.
5. Sift off excess sugar and return to a clean pan.
6. Constantly stir nuts over a medium high heat. The sugar will
begin to dissolve and caramelize.
7. Once a light amber color has been reached, remove the pan
from the stove and stir in the cocoa butter. Coffee and Lemon (slab)
8. Pour nuts onto a silpat-lined sheet pan and cool completely.
Portions: 69 pieces
Portion size: 1-in. (25-mm) square
Yield description: 69 portions at 1-in. (25-mm) square

Lemon Ganache, page 367 1 lb 12 oz 794 g
Coffee Nougatine, page 367 8 oz 225 g
Procedure
1. Attach the coffee nougatine to the bottom of the lemon ganache

squares using melted chocolate.
2. Hand dip in dark chocolate.

Lemon Ganache Coffee Nougatine

Portion size: 0.4 oz (11.5 g) Portion size: 1-in. (25-mm) square
Yield description: 69 portions at 0.4 oz (11.5 g) Yield description: 69 portions at 1-in. (25-mm) square

Heavy Cream 7.1 oz 200 g Water 0.4 oz 10 g
Glucose 0.7 oz 20 g Glucose 4.9 oz 140 g
Sorbitol 0.7 oz 20 g Honey 1.4 oz 40 g
Chocolate 64% 2.1 oz 60 g Sugar 5.6 oz 160 g
Milk Chocolate 14.5 oz 410 g Salt 0.04 oz 1g
Lemon Juice 2.5 oz 70 g Yellow Pectin 0.1 oz 3g
Lemon Zest 0.1 oz 4g Butter 1.4 oz 40 g
Butter 0.4 oz 10 g Hazelnuts, roasted, 4.9 oz 140 g
finely chopped
Arabica Coffee, 0.1 oz 4g
finely ground
Procedure
1. Melt milk and dark chocolate half way over a double boiler.
2. Bring heavy cream, glucose and sorbitol to a simmer. Procedure
3. Emulsify chocolate and cream mixture.
1. Combine pectin, sugar, and salt in a bowl.
4. Add lemon zest, juice, and soft butter; emulsify.
2. Place water, sugar, honey, and glucose in a saucepan; add dry
5. Pour ganache into 8 × 9.5 in. (20 × 24 cm) frame with 0.5-in. ingredients.
(13-mm) thick metal bars.
3. Caramelize the mixture.
4. Add hazelnuts, coffee, and butter to caramel.
7. Cut into 1-in. (25-mm) squares.
5. Place nougatine between two sheets of parchment paper and
roll thin. If mixture becomes too cool to roll, place in a 350°F
(175°C) oven for 2 to 3 minutes to warm.
6. Cut into 1-in. (25-mm) squares and allow to cool.

Troubleshooting for Chocolates
Chocolate blooms when 1. Not enough tempered chocolate was added during the seeding
temperature is correct. of the chocolate. Add additional seed to chocolate.
2. The chocolate was not stirred enough during the tempering
process. Stir chocolate more.
3. The chocolate was not tested. Test before use.
Molded chocolate will 1. The chocolate was not tempered correctly. Temper
not release. chocolate properly.
2. Shell is too thin; recast with a slightly thicker shell.
3. The chocolate was properly tempered but not allowed enough
time in the mold. Allow chocolate to fully crystallize.
Ganache has a grainy texture. 1. Ganache was stirred when it was cool. Stir ganache less.
2. The recipe was not scaled accurately or too much water was
removed during the cooking process. Add more liquid to
emulsify.
Butter ganache loses shape The ganache is not crystallized. Allow mixture to crystallize longer
when piped. before piping.
Confections
Confections are defined by the presence of sweeteners—most often in the form of sugar. They
can be broken down into four main categories: crystalline, noncrystalline, aerated, and jellies.
Hard candies, caramels, fudge, pâte de fruit, and marshmallows are all forms of confections.
What sets these categories apart is the role the sweetener plays in the recipe. Sweeteners will
always contribute to flavor; applications in confections may create a smooth, creamy caramel
or a fudge.
Crystalline
Crystalline confections are identified by the presence of crystallized sugar in the final prod-
uct. The ingredients used in the formula create a system that controls the size of the crystals.
Fudge, fondant, and liquor bonbons are all examples of crystalline confections. Fondant is
made through a process of cooking sugar, water, and glucose to a specific temperature, then
cooling. Once the fondant has cooled, it is worked on a marble table, and the agitation creates
many small crystals that make the fondant opaque.
Sugar is the main ingredient in crystalline confections. Applying heat to a sugar solution
allows more sugar to dissolve in the solution. As the sugar solution cools, it now contains more
sugar than could have previously been dissolved. This is now a supersaturated solution. In
this solution, there is not much buffering for the sugar molecules. If the mixture is agitated or
stirred, the sugar will begin to recrystallize back out of the solution. This is a desired effect for
some crystalline confections. However, not controlling this crystallization is a problem. Ingre-
dients like glucose and inverted sugar help to create smaller crystals that will maintain the
creamy texture of the confections. Another factor in controlling crystallization is cooking the
ingredients to the proper temperature.

Noncrystalline
Noncrystalline confections have sugar present in an amorphous form. This means the sugar
is lacking form—it is dissolved in the confection and is free of crystals. The sugar provides
noncrystalline confections with sweetness and hardness of the final product. A formula for
brittle may contain sugar, glucose, water, butter, and nuts, and have a hard candy type consis-
tency. Caramels will have the same ingredients with the addition of dairy. The dairy products
contribute color and flavor to the candies while giving them a softer consistency.
Aerated
Aerated confections require the incorporation of air into a cooked sugar syrup. There are three
ways the air can be incorporated: mechanical, chemical, or pressure. Mechanical is achieved
through the use of a mixer and chemical is done through the use of baking soda. Mechanically
aerated confections require a whipping agent and stabilizer. The whipping agent comes in the
form of egg whites stabilized by gelatin. These two methods are used for smaller batch pro-
duction; pressure aeration is reserved for large manufacturers. Marshmallows and nougat are
included in aerated confections.
Jellies
Jellies are confections that contain a high percentage of sugar and are set with agar, pectin
(yellow or apple pectin), or gelatin. More information about the hydrocolloids used to set jellies
can be found in Chapter 4. The high percentage of sugar in products like gummy bears, jelly-
beans, pâte de fruit, and gumdrops contributes to their long shelf life.
As the name implies, many of these products have a sticky exterior until a final coating of
oil or granulated sugar is applied. An inexpensive way to create different shapes from the jellies
is to use a cornstarch mold. The following method will explain how to use cornstarch as a mold
for gummies, pâte de fruit, and liquor bonbons (crystalline confection).
Cornstarch Mold Method

1. Dry cornstarch in a low temperature oven 100°F (38°C).
2. Sift starch into a wooden framed starch box; level of the top of the starch using a metal bar
pulled along top of the frame.
3. Press the molds into the cornstarch and carefully lift straight up.
Note: Plaster of Paris works best for casting molds. A positive mold will need to be made
by casting plaster of Paris into a well-oiled chocolate or silicone mold. Make several cast-
ings of the mold and glue the cured plaster onto a wooden stick, leaving space between
the molds.
4. Return the cornstarch to the oven to keep it warm and dry before filling.
5. Larger molds can be filled with a fondant funnel, while smaller molds can be filled with a
pipette. Deposit the liquid into the mold.
6. Sift additional cornstarch over the liquid. Allow the confections to remain in the starch box
overnight.
7. Carefully remove confections from starch and clean off excess cornstarch using either a
brush or compessed air.
Confections 401
FIGURE 12.15a–e
1. Sifting the starch 2. Leveling the starch 3. Pressing the mold into the starch
4. Depositing the syrup 5. Sifting to cover the syrup

Confection Recipes
Apricot Passion Pâte de Fruit

Portions: 160 pieces 1. Combine first sugar 5.3 oz (150 g) amount with pectin.
2. Combine second sugar 3 lb 4.9 oz (1500 g) and glucose.
Yield description: 160 pieces at 0.7 oz (20 g)
3. Place purées in a heavy-bottom saucepan and heat to 104°F (40°C).
4. Add pectin/sugar mixture and bring to a boil.
Ingredients U.S. Metric 5. From this point on the mixture must remain boiling.
6. Slowly add sugar/glucose mixture while whisking.
Apricot Purée 1 lb 8.7 oz 700 g
7. Once all this mixture is incorporated cook to 225°F (107°C),
Passion Fruit Purée 1 lb 8.7 oz 700 g
or 75°Brix.
Yellow Pectin 1.1 oz 30 g
8. Add the tartaric acid solution, immediately pour into molds or
Sugar #1 5.3 oz 150 g paper lined half sheet pan.
Glucose 10.6 oz 300 g 9. Allow pâte de fruit to cool to room temperature overnight.
Sugar #2 3 lb 4.9 oz 1500 g 10. Unmold or cut into desired shapes and dredge in super-
Tartaric Acid 0.4 oz 12 g fine sugar.
Solution, page 373
Superfine Sugar As needed As needed
FIGURE 12.16 Banana, Raspberry, and Apricot Passion Pâte de Fruit
Confection Recipes 403

Banana Pâte de Fruit Raspberry Pâte de Fruit

Yield description: 180 pieces at 0.7 oz (20 g) Yield description: 160 pieces at 0.7 oz (20 g)

Pear Purée 2 lb 3.3 oz 1000 g Raspberry 2 lb 3.3 oz 1000 g
Purée
Yellow Pectin 1.2 oz 35 g
Fresh Raspberries 14.1 oz 400 g
Sugar #1 5.3 oz 150 g
Pectin 1.1 oz 30 g
Sugar #1 5.3 oz 150 g
Sugar #2 3 lb 4.9 oz 1500 g
Banana Purée 1 lb 13.7 oz 750 g
Sugar #2 3 lb 4.9 oz 1500 g
Tartaric Acid Solution 0.9 oz 25 g
Tartaric Acid Solution 1.1 oz 30 g
Procedure
Procedure
1. Combine first sugar 5.3 oz (150 g) amount with pectin.
1. Combine first sugar 5.3 oz (150 g) amount with pectin.
3. Place raspberry purée and fresh raspberries in a heavy-bottom
3. Place pear purée in a heavy-bottom saucepan and heat
saucepan and heat to 104°F (40°C).
to 104°F (40°C).
5. From this point on the mixture must remain boiling.
5. From this point on the mixture must remain boiling.
7. Once all this mixture is incorporated, cook to 225°F (107°C)
7. Once all this mixture is incorporated cook to 233°F (112°C).
or 75°Brix.
8. Add the banana purée.
8. Add the tartaric acid solution; immediately pour into molds or
9. Continue cooking to 225°F (107°C) or 75°Brix, add lemon juice paper lined half sheet pan.
and tartaric acid solution. Immediately pour onto paper lined
9. Allow pâte de fruit to cool to room temperature overnight.
half sheet pan or molds.
10. Unmold or cut into desired shapes and dredge in super-
10. Allow pâte de fruit to cool to room temperature overnight.
fine sugar.
11. Unmold or cut into desired shapes and dredge in super-
fine sugar.

Tartaric Acid Solution
Yield: 4.2 oz (120 g)

Portions: 1
Yield description: 1 portion at 4.2 oz (120 g)

Tartaric Acid 2.1 oz 60 g
Water, boiling 2.1 oz 60 g
Note: Tartaric acid solution easily crystallizes. Make sure all equipment
and storage containers are cleaned before use.
Procedure
1. Bring 8 oz (240 g) of water to a rolling boil.

2. Place tartaric acid in a bowl.
3. Scale boiling water directly into tartaric acid; stir gently
to dissolve.
4. Cover container and allow to cool. Store at room temperature.

Marshmallow
Portions: 75
Portion size: 0.2 oz (5.6 g)
Yield description: 120 knots at 0.2 oz (5.6 g)

Water or purée #1 1.5 oz 42.5 g
Sugar #1 1.5 oz 42.5 g
and scraped
Water or purée #2 7.5 oz 212.5 g
Sugar #2 4.5 oz 127.5 g
Sheet Gelatin, bloomed 9 each 9 each
for 15 minutes
Powdered Sugar As needed As needed
Procedure
1. Combine water or purée #1 and sugar #1 in a mixer with a whip.

2. Heat water or purée #2 and sugar #2 to a boil.
3. Pour boiling mixture into stand mixer.
4. Add melted gelatin to mixture.
5. Whip until completely cool.
6. Pipe lines with a 0.4-in. (1-cm) plain tip onto powdered sugar
dusted sheet pans.
7. Dust the top of the marshmallow with additional pow-
dered sugar.
8. Let marshmallow rest for 3 to 4 hours.
9. Cut into 2-in. (5-cm) pieces.
10. Tie into a knot and store in an airtight container at room
temperature.

FIGURE 12.17 Clockwise from top: Coconut macadamia brittle, chocolate nougat, marshmellow, toffee, nougat
Nougat Chocolate Nougat


Egg White Powder 0.2 oz 5g Sugar 1 13.4 oz 380 g
Sugar 0.5 oz 15 g Water 3.4 oz 95 g
Egg Whites 0.9 oz 25 g Honey 8.1 oz 230 g
Sugar 6.7 oz 190 g Sugar 2 0.7 oz 20 g
Glucose 2.1 oz 60 g Egg Whites 1.8 oz 50 g
Water 1.8 oz 50 g Vanilla Bean, split 1 each 1 each
and scraped
and scraped Unsweetened 4.4 oz 125 g
Chocolate 100%
Honey 4.1 oz 115 g
Whole Almonds 2.6 oz 75 g
Whole Almonds 3.5 oz 100 g
Hazelnuts 2.6 oz 75g
Hazelnuts 1.2 oz 35 g
Sliced Almonds 1.2 oz 35 g
Dried Apricot, diced 1.9 oz 55 g Procedure
Dried Cranberries 2.6 oz 75 g
1. Combine first sugar, water and vanilla bean, bring to a boil.
2. Begin whipping egg whites with second sugar.
3. Bring honey to a boil cook to 248°F (120°C) and add to whipped
Procedure egg whites.
1. Toast nuts. 4. When sugar reaches 323°F (162°C), add to egg white mixture.
2. Combine first sugar with egg white powder; add to egg whites 5. After incorporating sugar, paddle the mixture to cool.
in a mixer with whip attachment. 6. Add the melted chocolate.
3. Combine second sugar, glucose, water, and vanilla bean in 7. Warm fruit and nut mixture to 248°F (120°C).
a saucepan. 8. Fold in nuts.
4. Cook honey to 222°F (106°C); turn mixer on high. Continue 9. Roll the nougat between two pieces of parchment paper into
cooking to 248°F (120°C). an 8 × 9.5 in. (20 × 24 cm) frame with 0.5-in. (13-mm) thick
5. Begin cooking sugar mixture; add cooked honey to whipped metal bars.
egg whites. 10. Allow nougat to cool to room temperature, cut into 1-in. (2.5-cm)
6. Cook sugar mixture to 323°F (162°C) and add to egg white squares.
mixture.
7. Allow to mix for 3 to 5 minutes; add melted cocoa butter.
8. Warm fruit and nut mixture to 248°F (120°C).
9. Fold nut mixture into meringue.
10. Roll the nougat between two pieces of parchment paper into a
7 × 9 in. (18 × 23 cm) frame with 0.5-in. (13-mm) thick metal bars.
11. Allow nougat to cool to room temperature, cut into 1-in. (2.5-cm)
squares.

Toffee Coconut Macadamia Brittle


Butter 8.8 oz 250 g Water 4.1 oz 115 g
Sugar 8.8 oz 250 g Glucose 6 oz 170 g
Glucose 1.1 oz 30 g Sugar 8.5 oz 240 g
Salt 0.07 oz 2g Butter 0.4 oz 10 g
Vanilla Extract 0.3 oz 8g Dessicated Coconut, 2.6 oz 75 g
lightly toasted
Chocolate 64%, As needed As needed
tempered Macadamia Nuts, 2.6 oz 75 g
toasted and chopped
Sea Salt As needed As needed
Vanilla Paste 0.2 oz 5g
Baking Soda 0.1 oz 3g
Procedure
1. Combine butter, glucose, salt, and sugar in a heavy-bottom

Procedure
saucepan and heat.
2. Stir with a rubber spatula or wooden spoon, while bringing 1. Combine the water, glucose, sugar, butter, and salt in heavy-
to a boil. bottom saucepan. Bring to a boil.
3. Cook to a temperature of 295°F (146°C). 2. Cook this mixture without stirring to 240°F (115°C).
4. Remove from heat and add vanilla extract. If mixture is broken, 3. Add coconut and macadamia nuts; stir constantly.
stir to emulsify. 4. Continue cooking to 290°F (143°C).
5. Deposit toffee into 1.4-in. (3.5-cm) molds and cool completely. 5. Remove from heat and add baking soda and vanilla paste.
6. Dip toffee in tempered chocolate and sprinkle with sea salt. 6. Pour the brittle onto a silpat-lined sheet pan. Use an offset pal-
let knife to spread the mixture.
7. Once the brittle starts to set, use your hands to pull it thinner.
8. Cool completely and break into pieces. Store in an airtight con-
tainer at room temperature.

Liquor Bonbon
Portions: 40 pieces
Portion size: 0.3 oz (8.5 g)
Yield description: 40 pieces at 0.3 oz (8.5 g)

Sugar 8.8 oz 250 g
Water 3 oz 85 g
Liquor (min 40% alcohol) 3.5 oz 100 g
Procedure
1. Warm cornstarch to 110°F (43°C) in an oven.

2. Prepare a cornstarch mold (page 370).
3. Cook water and sugar to 243°F (117°C).
4. Remove from heat; add liquor and cover for 5 minutes.
5. Gently transfer syrup between two bowls to mix the syrup, a
minimum of three times.
6. Deposit syrup into warm cornstarch mold.
7. Sift additional cornstarch on top of the mold to cover the syrup.
8. Return the cornstarch mold to warm oven to maintain a tem-
perature of 110°F (43°C).
9. After 6 hours, carefully turn the liquor bonbons over to create
an even crystallization.
10. Place the tray back in the oven overnight.
11. Remove the liquor bonbon from the cornstarch and brush off
any excess cornstarch.
12. Dip in tempered chocolate.

Key Terms
Winnowing Seeding method Slab ganache
Conching Seizing Guitar
Couverture Bonbons Crystalline confections
Polymorphic Truffles Supersaturated
Fat bloom Cream ganache Noncrystalline confections
Sugar bloom Butter ganache Aerated confections
Tabling method Enrobing Jellies

1. What are the qualities of properly tempered chocolate? 4. What happens when chocolate is overcrystallized?
2. Describe the differences between milk, white, and dark chocolate. 5. What is the difference between crystalline and noncrystalline
3. What does cocoa percentage represent? confections?

CHAPTER 13
Chocolate Work
Art is defined as the expression of human creative skill and imagination, typically in visual form.
Pastry chefs create art every day that transcends vision, creating something that appeals to
the sense of smell, taste, and feel. Chocolate work allows the pastry chef to demonstrate their
ability to create works of art from a premium product usually reserved for consumption.
LEARNING OBJECTIVES
1. Assemble a chocolate showpiece.

2. Demonstrate how to build a variety of chocolate flowers.
3. Prepare a variety of chocolate garnishes.
4. Explain how to design a showpiece.
Introduction to Chocolate Work

Chocolate provides an excellent medium for creating garnishes and showpieces. Chocolate gar-
nishes are delicately used on cakes, tarts, desserts and petits fours to add an attractive visual
element to the dessert. The garnish can add color, movement, and height to pastries. Many
of these garnish elements can be incorporated into a chocolate showpiece for a room service
amenity or a larger buffet decoration.
Chocolate as a Medium for Sculptures and Garnishes

Chocolate can be easily molded, sculpted, and shaped to create a wide variety of components
from solid support structures to delicate flower petals. A sculpture can be created using basic
kitchen equipment, hand tools, and some equipment from the local hardware store. The one
challenge associated with chocolate is that it is dark and solid, which leads to a heavy show-
piece. Because chocolate is a strong medium, structural pieces tend to be overbuilt. This not
only increases the cost of the piece, but adds to the weight of the piece. Reducing the weight
of the structure will add to the visual appeal of the piece while reducing the overall weight,
making transportation easier, and reduce cost.
413
Chocolate Selection
The pastry chef uses garnishes and showpieces to demonstrate skill and mastery of chocolate.
Chocolate garnishes are strictly used as decoration: they provide color, texture through the
snap of the chocolate, and the flavor of the chocolate. There is no set rule as to which chocolate
should be used for a garnish. The flavor of chocolate goes with almost every other flavor, it is
acceptable to use chocolate as a garnish even if there is not chocolate it the dessert. However,
if there is chocolate in the dessert the garnish can be used as a way to reflect this. A pastry
that has white chocolate mousse should use a white chocolate garnish, additional color can be
added with the use of edible luster dusts and cocoa butter colors.
A showpiece requires additional thought in selecting the correct chocolate. Milk and white
chocolate contain milk products and a higher percentage of sugar compared to dark chocolate.
These additional ingredients reduce the amount of cocoa butter in the chocolate. Cocoa butter
provides the strength and structure to hold the showpiece up. Milk chocolate is rarely used
in the production of chocolate sculptures. Dark chocolate is the primary chocolate used for
chocolate sculptures, while white chocolate is used as an accent due to its decreased strength.
If dark chocolate is the best chocolate to build a showpiece with and cocoa butter makes
the piece stronger, then a high cocoa percentage chocolate is the best chocolate, right? Wrong.
Just as different cocoa percentage chocolates have different flavor profiles, they also have dif-
ferent characteristics when building a showpiece.
A 55% to 58% couverture can be used to assemble a strong showpiece. The amount of
sugar in the chocolate makes it easy to temper, and, at the same time, the amount of cocoa
butter makes it strong. This chocolate will be slightly thicker than the next example. The ease
of tempering is a benefit for using a semisweet chocolate. The other benefit is the length of
working time when tempered. Chocolate with a high percentage of cocoa butter can easily
become overcrystallized. This will cause the chocolate to become very thick, reduce the ability
to flow, and make it difficult to work with.
Using a bittersweet couverture, 60% to 64% cocoa solids, will give a better flow for
molding. This chocolate will require more attention while tempering. The additional cocoa
butter present will create a stronger structure. There is a drawback associated with higher
cocoa percentage chocolates. It can easily become overcrystallized when working with the
chocolate. This occurs after several hours of working with the tempered chocolate. Melting
the chocolate and repeating the tempering process can reverse the overcrystallized cocoa
butter and return it to a fluid state.
Garnishes
Garnishes can be used for sculptures or as a decorative element for pastries. These pieces are
edible and added for decorative purposes and can be made using white, milk, or dark chocolate.
Chocolate Cigarette
Equipment needed: Offset pallet knife, straight blade slicing knife, and metal scraper:
1. Spread a thin layer of tempered chocolate onto a piece of marble. It is important that the
chocolate be spread as evenly as possible. Thinner areas will set too quickly and will also
be too soft to come off the knife.
2. Using the metal scraper, clean the edges of the spread chocolate. The width of the chocolate
should be 4 to 6 in. (10 to 15 cm).
3. Allow the chocolate to set; rub your hand over the chocolate to rewarm slightly.
414 C H A PT E R 1 3 Chocolate Work

4. Place the knife on the chocolate, starting ½ in. (1.5 cm) in from the
end of the chocolate on the right side.
5. Push down and away toward the right. The chocolate will roll off in
the shape of a cigarette.
Variation: To make two-colored cigarettes, spread dark chocolate

first then scrape with a metal comb. After the chocolate has set to the
point it will not smear, spread a layer of tempered white chocolate
over the top.
Chocolate Plaquettes
Equipment needed: Offset pallet knife, airbrush, skewer, paring knife,
round cutters, two flat cutting boards, parchment paper, plastic
acetate sheet:
1. Wipe the cutting board with a wet towel. Place the acetate on the
cutting board, using your hand to remove any large bubbles that
may have formed under the acetate. Then, using a clean dry towel,
wipe the acetate to remove any water that might have gotten on
top. The water left underneath the acetate will be enough to hold
it in place.
2. Spray the acetate with a darker cocoa butter color (green).
3. Use a clean rubber eraser or artist’s blending tool to draw circles in
the cocoa butter.
FIGURE 13.1 Chocolate spread on marble with a portion
4. Spray a lighter cocoa butter color (yellow) next and allow the cocoa
already made into cigarettes on the left and the remainder
butter to crystallize.
of the strip in the process
5. Spread a thin, even layer of tempered chocolate over the cocoa
butter.
6. When the chocolate sets, cut out desired shapes using the back of a paring knife or round
cutters. This prevents cutting through the acetate.
7. Place a sheet of parchment paper on top of the chocolate, followed by the other cutting
board. Chocolate will contract as it crystallizes; the weight placed on top will keep the dec-
orations flat.
8. Let the chocolate crystallize overnight before removing the actetate.
Variations: 1. In place of the cocoa butter, use white, milk, and dark chocolate. 2. Use
a paintbrush to splatter cocoa butter on the acetate. 3. A sponge can be used to apply colors.
4. Textured plastic sheets can also be used to create a different effect.
Colored Chocolate Spheres

Equipment needed: Polycarbonate sphere mold, offset pallet knife, metal scraper, half sheet of
parchment paper, colored cocoa butters:
1. Wearing gloves, smear a thin layer of colored cocoa butter in the mold with your finger.
2. Fill the molds with tempered chocolate.
3. Scrape off any excess chocolate and tap the mold with the plastic handle of the scraper to
remove any bubbles.
4. Let the filled mold sit for 1 to 2 minutes.
Garnishes 415
FIGURE 13.2a–d
1. Applying swirls on first color of acetate (step 3) 2. Spreading chocolate (step 5)
3. Cutting chocolate (step 6) 4. Finished assorted colored decors (step 8)
5. Turn the mold over and tap with the plastic handle of the scraper, removing the extra
chocolate.
6. Place the mold on a sheet of parchment paper and allow the chocolate to drip down to
form a lip. This will make it easier to seal the two halves together.
7. Before removing from the paper, be sure that the chocolate has crystallized enough that
the lip remains with the mold.
8. Scrape the mold again, removing any excess chocolate. This will ensure the chocolate will
be able to contract properly during crystallization.
9. Leave the chocolate in the mold overnight and release the following day; this will ensure a
good shine. If needed sooner, the mold can be placed in the refrigerator for 10 to 1 5 minutes
to release the chocolate.

10. Remove the sphere halves from the mold.
11. Using a warm, flat surface, approximately 100°F (38°C), melt the edge of both pieces of the
chocolate.
12. Press the halves together and place the sphere back in the mold, allow the seam to set fully
before moving.
Variations: 1. Use an airbrush to spray the cocoa butter colors in the mold. 2. Use a brush
to add the cocoa butter color by brushing or splashing in color.
FIGURE 13.3a–d
1. Applying the color into the mold (step 1) 2. Showing the lip inside the mold after scraping
(step 7)
3. Melting the halves and placing them in the 4. Finished piece with spheres
mold to set (step 11)
Garnishes 417
Colored Chocolate Triangles
Equipment needed: Acetate plastic sheet, half sheet of parchment paper, paring knife, offset
pallet knife, paintbrush, piece of tape:
1. Drizzle colored cocoa butter onto the sheet of acetate. Immediately brush the cocoa butter
across the acetate. The cocoa butter needs to be 88°F (31°C). It does not need to be tem-
pered; the process of brushing will temper the cocoa butter.
2. After the cocoa butter has crystallized, spread a thin layer of tempered chocolate.
3. As the chocolate crystallizes, it will become firm enough to cut cleanly and still remaining
pliable. This can be checked by touching the chocolate with your finger—it should not stick
to your finger.
4. Using the back side of the paring knife (this avoids cutting the acetate), cut the chocolate
into triangles, approximately 1 × 4 in. (2.5 × 10 cm).
FIGURE 13.4a–d
Brushing on the cocoa butter (step 1) Cutting the chocolate (step 4)
Wrapping the curls (step 5) An example of chocolate curls with modeling

chocolate roses.

5. Place the piece of parchment paper on top of the chocolate and roll diagonally. Place a
small piece of tape to secure the roll.
6. Allow the chocolate to crystallize overnight. This will ensure the triangles will have an
excellent shine. Unroll tubes as needed to protect them.
Variations: 1. After drizzling the cocoa butter color spread with an offset pallet knife. 2. In place
of the colored cocoa butter, use white or milk chocolate.
Chocolate Curls
Equipment needed: 2.5 × 12 in. (6.5 × 30 cm) acetate strip, offset pallet knife, plastic comb, half
plastic tube, paper cornet:
1. Place the acetate strip on the table. To adhere the strip to the table, use a wet towel and
place the acetate on top. Wipe with a clean dry towel to remove any water. This will prevent
the acetate from moving.
2. Spread a thin layer of chocolate onto the acetate strip.
3. Pull the plastic comb down the length of the strip.
4. Pipe small dots of chocolate between the lines to hold the twist together.
5. Twist the acetate and place in the half plastic tube and let the chocolate crystallize.
6. Carefully remove the acetate from the curl.
Variations: 1. Brush acetate with colored cocoa butter. 2. Do not pipe the dots between the
lines. The curls can be used individually.
FIGURE 13.5 Garnish from entremets
Garnishes 419
FIGURE 13.6a–b
1. Piping chocolate on the vermicelli (step 2) 2. The finished decorations
Piped Decors
Equipment needed: Piping bag, half sheet pan, chocolate vermicelli:
1. Spread the chocolate vermicelli on the half sheet pan.

2. Pipe the chocolate directly onto the vermicelli. Piping can be in circles or lines.
3. Allow the chocolate to crystallize before removing the decoration.
Sculpture Design
Chocolate sculptures offer the pastry chef a way to demonstrate their creativity and knowledge
of chocolate. The size of these pieces can vary from a small room service amenity to a large
piece meant for display on a buffet. Regardless of size there are three parts to constructing a
sculpture: structure, color, and theme.
When setting out to start creating showpieces, planning is the most important step. Every-
one creates art differently; you may be inspired by a drawing or searching for images online.
Once your ideas are collected, draw the piece to scale. This does not have to be a perfect
drawing. It is a starting point from which templates will be made to start assembling the sculp-
ture. The next step in the process is to assemble the sculpture from cardboard templates. Any
design changes are easy to make. At this point, your idea goes from paper to three dimen-
sions. A great deal about the piece can be learned from these additional steps that should make
building the piece from chocolate faster.
Structure Design
Base
As with any other form of construction the base is the foundation of the piece. The base can
easily be overlooked when creating the sculpture. It not only provides a sturdy foundation to
build on, but also stabilizes the piece. Small and large pieces constructed with a weak base will

be more likely to fail. In the case of larger pieces, the weight of the base makes transporting the
piece easier. The base is not just a block of chocolate, it can be molded and sculpted to rein-
force the theme of the piece.
Include the base in the sketch of the piece so that there is a point of reference for the
height of the base. The base should be no more than 30 percent of the total structure. As
part of the construction of the base include a small chocolate pedestal or feet. This piece
should be just slightly smaller then the size of the base; if it is too small the piece may not
be stable enough. From a design standpoint, this pedestal lifts the piece off the display
table and gives the sculpture a lighter feel. It also provides a way to easily lift the piece when
transporting.
Structure
The structure of the piece provides the height and strength of the piece. When designing
a sculpture this is the first step. It is important to design a structure that is strong to hold
the theme elements. The most common shaped structures are J, C, E, and S. These
shapes provide a flow to the design of the sculpture—straight lines are also used to create
structures.
It is important to consider the shape of the structure and how it impacts the overall design
of the piece. The structure should catch the eye of the viewer and help their eye to move
through the piece. The movement should come from the top and bottom of the piece towards
the middle, ultimately directing them back to the focal point.
Focal Point
In addition to supporting the sculpture the structure is also used to guide the viewer’s eye to
the focal point. The focal point is the point of interest on the piece that makes the sculpture
unique. Most often, the focal point is a flower or pastries presented on the piece. The focal point
should be located 50% to 60% of the height from the base of the sculpture. This is a guideline
for sculptures placed on a buffet table with a height of 30 in. (76 cm). This is a guideline for large
sculptures; smaller amenity pieces do not have to follow this guideline and an attractive design
can be created.
It is important to consider the height of the table and placement of the table (against a
wall or in the middle of the room, etc.) when designing a piece. The table height and position
will impact how the decorative elements are positioned. Decorative elements and focal point
should be placed in a way that they are easily viewed.
J S C E Straight
FIGURE 13.7 Drawing of J, S, C, E and straight lines

Optimal Viewing Position
For example, a flower placed on a sculpture should be positioned in a way that the center of
the flower is facing the viewer. This is known as the optimal viewing position (OVP). Some
refer to this simply as the front of the piece. When considering the OVP, most of the elements
on the piece should be visible from this position. Not all elements need to be in clear view from
the front of the piece. At the same time the piece should not have a “back” that is void of any
decoration. Elements from the front of the piece should catch the eye and draw the observer to
inspect what is on the other side the piece. A perfectly designed piece should be just as inter-
esting on the back as it is from the OVP.
Incorporating Design in the Structure

While the primary purpose of the structure is to hold the piece up, it can also help to carry the
theme through the piece. A curved piece at the top of an S-curved structure could be made to
look like a bow with arrows flowing around it. A straight vertical line can add to the piece by tak-
ing on the appearance of a steel beam. The possibilities are endless. Keep an open mind when
practicing assembling the piece as it will evolve and change with every assembly.
Theme
When thinking about how to design a sculpture for a buffet, consider the theme of the buf-
fet. Holidays such as Christmas, Valentine’s Day, Thanksgiving, Easter, and New Year’s Eve all
have easily recognizable themes. What makes the showpiece unique is how the themes are
incorporated.
Consider New Year’s Eve as a theme, what ideas come to mind? A clock, champagne flutes,
horns, hats, and noisemakers immediately come to mind. A visit to the library or museum,
as well as searching online, may provide additional ideas. Using any three of these elements
should be enough to convey the theme of the holiday buffet.
To build the New Year’s Eve themed sculpture we will use the decorative elements of the
clock, champagne bottle, and confetti. It is now time to decide on the structure of the piece.
It is best to decide on decorative elements and the purpose of the piece before selecting the
structure. This piece will be a strictly decorative piece on the buffet. Selecting the S curve, E, or
straight-line designs will work for this piece. If the piece requires a cake or pastry to be displayed
on the piece, the J or C shape will work well. For this application, the S curve will be selected.
The piece can now be sketched using the decorative elements and structure (see Figure 13.8).
Color
Creating color on a chocolate sculpture can be easily achieved with the use of colored cocoa
butter. The biggest challenge when working with chocolate is creating a piece that is not bulky
and heavy. Design, along with color, can be used to create a chocolate sculpture that is light and
flows. Color can be used to draw attention to areas like the focal point while taking attention
from larger structural pieces.
An attractive showpiece can be built using the natural colors of white, milk, and dark
chocolate. This holds true with a piece using black and white colors. Cocoa butter colors
are available in a wide variety of colors, and they can also be blended to create many addi-
tional colors. Primary colors, such as red, blue, and yellow, can be used to create almost any
other color. Mixing the primary colors together creates secondary colors of orange, green, and
purple. The color wheel in Figure 13.9 shows primary, secondary, and tertiary colors and their
corresponding complementary colors. The complementary colors are located directly across
from each other.

FIGURE 13.8 Sketch of piece with decorative elements
Yellow
primary
Green Orange
complementary complementary
primary primary
Blue Red
complementary
Purple
FIGURE 13.9 Color wheel with complementary colors

FIGURE 13.10 Finished piece made from chocolate
While colors are easily applied to the chocolate, it is good to leave some of the chocolate
of the piece showing. In some cases, this may be the only indication to the observer that it is in
fact chocolate.
Incorporating color into a showpiece can be done in several ways: through the use of
colored garnishes, by adding color to white chocolate, using a paintbrush or airbursh, or adding
edible luster dusts. When applying color to chocolate the color of the chocolate will change the
applied color. If red cocoa butter color is sprayed on dark chocolate, it will have a deeper red
color from the brown color behind it. The same is true when adding color to white chocolate,
the natural yellow from the cocoa butter will combine with the color. For example, adding
blue to white chocolate will produce a green-blue color. Depending on the desired final color,
another spray or primer, may need to be applied. For the red spray to be a true red on the dark
chocolate, white must first be applied. Experimenting with different color combinations will
help to make the sculpture more unique.
The design of the piece continues by adding color to the sketch. A set of colored pencils
or markers can get the colors close to what the cocoa butter colors will achieve. When adding
color to the piece, refer back to the complimentary colors as a starting point. For example, the
face of the clock will be a tan color, the numbers and arms black, the champagne bottle will
have a green color, and the confetti will be colored red and blue. More color can be added by
the accent pieces that will represent fireworks.
Assembly
After all the ideas have been put down on paper, it is time to get the templates together.
Chocolate is an excellent medium to work with because it does not require much equipment to
build an elaborate piece. The templates can be cut from poster board or cake boxes; in fact, any

piece of flat, sturdy cardboard will work. Transfer the designs to the cardboard. At this point,
the cardboard templates can be taped together, giving a preview of what the final piece will
look like.
Once the templates are assembled, any necessary changes can be made. The follow-
ing procedure explains the chocolate cutout method, how to cut out the chocolate using
templates.
Chocolate Cutout Method

Equipment needed: Paring knife, 2 each 0.25-in. (6-mm) metal bars, offset pallet knife, card-
board template, parchment paper, newsprint:
1. Place the newsprint on a flat board, with the metal bars on the side. The metal bars will
ensure that the chocolate is even thickness, which is very important for structural pieces.
The chocolate will also crystallize at the same rate, making it easier to cut.
2. Ladle tempered chocolate on the newsprint and spread it with an offset pallet knife.
Quickly drag a metal bar across the top of the 0.25-in. (6-mm) bars. This will level out the
chocolate.
3. Wait for the chocolate to crystallize. When the chocolate looks like it is setting, test with
your gloved finger. The chocolate should not stick. At this point, it is ready to cut.
4. Place the template on top of the chocolate and cut with the paring knife. Do not press
down; the newsprint under the chocolate should not be cut. Make additional relief cuts
once the template is cut.
5. Place the parchment paper on top of the chocolate and flip the board over.
6. Remove the newsprint from the chocolate. The chocolate should remove cleanly from the
paper. You will notice the newsprint is greasy. This is caused by the cocoa butter from the
chocolate. If parchment paper were used in place of newsprint, the parchment would have
become wrinkled from the absorption of the cocoa butter and this would have transferred
to the chocolate.
7. Remove excess chocolate from around the cutout piece. Allow the structural piece to crys-
tallize fully before moving.
The cut pieces require several hours to crystallize fully. Moving the pieces prematurely may
cause the chocolate to bend slightly, forming small cracks that may not be visible. Over time,
these cracks will weaken the structure to the point that it could break.
FIGURE 13.11a–c
1. Spreading the chocolate between the 2. Cutting the chocolate (step 4) 3. Removing the paper from the flipped cut
bars (step 2) out (step 6)

Connecting Pieces
Although it is said that the chocolate is used to “glue” the pieces together, this is not entirely
true: The chocolate acts as more of a weld. When connecting pieces, the goal is to get them to
become one, not just two pieces with some chocolate between them holding them together.
To achieve this, the chocolate pieces are warmed slightly at the connection point, a thin line
of tempered chocolate is piped at the connection point, and the pieces are placed together. Be
careful how much chocolate is piped to avoid overfilling. The extra chocolate will be pressed
out of the seam and leave an unsightly mess, or worse, drip onto another part of the piece. Any
extra chocolate can be cleaned using a gloved finger or a small pallet knife. The seam needs
to be as clean as possible, even if it is not in clear view on the piece. Practicing making a clean
seam is good for when the seam will be visible.
To help set the seam quickly, cold spray can be used. Cold spray is compressed air in a can
that sprays cold air. This product can be helpful in assembling a piece quickly. However, it is often
abused and overused by the inexperienced. A quick blast of cold spray can set the chocolate
enough for the remainder of crystallization to occur without the piece moving or falling. Over-
spraying can cool the chocolate too rapidly and create a false set, as the piece warms back up the
chocolate returns to a liquid state and the piece falls off. Since the chocolate crystallizes better
without the use of cold spray, it is recommended to only use it when absolutely necessary.
Connecting Pieces Method

Equipment needed: heat gun, paper cornet, paring knife:
1. Place the pieces being glued together and use the paring knife to mark a line where the
pieces line up.
2. Warm the connection areas with the heat gun. A slight warming will not take the chocolate
out of temper; instead, it will warm the chocolate to fuse the two pieces together.
3. Pipe a small line of chocolate where the two pieces will meet.
4. Connect the pieces pressing firmly; hold until set.
5. Clean any excess chocolate that may have ran out.
6. Go back over the seams with the paper cornet and pipe a line of chocolate along each side
of the piece. Immediately clean the excess with a gloved finger.
FIGURE 13.12a–c Attaching technique:
1. Warming the pieces (step 2) 2. Piping the chocolate (step 3) 3. Cleaning the seam (step 5)

Component Inventory
When designing a showpiece, it is important to get the ideas down on paper. After the sketch
is completed, the design moves into the next phase. Utilizing different techniques and compo-
nents in the piece will help to create a more interesting piece. If a chocolate sculpture is made
from flat cutout pieces and sprayed, it would still look good. However, incorporating different
techniques like molded spheres, flowers, and piped chocolate can give the piece more life. Cre-
ating a component inventory of techniques will help make sure that nothing is overlooked dur-
ing the planning process.
Component Inventory for Chocolate Showpieces

Molded Cutouts Piped
Shiny Dull Sprayed flat
Sprayed velvet Carved Food processor rollouts
Brushed Hand painted Rocks
Chocolate pastillage Flower
When designing a sculpture, it is important to take into consideration what is truly needed
and what is not. The hardest skill to learn in designing a showpiece is editing. Not every item on
the component needs to be included in the design.
Techniques
Spraying with Cocoa Butter
When working with chocolate, whether it is molded pieces or cutouts, the piece will need to be
finished with a cocoa butter spray. It is inevitable that smudges or fingerprints will get on the
piece. While spraying will cover small marks, any large dents or chips will become more pro-
nounced after spraying. Cocoa spray provides a way to cover up these small blemishes and at
the same time give the structural elements the same color.
Spraying a showpiece is not the same as the delicate work of airbrushing. The sprayer is
larger and more powerful. There are several models of spray guns available from most hardware
stores. The spray is propelled in one of two ways: an electric sprayer uses a small piston to push
the paint through a nozzle, while a compressor forces air through a small opening to propel the
chocolate. Compressor-powered sprayers spray a more even coat than the electric version, but
they are considerably more expensive.
Always test the spray gun before spraying the piece to confirm the gun is operating prop-
erly. Start with the gun off to the side of the piece and begin spraying. Slowly move the gun over
the piece and continue past. Continue spraying the piece in passes, being careful to go past the
piece when switching directions. If direction is changed while the spray is directed at the piece
it will become oversprayed in this area. This will lead to drips and an uneven coating of color.
The spray guns operate at a high pressure. It is recommended to create a spraying station
with a large cardboard box or other material to reduce clean up time. After spraying the piece,
move the piece carefully—any contact will result in fingerprints on the piece.
Velvet Spraying
Spraying can be used to achieve different textures in the piece. By placing the chocolate in the
freezer for 15 minutes and then spraying the piece, it will have a velvet finish. As the cocoa butter
spray comes in contact with the frozen chocolate piece, it immediately sets. Then, as more
spray is added, it continues to build up. Be careful when handling velvet-sprayed chocolate. It
is very delicate and easily damaged.
Techniques 427
FIGURE 13.13 A properly sprayed piece (left), oversprayed (center), and velvet
texture (right)
Modeling Chocolates
Modeling Chocolate
Molds help to speed up the production of chocolate sculptures. There are some items that
cannot be made with molds. A delicate chocolate rose is impossible to make from chocolate and
the shape cannot be replicated with a mold. The only way to assemble a rose out of chocolate
is to use modeling chocolate, a combination of chocolate and sugar syrup that allows the
chocolate to remain flexible. Modeling chocolate can also be used to create leaves and figu-
rines. After sculpting, the modeling chocolate will dry and hold its shape. Larger pieces tend to
weep over time, but modeling chocolate will set as hard as chocolate. Modeling chocolate is
used mostly for decorative showpieces, and is not allowed in competitions.
White or Milk Modeling Chocolate For white modeling chocolate, use white or milk
chocolate in place of the dark chocolate and add 100 g of cocoa butter to the chocolate. During
the tabling process, the cocoa butter will separate out from the chocolate. This is normal. Table
the cocoa butter separately; once crystallization has begun, add it back to the chocolate and
continue tabling as with dark modeling chocolate.
Modeling Chocolate Rose Method Equipment needed: Metal spoon, paring knife:
1. Knead the modeling chocolate back to a workable consistency and roll to 1⁄8 in. (3 mm)
thick.
2. Using a round cutter, cut 10 disks 1.5 in. (40 mm) and one solid sphere ¾ in. (20 mm)
in diameter.
3. Shape the sphere into a teardrop shape, slightly flatten the larger end so it will stand with-
out falling over.
4. Use the spoon to thin out the edge of the disks. Thinning the edges will give the flower
a more lifelike appearance. The petals can easily be removed from the marble with a
paring knife.
5. Wrap the first petal completely around the teardrop. Be sure to cover the entire teardrop.
6. Place the middle of the second petal directly across from the seam of the first petal, and
slightly lower. The center of the flower should always be the highest point.

7. The next layer will have three petals. These petals will be slightly lower than the second
petal. Place the left side of the petal against the rose bud and roll back the right side with
your finger. The next petal goes under the right side of the previous petal. All three petals
will interlock. When spaced evenly, the bud will remain round. Flowers are always assem-
bled with odd numbers of petals to prevent the flower from becoming boxy and to provide
a natural appearance.
8. The remaining five petals are shaped by pinching the bottom to create a small-cupped
petal. The top of the outer petals is pinched slightly in the center and rolled back.
9. Attach the petals, making sure they are evenly spaced and slightly lower than the
previous layer.
10. Freeze the finished flower and spray with red cocoa butter color.
FIGURE 13.14a–d
1. Flattening the petals with a spoon (step 4) 2. Cupping the outer petals (step 8)
3. Bud; bud with 2 wrapped petals; bud with 4. Finished rose piece with sprayed rose
3 petals; bud with 5 petals
Techniques 429
Food Processor Modeling Chocolate Food processor modeling chocolate gives the chef
a faster alternative to traditional modeling chocolate. Using the food processor eliminates the
need for making the modeling chocolate and waiting for it to crystallize and then having to dry
it. Food processor modeling chocolate uses the friction of the food processor to melt the cocoa
butter to the point that it is malleable but still tempered. The chocolate has the consistency of
clay and is easily rolled into smooth shapes. It cannot be used for creating the delicate petals
of a rose because the chocolate crystallizes too quickly. Instead, it is used for larger showpiece
decorations like rollouts and loops.
There are two methods to making food processor chocolate. Solid tempered chocolate
can be placed directly in the food processor. Chocolate pistoles from the manufacturer work
best, as they arrive tempered and are uniform in size. The second method uses the formula
below with cocoa powder and cocoa butter. Using these methods has two advantages: There is
minimal preparation time and the chocolate crystallizes within 15 minutes of rolling.
White Food Processor Rollouts To make white chocolate rollouts, replace the cocoa
owder with potato starch. Cocoa butter colors can be added to the white chocolate mixture in
p
the food processor.
Note: Due to the inclusion of potato starch, the white chocolate rollout recipe cannot be used
in competitions.
Food Processor Rollout Method

1. Place ingredients or chocolate in food processor.
2. Mix until the chocolate forms a paste.
3. Knead on a wood table to make sure the all the paste is slightly melted. It should not stick
to the table, if it sticks to the work surface the cocoa butter has melted too much.
4. Roll the chocolate into a long rope. These can be even or tapered at one end. A piece of
cardboard can be used to smooth out and indentations left from fingers.
5. Quickly form the chocolate, as it will begin setting within minutes.
FIGURE 13.15a–c Food processor rollout method:
1. The consistency of chocolate in food 2. Rolling out the chocolate (step 4) 3. Finished piece with rollouts
rocessor (step 2)
p

Chocolate Pastillage
Chocolate pastillage is a relatively new medium used on chocolate showpieces. It is sim-
ilar to pastillage used on sugar sculptures, with the addition of cocoa powder. The use of
chocolate pastillage is restricted to display pieces, and not allowed in competitions. There are
many advantages to using chocolate pastillage on chocolate sculpture. It can be rolled thin-
ner than modeling chocolate and will dry completely. It holds the shape it is formed in and is
extremely light.
Chocolate pastillage can be shaped in the same way pastillage is shaped in Chapter 14. Once
the pieces have dried, they are attached to the showpiece using tempered chocolate. Spraying
the chocolate pastillage will give it a darker color, and it will blend with the rest of the piece.
Chocolate Flowers
Flowers made from chocolate provide a way to add color and lighten up a showpiece. Flowers,
like a modeling chocolate rose, mimic a real flower, while modern chocolate flowers can add
volume to a showpiece with minimal weight. Volume refers to the space the flower fills on
the piece. Flowers are open with thin petals; therefore, they minimize the amount of weight.
Petals can be positioned to create a swirling motion or placed straight and look more like an
explosion.
There are four techniques used to create flower petals: chablon, dipped-knife, cutout, or
scraped. A chablon is a thin mat that chocolate is spread on. This method creates petals of even
thickness that are thinned on the edges. The knife-dipped flowers use a paring knife, or any
long object, dipped into chocolate then placed on an acetate sheet. These petals can be left flat
or curved. Cutout petals are spread onto paper the same way pieces are cut out for structures,
only the chocolate is spread thinner, cut, and shaped. The scraped method uses round cutters
or scrapers to shape the chocolate directly off the marble table. All of these methods offer inter-
esting ways to create flowers, which can be small to as large as 12 in. (30 cm) across.
Chablon Method A chablon is a thin mat of rubber or flexible material with shapes cut out.
The thickness of the chablon will depend on the size of the final flower—the bigger the flower,
the thicker the mat will need to be. For most flowers, a mat that is 1⁄8 in. (3 mm) thick is good.
Equipment needed: Newsprint, chablon, piping bag, metal scraper, mold for shaping:
1. Place the chablon on a piece of newsprint.

2. Pipe a line of tempered chocolate on top of the chablon.
3. Drag the metal scraper across the top of the chablon. Do this only once.
4. Remove the chablon immediately after spreading.
5. Pick up diagonally opposite corner and tap the newsprint. This will smooth out the
chocolate.
6. Shape the chocolate petals and let them set in the mold.
7. Remove the petals from the newsprint and reserve for assembly.
Dipped-Knife Method The dipped-knife method uses a paring knife, offset pallet knife, or
painter’s knife (available at craft stores) to make the petals. The knife is dragged through the
tempered chocolate and then placed on an acetate sheet and shaped. Flowers can be with
twisting petals or several rows of multiple petals.
Equipment needed: Acetate strips, paring knife, mold for shaping:
1. Wipe a wet towel along the edge the table. Place the acetate strip on the wet table and
smooth. Use a clean, dry towel to remove excess water.
2. Dip the knife into tempered chocolate the full length of the blade and drag through the
chocolate.
Techniques 431
FIGURE 13.16a–c
Dipping the knife in the chocolate (step 2) Placing the knife on the acetate (step 3) Unmolded petals (step 6)
3. Place the chocolate-covered knife blade on the acetate sheet; do not press all the way
down to the plastic.
4. Lift the knife straight up and pull straight back. This will create a ridge on what will be the
inside of the petal, providing structural support.
5. Place the petals in the shaping mold and let the chocolate crystallize.
6. Remove the petals from the acetate and reserve for assembly.
Assembly of Chablon and Dipped-Knife Flowers Chablon and dipped-knife flowers

are assembled in the same way. They are attached to a s eries of spheres that will hold the
flower up, allowing for easy placement on the showpiece. This assembly will require two 1-in.
(2.5-cm) spheres and two 2-in. (5-cm) half spheres solid cast. One of the half spheres will be
used for assembling the flower, the other is attached to the showpiece as a mounting point for
the finished flower.
Equipment needed: Cold spray, 8 in. (20 cm) cake board, paper cornet:
1. Build the center of the flower, start with one of the half sphere on the bottom followed by
the two 1-in. (2.5-cm) spheres. Place the seams of the spheres vertically.
2. Once the spheres have crystallized fully, turn the assembly upside down and dip in
tempered chocolate, return to the cake board. This dipping solidifies the spheres, reducing
the possibility of breakage. It also creates a rough surface to attach the petals.
3. Begin placing the petals on the center. Dip the end of the petal in tempered chocolate and
place on the bottom of the top sphere. Use a quick shot of cold spray to attach the petal.
Continue placing a total of five petals in the first row. The first row of petals is strictly for
positioning purposes. It is a common mistake to begin placing the first row of petals too
close together to fill in the space between the petals. The remaining rows will be posi-
tioned between the openings of the previous row.
4. The second row of five petals is placed in between the petals from the first row and posi-
tioned so the tips of the petals are slightly lower. This will create an open flower. A flower
that is too open is associated with a flower that is past its prime and beginning to die.
5. Continue using the same method for attaching the third row of petals.
6. Freeze and spray the flower with colored cocoa butter.

FIGURE 13.17a–c
1. The stack of spheres, one dipped 2. Placing the first petals (step 3) 3. Series of the flower showing the progress
the other not (steps 1 and 2) of each row
7. The remaining half sphere is used to attach the flower to the showpiece. Place the half
sphere with the flat side facing out.
8. Warm the flat portion of the sphere with a heat gun and pipe a small amount of tempered
chocolate.
9. Pick the flower up from under to petals and press into place, quickly with a shot of cold
spray to set the chocolate.
Scraped Flower Method The scraped flower method creates a flower that closely resem-
bles a peony. The ruffled curls of the petal set this flower apart from the rest. When making
chocolate cigarettes, the chocolate demonstrates a certain flexibility before setting. The same
procedure is used to create flower petals using the scraped method.
Equipment needed: Round cutter, offset pallet knife, paper cornet, 8-in. (20-cm) cake
board, parchment paper square 6 in. (15 cm):
1. Spread tempered chocolate on a marble table. Be sure the chocolate is spread to an even
thickness.
2. Once the chocolate is beginning to set, test with the round cutter. The chocolate should
peel off the marble and still be flexible.
3. To scrape the petals, hold the side of the cutter closest to you with both hands. Pull the
cutter toward you while pressing down firmly. Lifting the cutter up will create a tight curl;
holding the back end down will create a more open curl. A tight curl is needed for the
center; the remaining curls will need to be open. Continue scraping the chocolate.
4. Let the curls crystallize before assembling the flower.
5. Place the parchment square on the cake board and pipe a dot of chocolate to attach the
flower center.
6. Begin building the flower around the center with small tighter curls, eventually opening to
the larger curls. Pipe chocolate on the paper to attach the petals.
7. Once the chocolate has crystallized, remove the flower from the paper before spraying
with colored cocoa butter.
Techniques 433
FIGURE 13.18a–d
Scraping the petals (step 2) Showing the scraped petals
Beginning to assemble the flower (step 6) The airbrushed finished flower
Additional Chocolate Techniques

Chocolate Rocks Creating texture on a showpiece that is primarily smooth adds visual
appeal to the piece. Chocolate Rocks, also referred to as chocolate concrete, adds color and
texture to the piece. The inclusion of sugar is acceptable for competition use, since sugar is an
ingredient in chocolate. To produce chocolate cement, the mixture is cast into a mold and then
scuffed to reveal the texture of the granulated sugar. For rocks, the mixture is rolled to an even
thickness. Once the mixture has crystallized, it is broken into pieces and scuffed, bringing out
the texture.

Chocolate Branches Creating organic forms in chocolate pieces can be challenging.
Organic forms are those with a natural look or flowing or curving appearance. There are no
commercial molds available to shape chocolate into twists and curves. These chocolate
branches are easily made using equipment in every kitchen.
Gelatin Molds
A showpiece can be built without the use of molds. However, there is a place and time for molds.
Custom molds take time to order and there is a price associated with them. A quick, temporary
mold can be created using gelatin. These molds are usually good for two moldings—then they
will begin to lose shape. Gelatin molds can used to cast three-dimensional molds of figurines
or bottles. Castings can also be made from shapes and placed inside molds to create a negative
impression. Gelatin molds provide the pastry chef a way to practice molding before moving on
to working with more expensive silicones.
When molding chocolate spheres with 1. The cocoa butter was not tempered when applied to
colored cocoa butter, the color does not the mold. Temper the cocoa butter before spraying
release from the mold. 2. The chocolate was too cool to release the cocoa
butter. Use tempered chocolate that is at the higher
end of the tempered range.
When making chocolate cigarettes the The chocolate has not set enough. Wait 30 seconds and
chocolate sticks to scraper instead of try again.
rolling up.
Cocoa butter spray on a showpiece The chocolate spray was not tempered and has bloomed.
begins to bloom after several weeks. Temper spray before applying.
When kneading modeling chocolate The cocoa butter was not fully emulsified in the modeling
there is a gritty texture. chocolate.
1. Cool the chocolate before adding the syrup.
2. Table the mixture longer to ensure emulsification.
Modeling chocolate is soft. There is not enough cocoa butter in the chocolate. Use a
higher cocoa percentage chocolate, or add some additional
cocoa butter.
When spraying velvet spray the spray 1. The chocolate was too cold when spraying. Take out of
comes off of the chocolate. the freezer sooner.
2. The spray was applied too heavily, and it flakes off.
Spray less chocolate the next time.
Chocolate pastillage is dry and not Add a small amount of water to pull the dough together.
coming together in the mixer.
Chocolate pastillage is too sticky. 1. The liquid may have been too hot when added, just
warm to dissolve the gelatin.
2. The recipe was not scaled accurately. Add additional
potato starch to get proper consistency.
Chocolate pastillage has small lumps. Gelatin was not bloomed and dissolved properly.
Techniques 435
Recipes
Cocoa Butter Spray Modeling Chocolate


Milk, White, or Dark Chocolate 7.1 oz 200 g Dark Chocolate 63% 2 lb 3 oz 1000 g
Cocoa Butter 3.5 oz 100 g Sugar 4.4 oz 125 g
Water 2.6 oz 75 g
Glucose Syrup 10.6 oz 300 g
Procedure
1. Combine chocolate and cocoa butter, and melt.

2. Strain through a warmed chinois; this will prevent the sprayer Procedure
from becoming clogged. 1. Combine sugar and water in a saucepan.
3. Cool to 88°F (31°C), spray is ready to use. 2. Melt chocolate and cool to 84°F (29°C). The cooler the chocolate
is, the better the emulsification between the syrup and
chocolate.
3. Heat the sugar and water to simmer; be sure all sugar is dis-
solved. Add the glucose syrup.
4. Combine the syrup with the melted chocolate and stir.
5. Pour the modeling chocolate onto a marble surface and table in
the same method as tempering. This cools the modeling paste
quickly and promotes crystallization.
6. After the modeling chocolate has been tabled and cooled suffi-
ciently, wrap tightly in plastic wrap.
7. Rest modeling chocolate for 2 hours at room temperature to
fully crystallize.

Dark Food Chocolate Pastillage
Processor Roll Outs
Portions: 1
Portions: 1
Yield description: 1 portion at 15 oz (450 g) Ingredients U.S. Metric
Ingredients U.S. Metric Powdered Sugar 1 lb 10 oz 735 g

Potato Starch 4.4 oz 125 g
Gelatin Sheets 7 each 7 each
Note: This formula produces a rollout that is stronger than the straight Cold Water 4.2 oz 120 g
chocolate rollout method. Glucose Syrup 0.9 oz 25 g
White Vinegar 0.5 oz 15 g
Additional Potato
Procedure
Starch for Dusting
1. Combine cocoa powder and cocoa butter in a food processor.
2. Mix until the friction of the food processor melts the cocoa Note: Chocolate pastillage is suitable for display pieces. It is not
butter. At this point, it will still be tempered. approved for use in most competitions. Refer to the rules before using.
3. Roll out to desired thickness and shape.
Procedure
1. Bloom gelatin in the cold water specified in the recipe.

2. Combine powdered sugar, potato starch, and cocoa pow
der and sift.
3. Combine the gelatin and water mixture with glucose syrup and
vinegar in a saucepan.
4. Warm gelatin mixture to dissolve gelatin, do not overheat.
5. Place dry ingredients in a mixer with paddle attachment.
6. While mixing on low, add wet ingredients to dry ingredients;
mix until combined.
7. Remove the mixture from the bowl and knead on a table dusted
with potato starch.
8. Wrap pastillage tightly in plastic wrap, then in a damp towel
and again in plastic wrap to prevent drying.
9. Allow pastillage to rest overnight before using.
Recipes 437
Chocolate Rocks
Yield: 1 lb 12 oz (800 g) FIGURE 13.19a–b

Portions: 1

Dark Chocolate 14.1 oz 400 g
Granulated Sugar 14.1 oz 400 g
Procedure
1. Combine melted dark chocolate and granulated sugar.

2. Cast into a mold or roll out between parchment paper to a uni-
form thickness; allow to crystallize.
3. Unmold and use a small wood rasp to scuff the chocolate.
1. Spreading the chocolate mixture
2. Scuffing the chocolate to reveal the texture

Chocolate Branches
Yield: 15 oz (450 g) FIGURE 13.20a–b

Portions: 1

Cocoa Butter, melted 5.3 oz 150 g
Procedure
1. Create a mold for the branch using a cylinder; size will vary,
depending on the final size needed.
2. Place plastic wrap on the cylinder and secure with tape.
3. Combine cocoa powder and melted cocoa butter, and place in
a pastry bag.
4. Pipe mixture over the plastic wrap in multiple passes.
5. Let the mixture crystallize for 2 hours at room temperature
before moving.
Piping the mixture (step 4)
Finished branch
Recipes 439
Gelatin Mold
Yield: 2 lb 5.3 oz (1110 g) Procedure

Portions: 1
1. Combine sugar and gelatin.
2. Add glucose to water and whisk in gelatin.
3. Bloom for 10 to 15 minutes; cover with plastic wrap.
Ingredients U.S. Metric 4. Heat gelatin in a double boiler until liquid.

5. Pour gelatin mixture into mold and refrigerate for 5 to
Gelatin Powder 5.9 oz 170 g
15 minutes. This will depend on the size of the mold.
Sugar 7.4 oz 210 g
6. Unmold and allow gelatin to warm to room temperature before
Glucose 1.8 oz 50 g filling with chocolate.Troubleshooting for Chocolate Work
Water 1 lb 7 oz 680 g
Note: If a firmer mold is needed, gelatin can be increased; to make the

mold softer, decrease the amount of gelatin. The gelatin mold can be
melted down and reused.
FIGURE 13.21a–d
1. Casting the gelatin 2. Removing the molded piece
3. Filling the gelatin mold with 4. Finished pieces made from

chocolate gelatin mold

Key Terms
Garnish Optimal viewing position (OVP) Food processor modeling chocolate
Structure Cutout method Chablon
Focal point Modeling chocolate Organic forms

1. What is the difference between optimal v iewing position and 4. What is the role of the base of a showpiece?
focal point? 5. What are the advantages and disadvantages of using chocolate to
2. What is the function of a chocolate garnish? create a showpiece?
3. When designing a showpiece, why is it important to assemble a
scale model from cardboard?

CHAPTER 14
Sugar Work
Dale Chihuly, the most celebrated glassmaker in the United States, was quoted saying, “I’m an
artist, a designer, a craftsman, interior designer, half architect. There’s no one name that fits
me very well.” Sugar work closely resembles glass work, and Chihuly’s work can be referenced
for innovative ideas in glass that have been replicated in sugar. Pastry chefs are more than just
chefs—they must be chef, artist, designer, architect, innovator, student, and teacher all at the
same time.
LEARNING OBJECTIVES

1. Cook sugar for casting, pulling, and blowing.
2. Make crystallized sugar and bubble sugar.
3. Assemble a showpiece from pastillage.
4. Demonstrate how to make a sugar rose.
5. Assemble a sugar showpiece.
6. Demonstrate how to cast, pull, and blow sugar.
Introduction to Sugar Work

Artistic showpieces constructed from sugar bear a strong resemblance to a sculpture made
from glass. Warmed sugar can be cast into forms, blown with air, or pulled and shaped by hand.
Sugar work can be found on elaborate competition showpieces, hotel lobby displays, or used
as a garnish on pastries. A small garnish on a plated dessert or a large showpiece, this fragile
medium will capture the attention of the guest and demonstrate the skill and artistry of the
pastry chef.
Sugar as a Medium for Sculptures and Garnishes

Sugar work is used primarily for decorative showpieces, but it also can serve the function of a
garnish on pastries. Thin, wispy hoops, ribbons, or even sugar roses can be used to decorate
wedding cakes and plated desserts. There are many forms of sugar that can be used for sugar
work. Granulated sugar is used to create the cast, blown, crystallized, and pulled components,
while powdered sugar is used to make pastillage.
Introducing textures into the sugar work can be achieved through the use of crystalline
sugar, pressed sugar, propagated sugar crystals, or even pressed brown sugar. The most
important area to consider when working with sugar is moisture. Many of the mediums used for
443
sugar work are hygroscopic, meaning they can readily absorb moisture from the air and direct
contact with water. High humidity will cause the sugar to become sticky and cause the sugar to
become dull and hazy, which could ultimately lead to the structural failure of the piece.
Cooking Sugar
In order to work with sugar, it must first be cooked. When it comes to showpieces, cooking sugar
holds as much importance as chocolate tempering. An inability to do both makes it difficult
to create the piece. Cooking sugar is not as easy as dropping a thermometer into the pan and
following directions. Mise en place of ingredients and equipment will facilitate the cooking of
sugar and assembling of a showpiece.
Guidelines
1. Cooked sugar is extremely hot and can cause serious burns, so it is critical to use extreme
caution when working with sugar. It is recommended to wear gloves when working with
sugar. The gloves can easily be removed if hot sugar gets on your hands.
2. Thoroughly clean all equipment and surfaces that will be used for cooking and working
with the sugar.
3. Calibrate the thermometer to ensure the sugar is cooked to the proper temperature.
Ingredients
Sugar
Sugar purity and cleanliness are two factors that must be considered when preparing to cook
sugar. Granulated sugar is available from two sources: cane and beet. While both are sucrose,
the higher quality and more pure sugar is cane and should be selected for cooking. The storage
of the sugar in the shop contributes to the cleanliness. A dry-ingredient storage bin containing
granulated sugar will also contain trace amounts of flours and other products in the pastry
shop. These contaminants could cause the sugar to crystallize or discolor during cooking.
A separate storage area for sugar used for cooking is recommended.
Granulated sugar is the low-cost alternative to using isomalt. When working with sugar,
avoid overheating the sugar under the heat lamp or working it too long. The sugar is less for-
giving than isomalt, and is prone to crystallize under these conditions. Crystallized sugar has
a cloudy appearance and will begin to form large sugar crystals. As the sugar crystallizes the
once pliable warm sugar will become solid even when warmed, this sugar should be discarded.
Isomalt
Isomalt is a sugar alcohol that is resistant to humidity and crystallization. It was first used as
a bulking agent in sugar-free candies. Isomalt has half the sweetness of granulated sugar, but
performs the same physical function as sugar in a recipe.
Resistance to crystallization and humidity make it ideal for sugar work. Isomalt can be
cooked to higher temperatures and maintain a clear or pure white due to its resistance to
browning. All of these benefits come at a cost, as isomalt is considerably more expensive than
granulated sugar. However, its benefits outweigh the cost.
Cooking time and amount of water may need to be adjusted to ensure all crystals are fully
dissolved during cooking. Be careful when increasing the quantity of water because boiling the
isomalt for an extended period of time will make the isomalt brittle.
444 C H A PT E R 1 4 Sugar Work

Water is the only additional ingredient added to the isomalt. It does not require any glucose
syrup or tartaric acid solution. When using isomalt, the same formula is used for pulling, blow-
ing, and casting. Another advantage of using isomalt is that it can be cooked repeatedly. If a
batch cooked for pulling contains crystals, more water can be added to this sugar and it can be
cooked again with no loss of quality.
Isomalt is cooked slightly higher than sugar, and will be more liquid when hot. Additional
cooling time is necessary for isomalt, but the same honey-like consistency should be used to
determine when to cast. All working techniques that are done with sugar can be done the same
way with isomalt.
Water
Water that is high in mineral content will discolor the cooked sugar or isomalt. As the water
evaporates during cooking, the minerals concentrate and may give the sugar a yellow tint.
Using distilled water will help to prevent this from occurring. Distilled water has many of the
impurities and nutrients removed from the water.
The formulas in this chapter contain specific amounts of water and sugar or isomalt.
The amount of water may need to be increased or decreased, depending on the strength of
the burner. Cooking sugar is not about speed. It is important that all the crystals dissolve. By
increasing the amount of water, the cooking time will be extended. When working with granu-
lated sugar, cooking time should not exceed 20 minutes. The longer the sugar boils, the more
likely it is to have a yellow tint.
Glucose Syrup
Glucose syrup is an inverted sugar produced through the hydrolysis (breaking down) of starch
from wheat, corn, or potato. The resulting syrup is used to prevent crystallization in the cooked
sugar. Too much glucose syrup can have a detrimental effect on the sugar, making it soft. When
cooking sugar formulas with glucose syrup, it must be added after the sugar is dissolved in the
water. If added too early, the sugar will not dissolve. It is not necessary to add glucose to isomalt.
Tartaric Acid
Acid is used when cooking granulated sugar to prevent crystallization and soften the sugar to
ease pulling. Including too much acid will make the sugar soft and sticky; too little will make the
sugar brittle. Tartaric acid is used when cooking sugar. The reaction of the acid is immediate,
and the acid can be added at the end of cooking. Tartaric acid is available in a white powder
form and must be dissolved in water prior to use.
Tartaric acid is not the same as cream of tartar. Cream of tartar is slower acting and must
be added at the beginning of cooking. It is not necessary to add tartaric acid to isomalt.
Color
Food coloring is added to the sugar during cooking. Liquid food colorings contain acid as a
preservative. The additional acid from the food coloring can weaken the cooked sugar. Water-
soluble powder colors are available in a wide variety of colors. The powder cannot be directly
added to the sugar, it must be dissolved in water or alcohol first.
Mise en Place for Cooking Sugar

Cooking sugar takes a great deal of preparation and attention to the process. Mise en place of
the workstation and ingredients will help to ensure a successfully cooked batch of sugar. This
includes thoroughly cleaning all equipment and work stations. Any contaminants, such as flour
or grease can cause the sugar to crystallize or become dull.
Cooking Sugar 445

Induction versus Gas Stoves
Many kitchens contain both induction and gas stoves, and there is a great deal of discussion
about which is better for cooking sugar. Induction technology requires special pans in order
to work, and these burners are more powerful than gas stoves. Induction burners provide a
constant heat source, and a great deal of temperature control can be achieved.
The heat of an induction burner is focused only on the bottom of the pan and does not
heat the sides, which is good and bad. Heating the sides of the pan can result in caramelizing
the sugar because the thin wall of the saucepan quickly transfers the heat. Although too much
heat up the side of the pan is not good, some heat is needed. A gas stove that heats the sides of
the pan will help dissolve sugar crystals along the sides of the pan.
The type of heat source used to cook the sugar is not as important as focusing on the tech-
nique of cooking. While the heat source and type of pan used may have an impact on how the
sugar cooks, the pastry chef ultimately controls the outcome. When working with new equip-
ment, conduct test batches to see what works best, check and record heat settings and times.
Once the cooking of the sugar has been mastered, the focus can be placed on the techniques
of pulling and blowing.
Casting Sugar
Cast sugar is made using granulated sugar, water, and glucose syrup. There is no additional
acid added to cast pieces to ensure these pieces are solid. Cast pieces provide the structural
support to the showpiece and do not require the flexibility needed for pulled and blown pieces.
Procedures for Casting Sugar

Cast sugar is used to create base and structural elements for showpieces. Sugar can be
cast into many shapes, using silicone noodles, metal bars, flexipans, silicone molds, and
metal cake rings. To create a bottom of the mold, these forms are placed on silicone mats
or vinyl sheets.
It is important that the casting surface is flat and level, so the casting is the same thickness
the entire length of the piece. Pieces that are cast flat can be rewarmed and bent to give more
dimension. To create more dramatic effects, using multiple colors when casting can enhance
cast components, creating a marbleized design. Inlays of airbrushed pastillage can be placed
inside clear cast sugar, creating a design that looks as if it is trapped in glass. This technique
also gives the pastillage a shiny finish.
Casting Method
Equipment needed: Rubber gloves, vinyl sheet, parchment paper, blowtorch, frame:
1. Place a sheet of parchment paper under the silicone mold, vinyl sheet, or silpat. If a silicone
mold is not available, use metal bars of metal cake rings to create the desired shape.
2. Cook the sugar and cool to a honey-like consistency, which will ensure that it is bubble
free. If the sugar is too cold, it will not flow into the mold evenly and will trap air and create
bubbles in the sugar. Pour the sugar into the mold, starting at one end. Slowly pour the
sugar until the mold is filled.
3. Quickly pass a blowtorch over the top of the piece, which will remove any surface bubbles.
4. Allow the piece to cool completely; a slightly warm piece will bend a little before cracking.
Once the sugar has set, a fan can be used to shorten cooling time.

5. Carefully remove the silicone mold from the sugar. If using a silpat or vinyl sheet, slide the
vinyl to the edge of the table and pull down. The vinyl will peel off of the sugar while leav-
ing the sugar flat. Turn the vinyl sheet and remove the other half of the cast piece from the
vinyl. Trying to lift the sugar off of the vinyl will break the sugar.
FIGURE 14.1a–c
Pouring the sugar into the mold (step 2) Blow torching to remove the bubbles (step 3) Removing the sugar from the silicone (step 5)
Casting into Vinyl Tubing Method

Casting sugar into vinyl tubing creates a perfect cylindrical tube of clear sugar. This method can
be used to create hoops and cylinders used for decoration or support. When cutting and shap-
ing temperature is critical. If the sugar is too hot, the tube will lose shape. Too cold and it will
snap, this can be remedied by placing the tube under the warming lamp.
Equipment needed: 5⁄8 in. inside diameter vinyl tubing, masking tape, pitcher, utility knife,
rubber gloves, 8-in. cake ring, parchment paper, silpat:
1. Warm the vinyl tube under a heat lamp until it becomes pliable. Warming the tube will help
the sugar to flow better.
2. Tape both ends of the tube to the side of the worktable, make sure it is secured well.
3. Transfer the cooked sugar to a pitcher. For this technique, the sugar needs to be thinner
than other casting methods.
4. Pour the sugar into the tube from one end, continuing until the tube is full.
5. Let the sugar cool until the tube is still flexible but not hard, at this point the sugar will not
run out of the ends of the tube.
6. Remove the tube from the table, use the box cutter and cut along the length of the tube.
7. Remove the sugar from the tube and shape around the cake ring.
8. Allow the ring to cool completely before moving.
9. Cut the tube to the desired length with a hot knife.
Casting Sugar 447

FIGURE 14.2a–d
Filling the tube with the sugar (step 4) Cutting the vinyl tube (step 6)
Shaping the sugar (step 7) The finished cooled tube
Casting into Sugar Method

Creating larger pieces and new shapes can sometimes be challenging when just starting out
working with sugar. Granulated sugar can be used to create a variety of organic shapes, with the
texture of the granulated sugar.
Equipment needed: stainless steel bowl or hotel pan, granulated sugar, rubber gloves:
1. Fill the stainless steel bowl 3⁄4 full with granulated sugar.
2. Create a form in the sugar using your hand.
3. Cast the liquid sugar.
4. Cover the cast sugar with the granulated sugar; be careful as the cast sugar is extremely hot.
5. Allow the sugar to cool until it is almost solid.
6. Carefully move the cast piece while it is still in the granulated sugar.
7. Let the piece fully cool and remove from granulated sugar.

FIGURE 14.3a–c Casting into sugar:
Creating the shape in the granulated sugar Casting the sugar (step 3) The finished piece
(step 2)
Bending Cast Sugar Method

Equipment needed: Silpat, warming lamp, form to shape sugar:
1. After the sugar has completely cooled, unmold and transfer to a silpat.
2. Place the silpat and sugar on the warmer or in a 160°F (70°C) oven.
3. As the sugar warms, it will become flexible, while maintaining the shape. The goal is to
warm the sugar and keep the clean edges.
4. Place the warmed sugar on the mold, in this case a rolling pin, and cool completely.
FIGURE 14.4a–b Bending cast sugar:
Sugar placed over rolling pin (step 4) Finished cooled piece
Casting Sugar 449

Procedures for Bubble Sugar
Bubble sugar can be produced through casting or by melting isomalt in the oven. Both methods
give slightly different looks. Bubble sugar provides a filler to showpieces to create volume, the
look of water to an underwater themed piece, or as abstract leaves.
Bubble Sugar Casting Method

Equipment needed: 2 half sheets of parchment paper, rubber gloves:
1. Crumple up one of the sheets of parchment and flatten out. The creases in the paper will
trap the air that will form the bubbles.
2. Pour sugar along one side of the crumpled paper.
3. Lift the paper so the sugar runs down; hold this over the other piece of parchment in case
some of the sugar drips off.
4. Let the sugar cool, then remove from the paper.
FIGURE 14.5a–c Bubble sugar casting:
Pouring the sugar on the crumpled paper Lifting the paper (step 3) The finished bubble sugar
(step 2)
Bubble Sugar Oven Method

Equipment needed: 2 half silpats, half sheet pan:
1. Place one silpat on the sheet pan and sprinkle with isomalt. At this point color can be
added by very lightly dusting the isomalt with powder food coloring.
FIGURE 14.6a–b Bubble sugar oven method:
Sprinkle isomalt onto silpat-lined sheet pan (step 1) Finished bubble sugar

2. Place the other silpat on top.
3. Bake in the oven at 350°F (175°C) for 10 minutes. Check to see that the isomalt has all
melted. If not, you will be able to see crystals through the silpat. If there are still crystals,
place back in the oven for 2 more minutes.
4. Allow the isomalt to cool before removing silpat.
Pulling and Blowing Sugar

Pulled and blown sugar is manipulated by hand to create delicate ribbons and flowers. Prop-
erly cooked sugar will maintain a brilliant shine and be free from crystals. This formula is the
same with the addition of the tartaric acid solution, which helps to increase the flexibility of the
sugar when it is warm and prevent crystallization.
When cooking sugar for pulling and blowing, it is important that the sugar cook for
approximately 20 minutes. The quantity of water and intensity of the heat can be adjusted
to reach the correct time. The quality of the sugar will also have an impact on the boiling
time. If cooked too quickly, the sugar crystals may not be fully dissolved before reaching the
final temperature. Due to the thin nature of pulled sugar elements, crystals can easily be seen.
When casting, the cooking time is not as important because these pieces tend to be thicker
and opaque.
Satinizing Sugar
Satinizing is the process of folding air into the sugar. This makes the sugar opaque and creates
the shine of pulled sugar. After cooking, the sugar is poured onto a silpat-covered marble slab
to decrease the cooling time. The cooling starts from the outside edge of the sugar while the
middle remains hot. When the edges of the sugar harden slightly, fold them into the center of
the hot sugar. Leaving this outer edge to cool completely before folding in can result in sugar
crystals in the pulled sugar. It is difficult to melt these crystals once they form; cooling the mass
of sugar in a uniform way will prevent this.
Sugar that is not satinized will have a glassy appearance. In the same way, overworking the
sugar or folding in too much air will cause the sugar to have a dull finish. The cooler the sugar
is, the better for satinizing. As the sugar cools it retains the air better, creating a more reflective
sugar. All colors can be satinized with the exception of black—incorporating air into black sugar
creates gray.
Satinizing Method
Equipment needed: Rubber gloves, scissors:
1. Fold the sugar over onto itself on the silpat to cool. Continue folding until the sugar no
longer moves but is still soft.
2. Roll the sugar into a cylinder.
3. Pick up the ends of the sugar, place one hand at each end.
4. Pull the sugar out from the center, fold in half and twist.
5. Pull again out from the center, fold, and twist again. Continue doing this until the sugar is
opaque and shiny.
6. Lay the sugar out flat and cut with scissors; completely cool the sugar.
7. Store the sugar in zippered plastic bags and reserve for pulling or blowing.

FIGURE 14.7a–d
Folding the sugar (step 1) Pulling the sugar (step 4)
Twisting to incorporate air (step 4) Finished satinized sugar
Pulled Sugar
Pulling sugar is an art form that relies on touch to determine when the sugar is the correct
temperature for creating ribbons, flowers, and other decorations. Practicing and perfecting the
skills are truly the only way to master them.
Sugar Ribbon Method

A sugar ribbon requires multiple colors of sugar to be heated to the same consistency. It is
critical that the different colors be consistent in feel so they will stretch at the same rate. It is
a delicate balance of temperature, warm enough to be pliable and connect when folded over,
but not too hot that the sugar loses the sheen. Work with single colored ribbons to get the feel
for temperature and learning the process. Once a good single-colored ribbon can be made, add
more colors.
Equipment needed: Heat lamp, knife, blowtorch, wet towel, rubber gloves:
1. Roll five pieces of colored satinized sugar into cylinders approximately 1 in. (3 cm) in diam-
eter and 5 in. (12.5 cm) long, and one piece of black sugar the same length and 1⁄3 in. (1 cm)
in diameter.
2. Lay the pieces side by side and connect them.
3. Pick up the ends of the ribbon, place one hand at each end.
4. Stretch the ribbon out from the center.
5. Fold the ribbon in half and connect in the middle.
6. Repeat the stretching and folding two more times.
7. Pull the ribbon out to the desired thickness and lay it flat on a marble table.

8. Using the blowtorch heat the knife to cut the ribbon. The knife must be hot enough to
cut through the sugar without discoloring the sugar or sticking. Wipe the knife on the wet
towel between cuts to clean the blade.
9. Rewarm the ribbon under the heat lamp, shape as needed.
FIGURE 14.8a–d
Lining up the sugar (step 2) Pulling out the strands (step 4)
Cutting with hot knife (step 8) Assorted ribbons
Sugar Rose Method

When making a sugar rose refer to a picture of a real rose. The goal is to capture the thin edges,
the shape, positioning and beauty of how the petals come together to form the flower. When
pulling a sugar rose be sure that each layer has odd numbers, to keep the rose round. When
moving from one row of petals to the next the petals should increase in size and become
more rounded.
Equipment needed: Sugar warmer, silpat, scissors, alcohol burner:
1. Shape a piece of sugar into a teardrop shape to form the center of the rose.
2. To pull the petals, stretch a thin edge on the sugar using two hands; this will give the flower
a delicate look.
3. Pinch the sugar between the thumb and index finger and pull out.
4. Cut the sugar off and position around the flower center.
5. The next row is composed of three petals, pulled slightly wider than the previous row.
The right edge of each of these petals will be curled back slightly.
6. Connect the petals by slightly melting the bottom over the burner.
7. The outer set of petals will need five petals. These petals have a more pronounced, cupped
shape formed by pressing the petal into the left palm with the right thumb. The top of the
petal is pinched in the center and the edges are curled out.
8. Connect the petals by slightly melting the bottom over the burner.

FIGURE 14.9a–d
Thinning the edge of the sugar (step 2) Pulling the petal with thumb and index finger (step 3)
Attaching the petal to the bud (step 4) One picture showing all the petals and layers of the
rose from bud to finished
FIGURE 14.10a–b
Placing the sugar in the press (step 3) Removing the sugar from the press (step 4)

Pressed Leaves Method
Silicone and metal molds can be used to give pulled sugar texture. These molds can replicate
a leaf or create a diamond pattern in the sugar. The extra lines pressed into the pulled sugar
create different angled surfaces to refract light. Pulled sugar that will be pressed can be pulled
slightly thicker, keeping it warm and flexible while in the press.
Equipment needed: Scissors, mold, warming lamp:
1. To pull the petals, stretch a thin edge on the sugar using two hands.
2. Pull the petal out and cut with scissors to the desired shape.
3. Quickly place the sugar on the press and close the mold; press firmly.
4. Remove the leaf and shape as desired.
Blown Sugar
Blown sugar, the most challenging of the three sugar working techniques, requires the use of a
pump to inflate the sugar to create hollow spheres, flowers, figurines, and fruits. When working
with blown sugar, it is important to understand the vital role of temperature. It is difficult to
state the temperature at which the sugar is ready to be placed on the pump. The complexity
of the piece and skill of the pastry chef must also be considered. A piece that is more complex
needs to be warmer, to allow for additional working time to shape the sugar. The same holds
true with a novice sugar worker—it will take longer to form the sugar and therefore it will need
to be warmer. Over time, you will build the skills to work with the sugar at a cooler temperature
and retain more of the shine.
Sugar blowing is not just about pumping air into sugar. As the air is blown into the sugar,
the pastry chef must shape the sugar. For example placing sugar on a pump and blowing in air
will not create a sphere. The air is pumped in slowly into the sugar; carefully watch the sugar to
see how it is expanding. Hold the piece at eye level and turn so you can observe all sides. Keep-
ing one hand on the pump and the other on the sugar will help to steady the sugar while still
being able to add more air if needed.
The sugar may start to slowly bulge on one side. This is due to the sugar being slightly thin-
ner and/or warmer. The thinner the sugar, the less resistance there is for the air to push it out-
ward. To control this, place a hand over the bulge. The temperature of your hand is lower than
that of the sugar and it begins to cool the sugar making it expand less. If the sugar is too cool, it
can be warmed slightly under the heat lamp to make it more flexible. After the piece has been
shaped, cool it completely using a fan or hair dryer that has a cool setting.
Placing Sugar on the Pump Method

Before placing the sugar on the pump, it is critical that the sugar temperature be equalized.
This can be done by folding the sugar to make sure the internal temperature matches the
external temperature. A consistent temperature will cause the sugar to expand at a more
even rate.
Equipment needed: Warming lamp, sugar pump, fan, scissors, rubber gloves, alcohol
burner:
1. Fold the sugar onto itself to equalize the temperature and smooth the outside of the
sugar.
2. Cut a ball off the edge of the sugar with room-temperature scissors (hot scissors will stick
to the sugar).
3. Press a finger into the bottom of the ball (cut end). Pushing too far will cause a thin spot to
form at the top of the sugar.

4. Warm the opening of the sugar over the alcohol burner and attach the sugar. Do not push
the end of the tube all the way into the sugar, as the tube will become clogged and the
sugar will not expand. Quickly press the sugar onto the tube.
5. Pump a little air into the sugar to be sure it is sealed.
FIGURE 14.11a–c Placing sugar on the pump:
Cutting the ball of sugar (step 2) Inserting a finger (step 3) Placing the sugar on the tube (step 4)
Blowing a Sphere Method

A sphere may look like a simple shape, but learning to blow a sphere is a foundational element
of blowing sugar. The simplicity of the shape makes it challenging, as any inconsistencies in
the sphere can be easily noted. The goal is to create a perfectly round sphere with walls of even
thickness. More advanced blown forms like fruit also start out as spheres.
burner:
1. After checking that the sugar is completely sealed on the tube, slowly pump a little air into
the sugar.
2. Check the sugar to see if it is expanding equally in all directions. If the sugar is expanding
too much in one area, cool it by placing your hand on the warm spot. Sugar that is too thin
will eventually cool and pop when more air is added. If the sugar is too thin, remove it from
the pump and start again.
3. When the sphere is expanding equally, pump in some more air.
4. Using your hand, begin pushing the sphere away from the tube; be careful to not pinch the
sugar close by the tube.
5. Use your hand to round the sphere.
6. Continue pumping air into the sugar until the desired size has been reached.
7. Completely cool the sphere.
8. To remove the sphere, warm the sugar near to the tube and cut with scissors.

FIGURE 14.12a–d Blowing a sphere:
Sliding the sugar up from the pump (step 4) Using a hand to round the sphere (step 5)
Continue filling the sphere with air (step 6) Finished sphere
Blown Sugar Flower Center

Blown sugar can be used to add volume to a showpiece. These larger pieces carry a visual
weight from the size of the piece. As a result of being hollow, they do not carry any physical
weight—therefore, the impact on the physical structure of the showpiece is low.
burner, blowtorch, knife, wet towel:
1. After checking that the sugar is completely sealed on the tube, slowly pump a little air into
the sugar.
2. Shape the sugar into a cylinder on the tube; add a small amount of air.
3. Pinch the top of the sphere about a quarter of the way down the cylinder. The sugar should
now look like a bowling pin.
4. Add some more air. While doing this, continue to work the sugar away from the pump. Pull-
ing the piece away from the pump will develop an elegant long piece. Adding air and not
pulling will result in a more rounded shape.

5. Hold the tube in one hand, and with the other pull the pinched piece out to elongate the
thinner portion.
6. Quickly cut the tip of the sugar off. The remaining heat will seal the sugar.
7. Continue pumping in air until the desired size is reached.
8. Remove the sugar from the tube and cut the thinner section with a hot knife.
FIGURE 14.13a–d
Elongating the sugar (step 3) Stretching out the pinched piece (step 5)
The blown piece attached to the blowing tube Finished piece
Crystalline Sugar
Sugar showpieces are characterized by their clarity, shine, and bright colors. Granulated sugar
and propagated crystals are ways to add texture and color to a showpiece. Granulated
sugar can be added to a showpiece by folding into pulled sugar, coating pulled or cast sugar,
or by pressing.
Pressed Sugar
Pressed sugar closely resembles the texture of a sugar cube. Granulated sugar is combined with
a small amount of water and pressed into a mold and allowed to dry.

Propagated Crystals
Propagated crystals are formed by submerging an item into a sugar syrup for several days or
weeks. A blown piece of sugar or a sculpted piece of shortening is coated in sugar and placed in
the sugar syrup. The submerged item forms a seed and attracts more sugar crystals to it. Over
a period of time the water in the container evaporates, increasing the sugar concentration and
causing the crystals to form at a faster rate. When the finished product is removed from the
syrup and allowed to dry it resembles rock sugar and can be used to decorate a showpiece.
Pastillage
Pastillage is used to create showpieces as well as accent pieces for a sugar showpiece. What
makes a sugar showpiece beautiful and attractive is the transparency of the cast pieces and
the sheen of pulled elements. Pastillage is used to add different textures and opacity to a sugar
showpiece through the use of very thin decorative elements with a flat finish. It is pure white
and can be easily painted or airbrushed. Pastillage can be rolled with a rolling pin and cut, tex-
turized, shaped on curved forms, hand rolled, or pressed into molds. Before use, the pastillage
must be fully dried. Thin pieces can dry within an hour, while larger pieces may take days.
Pastillage Cutout Method

Equipment needed: X-acto knife, vodka, potato starch sachet, templates, rolling pin:
1. Knead the pastillage to soften. This will make it easier to roll.

2. Roll the pastillage to the desired thickness. Pastillage is very strong when dry. Decorative
elements can be rolled thin and will dry quickly.
3. Dip the X-acto knife in the vodka and shake off excess. The alcohol will help the blade to cut
cleanly; any excess left on the pastillage will evaporate quickly.
4. Cut the pastillage using the templates.
5. Place the pastillage on foam to dry, or over molds to create bends.
6. Pastillage can be sanded if needed.
FIGURE 14.15a–c Pastillage cutout method:
Rolling (step 2) Cutting (step 4) Finished pastillage
Pastillage 459
FIGURE 14.16a–b Pastillage rollout method:
Rolling (step 2) Finished assorted rollout shapes
Pastillage Rollout Method

Equipment needed: Paring knife, cake board:
1. Knead the pastillage to soften. This will make it easier to roll.

2. Roll out a small piece of pastillage so it is tapered at one end.
3. Use the cake board toward the end of rolling to remove any marks left from fingers.
4. Trim the end of the pastillage and shape immediately.
Pastillage Rock Method

Pastillage can be used to create shapes other than by rolling and cutting. Sculpting can also
be used to shape pastillage. A simple form to sculpt is rocks. More complex figurines and ani-
mals can be made as well, but work must be done quickly before the pastillage dries out and
begins to crack.
FIGURE 14.17a–d Pastillage rock method:
Pastillage rocks being Water being applied (step 3) Dipping the rocks (step 5) Finished piece with rocks
airbrushed (step 2)

Equipment needed: Airbrush, brush, dipping fork, silpat:
1. Shape pastillage with your hands into smooth river-rock shapes.

2. After the pastillage has dried, airbrush with two to three colors.
3. Apply water to rocks using a paintbrush; allow to dry.
4. Warm up clear sugar, the sugar needs to be hot and free of bubbles.
5. Dip the pastillage into the sugar, using the fork transfer the rock to the silpat.
Assembling Pastillage
Before assembling a pastillage piece, be sure that the pastillage is completely dry and free of
any dust from rolling or sanding. There are three methods that can be used to attach pastillage:
royal icing, cooked sugar, or pastillage glue. Royal icing is a mixture of egg whites and powered
sugar that dries hard. In addition to gluing, it can be used for decorative string work or piping
on a sugar piece. Microwaving pastillage to a liquid state makes pastillage glue. Both pastillage
glue and cooked sugar will set very quickly.
Sculpture Design
Designing a sculpture from sugar is similar to designing a piece from chocolate. Both mediums
have several similarities: structural shape, importance of color, focal point, OVP, and incorpo-
rating theme. What really sets a sugar piece apart from chocolate is the use of transparent or
clear sugar. A strong sugar piece can be created, and using clear sugar will make parts of the
piece appear to float while being firmly connected.
Structure Design
Base
The bases of a sugar piece can be made from cast sugar or pressed sugar. The overall height of
the piece needs to be considered when creating the base. A tall, slender showpiece with a small
base will need enough weight to anchor the piece and prevent it from falling over. For larger
pieces, it is important to remember that the base should include elements of the theme and not
just be a supporting piece. Hot sugar can be used to attach the showpiece to the display base,
providing additional support.
Structure
Sugar pieces follow the same structural shapes as were discussed in Chapter 13 on page 389,
J, C, E, S and straight line. There are some differences in how the structure can be assembled,
taking advantage of the clarity of the sugar. Rather than casting one large thick piece, multiple
panes of sugar can be cast and spaced apart. Using this approach gives the piece the stability
and strength needed. It also enhances the design of the piece; the empty space between the
cast sugar adds to the lightness of the piece.
Incorporating Design in the Structure

The clarity of the sugar provides another way to incorporate the theme of the showpiece into
the structure. Pastillage can be cut, painted, and airbrushed to incorporate theme elements
into the structural pieces. Placing silicone molds or vinyl cutouts down before casting the sugar
will create a negative impression in the backside of the sugar. Using vinyl will make the design
clear; silicone will create small bubbles in the sugar.

Color
When working with color on sugar work, refer to “Color” in Chapter 13 on
pages 390–392. The rules of selecting color apply the same way. When working
with sugar, many shades of the same color can be used on the same piece. An
attractive piece can be created using only white and various shades of pink,
this would be difficult to achieve with chocolate colors. Structural pieces can be
cast in lighter shades of pink, then moving to darker shades of pink and white
within the flowers. When working with color, experiment with the colors each
time the piece is practiced to see what works and what does not.
A batch of casting sugar can be colored with a few drops of blue, just giving
it a light tint, so it will resemble a pane of glass. Adding additional blue will con-
tinue to deepen the color. The sugar can be made opaque by adding titanium
dioxide along with the blue. When adding color to pulling sugar, the color must
be strong. As the sugar is satinized, the color will lighten. It is better to have dark
pulled sugars that can be lightened by mixing with other pulled sugar. White
pulled sugar does not have any color added; the air that is worked into the sugar
makes it opaque.
Assembly
Assembling sugar pieces requires a great deal of care to make sure that the
pieces are affixed properly. Sugar pieces are very strong when bonded properly.
Both pieces need to be warmed to create a solid fusion.
It is important to consider temperature when attaching sugar pieces. A
piece that was made a day prior to assembly or one that is in a cold room will
be more fragile than one that was just cast. The heat of a torch is extremely hot
compared to a room-temperature piece of sugar. This amount of heat can cause
FIGURE 14.18 Cast sugar with a lot of blue (top), areas of the sugar to expand while others do not—this is called thermal shock.
a piece with a few drops of blue (center), a piece of The cracks may not be visible but may be heard during assembly. This will
the blue with titanium dioxide added (bottom) weaken the structure of the piece. To prevent this from happening, the pieces
can be warmed slightly under a heat lamp.
Assembling Sugar Method

Equipment needed: Silpat, small torch:
1. Place the pieces being assembled on a silpat. When assembling pieces, there may be
enough heat to melt a piece and have it stick to the worktable.
2. Test-fit the pieces to see where the sugar will need to be heated.
3. Pull a thread of sugar the length of the pieces being attached.
4. Warm the edge of the sugar and place the pulled sugar thread. This small thread will help
to fill any low spots in the seam and make the connection stronger.
5. Heat both pieces of sugar where they will connect. A small butane torch makes it easier to
direct the heat directly where it is needed. Overheating the sugar will cause it to drip.
6. Quickly place the warmed areas together; press firmly to make sure the connection is solid.
Pressing too hard may crack the sugar.
7. Use a fan to blow cool air on the seam.
Sugar is difficult to work with in humid environments and will not only stick to your gloves
but also to itself. Sticky sugar can create the feeling that the pieces are properly attached but
then they will fall apart shortly after. When melting sugar to attach a piece, the sugar should
begin to bubble but not drip. Doing this with both surfaces will ensure a solid connection.

FIGURE 14.19a–c
Placing the thread on the sugar (step 4) Melting the thread (step 5)
Placing the pieces together (step 6)
Component Inventory
When designing a showpiece, it is important to get the ideas down on paper. After the sketch
is completed, the design moves into the next phase. Utilizing different techniques and compo-
nents in the piece will help to create a more interesting piece.
Component Inventory for Sugar Showpieces

Cast Pulled Blown
Pressed Sugar Vinyl Tubes Bent
Pastillage Ribbon Molded

When designing a sculpture, it is important to take into consideration what is truly needed
and what is not. The hardest skill to learn in designing a showpiece is editing. Not every item on
the component needs to be included in the design.
Troubleshooting for Sugar Work
Sugar has a yellow tint. 1. The flame was too high and sugar on the edge of the pan
caramelized. Use a smaller pan or reduce heat.
2. The sugar cooked for too long. Turn the heat up slightly to reduce
cooking time.
3. There were minerals in the water. Use filtered water for
cooking sugar.
Sugar is sticky. 1. Too much acid. Decrease amount for next batch.
2. Sugar was not cooked to the correct temperature. Calibrate
thermometer and cook another batch.
Sugar is dull. 1. There were impurities in the sugar. Be sure to skim the sugar
when cooking.
2. Sugar was too hot when pulled. Allow the sugar to cool more before
satinizing.
Crystals can be seen The sugar did not fully dissolve. Let the syrup sit for 24 hours
in the sugar. before cooking.
Sugar piece collapses. 1. Too much acid was added to the sugar. Decrease the
amount of acid.
2. Sugar was not cooked to the proper temperature. Calibrate
thermometer and cook another batch of sugar.
Sugar is brittle. 1. Not enough acid. Increase the amount of acid.

2. Sugar was cooked too high. Calibrate thermometer and cook
another batch of sugar.
Crystals can be seen 1. Isomalt was not cooked long enough. Increase the amount of water
in isomalt. and cook the isomalt again.
2. Heat was too high. Reduce heat and cook slower
to dissolve crystals.
Isomalt is brittle and hot When cooking, the isomalt boiled too long. Increase the heat and cook
when pulling. the isomalt again.

Recipes
Isomalt Tartaric Acid Solution

Portion size: 3 lb 6 oz (1550 g) Portion size: 4 oz (120 g)
Yield Description: 1 portion at 3 lb 6 oz (1550 g) Yield Description: 1 portion at 4 oz (120 g)

Isomalt Type M 2 lb 3.3 oz 1000 g Tartaric Acid Powder 2.1 oz 60 g
Note: Total water can be increased to 9 oz (250 g). When pulling or Note: Tartaric acid solution can easily crystallize. All containers should
blowing isomalt, some undissolved crystals may be present during the be thoroughly cleaned before using. After storage, the solution may
satinizing of the isomalt. This can result from the isomalt being cooked begin to crystallize. If this occurs, discard the solution.
to quickly. Since all stoves do not have the same intensity, adjustments
may need to be made to the level of heat, amount of water, or cooking
time. This will ensure that all isomalt crystals have fully dissolved. Procedure
1. Scale the tartaric acid and place in a container.

Procedure 2. Boil more water than needed, after the water has boiled scale
the required quantity directly into the tartaric acid.
1. Place water in a heavy-bottom saucepan.
3. Store the Tartaric Acid Solution in a glass dropper bottle.
2. Add a small amount of the isomalt and stir until dissolved.
3. Gradually add more isomalt; using this method will cook the
isomalt faster than adding it all in the pan at the beginning.
4. Use cold water to clean any isomalt crystals off the sides
of the pan.
5. Add food coloring once all isomalt is dissolved.
6. Cook to 330°F (165°C).
7. Immediately shock the pan in ice water to prevent carry
overcooking.
8. When the isomalt is free of bubbles and it has a honey-like
consistency, it is ready for casting.
Recipes 465
Sugar for Casting Sugar for Pulling and Blowing

Yield Description: 1 portion at 3 lb 6 oz (1550 g) Yield description: 1 portion at 3 lb 8 oz (1600 g)

Granulated Sugar 2 lb 3.3 oz 1000 g Granulated Sugar 2 lb 3.3 oz 1000 g
Glucose Syrup 7.1 oz 200 g Glucose Syrup 7.1 oz 200 g
Tartaric Acid Solution 10 drops 10 drops
Procedure
1. Combine sugar and water in a heavy-bottom saucepan. Warm Procedure

slowly to dissolve sugar. 1. Combine sugar in water in a heavy-bottom saucepan. Warm
2. Once the sugar is dissolved add the glucose syrup and slowly to dissolve sugar.
continue cooking. 2. Once the sugar has dissolved, add the glucose syrup and boil.
3. Skim the surface with a tea strainer to remove any impurities. 3. Skim the surface with a tea strainer to remove any impurities.
4. Using a clean brush and cold water, clean the sides of the pan 4. While the sugar syrup is still hot, cover the pan with plastic
to remove any crystals that may have formed. wrap and allow the syrup to rest for 24 hours at room tempera-
5. Continue cooking and add color at 285°F (140°C). To create ture. Resting the syrup overnight will help dissolve any remain-
opaque cast sugar, combine titanium dioxide with water and ing sugar crystals.
add to the sugar. 5. Bring the syrup to a boil and clean the sides of the pan, using a
6. Cook the syrup to 320°F (160°C). clean brush and cold water.
7. Immediately shock the pan in ice water to prevent carryover 6. Add the Tartaric Acid Solution. Continue cleaning the pan as
cooking. needed with the brush.
8. When the sugar is free of bubbles and the sugar has a honey- 7. Add colors at 285°F (140°C); adding the color too early in the
like consistency, it is ready for casting. cooking process may change the color.
8. Cook the syrup to 320°F (160°C).
9. Immediately shock the pan in ice water to prevent carry-
over cooking.
10. Pour the syrup onto a silpat.

Pressed Sugar

Portions: 1
1. Combine sugar and water; mix to a wet sand consistency.
2. Fill mold and pack the sugar into the mold.
3. Scrape the bottom of the mold to remove excess sugar.
Ingredients U.S. Metric 4. Carefully unmold immediately.

5. Allow pressed sugar to dry completely 2 to 3 days.
Granulated Sugar 1 lb 1.6 oz 500 g
Water 1.8 oz 50 g
Note: Powder color can be added as needed to the water.
FIGURE 14.14 Assorted pressed sugar
Recipes 467
Pastillage Royal Icing

Yield description: 1 portion at 2 lb 8 oz (1160 g) Yield Description: 1 portion at 1 lb 5 oz (600 g)

Powdered Sugar 1 lb 12 oz 800 g Powdered Sugar 1 lb 1.6 oz 500 g
Potato Starch 7.1 oz 200 g Egg Whites 3.5 oz 100 g
Gelatin Sheets 7 each 7 each Cream of Tartar 0.02 oz 0.5 g
Cold Water 4.2 oz 120 g
Glucose Syrup 0.9 oz 25 g Note: Increasing egg whites will create a looser icing; decreasing will
produce a stiffer icing.
White Vinegar 0.5 oz 15 g
Additional Potato Starch,
for dusting Procedure
1. Sift dry ingredients into a mixing bowl.

2. Using the paddle attachment, start mixing on low while adding
Procedure egg whites.
3. Continue mixing until the desired consistency is reached and
1. Bloom gelatin in the cold water.
icing is smooth.
2. Sift powdered sugar and potato starch.
4. To store royal icing, cover the surface with a moist towel, then
3. Combine the gelatin and water mixture with glucose syrup and wrap tightly with plastic wrap.
vinegar in a saucepan.
4. Warm gelatin mixture to dissolve gelatin, do not overheat.
5. Place dry ingredients in a mixer with paddle attachment.
6. While mixing on low, add wet ingredients to dry ingredients;
mix until combined.
7. Remove the mixture from the bowl and knead on a table dusted
with potato starch.
8. Wrap pastillage tightly in plastic wrap, then in a damp towel,
and again in plastic wrap to prevent drying.
9. Allow pastillage to rest overnight before using.

Key Terms
Hygroscopic Bubble sugar Pastillage
Isomalt Satinizing Royal icing
Glucose syrup Pulled sugar Thermal shock
Tartaric acid Blown sugar
Cast sugar Propagated crystals

1. Why is glucose added after the sugar has dissolved? 4. What are the benefits of using isomalt for sugar work?
2. Describe the process of satinizing sugar. 5. What are the structural shapes that are used for sugar pieces?
3. What is the purpose of tartaric acid in pulled sugar?

Index
A Banana mousse glacé, 173 production stages, 37–42
Aerated confections, 375 Banana pâte de fruit, 378 proofing, 41
Aerators, 129–131 Bananas in lime juice, 277 scoring, 41
Agar, 90 Banana tart, 276–277 sour starters for, 31, 32–33
Agar recipes, 100–101 Bases, cake, 210 spiral mixers for, 12
bakeproof raspberry jam, 101 Bâtards, 40 troubleshooting for, 42
dehydrated curd, 100 Batch freezers, 155–156 Bread recipes, 43–54
milk chocolate mousse, 100 Bavarian method, 133 baguette, 43, 45–46
pliable ganache, 101 Bavarian recipes: beer, 45–46
Airbrushes, 10 gianduja, 296 chocolate cherry, 51
Air compressors, 10 pumpkin, 288 ciabatta, 46
Air tools, 10 vanilla, 134, 139 cottage cheese dill, 49
À la minute, 276 Bear claws, 73, 80 egg wash, 49
Albumin, 130 Beer bread, 45–46 focaccia, 44
Alcohol wick burners, 10 Bench proofing, 40 honey wheat, 49
Allergies, food, 9 Biga, 34 kalamata thyme, 44
All-purpose flour, 23 Biga recipes: multigrain, 47
Almond cream recipe, 80 ciabatta, 46 pizza, 52
Almond dacquoise, 199 multigrain bread, 47 potato onion, 52
Almond paste, stollen, 77 Biological contamination, 7–9 pretzel, 47–48
Amaretto ice cream, 283 Bird of paradise cake, 222–224 raisin walnut sour, 53
Angel food cake, 194 Biscotti, 337 rye sour starter, 53
Angel food method, 186, 188 Black pepper meringue, 295 semolina, 51
Animal-based hydrocolloids, 87–89 Blancmange, 124 sourdough, 50
Antifreezing power (AFP), 149–150 Blast chillers, 16–17 sour rye, 53–54
Apple chips, 286 Blast freezers, 16 sour starter, 50
Apple cider granita, 178 Blenders, 86 Brioche, 57
Apple consomme plated dessert, 284–286 Blind baking, 252–253 loaf, 74
Apple pectin gel, 285 Blitz puff pastry, 68, 82 recipe, 78
Apple pie, old-fashioned, 257 Bloom, Oscar, 88 Brioche mixing method, 34–35
Apples, compressed, 284 Blooming gelatin, 88–89 Brittle, coconut macadamia, 383
Apples, sous vide poached, 358 Bloom strength, 88–89 Brix, 152–153
Apple tart, 284–285 Blown sugar, 425, 429–432 Bromelain, 88
Apricot caramel, 363 Blown sugar recipe, 440 Brown butter ice cream, 169
Apricot crème fraiche, 362 Blowtorches, 10 Brown butter nuggets, 114
Apricot glaze, 109 Bombe, 166 Bubble sugar, 424–425
Apricot milk chocolate entremets, 236 Bonbons, 353. See also Chocolates; Buffet presentation, 366
Apricot passion pâte de fruit, 377 Confections Bulk fermentation, 38
Apricots, roasted, 238 Bonbons, liquor, 384 Butter:
Apricot sorbet, 176 Bottom-to-top method, 211 in breads, 26
Apricot tart, 299–301 Branches, chocolate, 403, 407 compared with other fats, 6
Attitude, 4 Bread pudding, 128 in ganache, 354
Autolyse mixing method, 35 Breads, 20–55 salted vs. unsalted, 26
baking, 41 in Viennoiserie, 59
B bulk fermentation, 38 Buttercream recipes, 199
Bacteria, temperatures encouraging cooling, 41 chocolate, 200
growth of, 8–9 dividing, 39 coffee, 348
Baguette, 40 dough handlers, 13–14 pistachio crunch, 360
Baguette recipe, 43 enriched, 67–68 Butter ganache, 353, 356
Bakeproof raspberry jam, 101 final shaping of, 40–41 Buttermilk panna cotta, 139
Baker’s percentages, 26–30 folding, 38–39
calculating, 27–30 importance of, 21 C
definition of, 27 ingredients and their functions in, 21–26 Cake flour, 23
Baking powder, 183–184 ingredient scaling for, 38 Cakes, 180–189
Baking soda, 183–184 ingredient selection for, 37 assembling, 202–216
Banana, caramelized, 290 intermediate fermentation of, 40 categories of, 184–188
Banana and chocolate plated dessert, 288–290 math for making, 26–32 coating, 215
Banana cake, 289 mixing, 38 contemporary, 209–214
Banana chips, 289 mixing degrees, 35–37 fillings, 204–205
Banana creméux, 243 mixing methods, 34–35 frozen components in, 215
Banana glaze, 244 preferments, 34 garnishes, 204, 215
Banana lime entremets, 240–244 preshaping, 39 glacé, 214–216
INDEX 471
glazing, 214 yellow cake, 190 Chocolate mousse tart, 278–279

guidelines for, 184–185 yogurt panna cotta, 239 Chocolate pain de genes, 195
high-fat, 185 Calvel, Raymond, 35 Chocolate pastillage, 405
icing, 204, 205–207 Candied citrus peel, 337 Chocolate pastry cream, 346
ingredients, 181–184 Candied sunflower seeds, 353 Chocolate peanut glacé, 217
leaveners in, 183–184 Cappuccino semifreddo, 173 Chocolate plaquettes, 383
low-fat, 186–188 Caramel, apricot, 363 Chocolate pot de crème, 143
splitting, 204, 205 Caramel, dry, 113 Chocolate recipes, 362–384
troubleshooting for, 189, 216 Caramel creméux, 235, 285 nougat, 382
wedding, 207–209 Caramel glaze, 236 Chocolates, 353–354
Cake recipes, 190–200, 217–244 Caramel peanut ice cream, 218 Chocolate sauce, 291
almond dacquoise, 199 Caramel popcorn, 301 Chocolate spheres, 383–385
angel food, 194 Caramel sauce, 290 Chocolate streusel, 238
apricot milk chocolate entremets, 236 Carbonated coco, 116 Chocolate triangles, 386–387
banana creméux, 243 Carrageenan, 90–91 Chocolate work, 381–409
banana glaze, 244 Carrageenan recipes, 102–103 chocolate selection for, 382
banana lime entremets, 240–244 chocolate gel, 103 garnishes, 381, 382–388
bird of paradise, 222 olive oil gel, 102 introduction to, 381
buttercream, 199 peanut butter panna cotta, 102 piped, 387
caramel creméux, 235 Carrot cake, 192, 225 sculpture, 388–395
caramel glaze, 236 Carryover cooking, 121 techniques, 395–403
caramel peanut ice cream, 218 Cast sugar, 420–423 troubleshooting for, 403
carrot cake, 192, 225 Cast sugar recipe, 440 Chocolate work recipes, 404–408
cherry coulis, 224 Celiac disease, 183 chocolate branches, 407
chocolate brioche, 218 Chablon method, 399, 400–401 chocolate pastillage, 405
chocolate buttercream, 200 Chantilly, stabilized, 259 chocolate rocks, 406
chocolate cake, 190 Cheesecake, 126, 128, 144 cocoa butter spray, 404
chocolate flourless, 356 Cheesecake recipes, strawberry, 295 dark food processor roll outs, 405
chocolate genoise, 192 Chemical contamination, 7 gelatin molds, 408
chocolate glaze, 219 Cherry chocolate verrines, 354–356 modeling chocolate, 404
chocolate mango creméux, 230 Cherry coulis, 224 Churned frozen desserts, 155–165
chocolate mirror glaze, 231 Cherry granita, 177 dairy-based, 157–161
chocolate pain de genes, 195 Cherry pie, 258 methods for, 162
chocolate peanut glacé, 217 Cherry sorbet, 177 serving, 165
cholate streusel, 238 Chiboust, 130, 133 sorbet method, 162–165
coconut biscuit, 242 Chiboust, passion fruit, 138 Ciabatta recipe, 46
coconut dacquoise, 199 Chiffon method, 186, 188 Cigarettes, chocolate, 382–383
cream cheese frosting, 199 Chihuly, Dale, 417 Cinnamon crème anglaise, 287
crispy hazelnut base, 234 Chocolate, 343–385 Cinnamon parfait, 287
décor paste, 197 buttercream, 200 Cinnamon rolls, 78, 79
devil’s food, 191 enrobers, 345 Cinnamon smear, 79
flourless chocolate, 234 equipment for, 343–345 Citron, 347
genoise, 192 ganache, 354–361 Citrus curd, 139
hazelnut dough, 229 manufacturing, 345–347 Citrus mousse, 137
high ratio, 191 percentages of, 347–349 Clafoutis, 144
jaconde, 196 tempering, 349–353 Clarification, gelatin, 97
japonaise, 194 tempering machines, 344 Cleanliness:
lady finger biscuit, 193 troubleshooting for, 374 cross contamination and, 9
lime curd, 243 warmers, 343–344 pastry shop, 5
lime streusel, 242 wraps, dark, 362 uniforms, 4–5
mango chocolate entremets, 228–232 Chocolate brioche cake base, 218 work area, 4–5
mango curd, 230 Chocolate buttercream, 200 Clear flour, 23
milk chocolate blood orange Chocolate cake, 190 Coagulation, 119–121
entremets, 232–234 Chocolate cherry bread, 51 Coco, carbonated, 116
milk chocolate mousse, 235 Chocolate cigarettes, 382–383 Cocoa butter spray, 395, 404
orange chiffon, 196 Chocolate creméux, dark, 302 Coconut biscuits, 242
pain de genes, 194–195 Chocolate curls, 387 Coconut dacquoise, 199
peach melba charlotte, 227 Chocolate-dipping forks, 10–11 Coconut financiers, 293
pistachio dacquoise, 221 Chocolate flourless cake, 356 Coconut macadamia brittle, 383
pistachio parfair, 221 Chocolate gel, 103 Coconut rice pudding, 141
roasted apricots, 238 Chocolate genoise, 192 Coconut sorbet, 176
roulade, 193 Chocolate glaze, 219 Coffee buttercream, 348
sacher biscuit, 195 Chocolate ice cream, 167 Coffee caviar, 110
strawberry lemon, 226 Chocolate mango creméux, 230 Coffee marsala syrup, 275
strawberry pistachio glacé, 220 Chocolate meringue, 356 Coffee syrup, 348
tres leches syrup, 200 Chocolate mirror glaze, 231 Coffee tart, 290–292
tropical glaze, 224 Chocolate mousse, 135 Color wheel, 391
472 Index
Combi ovens, 16, 86, 126 caramel, 235, 285 in Viennoiserie, 58

Conching, 347 chocolate mango, 230 Egg wash, 49
Confections, 343, 374–385 chocolate raspberry, 283 ElBulli, 85
aerated, 375 dark chocolate, 302 Emulsifiers, 155
crystalline, 374 eggless white chocolate, 141 Emulsion, 129
jellies, 375 pistachio, 268 Encapsulation, 94
noncrystalline, 375 vanilla, 140 English cream, 274
Confection recipes, 377–384 Crepes, 292 Enriched breads, 67–68
apricot passion pâte de fruit, 377 Croissant, 57, 67, 71 Enrobed ganache, 358
banana pâte de fruit, 378 fats added in, 59 Enrobing, 358, 359–361
chocolate nougat, 382 whole wheat, 70 Entremets, 209–214
coconut macadamia brittle, 383 Croissant recipes, 70 Entremet recipes:
liquor bonbon, 384 Cross contamination, 9 apricot milk chocolate, 236
marshmallow, 380 Crumb coats, 205–206 banana lime, 240–244
nougat, 382 Crumb crusts, 250 mango chocolate, 228–232
raspberry pâte de fruit, 378 Crystalline confections, 374 milk chocolate blood orange,
tartaric acid solution, 379 Crystalline sugar, 432–433 232–234
toffee, 383 Curds, 124 Equipment, 11–18
Connecting pieces method, 394 Curd recipes: for chocolate, 343–345
Convection ovens, 15–16 citrus, 139 dough handlers, 13–14
Cornstarch mold method, 375–376 dehydrated, 100 food processors, 17–18
Cottage cheese dill bread, 49 lime, 243 freezers, 16–17
Coulis, 215 mango, 230 mixers, 11–12
Couverture, 347–348, 382 Curls, chocolate, 387 modern pastry, 86–87
Cranberries, poached, 281 Custards, 119–128 ovens, 14–16
Cranberry orange tart, 280–281 baked, 120, 125–128
Cranberry orange tart brûlée, 281 egg-based, 122–124 F
Cream, whipped, 129–130 eggs in, 119–121 Fat bloom, 375
Cream cheese dough, 256 non–egg-based, 124–125 Fats:
Cream cheese filling recipe, 81 stirred, 120, 122–124 in bread, 25, 26
Cream cheese frosting, 199 testing for doneness, 126 in cakes, 182
Cream ganache, 353, 354–355 troubleshooting for, 134 in pie dough, 5–6
Creaming, 185, 249–250 Cutout method, 393–394, 433 in pie/tart doughs, 248
Creams, 118–145, 129–134 in Viennoiserie, 59
in cakes, 210 D Fermentation:
Dacquoise recipes:
stabilizers, 131–132 bulk, in bread, 38
almond, 199
troubleshooting for, 134 intermediate, in bread, 40
coconut, 199
Cream recipes, 138–144 Film, thin, 112
pistachio, 221, 269
buttermilk panna cotta, 139 Financier recipes:
Dairy products, 154
cheesecake, 144 coconut, 293
Danish, 59, 67, 72, 73
chocolate pot de crème, 143 hazelnut, 338
Danish recipes, 70
citrus curd, 139 Fish, allergies to, 9
Deck ovens, 14
clafoutis, 144 Flaky pie doughs, 250
Décor paste, 197
coconut rice pudding, 141 Flan, 127
Dehydrated curd, 100
crème anglaise, 143, 274 Flan recipe, 140
Dehydrators, 86, 87
crème brûlée, 140 Flavor families, 273
Desired dough temperature (DDT), 30–32
diplomat cream, 138 Flourless chocolate cake, 234
Devil’s food cake, 191
eggless white chocolate cremeux, 141 Flours:
Dextrose equivalent (DE), 150
English, 274 baker’s percentages for, 27–30
Digital thermometers, 10
flan, 140 for bread, 21–23
Diglycerides, 155
ganache, 142 in cakes, 182–183
Diplomat cream, 133, 138
hazelnut, 275 gluten-free flour replacer, 116
Dipped-knife method, 399–400
mascarpone, 274 in pie/tart doughs, 248
Divider rounders, 13
pastry cream, 140 protein contents in, 23
Dividers, dough, 13
pistachio, 300 specialty, 22–23
Docking, 253
speculaas, 358 in Viennoiserie, 58
Double-crusted pies, 252
vanilla bavarian, 139 wheat, 21–22
Double hydration method, 35
vanilla cremeux, 140 Flowers, blown sugar, 431–432
Dough hooks, 11–12
Crème anglaise, 119, 123–124 Flowers, chocolate, 396–397, 399–402
Doughs, pie and tart, 248–252
Crème anglaise recipes, 143, 274 Foams, 86–87, 92–93
cinnamon, 287 E egg, 130–131
graham cracker, 302 Egg foams, 130–131 Foam recipes:
Crème brûlée, 121, 125, 126–127 Eggs: crispy raspberry, 107
Crème brûlée recipe, 140 allergies to, 9 passion fruit, 106
Crème caramel, 127 in bread, 26 vanilla bean vodka, 98
Crème fraiche, apricot, 362 in cakes, 183 Focaccia recipe, 44
Creméux recipes: in custards, 119–121, 122–124 Focal points, 389
banana, 243 in pie/tart doughs, 249 Folding, 38–39
INDEX 473
Fondant, pouring, 341 enrobed, 358 H

Food Allergen Labeling and Consumer hand-rolled, 361 Hair dryers, 10
Protection Act of 2004 (FALCPA), 9 molded, 356–358 Hand-rolled ganache, 361
Food allergies, 8–9 piped, 358–359 Hazelnut base, crispy, 234
Foodborne illnesses, 7–9 slab, 358 Hazelnut cream, 275
cross contamination and, 9 Ganache recipes, 142 Hazelnut croquants, 298
personal hygiene and, 7–8 milk chocolate banana, 277 Hazelnut dough, 229
Food coloring, 419 pliable, 101 Hazelnut financiers, 338
Food processor modeling chocolate, 398 soft, 142 Hazelnut marzipan, 297
Food processors, 17–18 tea tart, 282–283 Hazelnut microsponge, 288
Food safety, 7–9 whipped white chocolate, 294 Hazelnut streusel, 298
Free water, 148–149 Garnishes, 279–280 Hearth ovens, 14
Freezers, 16–17 chocolate, 381, 382–388 Heat guns, 10
French macarons, 340 sugar, 417–418 Heat tools, 10
French meringue, 130 Gas stoves, 420 High-fat cakes, 185
Frozen desserts, 147–166 Gelatin, 87–89 High-gluten flour, 23
churned, 155–165 blooming, 88–89 High ratio cake, 191
emulsifiers and stabilizers in, 155 conversion between powder and sheet, 89 High temperature/short time (HTST), 153
ingredients, 147–154 lumps in mousse, 134 Homogenous mixture, 184
still, 165–166 tempering, 131 Honey, 151
troubleshooting for, 179 Gelatin molds, 403, 408 Honey wheat bread, 49
Frozen dessert recipes, 167–178 Gelatin recipes, 97–99 Hospitality industry:
apple cider granita, 178 raspberry cloud, 99 expectations in, 4
apricot sorbet, 176 strawberry water, 97 reasons to work in, 3–4
banana mousse glacé, 173 vanilla bean vodka foam, 98 Hydrocolloids:
brown butter ice cream, 169 Gelato recipes, 168 animal-based, 87–89
cappuccino semifreddo, 173 Gelatos, 157 definition of, 86
cherry granita, 177 Gellan, 91 plant-based, 90–96
cherry sorbet, 177 Gellan recipes, 104–105 Hygroscopic, 182
chocolate ice cream, 167 orange veil, 105 Hygroscopic sugars, 417–418
chocolate parfait, 172 passion fruit cubes, 104 Hysteresis, 90
coconut sorbet, 176 strawberry jam, reduced sugar, 104
frozen yogurt, 171 yogurt sphere, 105 I
gianduja gelato, 168 Genoise, 192 Ice creams, 157–161
green apple sorbet, 175 Gianduja bavarian, 296 French style, 157
lemon granita, 178 Gianduja gelato, 168 gelato, 157
lemon mosto olive oil ice cream, 172 Glacé cakes, 214–216 guidelines for formulating custard
lemon sorbet, 174 Glacé petits fours, 341–349 base, 159–161
mango ice cream, 170 Glacé recipes: machines for, 155–156
mango sorbet, 175 banana mousse, 173 methods for, 158
passion fruit sorbet, 175 chocolate, 219 sherbet, 158
pineapple sherbet, 171 chocolate peanut, 217 Ice cream recipes:
pistachio gelato, 168 strawberry pistachio, 220 amaretto, 283
raspberry sorbet, 174 Glaze recipes: brown butter, 169
roasted banana sorbet, 176 apricot, 109 caramel peanut, 218
roasted corn ice cream, 169 banana, 244 chocolate, 167
soufflé glacé, 174 caramel, 236 frozen yogurt, 171
strawberry ice cream, 170 chocolate mirror, 231 hot, 107
strawberry sorbet, 175 clear, 109 lemon mosto olive oil, 172
tea granita, 177 tropical, 224 mango, 170
vanilla ice cream, 167 Glucose, 151–152 pineapple sherbet, 171
vanilla parfait, 172 Glucose syrup, 419 roasted corn, 169
Frozen yogurt, 158, 171 Gluten, development of, 37 strawberry, 170
Fruit gelee, pectin, 108 Gluten-free flour replacer, 116 vanilla, 167
Fruit mousse, 133, 136 Gluten inteolerance, 183 Immersion blenders, 18, 86
Fruit pies and tarts, 249 Graham cracker anglaise, 302 Immersion circulators, 86
Fruit sauce, 115 Graham cracker croustillant, 302 Improved mix, 36
Fruit tart recipes: Graham cracker crust, 295 Improvement, striving for, 6
classic fresh, 260 Graham cracker dough, 255 Induction stoves, 420
contemporary fresh, 262 Grains, 23 Infrared thermometers, 10
petits fours, 359 Granita recipes: Ingredients:
apple cider, 178 bread, scaling, 38
G cherry, 177 bread, selecting, 37
Galettes, 247 lemon, 178 in breads, 21–26
Ganache, 354–361 tea, 177 understanding, 5–6
butter, 356 Granités, 162 Inserts, 210
cream, 354–355 Green apple sorbet, 175 Intense mix, 36
definition of, 129 Guitars, 358 Intermediate fermentation, 40
474 Index
Intolerances to foods, 9 Meringue recipes: Orange fluid gel, 298

Inverted sugars, 182 black pepper, 295 Orange tuile, 336
Invert sugar, 152 chocolate, 356 Orange veil, 105
ISI cream whippers, 86 Italian, 266 Organic forms, 403
Isomalt recipe, 439 Metal bars, food safe, 11 Organization:
Italian meringue, 130 Methylcellulose, 94 mise en place, 4, 18
Methylcellulose recipes: pastry shop, 5
J crispy raspberry foam, 107 work area, 4–5
Jaconde method, 186, 187 hot ice cream, 107 Osmotolerant yeast, 59
Jaconde recipe, 196–197 Microplanes, 11 Ovalbumin, 130
Japonaise, 194 Milk: Ovens, 14–16
Jellies, 400–401, 411 allergies to, 9 Overrun, 147–148
K in bread, 24
Kalamata thyme bread, 44 scalding, 58 P
Knives, 5 Milk chocolate agar mousse, 100 Paco Jets, 156
Kugelhopf, 74, 75 Milk chocolate blood orange entre- Paddle attachment, 11–12
mets, 232–234 Pain au chocolate, 57, 72
L Milk chocolate mousse, 235 Pain au lait, 74, 76
Lactobacilli, 33 Milk solids nonfat (MSNF), converting from Pain de genes, 194–195
Lactose, 151 whole milk to, 58 Pain de genes recipes, hazelnut, 297
Lady finger biscuits, 193 Minimal mixing methods, 35 Panna cotta, 125
Lamination, 57, 59, 61–64, 68, 83 Mise en place, 4 Panna cotta recipes:
Lard, 6 for cooking sugar, 419 buttermilk, 139
Leaveners, 183–184 definition of, 18 peanut butter, 102
Lecithin, 92 Mixers, 11–12 yogurt, 239
Lecithin recipe: passion fruit foam, 106 Mixing, degrees of, 35–37 Parfaits, 165
Lemon granita, 178 Mixing methods, 34–35 Parfait recipes:
Lemon mosto olive oil ice cream, 172 Modeling chocolate, 396–398, 404 chocolate, 172
Lemon mousseline, 347 Modern cuisine, 85–86 cinnamon, 287
Lemon sorbet, 174 Molded ganache, 356–358 pistachio, 221
Lemon syrup, 312, 314 Molecular gastronomy, 85–86 vanilla, 172
Lemon tart, 264 Monochromatic, 274 Passed presentation, 366
Lemon viennese, 335 Monosterates, 155 Passion fruit chiboust, 138
Lime and white chocolate verrines, Mousse, 129–134. See also Custards Passion fruit cubes, 104
351–353 milk chocolate, 235 Passion fruit foam, 106
Lime curd, 243 stabilizers, 131–132 Passion fruit sorbet, 175
Lime gelée, 352 troubleshooting for, 134 Pasta dough, 285
Lime streusel, 242 Mousse glacé, 166 Pasteurization, 153
Linzer bombe plated dessert, 286–288 Mousse recipes, 135–138 Pastillage, chocolate, 399, 405
Liquids: banana mousse glacé, 173 Pastillage, sugar, 433–435, 442
in bread, 24 chocolate, 135 Pastry cream, 123, 134, 140
in pie/tart doughs, 248 chocolate mousse tart, 278–279 Pastry cream recipes, 140
in Viennoiserie, 58–59 chocolate raspberry, 283 chocolate, 346
Liquid shortenings, 182, 185 citrus, 137 raspberry, 268
Liquor bonbons, 384 diplomat cream, 138 Pastry flour, 23
Low-fat cakes, 186–188 fruit, 136 Pâte à bombe, 130, 132–133, 135–136
milk chocolate agar, 100 Pâte au choux recipes, 346
M
passion fruit chiboust, 138 chocolate filled, 345
Macarons, 340
praline mousseline, 138 Pâte brisée, 257
Macaron surprises, 357–358
vanilla, 137 Pâte de fruit:
Madeleines, 340
white chocolate coconut mousse, 136 apricot passion, 377
Maintenance schedules, 5
Multigrain bread, 47 banana, 378
Malt, in bread, 26
Multitasking, 4 raspberry, 378
Mango chocolate entremets, 228–232
Patent flour, 23
Mango curd, 230 N Pâte sablée, 254
Mango ice cream, 170 Nappe, 153, 179 Peach galette, 270–271
Mango sorbet, 175 Noncrystalline confections, 401 Peach melba charlotte, 227
Mango spheres, 111 Nougat, 382 Peanut butter panna cotta, 102
Mango tuiles, 294 Nutella powder, 113 Peanut butter tart, 258
Marshmalloe, 380 Nuts, allergies to, 9 Peanuts, allergies to, 9
Marzipan recipes: Nut tuiles, 108 Pear almond cream tart, 286
almond, 344
hazelnut, 297 O Pear and hazelnut plated dessert, 296–298
Oatmeal streusel recipe, 81 Pears, poached, 286
Mascarpone cream, 274
Olive oil gel, 102 Pectin, 94–95
Mealy pie doughs, 250
Operas, 347 Pectin fruit gelee, 108
Mechanical ovens, 15
Optimal viewing position (OVP), 390 Pectin recipes:
Mental preparation, 18
Orange chiffon cake, 196 apple pectin gel, 285
Meringues, 130
INDEX 475
apricot glaze, 109 Pie and tart recipes, 254–288 Plated dessert recipes, 283–302
clear glaze, 109 apple pie, old-fashioned, 257 amaretto ice cream, 283
nut tuile, 108 apple tart, 284–285 apple chips, 286
pectin fruit gelee, 108 bananas in lime juice, 277 apple consomme, 284–286
Pericarp, 22 banana tart, 276–277 apricot tart, 299–301
Personal hygiene, 7–8 chantilly, 259 banana and chocolate, 288–290
Petits fours, 330–367 cherry pie, 258 banana cake, 289
contemporary, 350–363 chocolate mousse tart, 278–279 banana chips, 289
definition of, 331 coffee marsala syrup, 275 caramelized banana, 290
glacé, 341–349 cranberry orange tart, 280–281 caramelized white chocolate, 300
introduction to, 331–332 cranberry orange tart brûlée, 281 caramel sauce, 290
presentations, 364–366 cream cheese dough, 256 chocolate raspberry creméux, 283
sec, 332–340 English cream, 274 chocolate raspberry mousse, 283
Petits fours recipes: fresh fruit tart, classic, 260 chocolate sauce, 291
biscotti, 337 fresh fruit tart, contemporary, 262 cinnamon crème anglaise, 287
cake, 345 graham cracker dough, 255 cinnamon parfait, 287
candied citrus peel, 337 hazelnut cream, 275 coconut financier, 293
candied sunflower seeds, 353 Italian meringue, 266 coffee tart, 290–292
cherry chocolate verrines, 354–356 lemon tart, 264 compressed apples, 284
chocolate filled pâte au choux, 345 mascarpone cream, 274 crepes, 292
chocolate flourless cake, 356 milk chocolate banana ganache, 277 dark chocolate creméux, 302
chocolate meringue, 356 pâte brisée, 257 gianduja bavarian, 296
citron, 347 pâte sablée, 254 graham cracker anglaise, 302
coffee buttercream, 348 peach galette, 270–271 graham cracker croustillant, 302
coffee syrup, 348 peanut butter tart, 258 hazelnut croquant, 298
contemporary, 351–363 pear almond cream tart, 286 hazelnut marzipan, 297
French macaron, 340 pie dough, 254 hazelnut microsponge, 288
fruit tart, 359 pistachio creméux, 268 hazelnut pain de genes, 297
glacé, 342–349 pistachio dacquoise, 269 hazelnut streusel, 298
hazelnut financier, 338 poached cranberries, 281 lemon syrup, 292
lemon mousseline, 347 pumpkin tart, 287–288 linzer bombe, 286–288
lemon viennese, 335 raspberry pastry cream, 268 mango tuile, 294
lime and white chocolate verrine, 351–353 raspberry pistachio crumble, 269 orange fluid gel, 298
lime gelée, 352 raspberry pistachio tart, 267–269 pasta dough, 285
macaron surprise, 357–358 sablé breton, 256 pear and hazelnut, 296–298
madeleine, 340 short dough, 255 pistachio cream, 300
marzipan, 344 tea tart, 282–283 raspberry and chocolate, 282–283
opera, 347 tiramisu tart, 272–275 ravioli filling, 285
orange tuile, 336 whiskey pecan pie, 259 s’more Saint Honoré, 301–302
pistachio crunch, 359–360 Pineapple, sous vide, 349 strawberry cheesecake, 295
pistachio crunch Florentine, 361 Pineapple sherbet, 171 tropical stack, 293–294
pistacio diamonds, 336 Piped decors, 387 whipped white chocolate ganache, 294
pouring fondant, 344 Piped ganache, 358–359 Pliable ganache, 101
romias, 333 Pistachio cream, 300 Polymorphic, 349
sablé breton, 335 Pistachio creméux, 268 Poolish, 34
sec, 333–340 Pistachio crunch Florentine petits fours, 361 Poolish recipes:
sous vide poached apples, 358 Pistachio crunch petits fours, 359–360 beer bread, 45
speculaas, 334 Pistachio dacquoise, 221, 269 pretzel, 47
speculaas cream, 358 Pistachio diamonds, 336 Potato onion bread, 52
traditional glacé, 342 Pistachio gelato, 168 Pot de crème, chocolate, 143
white chocolate and raspberry mousse Pistachio parfait, 221 Pouring fondant, 341
purse, 361–362 Pizza dough recipe, 52 Pouring fondant recipe, 344
white chocolate creamy, 352 Planning, mise en place and, 18 Powder gelatin, 87–89
white chocolate glaze, 349 Plaquettes, chocolate, 383 Praline mousseline, 138
white chocolate pineapple, 348–349 Plated desserts, 270–303 Pre-dessert petits fours, 331, 364
Phospholipids, 92 assembling, 280–281 Preferments, 34
Physical contamination, 7 color of, 274–275 Pressed leaves method, 429
Pies and tarts, 246–289 designing, 272–277 Pressed sugar, 432, 441
classic, 252–253 developing, 277–282 Pretzel bread, 47–48
definition of, 247 evaluating, 281 Professionalism, 3–6
doughs for, 5–6, 248–249 flavor in, 272–273, 279 Proof boxes, 13–14
doughs for, mixing, 249–250 garnishing, 279–280 Proofer retarders, 13
fruit, 249 inventory creation for, 277–278 Proofing:
ingredients in, 247–251 presentation approaches to, 271–277 bread, 41
modern, 253 shapes of, 275–276 enriched breads, 68
rolling and lining, 250–251 temperature of, 273–274 Propagated crystals, 432, 433
troubleshooting for, 253 texture of, 273 Puddings:
476 Index
bread, 128 clear strawberry, 115 Sous vide poached apples, 358
coconut rice, 141 fruit, 115 Soybeans, allergies to, 9
Puff pastry, 68–69 Scalding milk, 58 Speculaas cream, 358
recipe, 82 Scales, 10 Speculaas petits fours, 334
recipe, blitz, 82 Scattered presentation, 271–272 Spheres, blown sugar, 430–431
traditional, 68 Scoring, breads, 41 Spheres, chocolate, 383–385
Pulled sugar, 425, 426–429 Scraped flower method, 401–402 Spherification, 91, 110
Pulled sugar recipe, 440 Sculptures, chocolate, 388–403 Spherification, reverse, 95, 111
Pumpkin bavarian, 288 color in, 390–391 Spiral mixers, 12
Pumpkin tart, 287–288 flowers, 399–402 Sponge, 34
Pump method of sugar blowing, 429–430 modeling, 396–398 Sponge method, 186
pastillage, 399 Sponge mixing method, 34
R spraying, 395 Sponge recipes:
Rack ovens, 15 theme in, 390 kugelhopf, 75
Raisin walnut sour bread, 53 troubleshooting for, 403 stollen, 76
Raspberry and chocolate plated Sculptures, sugar, 417–418, 435–438 Spraying, 395
dessert, 282–283 assembling, 436–437 Stabilizers, 131–132, 155
Raspberry cloud, 99 color in, 436 Stacks, 279
Raspberry foam, crispy, 107 component inventories for, 437–438 Stick blenders, 18
Raspberry jam, bakeproof, 101 designing, 435 Sticky bun smear, 79
Raspberry pastry cream, 268 Sec petits fours, 332–340 Still frozen desserts, 165–166
Raspberry pâte de fruit, 378 Seeding method, 350, 353 Stollen, 74, 76–77
Raspberry pistachio crumble, 269 Seeds, in breads, 23 Storage:
Raspberry pistachio tart, 267–269 Seizing, 351 of bread, 42
Raspberry sorbet, 174 Semifreddo, 166 of chocolate, 350
Ravioli filling, 285 Semifreddo, cappuccino, 173 cross contamination and, 9
Recipes, understanding ingredients in, and Semolina bread, 51 of laminated doughs, 67
changing, 5–6 Semolina flour, 23 of yeast, 24–25
Reverse puff pastry, 68 Separation foam method, 186, 187 Straight mixing method, 34
Reverse spherification, 95, 111 Sheeters, dough, 13 Strawberry cheesecake, 295
Ribbon stage, 183 Sheet gelatin, 87–89 Strawberry ice cream, 170
Richness, 273 Shellfish, allergies to, 9 Strawberry jam, reduced sugar, 104
Ritz-Carlton Hotel Company, 3–4 Shells, lining, 251 Strawberry lemon cake, 226
Roasted banana sorbet, 176 Sherbets, 158 Strawberry pistachio glacé, 220
Roasted corn ice cream, 169 Sherbet recipes, pineapple, 171 Strawberry sauce, clear, 115
Robot Coupe Blixers, 17 Short dough, 255 Strawberry sorbet, 175
Robot Coupe food processors, 17 Short mix, 35–36 Strawberry water, 97
Rocks, chocolate, 402, 406 Single-crusted pies, 252 Streusel recipes:
Rocks, pastillage, 434–435 Skills, 4–6 chocolate, 238
Rolling doughs, 250–251 Slab ganache, 358 hazelnut, 298
Rollout method, 434 S’more Saint Honoré, 301–302 lime, 242
Roll outs, dark food processor, 405 Soakers, hot and cold, 23, 47 Structure, 389
Romias, 333 Sodium alginate, 95 Sugar bloom, 350
Room service amenities, 364–366 Sodium alginate recipes, 110–112 Sugar pumps, 11
Roses, chocolate, 396–397 coffee caviar, 110 Sugar ribbon method, 426–427
Roulade, 193 mango spheres, 111 Sugar rose method, 427–428
Royal icing, 435 thin film, 112 Sugars:
Royal icing recipe, 442 Sorbets, 162–165 in bread, 25–26
Rubber gloves, 8 Sorbet recipes: in cakes, 182
Rye bread recipe, sour, 53–54 apricot, 176 density of, 152–153
Rye flour, 22 cherry, 177 in frozen desserts, 149–153
coconut, 176 in ganache, 354
S green apple, 175 granulated, 151
Sablé breton, 256, 335 lemon, 174 in pie/tart doughs, 249
Sacher biscuits, 195 mango, 175 in sourdough starter, 31, 32–33
Safety, 5. See also Food safety passion fruit, 175 in Viennoiserie, 58–59
Salmonella, 121 raspberry, 174 Sugar work, 416–443
Salt: roasted banana, 176 blowing, 425, 429–432
baker’s percentages for, 27–30 strawberry, 175 bubble sugar, 424–425
in bread, 24 Soufflé glacé, 166, 174 casting sugar, 420–423
in Viennoiserie, 59 Sourdough bread, 31, 32–33 cooking sugar for, 418–420
Sameness, 275 Sourdough bread recipe, 50 crystalline, 432–433
Satinizing, 451 Sour rye bread recipe, 53–54 introduction to, 417–418
Sauce guns, 11 Sour starters, 31, 32–33 pastillage, 433–435
Sauces, 280 Sous vide, 86, 87 pulling, 425, 426–429
Sauce recipes: Sous vide pineapple, 349 satinizing, 425
INDEX 477
troubleshooting for, 438 air, 10 pain au lait, 76

Sugar work recipes, 439–442 heat, 10 puff pastry, 82
isomalt, 439 safety and maintenance of, 5 sticky bun smear, 79
pastillage, 442 scales and thermometers, 10 stollen, 76–77
pressed sugar, 441 specialty hand, 10–11 sweet dough, 78
royal icing, 442 Top-to-bottom method, 212–213 Vitamix, 18
sugar for casting, 440 Total temperature factor, 31
sugar for pulling and blowing, 440 Tres leches syrup, 200 W
tartaric acid solution, 439 Triangles, chocolate, 386–387 Water:
Sunflower seeds, candied, 353 Tropical glaze, 224 baker’s percentages for, 27–30
Supersaturated, 374 Tropical stack plated dessert, 293–294 in bread, 24
Sweet dough recipe, 78 Truffles, 353, 361 Water baths, 125–126
Sweetening power (SP), 149, 150 Tuiles, 279 Wet caramel method, 127
Syneresis, 121 Tuile recipes: Wheat allergies, 9
mango, 294 Wheat flours, 21–22
T nut, 108 Wheat germ, 22
Tabling method, 350, 351–352 orange, 336 Whip attachments, 11–12
Tapioca maltodextrin, 96 Two-stage method, 182, 185 Whipped cream, 129–130
Tapioca maltodextrin recipes, 113–114 Whiskey pecan pie, 259
brown butter nuggets, 114 U White chocolate, caramelized, 300
dry caramel, 113 Umami, 293 White chocolate and raspberry mousse
Nutella powder, 113 Uniforms, cleanliness of, 4 purses, 361–362
Tartaric acid, 419 White chocolate coconut mousse, 136
Tartaric acid solution, 379, 439 V White chocolate creamy, 352
Tarts. See Pies and tarts Vacuum sealers, 86, 87 White chocolate glaze, 349
Tea granita, 177 Vanilla bavarian, 139 White chocolate pineapple petits
Tea tart, 282–283 Vanilla bean vodka foam, 98 fours, 348–349
Techniques, modern pastry, 84–117 Vanilla cremeux, 140 Whole wheat croissant, 70
basics of, 86–87 Vanilla ice cream, 167 Winnowing, 346
hydrocolloids, animal-based, 87–89 Vanilla mousse, 137 Work area organization, 4–5
hydrocolloids, plant-based, 90–96 Vanilla parfait, 172
Temperatures: Vegetable fat, solid, 6 X
Velvet spraying, 395 Xanthan, 96
desired dough, 30–32
Verrines, 350 Xanthan recipes, 115–116
egg coagulation, 121
Vertical mixers, 11–12 carbonated coco, 116
plated desserts, 273–274
Viennoiserie, 56–84 clear strawberry sauce, 115
time and, in foodborne illnesses, 8–9
enriched breads, 67–68 gluten-free flour replacer, 116
Tempering:
chocolate, 344, 349–353 ingredients and their functions in, 57–59
Y
eggs, 122–123 lamination in, 57, 59–67
Yeast:
gelatin, 131 puff pastry, 68–69
baker’s percentages for, 27–30
Texture, 273 troubleshooting for, 69
in bread, 24–25
Thermal shock, 436 Viennoiserie recipes:
conversions between types of, 25
Thermometers: almond cream, 80
forms of, 24
digital, with probe, 10 bear claw filling, 80
osmotolerant, 59
infrared, 10 blitz puff pastry, 82
in sour starters, 31, 32–33
probe, 86 brioche, 78
in Viennoiserie, 59
Thermoreversible, 88 cinnamon smear for cinnamon rolls, 79
Yellow cake, 190
Thin film, 112 cream cheese filling, 81
Yogurt sphere, 105
Time–temperature abuse, 8–9 croissant, 70
Time–temperature abuses, 8–9 croissant, whole wheat, 70
Tiramisu tart, 272–275 Danish, 72
Toffee, 383 kugelhopf, 75
Tools, 9–11 oatmeal streusel, 81
WILEY END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT
Go to www.wiley.com/go/eula to access Wiley’s ebook EULA.

BJNZ

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

BJNZ

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

BJNZ

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

The Advanced Art of

Baking & Pastry

PHOTOGRAPHY BY ANTHONY TAHLIER

Mise en Place 18 Custard 119

Math 26 Ingredients 147

7 Cake Mixing and Baking 180

Classic Cakes 203

Key Terms 245 Ganache 380

Pies and Tarts 247

10 Plated Desserts 290

12 Chocolate and Confections 368

Introduction to Chocolates and Confections 369

After reading this chapter, you should be able to:

Skills for Success in the Pastry Shop

Work Area Organization In addition to maintaining a clean uniform, it is important to

Pastry Shop Organization In addition to maintaining individual workstations, the mem-

Analyzing Fats in Pie Dough

Type of Fat Characteristics Cost Source

1. Do not work if you are sick.

FIGURE 1.1 Thermometer showing temperature

Tools and Equipment

Tools and Equipment 9

Scales and Thermometers

Specialty Hand Tools

FIGURE 1.2 Countertop mixer (Image ­courtesy of Hobart)

Tools and Equipment 11

FIGURE 1.4 Spiral mixer (Image courtesy of Hobart)

Divider The divider does exactly what the name implies: It

Divider Rounder The divider rounder takes the dividing pro-

Dough Sheeter A dough sheeter is a mechanized rolling sys-

FIGURE 1.10 Rack oven (Image courtesy of Baxter)

FIGURE 1.11 Convection oven (Image

Tools and Equipment 15

FIGURE 1.12 Combi oven (Image courtesy of Vulcan)

Tools and Equipment 17

FIGURE 1.15 Vitamix (Photo

Questions for Review

Questions for Review 19

Bread for the Pastry Chef

After reading this chapter, you should be able to:

Ingredients and Function

22 CH A PT E R 2 Bread for the Pastry Chef

Protein Contents in Flours

Protein Content Flour

11% Rye flour

15% Clear flour

21% Semolina flour

Grains and Seeds

Cold and Hot Soakers

Ingredients and Function 23

24 CH A PT E R 2 Bread for the Pastry Chef

Fresh Active Dry Instant

Active Dry 0.5 oz 1 oz 1.5 oz

Instant 0.33 oz 0.66 oz 1 oz

Ingredients and Function 25

26 CH A PT E R 2 Bread for the Pastry Chef

Calculating Ingredient Percentages

Ingredient Pounds Ounces

Instant Yeast 0.15

FIGURE 1.2 Countertop mixer (Image courtesy of Hobart)